Home

SERVICE MANUAL

1. Printer Paper User Setting Setting Setting Staple gt 161 gt 169 4 Hole Punch H PCL Setting Typeface Symbol Set H Font Size H Line Page CR LF Mapping H PS Setting PS Error Print Print Reports Configuration Page H Demo Page H PCL Font List PS Font List Administrator System Power Save Low Power Setting Setting Mode Setting gt 173 gt 173 1 4 Sleep Mode Setting Power Save Key Entering Power Save Mode Fax Output Print Fax Out Printer Setting put Settings Date Time Exit Tray H Fax Setting Setting Daylight Sav ings Time Setting 8 Utility Mode 147 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Administrator System Weekly Weekly Timer 2 Setting Setting Timer Setting ON OFF Setting N 173 173 2 H Time Setting Lo N a H Date Setting Select Time for Power Save Password for Non Busi ness Hours Restrict User Restrict Access to Access Saved Program Jobs Delete Saved Program Jobs Restrict Access to _ Changing Job Settings Job Priority Deleting Other User s Jobs Registering and Chang ing Addresses Expert AE Level
2. Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CFA33 Software rotating processing MFP Control Board C start CFA34 Other Sequence malfunction MFP Control Board C CFA35 Buffer Array malfunction Control Board C CFA36 Thread Service malfunction Control Board C CFA37 Input image height 0 MFP Control Board C CFA38 Output image width 0 e MFP Control Board C CFA41 pcbuf_exinput cpp h Control Board C CFA42 pcbuf_inout cpp h MFP Control Board C CFA43 pcbuf_exoutput cpp h Control Board C CFA61 DMA A MFP Control Board C CFA62 DMA B MFP Control Board C CFA63 DMA C MFP Control Board CFA64 DMA D MFP Control Board C CFA65 DMAE MFP Control Board C CFA66 DMA F MFP Control Board CFA67 DMA G Control Board C CFA68 DMA H MFP Control Board C CFA69 DMA I MFP Control Board C CFA70 DMA J MFP Control Board C CFA71 Interruption MFP Control Board C CFA72 Common register setting MFP Control Board C CFA73 PCIBridgeDMA MFP Control Board C CFA74 BTC compression Extension MFP Control Board C device CFA75 Control Board C CFB52 _ error interruption MFP Control Board CFB53 DMA_B error interruption Control Board C CFB54 C error interruption MFP Control Board C CFB55 DMA_D 0 error inte
3. occurring the MFP Control Board PWB MFP Code Item Description Rank CC153 ROM contents error upon A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents startup PRT check of the Mechanical Control Board PWB M C during starting CC154 ROM contents error upon A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents startup PH check of the PH Interface Board PWB D during C starting CC163 ROM contents error PRT The wrong model of firmware is detected in the engine during the initial connection to the engine C is being checked CD002 JOB RAM save error The error in save of JOB data to the Memory C Hard Disk and its read error are detected CD004 Hard disk access error Unable to communicate between the hard disk C and MFP Control Board PWB MFP CD005 Hard Disk Error 1 Hard disk is faulty C CD006 Hard Disk Error 2 C CD007 Hard Disk Error 3 C CD008 Hard Disk Error 4 C CD009 Hard Disk Error 5 C CDOOA Hard Disk Error 6 C CDOOB Hard Disk Error 7 C CDOOC Hard Disk Error 8 C CDOOD Hard Disk Error 9 C CDOOE Hard Disk Error A C CDOOF Hard disk data transfer error Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty C CD010 Hard disk unformat Unformatted hard disk is connected CD011 Hard disk specifications error A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is C connected CD012 Encryption ASIC setting error
4. Operation Characteris Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name tics Panel Display 1 0 PI1 FN Sad Entrance Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not dle present present PI2 FN Paddle Home Paddle Home Position Sensor HP in PI3 FN isher Bundle Roller Swing Guide Home Position Sensor HP Home PI4 FN Front Align Front Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI5 FN Back Align Rear Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI6 FN Alignment Tray Finisher Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI7 FN Home Exit Belt Exit Belt Home Position Sensor HP PI10 FN Crease Position Folding Position Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI13 FN Crease Tray Saddle Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI11 FN Crease Home Folding Home Position Sensor HP PI12 FN Crease Roller Folding Roller Home Position Sensor HP Home PI14 FN Crease Clock Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI8 FN Paper Exit Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI9 FN Paper Surface Exit Tray Home Position Sensor Paper surface detected PI15 FN Lift Raised Shift Upper Limit Sensor Upper limit Position PI16 FN Lift Lowered Shift Lower Limit Sensor Lower limit Position PI17 FN Lift Clock Shift Motor Clock Sensor Lift Middle Paper full PI18 FN Slide Home Slide Home Position Sensor HP PI19 FN Stapler Home Staple Drive Home Position Sensor HP PI20 FN Staple Staple Detecting Sensor Staples No st
5. o d Q e Q CB127 Timeout Error due to Nonre sponse from CC during Suspen sion Process CB128 Timeout Error due to Nonre sponse from LINE during Sus C pension Process CB129 Timeout Error due to Nonre sponse from File System File Driver during Suspension Pro cess 341 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Description Rank B CB130 MIF Driver Error Driver Soft ts FK 502 Service Manual C D Error 5 CB131 MIF Driver Error Reception S Frame Length Error from Main CB132 MIF Driver Error Reception C Frame Header Error from Main CB133 MIF Driver Error 232C C Sequence Error CB134 MIF Driver Error DPRAM i f C Sequence Error CB135 MIF Driver Error DPRAM CTL C STL Register Error CB136 MIF Driver Error AKC Waiting C Timeout CB137 MIF Driver Error DPRAM C RESET Reception CB140 MSG Error with JC C 141 Error with Main I F Error with C Driver CB142 Error with Main Undefined C Command Reception CB143 Error with Main Command C Frame Length Error CB144 Error with Main Command C Parameter Length Error CB145 Error with Main Undefined C Parameter CB146 Error with
6. 10 3 3 3 11 3 3 4 CRESCE 11 3 4 _ PERIERE 3 4 1 Separation Roller 3 4 2 Paper Take up Boller rte entere herein 14 3 4 3 uie qiii 14 3 4 4 Vertical Transport nennen enne nnne 15 Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section ssesssessssseeeneenennnenneeene 17 5 Sensor check rn enirn i 18 5 1 Checkproced re 18 5 2 Sensor check list iia 18 5 2 1 Sensor CHECK 5 18 5 2 2 Sensor check list irent tintas 19 6 Mechanical adjustment trot eire ath ertet ter trea tan 20 6 1 Adjusting the paper reference position sssseeneen 20 eo ph Maintenance Adjustment Setting Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 1 1 Print Positioning Side Edge 6 1 2 Dup Print Positioning Side 22 S 6 2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment 22 g Troubleshooting 7 eee
7. System Paper Tray Auto Tray Setting Setting Setting Switch ON OFF 161 161 2 No Matching 4 Paper in Tray 2 Setting J Print Lists Reset System Auto Setting Reset H Auto Reset When Job Reset Account is changed Auto Color When Origi Level Adjust nal is set on ment ADF Power Save Low Power L pis Hd Staple Setting Mode Setting selected Setting Sleep Mode Original Set ae Bind Direc gt Setting ti ion ea Output Print Fax Out Print Reset Data Setting put Setting After Job E Exit Tray Kt Setting Fes Data amp Time Setting Daylight Sav Hings Time Setting AE Level Adjustment Sub Screen Displa H NH Display ON OFF gt 163 Scan Basic Screen Default Default Tab Seeing 144 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 ON when Auto Booklet Fold amp Staple for Combine Auto Zoom Booklet Sort Group Auto Change Display Scan Basic Program Yser Setting Setting Screen Default Default gt 161 gt 163 Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Dis play Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Default Program Address Book Default Index Ad
8. 16 3 5 8 Replacing the Bypass Tray Feed 17 3 5 4 Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller 19 3 5 5 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation 20 3 5 6 Replacing the Tray 2 Feed Roller seen 22 3 5 7 Replacing the Tray 2 Pick up Roller 25 3 5 8 Cleaning of the Registration Roller 27 o N o a 5 a Maintenance Adjustment Setting E Q e Q Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 5 9 Replacing the Waste Toner Box e 3 5 10 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port 28 N S 3 5 11 Replacing the Ozone Filter eeeseeeeeeeneneneneenennnen 28 amp 3 5 12 Replacing the Deodorant Filter eseseenn 29 3 5 18 Replacing the Dust Filter Vertical 29 3 5 14 Replacing the Dust Filter Cooling Fan een 29 3 6 Replacing ena c dee e re o ore Pe n 30 3 6 1 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller 30 3 6 2 Replacing the Image Transfer Belt
9. 2 Receive Mode Functions To set the Fax reception mode Use To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function etc when connected to the external telephone Setting The default setting is Auto RX Procedure Auto RX Manual RX 3 Number of RX Call Rings Functions To set the number of times to receive call rings Use To change the number of times of the fake RingBack tone after it starts calling until it starts receiving Setting The default setting is 2 X Procedure 2 X 0to 15 4 Number of Redials Functions To set the number of redials Use To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy etc The line which can be set up is different depending on the country Setting NOTE Procedure The default setting is different depending the country 5 Redial Interval Functions To set the interval for redialing Use To change the interval for redialing Setting The default setting is 3 min Procedure 8 min 1 to 15 6 Line Monitor Sound Functions To set whether to output the Line monitor sound from the speaker or not se Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 7 Line Monitor Sound Volume Functions To set the volume of the speaker Use To change the volume of the speaker Setting 5 Procedure Change
10. Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original sticks to Original Glass YES Reposition original 2 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 3 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 4 Mirror lens Mirror is dirty YES Clean 5 Exposure Lamp ens is dirty YES Clean and reflectors 6 Exposure Lamp is dirty YES Clean 7 Reflectors are dirty YES Clean The problem has been eliminated NO Clean Exposure Lamp 8 through the checks of steps up to 7 Change Scanner Assy Change CCD Unit D Q E Q 396 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 11 Scanner System defective ACS A Typical Faulty Images 18 Image quality problem changed Colored Area of Original ABCDE Black and White Area of Original B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Auto Color Level The problem persists even after YES Change the original loading direc Adjustment the ACS Determination Level tion Make manual settings User Setting Adjust function has been according to the type of original If the original contains a colored area in one of its corners the machine may fail to properly detect the colored area 397 bizhub C250 d Q
11. d Q e Q 411 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 24 Printer Monocolor blank copy black copy A Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy bizhub C250 403618403800 4036f8403900 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Image Check A blank copy occurs YES Check PH Unit connector for proper connection Imaging Unit Coupling of IU drive mechanism NO Check and correct drive transmit 2 is installed properly ting coupling Change IU The PC Drum Charge Corona NO Check clean or correct the con voltage contact or PC Drum tact ground contact of the Imaging Unit is connected properly High Voltage Unit Connector is connected properly NO Reconnect 4 Image Transfer Neutralizing The problem has been eliminated NO Change High Voltage Unit through the check of step 4 Image Transfer Neutralizing Change MFP Control Board Change PH Unit D fe Q E Q 412 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 25 Printer Monocolor uneven image A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 41385450760 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Toner Cartridge The Toner Cartridge of every color is surely installed 2 PHUnit The PH Unit is su
12. norint 385 DUE m 387 18 3 1 IR System white lines in Sub Scan Direction white bands in Sub Scan Hi Direction colored lines in Sub Scan Direction and colored bands in Sub iren CITED 387 18 3 2 Scanner System white lines in Main Scan Direction white bands in Main 5 Scan Direction colored lines in Main Scan Direction and colored bands in 2 Maiti SCam 388 lt 18 3 3 Scanner System color 389 18 3 4 Scanner System fog treten epe ehh dr ene a iesu aas 390 18 3 5 Scanner System blurred image blotchy 391 E 18 3 6 Scanner System incorrect color image registration sync shift lines in main scan direction 5 18 3 7 Scanner System moire eese nennen nnne nnne 18 3 8 Scanner System skewed image sse 394 18 3 9 Scanner System distorted image esee 395 18 3 10 Scanner System low image density rough image 396 18 3 11 Scanner System defective ACS sse 397 x 18 3 12 Scanner System blank copy black copy 398 d 18 3 13 Scanner System abnormal image sese 399 x 18 3
13. 4583F3C515DA 43 6 Board switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Afterthe initial operation of the Fin isher press the PSW1 1 on the Fin isher Control Board and make sure pl 1 that the alignment plate moves to the Selected paper size area Adjust the Alignment plate position with PSW1 1 or PSW2 2 When adjusting inward Press pswe Pswi 7 ew PSW1 1 When adjusting outward Press PSW2 The alignment plate will move 0 367mm every time the push switch is pressed Alignment range is 2 936 mm FS 603 ZENO LE 2 LELH Cc 9INO 8 17 ZINO N 4583F3C516DA 8 When the adjustment is complete ON turn switch 8 of SW1 ON to set the adjustment value i d 9 Turn all adjustment switches OFF 12345678 10 Turn main power switch OFF NOTE 4 When not all SW1 are OFF in step 3 return to the original condition according to the written note ON i i d H 11 Return the Finisher to the original 12345678 status 4583F3C517DA 2 5 n lt 44 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Board switch 6 2 PWB B PK Punch Control Board FS 603 J1007 SE J1005 91 J1006 SW1001 41 2 17511002 3 08 1003 LED1001 LED1002
14. nennen nnne ennt 301 19 Proc dure for RESCUING uci cnini rtr rur enn err rra entes 302 ASA Trouble resetting isseire rt rte Fr rii a ob Dre Pee 302 13 2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function sse 302 14 rne rho nr entente tnin 303 14 1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 303 14 1 1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor 303 14 1 2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit 305 14 2 Scanner Position Adjustment 306 14 3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section 307 14 3 1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size 307 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 4 PH Unit Mechanical Adjustment 14 471 SKEW AdJUStmBhl nici coner re n pte 309 Troubleshooting 15 Jam Display ise cii co a De ARE DR CHE S 313 15 4 Misfeed DISplay ene ERE REM IARE ERE KR 313 15 1 1 Misfeed Display Resetting 314 15 2 Sensor layOUl nae ede abren eae 315 15 3 SolBtiOnccscu tn or rera eR
15. 7 B s iv 5 4 4038F2C156DA 8 Open the Right Door 9 Remove three Screws 6 and remove the Reinforcement plate 7 of the right door and spring 8 4038F2C159DA 97 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Remove the Shoulder Screw 9 bizhub C250 4038F2C576DA 11 Remove two Screws 10 and remove the Metal blanking plate 11 5 s 7 g 4038F2C577DA 12 Remove five Screws 12 and the Connector 13 and remove the Rear Handle Assy 14 14 12 4038F2C578DA 98 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 15 15 4038F2C579DA 4038F2C580DA 18 20 4038F2C581DA 6 Other 13 Disconnect four Connectors 15 14 Remove the Front Door wx 59 15 Slide out the Tray 1 16 Remove two Screws 16 and remove the Front Right Cover 17 17 Remove the Screw 18 and remove the Shaft 19 18 Remove the Right Door Assy 20 99 bizhub C250 7 g s 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 34 Scanner Motor M201 A Removal Procedure 1 Remove the Upper Rear Cover and the IR Upper Rear Cover ts 57 54 bizhub C250 2 Remove the Harness from two Wire Saddles 1 and the Edge Cover 2 4038F2C128DA 3 Disconnect the Connector 3 and
16. LER 10 16 nocet tee cn EFC PEE HORE 11 Enhanced Security 11 1 Enhanced Security Function Setting 296 11 1 4 Procedure ener rient nnn 296 11 12 EXiting iiic rre ettet nettes 296 11 2 Enhanced Security Function Tree sssssssseeeeeneen 296 11 3 Settings in the Enhanced 5 297 11 3 1 Password 11 3 2 Administrator Password 297 11 3 3 Administrator Feature 298 11 3 4 CE Authentication cernerent ntn eti rentes 298 11 3 5 IU Life Stop Setting rennen tnos 298 12 Billing Setting ett tnr rtt eene eene enne 299 12 1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure sse 299 124 1 rnnt tne nnde rna 299 12 1 2 E MP 299 12 2 Billing Setting Function 299 12 3 Settings in the Billing 300 12 3 1 Gouriter Settiligi not rer ror 300 12 3 2 Management Function Choice essen 301 12 3 3 Coverage Rate
17. LED Sensor State 1 2 3 4 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN Unblocked O O O e Storage Sensor PC3 FN Blocked e Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN Blocked O e Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN Blocked e O O O OFF D S 2 2 n EI nl lt 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Jam Display Troubleshooting 8 Jam Display 8 1 Misfeed display FS 501 When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit 4684F4C501DA No Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1 7403 Horizontal Transport section Horizontal Transport section Cover 25 2 7401 Transport section Front Door ws 22 3 7402 Tray1 Exit section Front Door ww 23 4 7402 Elevator Tray Exit section Front Door gt 24 5 7404 Paper Stack Exit section Front Door gt 24 6 es Stapler section Front Door 3 25 7 7402 Job Tray Exit section JS 601 Job Tray Upper Cover wu 23 8 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door Q D Q 19 8 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 2 Sensor layout FS 501 468415450200 1 Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN 5 Turnove
18. tnn 16 6 1 Adjusting the paper reference position 16 6 1 1 Print Positioning Side Edge eene 16 6 1 2 Dup Print Positioning Side Edge eene 18 PC 103 PC 203 Maintenance Adjustment Setting Troubleshooting 103 203 Maintenance 2 2 N El lt Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Troubleshooting T NINE 19 7 1 Misfeed display 19 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 19 72 Sensor ayOUt EXEAT FOX UD 20 7 85 ERES 21 7 3 1 Initial check Items iater erra ere n pa eni eoe e Ye d erae rna aix RR nd 21 7 3 2 Tray3 Paper Take Up section Vertical Transport section misfeed 03 203 ges ierat 22 7 3 3 Tray4 Paper Take Up section Vertical Transport section misfeed uera 23 8 e cccvscccsscsatiesctsceserscctccssosecssecssczsuadesesvactseutsastevsdscodasdetsecttvesenstensaedeecs 24 8 1 Trouble code display nitri erento toon teretes 24 8 2 Trouble code list rre 24 LEcNEE Uc PEERS 25 8 3 1 C0206 Tray3 Lift Up Failure C0208 Tray4 Lift Up Failure
19. 377 16 5 107 007 DIMM initialize error seseeeeeenenn 377 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 108 CEEE1 MSC undefined malfunction occurring 16 5 109 CEEE2 Scanner Section undefined malfunction 377 2 16 5 110 CEEES Engine Section undefined malfunction 378 17 Powersupply iier reto tr icon ir rer ae ds 379 2 17 1 Machine is not Energized at All PU1 Operation 379 17 2 Control panel indicators do not light 379 17 3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate 380 17 4 Power is not Supplied to Option 380 17 4 1 Power is not Supplied to ADF sessseseeeneenennen 380 17 4 2 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet sese 380 17 4 3 Power is not Supplied to Automatic Duplex 381 pL FINISHGD 381 18 Image quality rtt inno 382 18 1 How to read Element date 382 18 1 1 Number 18 1 2 Level History 1 g 18 1 3 LevellHistoty 2 ceinture eec terae 384 18 2 How to identify problematic part 385 18 21 Initial Check
20. 257 10 7 5 Calling the Maintenance eeeseseeeeennnnene eene 257 10 7 6 Calling the Center from the 258 10 7 7 Checking the transmission log eee 258 10 7 8 Detail OM setting eene e ene ere hen iaa trn EE d SERRE Rad endo 258 10 7 9 List of the CS Remote Care error code 261 10 7 10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote 264 10 8 eC 265 10 8 4 Marketing Area 265 10 8 2 Tel Fax Numb6r iiu itii repr c cnra 265 10 8 3 Soral oie dr rro Pr irs 265 10 8 4 No Sl66p nina dco S 266 10 8 5 Original Size Detection 266 10 8 6 Foolscap Size Setting 266 10 8 7 Initialization coe oot err Pr ra eins i teas cereis 267 10 8 8 Install Date aco irr rto Encre Ere Ur e e o E PEE ERREUR 267 10 9 SySlalm 2 indo dee re rane ie rea Lob P PRODURRE 267 10 91 CED Dec usi a ee eei Eten ires E E E 267 10 9 2 Image Controller Setting 268 10 9 3 Option Board Status nni rro erento tineis 268 10 9 4 Consumable Life 268 10 89 5 Unit Change error rnit tte 269 10 9 6
21. Functions To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper Use To correct any color shift 90 0 6 to 6 dot Range Adjustment If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting Instructions If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Color Registration Adjust 3 Load Tray 1 with A3 11x17 or A4 8 1 2x11 Normal paper 4 Press the Start key 5 On the test pattern produced check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y 6 Select the color to be adjusted 7 Using the key change the setting value as necessary At this time only the line of the selected color moves 8 Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation Check Procedure Check point X Y X 40361300400 If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of D Adjustment for X direction Check point X Direction of C alle Ee s mb ud i eb eu L L L I FA w gt 4 amp gt Adjustment for Y direction Check point Y Direction of
22. uo T 30 999 105095 X3 uo B idi 40 524 10sueg uo o 30 294 10sueg dn yolq uo yo 30 109 uo yosueg jaded nou 30 24 Jaded uM 208095 dwg N29 Jo JQ EIA 100W Wa MO Moo TN HO JQ CWN podsues NO moo 10 HO ATHA MO uo l He aN39S uo 1980 0909 qnuziq xipueddy 456 hart iming c 21 T Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 xipueddy qnuziq 975394 607 suigoet 7 yo 90 118 piouejog o 40 218 0080 103 ud 89 110 uonensibag yo 40 9204 108095 1x3 uo o 40 594 Josuag anoun uo o 0 09 uo Josuas dn plg yo 39 104 uo Josues uonensibay 30 794 adeg yim 208495 idu 09 MOT iG o mo 0 EN 1010 1X3 MO 29 pus o 30 2 mo 20 M01 ACH Mo 9 13SQ uo p QN39S uo eDBueuox3 epis pig EE ejejduio2 1x3 puz f eje duio 0 pig _f ues ___ eu 457 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 20
23. 3 8 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 3 1 Duplex Unit 1 Release the tab 1 and remove the Connector Cover 2 4066F2C500DA 2 Disconnect the Connector 3 Maintenance 3 Open the Duplex Unit Door 4 4 Remove two screws 5 and remove the Duplex Unit 6 4 4066F2C502DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section e AdjustmentSetting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies u
24. 4038F2C016DA 22 1 5 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy See the procedures 1 to 5 in page 20 Tray 2 Separation Roller Remove the Tray 2 Right Rear Cover 64 Disconnect the Connector 1 Remove the Screws 2 and remove the Reinforcement plate 3 Remove four Screws 4 and remove the Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy 5 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 6 Remove two Screws 6 and the Installation flame 7 of the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy bizhub C250 6 4037F2C005DB 7 Remove two Screws 8 and Tray 2 Feed Roller cover 9 2 S E 8 4037F2C006DB 8 Remove the C ring 10 and Bushing 11 4038F2C510DA 23 bizhub C250 Maintenance 3 Periodical check 12 4038F2C511DA 17 4038F2C512DA 4038F2C513DA 24 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Remove the C ring 13 and Gear 14 while sliding out the Shaft Assy 12 in the direction indicated in left figure 10 Remove the C ring 15 and Bushing 16 and remove the Shaft Assy 17 11 Remove two E rings 18 and Bush ing 19 and remove the Tray 2 Pick up Roller fixing plate Assy 20 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 12 Remove the C ring 21 and Tray 2 Feed Roller
25. ug gt 1695 SUQ EL ou eBueuoxa3 apis gt 0 epis jeuibuo 1s 7 epis 1s yo 40 119 1o piouajog yo 90 215 Plousjog 1x3 uo yo 40 119 uogensi eu uo yo 30 99 205095 uo yo 40 624 208095 1e ouini uo yo 30 294 208095 dn yolq uo yo 40 129 uo Josueg uomensibey nou 40 599 edeg yy 209495 Moo yo p 30 81 MO ubiH bi 9 pu yo 3 2I podsues MO ubiH 100W mog a0 LW dn ayey ubiH 0 1980 uo He 395 uo 0969 qnuziq xipueddy 454 qnuziq xipueddy hart iming c 21 T VGbvS394 0t SWS9EL gt 3296 41054 dn eyey eut T1 1 tt yo 40 118 uo Plouajos anoun yo gt fP o 40 15 prouejos 1x3 ig 366 yo TOOT ay 0 10 vorerst 5 90 gt yo 30 999 208095 1x3 uo yo To T T T A 30 50 108095 1enouini uo EH p 40 224 108095 dn yolg uo 40194 H fe uo Josuag Jaded POM 40 29 Josueg xcu
26. 65 5 8 311 11 3 Punch Motor malfunctions 65 8 3 12 C11C5 Punch Sensor 66 8 3 13 C1401 Backup RAM 67 2 Pe n D lt Troubleshooting lii Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 09 S4 2212101279 Blank Page Bumes uewysn py Bunoouse qnoa j iv Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Product specification General 1 Product specification 8 A Type Multi Finisher with Saddle Booklet Installation Freestanding Document Alignment Center Supplies Staple Cartridge B Functions Modes Normal Group Sort Group Offset Sort Offset Sort Staple Center Staple amp Fold Punch Option Group Punch Sort Punch Group Offset Punch Sort Offset Punch Sort Staple Punch C Paper type Remove the finisher off the Copier for feeding the long paper The maximum loading capacity shown is for when loading the single type of paper 809 2 m 1 Group Sort No of Type Size Weight Tray Capacity 1 Exit Tray Sheets to be Stapled Plain Paper B5R B5to 90 g m A4R B4 1st paper wide 16 to 24 Ib 8 5 x 11R 8 5 14 exit tray or smaller or
27. WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC2 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN7A 12 ON DF 601 G to H 5 3 PC5 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A 3 ON DF 601 C 4 4 M1 DF operation check PWB A DF 5 1 3 4 6 DF 601 C 6 5 M2 DF operation check PWB A DF CN4A 4 to 7 DF 601 C 6 6 PWB A DF replacement D Q E Q 32 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Jam Display 9 4 4 Transport Tray section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description DF 601 Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor in the 1 Sided Mode Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is not turned ON within a preset time after exit operation started in the 1 Sided Mode Misfeed is detected if the difference between the paper feeding size Misfeed at the Transport Tray measured at the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF and that measured at the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is 20 mm or more B Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Control Board PWB A DF Exit Sensor PC6 DF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Initial check items 2 PC5 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A 3 ON DF 601 C 4 3 PC6 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A 6 ON DF 601 C 4 4 PWB A DF repl
28. Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS eo FS 603 E 2 General 1 Product SDecIfICatiori erint tort treo serere ena anat e teh tardus 1 Maintenance 2 Other 2 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items esee 5 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other 6 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 7 2 8 1 EXIU Fay na rcr D ra o n E EEUU re ERE ERR De ERN d 7 2 3 2 Font COVEN sasaa OO O 7 2 3 3 Rear Cover 8 2 3 4 Upper Door E 2 3 5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover esee enne nennen 8 2 2 3 6 eR 9 2 3 7 Side Guid e m 9 2 3 8 Middle Transport 10 2 2 3 9 Staples teneri niece der Por a D OU n ER ERR 10 E 2 93 10 Saddle Sections ien hen met n Era eer b e E LU Fai cn Rd 11 2 39 41 Finisher Tray taii ne eei ike eR aio 11 2 3 12 Paddl Sectiohn is escenas tnit ERE nah a 18 2 3 13 ExitiRoller Upper icri tramo te E chr 14 23 14 Paddle Eee iris estes 14 2 3 15 Exit Roller Lower and Paper Exit 15 E 2 3 16 Stapler Folding Drive Unit ssesseeeeeeeeeeenenneenrnnns 17 E 2 317 Transport Roller ner n e ads 2 2 3 18 M
29. 19 PC 403 le h JC 1 Maintenance Serin ein 3 Adjustment Setting 2 5 neither entre ee a dee edes 17 Troubleshooting ertt rtm teneri Pte rne 25 AD 503 erc TEC I 1 Maihtenarice rh eed code pn ae d De e TE RES 3 Adjustment Setting 7 Tro bl sHooOtitig 11 FS 501 Genetal ENDING EWERMERRBEHEEROSRNSUNREEReR 1 Maintenance e e a ee ei e ba d RO ek 5 Adjustment Setting rre eee rre PER e ETE EE e EE Vae errant 9 TroublesFiootitig 19 FS 603 oo eg d f cce done iat ota tu tea c ao 1 Maintenance Adjustment Setting terae te saree rer DR E E VE eR A eee oa eee e FASES 23 Iro blesFiootlhig roe PERS e Rer SERRE eR Mt ino ER NER ERE ERR 51 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC hereafter called the KMBT strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT trained service technicians Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed Accordingly KMBT does not warrant either explicitly or implicitly
30. 31 3 6 3 Replacing the Toner Cartridge C M Y 33 3 6 4 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode sese 34 3 6 5 Replacing the Imaging Unit C M Y 35 3 6 6 Replacing the Fusing nennen 38 4 DONVICS TOO E 40 8 21 TOON Mist c a acta 40 5 4 2 COPY materials eb cir 41 5 4 2 1 Imaging Unit Single Parts 1 41 4 2 2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts T C sese 41 4 2 3 Waste loner 41 25 4 2 4 Maintenance Kit nter nne cr tiro 41 3 5 Firmware Upgrades 42 5 1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting 42 5 1 1 Service environment sse 42 5 1 2 Application to be used n erento trinis 42 x 5 1 3 Installing the Cygwin nini heiter totes 42 5 1 4 Writing into the Compact cece eee 45 o 5 2 Firmware rewriting eee nn eerte taria teer e 48 5 2 1 Updating method netten retenti ntn 48 E 5 22 Action When Data Transfer 50 5 3 6 6 1 Disassembly Adjustment
31. 4038F2C568DA 8 11 10 je HIM oe s A i 11 9 11 4038F3C508DA NO 19 Af 304 5 Loosen the three screws that secure the Scanner Motor mounting bracket 7 6 With the Scanner drive gear set Screw 8 located on the right hand side as shown on the left slide the Scanner Motor Assy 9 to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring 10 Perform this step three times 7 Tighten the three screws 11 to fix the Scanner Motor Assy into posi tion Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 Mechanical adjustment 14 1 2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound 1 Remove two Screws 1 and Lens cover 2 bizhub C250 2 Slide the Mirrors Unit 3 to the cen ter until it is pressed up against the cutouts in the rails 4 4038F3C001DB 3 If the Mirrors Unit is not pressed up against the cutouts loosen the adjusting screw to which red paint is A 5 applied 5 of the Mirrors Unit and press the carriage up against the cutouts Then tighten the adjusting V screw 4 Slide the Mirrors Unit to the left and install the Lens Cover 5 Then conduct Scanner positioning adjustment D im oO E V lt
32. eee 25 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Product specifications General 1 Products A Type pecifications Name 2 way Paper Take Up Cabinet Type Front loading type 2 way paper take up device Installation Desk type Document Alignment Center B Paper type Plain paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib ype Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Size ABR to A3 5 5 x 8 5R to 11 x 17 Drawer 500 sheets 80 g m 21 25 Ib Capacity 4th Drawer 500 sheets 80 g m 21 25 Ib C Machine specifications DC 24 V x 10 6 supplied from the main unit Power Requirements DC5Vzzx59576 Max Power 75 W or less Consumption Dimensions 570 mm W x 548 mm D x 263 mm H 22 5 inch W x 21 5 inch D x 10 25 inch H Weight PC 103 22 0 kg 48 5 Ib PC 203 26 0 kg 57 25 Ib D Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice eo o N n ES e o NT 9 1 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 eo eu Q n e o ai Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Periodical check Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts PC 103 PC 203 2 1 1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy 1 Remove the Right Door ww 10 2 Remove two screws 1 an
33. eo Section Part name Ref page 2 1 Right Door ts 10 2 Rear Right Cover ts 10 3 Exterior Parts Lower Right Cover ts 10 4 Front Right Cover ts 10 5 Rear Cover ts 10 6 Drawer gt 11 Unit 7 Wire gt 11 3 2 2 Cleaning parts list No Section Part name Ref page 1 Separation Roller gt 14 2 Paper feed section Paper Take up Roller cr 14 g 3 Pick up Roller 14 S 4 Transport section Vertical Transport Roller te 15 2 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 3 1 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover PC 403 4061F2C504DA Open the Right Door 1 Remove the Right Door 1 Remove two screws 2 and remove the Rear Right Cover 3 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Lower Right Cover 5 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Front Right Cover 7 s 7 E 3 2 434816252100 1 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Rear Cover 2 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Other 3 3 3 Drawer 1 Press the Drawer Eject Button 1 and slide out the drawer 2 2 Remove the paper 3 Remove four screws 3 and slide out the drawer 2 PC 403 4 Remove two screws 4 the connec tor 5 and remove the Connector Board 6 5 Remove the Drawer NOTE
34. 21 8 3 2 Transport section ottenere therein iai 22 8 3 3 Tray1 Exit section misfeed eese 23 8 3 4 Job Tray Exit section misfeed 5 601 23 8 3 5 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed 24 8 3 6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed sse 24 8 3 7 Stapler section misfeed 8 3 8 Horizontal Transport section misfeed sssssssseeeee 25 9 WMPOUDIG COGS EPUM 26 9 1 Trouble code display ttti entere 26 9 2 A Trouble code list entere teer nire 26 9 3 27 9 3 1 C1182 Shift Motor drive malfunctions seen 27 9 3 2 C1183 Elevator Motor drive malfunctions eee 27 9 3 3 C1190 CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction esee 28 9 3 4 C11A1 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction 28 9 3 5 C11A2 Storage Roller Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction 29 9 3 6 C11B0 Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction 29 9 3 7 C11B2 Stapling Motor drive malfunction 30 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Product specification General 1 Product specification A Type Type Single Staple
35. 357 16 5 4 2151 2nd Image Transfer Roller Separation 357 16 5 5 C2152 Transfer Belt Separation 958 16 5 6 C2253 Color PC Drum Motor s failure to 358 16 5 7 C2254 Color PC Drum Motors turning at abnormal timing 358 16 5 8 C2255 Color Developing Motor s failure to turn 359 16 5 9 C2256 Color Developing Motor s turning at abnormal timing 359 8 16 5 10 2451 Transfer Cleaner Unit New Article 359 5 16 5 11 2551 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor 360 5 16 5 12 C2553 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor 360 16 5 13 C2555 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor 360 16 5 14 C2552 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor 360 16 5 15 2554 Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor 360 o 16 5 16 C2556 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR 360 2 16 5 17 C2557 Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor 361 16 5 18 C2558 Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor 361 5 16 5 19 2559 Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure 362 16 5 20 255 Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure 962 16 5 24 C255B Yello
36. eee ara 71 Image Processing Board 73 Slide Interface Board PWB SIF sese 75 MFP Control Board PWB MFP sees 76 DIMMO Work0 DIMM1 Work1 78 Hard Disk Drive HDD 5 retten nnns 78 High Voltage Unit EIV4 ieri titer artt tr rcr ena 80 Tray 1 Paper Size Board PWB I 81 Tray 2 Control Board 7 81 Tray 2 Paper Size Board PWB I PO sse 83 Inverter Board PUD2O1 netten 85 PH Interface Board PWB D sseeessseeeeeeeenenneneneneenennnne 85 Multi Bypass iit rnt rtr ente 87 89 Transport Drive ASSy entries cout 93 Hopper Drive 5 95 Right Door ASSy rente retten hr ner p ner da ea das 96 Scanner Motor M201 sessi 100 Scanner ASSy A 103 Scanner Drive Cables eese nennen nennen 104 PWB BOX M n 112 Color Developing Motor 115 Color PC Drum Motor M2 4116 Toner Supply Motor C K M7 esses 116 bizhub C250 Maintenance 2 L n El E lt Troublesh
37. 2 2 n EI nl lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 13 3 Halftone Pattern Functions To produce a solid halftone pattern Use Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density 255 Setting it of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Select the color mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 4PC Red Green Blue CMYK 3 Color 4 Color Black 1PC MIX Type the density level 0 to 255 10 13 4 Lattice Pattern Functions To produce a lattice pattern Use Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density Areverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background Pattern SINGLE FEET Cyan CD Width 5 FD Width 5 Density 255 Normal Setting it of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution Only select HYPER Select the color mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 4 Red Green Blue CMYK 3 Color 4 Color Black 1PC Enter CD width and FD width 0 to 191 dots Type the density level 0 to 255
38. FS 603 458315258900 10 Remove the spring 14 11 Remove the Punch Unit 16 from the Side Registration Motor section 15 458315259000 5 o 7 2 3 20 Finisher Control Board Remove the Rear Cover ww 7 Disconnect all connectors on the Board and remove the screw 1 3 Release the PCB support 2 and remove the Finisher Control Board 3 3 2 3 21 1 Remove two screws 1 Disconnect seven connectors 2 and remove the Punch Control Board 3 458315259100 21 FS 603 5 s 7 g s gt 2 Other 2 3 22 Transport Motor Unit 4 458318257400 2 3 23 Middle Transport Motor 3 2 3 24 Punch Motor 45835258460 2 3 25 Side Registration Motor 458318258500 22 A N UNS Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Rear Cover 7 Disconnect the connector 1 Remove screw 2 and remove the Harness Guide 3 Remove three screws 4 and remove the Transport Motor Unit 5 Remove the Middle Rear Cover 10 Remove the harness from the Wire Saddle 1 Disconnect the connector 2 Remove two screws 3 Remove the Upper Cover 9 Remove two screws 1 Disconnect the connector 2 and remove the punch motor 3 Disconnect the connector J1001 1 Remov
39. WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI4 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN FN 2 ON FS 603 G 6 M4 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement PWB A FN FN 2 to 5 FS 603 B 4 D Q E Q 60 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 3 5 C1193 Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Finisher Control Board PWB A FN PI5 FN Rear Aligning Motor M5 FN FS 603 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI5 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN15A FN 12 ON FS 603 G 5 M5 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement PWB A FN FN 7 to 10 FS 603 B 4 8 3 6 C11A4 Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions Relevant electric
40. 2 Pe i N lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 CR LF Mapping Functions To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data N e Use To change the mode for replacing data when printing the text data 2 Mode 1 Replacing CR with CR LF X Mode 2 Replacing LF with CR LF Mode 3 Replacing with CR LF OFF Does not replace Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 OFF D PS Setting 1 PS Error Print Functions To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS rasterizing Use To print the information concerning the PostScript error Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF E Print Reports Functions To output the report or Demo Page concerning the print setting Use To check the setting concerning the printer The types of report available for output are as follows Configuration Page The list of printer setting will be output Demo Page The test page will be output PCL Font List PCL Font List will be output PS Font List PS Font List will be output Setting 1 Touch User Setting Printer Setting Print Reports Procedure 2 Select the report to be output 3 Select the Paper Feed Tray and press the Start key 2 ae i 5 n lt 172 Field Ser
41. Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Text Functions To register the e mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e mail se Setting Touch New to register the new message Procedure Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing Set as Default B Fax Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit FIK 502 is mounted 1 Address Book lt Dial Functions Wi U register or change the Fax number for transmitting the Fax se Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting E Mail Functions To register or change the e mail address for transmitting the Fax original by e mail se Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting User Box Functions To register or change the Box address in the hard disk of the machine when storing Use the Fax data in the Box Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting Atleast one user box must be registered in order to register the Box address 2 Group Functions To register or change the group with a number
42. Functions To clear the coverage rate Use Use to clear the coverage rate Setting The default setting is Unset Procedure Set Unset Touching END key will clear the coverage rate 301 13 Procedure for Resetting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 13 Procedure for Resetting H E 13 1 Trouble resetting o 3 N Functions e f the trouble occurs and the status would not be cleared by turning Main Power e Switch OFF and ON again or opening and closing the front door clear the status of the machine Use To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning Main Power Switch OFF and ON again or opening and closing the front door in case of a trouble Setting 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch Procedure 2 Turn Main Power Switch ON while pressing the Utility Counter key 3 Touch Trouble Reset 4 Check to make sure that OK is displayed and the it has been reset 5 After turning off the Main Power Switch turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and check if the machine starts correctly 13 2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function i Initialization i Items for clearing Front Door Trouble p oid ystem Contents to be cleared Open Close resetting or Clear Dae Clear oon Jam display o Fusing Optical Malfunction 50292 o o o display CC151 2 Others 2 Erratic ope
43. N lt bizhub C250 2 ae i 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Account Track Input Method Functions To set the Authentication method for the Account Track Use To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name amp password Setting The default setting is Account Name amp Password Procedure Account Name amp Password Password Only NOTE This setting is not available without the Account Track Password Only setting is not available with the User Authentication 5 When of Jobs Reach Maximum Functions To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job or to stop the machine when reaching to the upper limit for the number of printed pages set by the User Authentication and the Account Track Use To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by the User authentication and the Account Track Setting The default setting is Skip Job Procedure Skip Job Stop Job 6 Synchronize User Authentication amp Account Track Functions To set whether to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track Use To be used when not to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track Setting The default setting is Synchronize Procedure Synchronize Do not synchronize NOTE The setting is availa
44. sensor check PWB M CNSEN 8 ON C250 C 3 3 116 I O sensor check PWB C2 PC PJ6C2 PC 8 ON bis an 4 PC117 PC I O sensor check PWB C2 PC PJ6C2 PC 11 ON 5 PC8 PC I O sensor check PWB Z PC PJ6Z PC 11 ON C250 S 25 6 122 operation check PWB C2 PC PJ5C2 PC 1 to 4 ba xs 7 PWB C2 PC replacement 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 3 7 Jam Display Tray4 Paper Take Up section Vertical Transport section misfeed PC 203 A Detection timing Type Description Tray4 Paper Take Up section Vertical transport section misfeed detection The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Take up Motor M123 PC is energized The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC has been blocked by a paper Tray 4 Vertical Transport section Loop Registration Reversing JAM Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the Registration Roller at Tray 4 take up Tray4 detection of paper remaining The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or mal function is reset The Tray4 Take up
45. 3 5 3 Replacing the Bypass Tray Feed Roller 1 Remove the Multi Bypass Unit tx 87 Snap off the E ring 1 and remove Bypass Paper Feed Clutch 2 4038F2C004DA 17 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Remove the Gear 3 bizhub C250 4038F2C005DA 4 Snap off the E ring 4 and remove the Bearing 5 5 s 7 g 4038F2C006DB 5 Snap off two C ring 6 and remove the Bearing 7 4038F2C007DB 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C008DB 3 5 4 4038F2C009DA 4038F2C010DA 6 7 8 3 Periodical check Remove the Bypass Tray Feed Roller 8 To reinstall reverse the order of removal Select Service Mode Counter Life and clear the count of Manual Tray bizhub C250 NOTE 1 87 2 Replace the Bypass Tray Feed Roller and the Bypass Separation Roller Assy at the same time Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy Remove the Multi Bypass Unit Remove the Screw 1 and remove the Ground terminal 2 5 o 7 g Remove the Screw 3 and remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller Assy 4 19 bizhub C250 5 s 7 g s gt 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Si 6 4038F2C502DA 4
46. 45821350800 2 3 Press the Start key 4 Check in which direction 2 or 3 the image tilts on the copy fed out of the machine lt Specifications Tilt 3 0 mm max f the image tilts more than the specifi cations perform the following steps to B E ae make the adjustment 458218351100 5 Loosen two front screws 4 on the right hinge 6 If the image tilts in direction of 2 move the Document Feeder toward the front If the image tilts in direction of 3 move the Document Feeder toward 4 n the rear 7 Tighten two screws 4 8 Make recheck D 2 2 N El nl lt 20 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Mechanical adjustment 8 4 Adjustment of the document stop position Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually by enter ing numbers The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode Service Made ADF Adjustment Firmuare riginal Stop Version Position Registration Loop Adi d Test 4582F3E513DA 8 4 1 Auto adjust Sub Scanning Direction 1 Sided Stop Position Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Service Mode Touch ADF Touch Auto Stop Position Adjustment Touch Sub Scanning Direction 1 Side ADF Adjustment 4582F3E518DA 5
47. 4583F3E512DA 12 Make the copy and check again 9 2 Pe i 5 N UO lt 29 FS 603 Adjustment Setting 5 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 3 Adjustment of height and inclination Y i aa Te A Ves poema io 458316350500 30 1 Gently move the finisher toward the machine and check for following Is the positioning pin aligned with the hole in the finisher Does the horizontal transport unit run excessively slantwise Does the clearance at A equal that at B If the finisher is not at the same height as the machine adjust the machine as follows Remove the Finisher 1 from the main unit and remove two caster covers 2 Remove four adjusting screw covers 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Mechanical adjustment 4 Loosen two caster fixing screws 4 4 points FS 603 458316350700 5 Turn the adjustment screw 5 to 5 make adjustment To heighten Turn the screw counter clockwise To bring down Turn the screw clock wise 6 Fasten the caster fixing screws 7 Install the caster covers and the adjustment screw covers 458318350860 D 2 2 N El E lt 31 5 Mec
48. 84 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 11 12 4038F2C517DA 6 3 27 Inverter Board PU201 1 3 4038F2C518DA 6 3 28 PH Interface Board PWB D 4038F2C097DA 6 Other 8 Remove the Lever 11 and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board 12 Remove the Scanner Assy 103 Remove four Screws 1 Flat Cable 2 and Connector 3 and remove the Inverter Board 4 N Remove the Front Cover 64 Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit x 31 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Front Right Cover 2 85 bizhub C250 5 o 7 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C098DA 4 Remove seven Screws 3 and remove the Right Door Switch Assy 4 bizhub C250 5 Remove the Screw 5 each and remove the Imaging Unit contact Assy 6 of each color 5 5 7 g 4038F2C099DA 6 Remove two Screws 7 each and remove the Imaging Unit Roll Assy 8 of each color 4038F2C100DA 86 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C102DB 6 3 29 Multi Bypass Unit 4038F2C103DA 6 Other 7 Remove all the Connectors and the Flat Cables on the PH Interface Board 8 Remove two Screws 9 and six tabs 10 and remove the PH Interface Board 11 1 Remove the Multi Bypass Tray R
49. Faulty sensor check procedure Open the Front Door and turn ON the Main Power Switch of the machine Call the Sensor Check screen to the screen by way of Service Mode For details how to display see Adjustment Setting Close the Front Door and start Stabilizer During the Stabilizer sequence check to see if the values of the phase detection sen sors Color PC Drive Main Sub Sensors change A sensor is faulty if its value does not change D i Q E Q 332 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 2 14 P 31 Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction e Relevant Electrical Parts Black PC Drive Sensor 15 Transport Drive Assy 2 Black PC Drive Sub Sensor PC16 Mechanical Control Board PWB M N Toy Step Action 1 Perform the faulty sensor check procedure 1 2 Check the sensor for which a faulty condition has been checked for installed position and proper connector connection Wipe the sensor for which a faulty condition has been checked clean of dirt if any If P 31 persists change the Transport Drive Assy Change PWB M Faulty sensor check procedure Open the Front Door and turn ON the Main Power Switch of the machine Call the Sensor Check screen to the screen by way of Service Mode For details how to display see Adjustment Setting Close the Front Door and start Stabilizer During
50. Toread the image in direction B use key 4 Press OK 188 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Original Stop Position 8 Utility Mode Functions To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes Use To use when the Auto Adj of Stop Position cannot make adjustment completely Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the Procedure 4038F3C503DA 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment ADF Adjustment gt Original Stop Position 3 Select either Front side or Back side 4 Enter the numeric value using the key Adjustment range 7 mm to 7 mm To read the image in direction use key To read the image in direction D use key 5 Press OK lt Centering Auto Adjustment gt Functions Adjust the start position for image scanning Use Upon setup of the ADF Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the Procedure screen 4038F3C504DA 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment ADF Adjustment gt Centering Auto Adjustment 3 Set the furnished Chart on the Original Feed Tray the side with arrow faces up and press the Start key 4 Make sure that adjustment result is OK and press SET If adjustment result is NG Check the document position and cor rect it Ma
51. 3 Remove screw 3 and remove the interface cable presser 4 4 Remove the Harness from seven Harness Saddles 5 5 Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle and disconnect two connec tors 6 6 Remove the Harness from the Har ness Saddle and disconnect the connector 7 7 Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle and disconnect two connec tors 8 17 FS 603 o 7 E s Maintenance 2 Other 458318257000 458318257100 458318257200 45831257300 2 3 17 Transport Roller 458318257600 18 Field Service 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Remove the screw 9 and remove the claw of Harness Guide 11 from the square hole 10 in the base plate 9 Disconnect two connectors 12 and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 10 Remove three screws 13 11 Remove the screw 14 and remove the Stapler Folding Drive Unit 15 Remove the Upper Door ww 8 Remove the Upper Cover ww 9 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Upper Cover Unit 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 458315257500 458316257700 458315257800 458315257900 2 3 18 Middle Transport Roller 458316258100 2 Other Remove the Transport Motor Unit 22 Remove the screw 3 Remove the C clip 4 and remove the bushing 5 7 Remove two sc
52. 415 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 28 Printer 4 Color uneven density in sub scan direction A Typical Faulty Images 40361640430 403615404400 bizhub C250 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer oil or other foreign YES with specified solvent 1 Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES dirty belt with a soft cloth 2 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 3 Terminal is dirty YES Clean 4 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall Transfer Roller properly Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Image Transfer 5 scratched Roller Unit 6 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit through the checks of steps up to 5 D Q E Q 416 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 29 Printer 4 Color uneven density in main scan direction A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 403615404600 403618404700 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clea
53. 94 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Remove five Screws 7 and the Connector 8 and remove the Rear Handle Assy 9 10 Disconnect the Connector 10 11 Remove the Harnesses 12 from five Wire Saddles 11 12 Remove eight Screws 13 and remove the Transport Drive Assy 14 NOTE The Screw is fixed at the position with the triangle markers Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 32 Hopper Drive Assy 1 Remove the Transfer Drive Assy ww 93 2 Disconnect seven Connectors 1 bizhub C250 4038F2C124DB 3 Remove the Harness from four Wire Saddles 2 5 o 7 g 4038F2C125DA 4 Remove two Screws 3 and remove the Duct 4 4038F2C126DA 95 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other 4038F2C127DA 6 3 33 Right Door Assy 4038F2C153DA 4038F2C154DA 96 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Remove four Screws 5 and two Claws 6 and remove the Hopper Drive Assy 7 Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the High Voltage Unit 80 Remove the IR Right Cover 54 Remove the Harness from the Edge Cover 1 ARVN 5 Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 Remove the Screw 3 fixing the IR cable bizhub C250 4038F2C155DA 7 Remove six Screws 4 and remove m the Motor cover 5 4
54. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit wu 87 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Bypass Tray Feed Roller 1 N Maintenance 4038F2C177DA 6 4 6 Bypass Tray Separation Roller Remove the Multi Bypass Unit t 87 Remove the Screws 1 and remove the Ground terminal 2 4038F2C009DA 128 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 3 Remove the Screw 3 and remove the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy 4 bizhub C250 4038F2C010DA 4 Using the soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Bypass Paper Sep aration Roller 5 5 o 7 g 4038F2C178DA 6 4 7 Tray 2 Feed Roller Tray 2 Pick up Roller 1 Slide out the Tray 2 2 Open the Vertical transport door 3 Remove two Claws 1 and remove the Vertical transport door 2 1 4038F2C011DA 129 bizhub C250 5 5 7 g s gt 6 Other 4038F2C012DB 6 A 4038F2C013DA 7 hs lt 4038F2C179DB 130 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Remove two Screws 3 and remove the Jam processing cover 4 NOTE Make sure the position of the Mylar when installing the Jam processing cover 5 Remove two Screws 5 and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy 6 6 Using a soft cloth da
55. Remove the Paddle 6 Remove the other Paddles as well in the same way NO 458315255800 2 3 15 Exit Roller Lower and Paper Exit Belt Remove the Tray Section w 13 Slide the Aligning Plate Front 2 and the Aligning Plate Rear 3 out side to remove them from the Tray 1 458315255900 15 FS 603 Maintenance 458318256000 458318256100 458318258200 458318256300 458318256400 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove two Holders 4 and remove the Finisher Tray Stopper 5 Remove the screw 6 and remove the Paper Guide Front 8 while dis engaging two claws 7 Remove the screw 9 and remove the Paper Guide Rear 11 while disengaging the claw 10 Remove two C clips 12 and move two bushings 13 inside respec tively Remove four screws 14 and remove the Exit Roller Lower sec tion 15 by lifting it Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 458316258600 2 3 16 Stapler Folding Drive Unit 458316256700 4 p 5 458316258900 2 Other 8 Remove the Exit Roller Lower 16 and two Paper Exit Belts 17 NOTE When installing align the edge of claws of the Paper Exit Belt 18 Remove the Rear Cover 7 Open the Front Door 1 and slightly pull out the stapler section 2
56. SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 6 2 Laser Safety Label A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER ox amp SEIENRN Only for the U S A 4038POE505DA 6 3 Laser Caution Label A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below CRMC LO FAWRTRL PHNTET IER CAUTION CLASS 38 INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE VORSICHT KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN AS ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTRALING NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 38 NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG KLASSE LASERSTRALING VED ABNING UNDG UDS ETTELSE FOR STRALING VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING KLASS 3B NAR DENNA DEL AV OPPNAD STRALEN FARLIG ARE TIBET OO ORS Be 0 Hola 5838 404440 HEUCH NAS 4038P0C503DA S 16 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 6 4 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT When laser protective goggles are to be used select ones with a lens conforming to the a
57. WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component 1 Reinstall Unit 2 Change PWB M Step Action Control Signal 359 bizhub C250 D 2 Q E Q 16 Malfunction code 16 5 11 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 C2551 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor 16 5 12 2553 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor 16 5 13 2555 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Toner Supply Motor C K M6 Toner Supply Motor Y M M7 Mechanical Control Board PWB M MFP Control Board PWB MFP Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low Clean the TCR Sensor window on the 2 underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty gt 3 M7 operation check PWB M CNDM2 10 to 13 M6 C 20 PWB M 10 to 13 M7 21 4 Reinstall Imaging Unit 5 Imaging Unit 6 Change PWB M 7 Change PWB MFP 16 5 14 C2552 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor 16 5 15 C2554 Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor 16 5 16 C2556 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor Relevant Elec
58. 4 Remove five Wire saddles 3 and the Edge cover 4 o 7 g s 4038F2C062DA 5 Disconnect the Connector 5 and remove the Harness from three Wire saddles 6 4038F2C063DA 69 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Disconnect the Connector 7 and remove the Harness 9 from the Wire saddles 8 bizhub C250 4038F2C064DA 7 Remove two Screws 10 and remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 1 11 5 5 7 g s gt 4038F2C065DA 8 Remove all the Connectors on the DC Power Supply 4037F2C066DB 70 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 9 Remove four Screws 12 and remove the DC Power Supply 13 13 12 bizhub C250 4038F2C067DB 6 3 16 Scanner Motor Drive Board PWB IC Remove the IR Upper Rear Cover 54 Disconnect three Connectors 1 and four Board Supports 2 3 Remove the Scanner Motor Drive Board 3 5 o 7 g 4038F2C068DA 6 3 17 CCD Unit Removal Procedure Remove the Original Glass 56 Remove seven Screws 1 and remove the CCD Unit Cover 2 v 4038F2C069DA 71 bizhub C250 5 s 7 E 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Remove four Screws 3 and Flat Cable 4 and remove the CCD
59. 40361280100 Specifications 1 0 mm Setting Range 10 0 to 10 0 in 0 1 mm increments Adjustment Instructions If the copy image is less than the specified length increase the setting value If the copy image exceeds the specified length decrease the setting value Setting Procedure 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Scanner Adjustment Center ing 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check point A on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make a copy 8 Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met EN 186 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Horizontal Adjustment Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section Use The CCD Unit has been replaced Adjustment Measure C width on the color chart and on Specification NC the sample copy and adjust the gap to be within the following specification Specifications C C x 1 0 mm ai Setting Range 0 990 1 010 0 001 4038F3C516DA Adjustment If the C width on the
60. N D lt Gradation Adjust D Max Density Background Voltage Margin Transfer Output Fine Adjustment Stabilizer Thick Paper Density Adjustment TCR Toner Supply Monochrome Density Adjustment Dev Bias Choice CS Remote Care t 250 229 bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 10 Service Mode 230 System 1 Marketing Area ts 265 Tel Fax Number Serial Number No Sleep Foolscap Size Setting Original Size Detection Install Date Initialization System 2 HDD 267 Image Controller Setting Option Board Status Consumable Life Reminder Unit Change Software Switch Setting Scan Calibration LCT Paper Size Setting Line Mag Setting Data Capture Counter Life ws 274 Jam Service Call Counter Warning Maintenance Service Total Counter Of Each Mode Service Call History Data ADF Paper Pages Paper Jam History Fax Connection Error Counter Reset Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Field Serv
61. SINGLE gt HYPER bands gt Gradation gt C2M Y K gt Density 64 and produce a test print Is image prob NO Scanner 387 lem evident 385 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 C Initial Check Items 3 e f the printer is responsible for the image problem let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors o N o 2 E is N a 4 Colors Mono Color 4038F4C509DA Evaluation Procedure Image o Problem Action Result Cause Next Step Lines bands From Service Mode select Test Mode gt YES Printer we 414 Halftone Pattern gt SINGLE HYPER 4 colors 3 Gradation gt gt Density Printer 64 and produce a test print Is image prob NO single color 400 lem evident in each of all four colors 386 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 Solution 18 3 1 IR System white lines in Sub Scan Direction white bands in Sub Scan Direction colored lines in Sub Scan Direction and colored bands in Sub Scan Direction bizhub C250 A Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub White bands in Sub Color lines in Sub Color bands in Sub Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Directi
62. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Tray 2 Lift Up Sensor PC7 PC Tray 2 Paper Size Board PWB I PC Tray 2 Control Board PWB Z PC Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 PC4 PC Tray 2 Set Sensor PC2 PC Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 PC3 PC Tray 2 Lift Up Motor M3 PC Tray 2 Paper Near Empty Sensor PC1 PC Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor M1 PC 433 bizhub C250 da o i Q Q lt bizhub C250 lt gt a a lt 19 Parts layout drawing 19 2 DF 601 Option Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F5C501DA Exit Motor M3 DF Exit Cover Sensor PC7 DF Exit Sensor PC6 DF Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Exit Solenoid SL2 DF Turnover Solenoid SL1 DF Document Size Volume R1 DF Tray Open Close Sensor PC8 DF Registration Clutch CL1 DF o OO A 434 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Empty Sensor PC4 DF Pick up Sensor PC2 DF Registration Sensor PC1 DF Take up Motor M1 DF Take up Cover Sensor PC3 DF Transport Motor M2 DF Control Board PWB A DF ROM IC7 DF Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 Parts layout drawing 19 3 PC103 PC203 Option o e o a 2 F 4037F5C511DA 1 Tray 3 Vertical Transport Motor M120 PC 14 Tray 4 Near Empty Sensor PC122 PC Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 PC128 PC Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 PC127 PC
63. 4037F3E538DA 5 Input the user name and the password User name capture Password sysadm Select Command Prompt ftp 2 inl xl Microsoft Windows 2888 Version 5 80 2195 lt C Copyright 1985 2000 Microsoft Corp C gt ftp 172 16 6 225 Connected to 172 16 8 225 226 KONICA MINOLTA FTP server ready 172 16 8 225 lt none gt gt capture rd required for capture capture logged in 4037F3E539DA 271 bizhub C250 2 L El E lt bizhub C250 D 2 2 N El nl lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Setting Procedure 6 Using the Is command display the list of the file available for capture indows 2666 Version 5 00 2195 1 lt C Copyright 1985 2000 Microsoft Corp C gt ftp 172 16 80 225 Connected to 172 16 8 225 220 KONICA MINOLTA FIP server ready User 172 16 0 225 lt none gt gt capture 331 Password required for capture Password 238 User capture logged ftp gt 1s 266 PORT command successful 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for capture 226 Transfer complete ftp 5 bytes received in 0 005 5 000 00Kbytes sec 4037F3E540DA 7 Using the binary command set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer Select Command Prompt ftp ZI x ftp ls 266 PORT command successful 150 Opening ASCII mode
64. 4038F3C002DB 305 14 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 2 Scanner Position Adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit must be completed bizhub C250 1 Slide the Mirrors Unit 1 to the posi tion shown on the left 4038F3C509DA 2 Secure the Scanner 2 in the posi tion shown on the left using the two Scanner positioning screws 3 3 Make the Feed Direction Adjustment 241 4038F3C510DA D 2 2 N El nl lt 306 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 Mechanical adjustment 14 3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section 14 3 1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed bizhub C250 p 1 Install the gear so that the protrusion u of the gear 1 and the mark 3 on ME the Bypass Guide Rack Gear 2 are SS aligned in a straight line gt I ESO 2 der V ur 4038F3C003DA 2 Install the Bypass Unit Cover so that part A edge 2 of the Rack Gear 1 for the Bypass Paper Size
65. 60 to 90 g m 10 sets 2nd paper Black copy 8 5 x 11 16 to 24 Ib No of Sheets to be exit tray 2to 15 sheets 11x17 Stapled 6 to 15 sheets Max 60 pages 20 sets Other copy No of Sheets to be 2 to 10 sheets Stapled 2 to 5 sheets Max 40 pages D Stapling Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode 5000 staples Staple Detection Available Nearly Empty 40 remaining staples Rear Parallel 1 point B5R B5 to Stapling Position Front Parallel 1 point Side Parallel 2 points Center Parallel 2 points 8 5 x 11R 8 5 x 11 to 11 x 17 Manual Staple None Folding Mode Roller Pressure Folding Folding Position Center of Paper Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 E No of sheets to be stapled sort staple 1 8 5 x 11R or smaller 1 Product specification No of Sheets to be No of Sets Stapled Rear Parallel Center Parallel Front Parallel 2 100 40 40 3105 80 40 40 6 to 10 60 40 40 11 to 20 30 30 30 21 to 30 30 30 30 31 to 50 30 sets or 1000 sheets 2 4 8 5 x 14 or larger No of Sheets to be No of Sets Stapled Rear Parallel Center Parallel Front Parallel 2 100 50 50 3to5 80 40 40 6 to 10 40 40 40 11 to 20 30 sets or 1000 sheets 21 to 25 F Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V supplied from the main unit
66. Caution When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS and follow the corresponding removal proce dures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and Screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 2 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 3 No Section Part name Ref page 9 1 Exit Tray Uu 7 2 Front Cover ws 7 3 Rear Cover cS 7 7 Exterior Parts Upper Door 5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover 8 6 Upper Cover uw 9 7 Side Guide i 9 8 Middle Transport Unit ts 10 9 Stapler ts 10 10 Saddle Section gt 11 11 Finisher Tray gt 11 12 Paddle Section tw 13 13 Unit Exit Roller Upper 14 8 14 Paddle 14 S 15 Exit Roller Lower and Paper Exit Belt 15 16 Stapler Folding Drive Unit 17 17 Transport Roller s 18 18 Middle Transport Roller ts 19 19 Punch Unit ts 20 20 Finisher Control Board 21 21 Punch Control Board ws 21 22 Transport Motor Unit 22 23 Middle Transport Motor 22 24 Punch Motor 22 25 Side Registration Motor 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2
67. Disconnect the Connector 3 Remove three Screws 4 remove and the Tray 2 Lift Up Motor 5 Pull out the Tray 2 Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover and the Tray 2 Rear Left Cover 63 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Reinforcement plate 2 121 bizhub C250 7 g s bizhub C250 5 o 7 E 6 Other 4038F2C168DA 4038F2C519DA 122 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Remove the Harness of the Motor Assy 4 from five Wire Saddles 3 5 Disconnect two Connectors 5 6 Remove two Screws 6 and remove the Motor Assy 7 7 Remove two Screws 8 and remove the Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor 9 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 46 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor M2 PC 1 Pull out the Tray 2 Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover and the Tray 2 Rear Left Cover ts 63 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Reinforcement plate 2 2 bizhub C250 amp 0 4038F2C165DA 4 Remove the Harness of the Motor Assy 4 from five Wire Saddles 3 5 Disconnect two Connectors 5 5 o 7 4038F2C167DA 6 Remove two Screws 6 and remove the Motor Assy 7 4038F2C168DA 123 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Remove two Screws 8 and remove the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor 9 bizh
68. Fed a Rs 427 Lie E IRGSOcHOIzanni Deo rena e rer perenniter Leer EE ER EORR IEEE REY 427 19 1 2 Engine section sss nennen 428 E 19 1232 RE A 432 19 1 4 2 Multiple bypass tray 433 19 2 DF 601 Option cacenni a 434 Xiv Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 3 PC103 PC203 Option 194 PG 403 Optom PCM 436 19 5 AD 503 Option iiir tcd rie ai ER Ea REF ia 437 19 6 FS501 OPON 438 19 7 JS 601 Option 440 19 8 FS 603 Option 19 9 PK 501 Option 19 10 Horizontal Transport Unit nennen 444 20 Connector layout drawing nnne nennen 445 21 TIMING chart rina pe tek Er Es 448 2141 Main UII 448 21 2 Automatic Document 449 XV bizhub C250 Maintenance D 7 L n El E lt Troubleshooting Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 0909 qnuziq 2212101279 Blank Page Bumes 3ueuusn py Bunoouse qnoa j x pu ddy xvi Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 General 1 System configuration 1 2 System Front View 1 System configuration o N o a 2 N F 4038T1E101AA
69. Functions To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit Use Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit 290 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 13 Test Mode To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern It also tests the printing operation in running mode as well as the Fax trans mission The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 and Tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for printing bizhub C250 10 13 1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output 1 Touch Test Mode to display the Test Mode menu 2 Touch the desired test pattern key 3 Setup the desired functions and press the Start key 10 13 2 Gradation Pattern Functions To produce a gradation pattern Use Used for checking gradation reproducibility Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan 4036fs3042c0 Setting Procedure of Print 1 to 999 Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Select the color mode Cyan Magenta Yellow Black 4PC CMYK 8Color 4Color Black 1PC 2 Pe N lt Black 4 Uses four colors Black 1PC Uses one color of black 291 bizhub C250
70. Select Normal or Reverse 292 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 13 5 Solid Pattern Functions To produce each of the C M Y and K solid patterns Use Used for checking reproducibility of image density E Pattern a K gt SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density 255 M Si Setting of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Type the density level 0 to 255 10 13 6 Color Sample Functions To produce a color sample Use Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors Pattern MET e SINGLE HYPER Hi Gradation E E i E Gita lt Setting of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Produce 12 gradation level patches of C M Y K R G and B and a patch of each of the 12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected 293 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 13 7 8 Color Solid Pattern a Functions To produce an 8 color solid pattern o a Use Used for checking c
71. 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5 minutes oj j 2 o 6 minutes 7 minutes 8 minutes 9 minutes 10 minutes 2 2 2lo o o o o o o 9v e of of ol ol o 2 o o l2 2 o o 25 2 o q v o 2 o 3 Modem redial times Mode 06 6 06 5 06 4 06 3 06 2 06 1 06 0 0 to 9 times 000 0 000 to 000 1001 10 times 0 1 0 11 to 99 times 000 1 011 to 110 0011 4 Retransmission interva E Mail delivery error Mode o p 2 A o 0 minute 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes 60 minutes 70 minutes 80 minutes 90 minutes ojojojojojojojo 100 minutes 110 minutes 120 minutes e oO of of of Of CO Of Of o Of oO CO Of CO oO o oO of oO Of Of Of oO 255 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Retransmission times on E Mail delivery error 2 Mode 09 6 09 5 09 4 09 3 09 2 09 1 09 0 0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001 10 times 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 a 11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011 6 Timer 1 RING reception CONNECT
72. 2 Format Hard Disk Change Hard Disk 4 Change PWB MFP 16 5 85 0004 Hard disk access error 16 5 86 0005 Hard Disk Error 1 16 5 87 0006 Hard Disk Error 2 16 5 88 0007 Hard Disk Error 16 5 89 0008 Hard Disk Error 4 16 5 90 0009 Hard Disk Error 5 16 5 91 CDOOA Hard Disk Error 6 16 5 92 CDOOB Hard Disk Error 7 16 5 93 X CDOOC Hard Disk Error 8 16 5 94 CDOOD Hard Disk Error 9 16 5 95 CDOOE Hard Disk Error 16 5 96 CDOOF Hard disk data transfer error Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the Hard Disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Reinstall the Hard Disk Change Hard Disk Change PWB MFP E Q e Q 375 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 97 0010 Hard disk unformat Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Hard Disk bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Select Service Mode State Confirma 1 tion gt Memory HDD Agj HDD For mat 2 Change Hard Disk 3 PWB MFP 16 5 98 0011 Hard disk specifications err
73. 2 Tray 3 Door Set Sensor PC111 PC 15 3 Tray 3 Lift Up Upper Sensor PC114 PC 16 Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC 17 Tray 4 Paper Size Board PWB I 4 PC 5 Tray 3 Paper Take Up Sensor PC116 PC 18 Device Detection Sensor 121 6 Tray 3 Empty Sensor PC115 PC 19 Control Board PWB C2 PC Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor 7 126 20 Tray Paper Size Board PWB I 3 PC 8 4 Paper Take Up Sensor PCi25 PC 21 Wav CD Paper Size Sensor t 118 Tray 3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 9 4 Empty Sensor PC124 PC 22 119 i Tray 3 Device Detection Sensor x 10 Tray 4 Lift Up Upper Sensor 123 23 PC112 PC 5 11 Tray4 Vertical Transport Motor M121 PC 24 Tray 3 Near Empty Sensor PC113 PC amp 12 Tray4 Take up Motor M123 PC 25 Tray 3 Lift Up Motor M124 PC 13 4 Lift Up Motor M125 PC 26 Tray3 Take up Motor M122 PC 435 bizhub C250 fas gt a a lt 19 Parts layout drawing 19 4 PC 403 Option Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 4037F5C512DA afk 8 9 10 11 12 436 Vertical Transport Motor M2 LCT Door Set Sensor PC5 LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT Lift Up Upper Sensor PC4 LCT Paper Take up Motor PC1 LCT Paper Empty Sensor PC3 LCT Main Tray Empty Sensor Board PWB E LCT Eleva
74. 5 2 Sensor check list 5 2 1 Sensor check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit Sensor Check Sensors 2 LCT Bouno oston O Reverse Sensor 0 2nd Transfer Lift Up Upper 0 91425100 Retraction Lift Up Lower O Cassette Open O Transfer Belt 0 Bniis Motor Retraction snb Tray Baise Motor 0 Waste Toner Take Up Duplex Toner Full Vertical Set Transport 0 Paper Empty Paper Passagel 0 M n Emppu Paper Passagee Shift Tray Hor izontal Empty Trans Unit Lower Over Run frongpore 4066F3E502DA 5 2 2 Sensor check list A Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteristics Symbol Panel display Part Signal name Panel display 1 0 PCI DU Set Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC1DU Paper Passage 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper Paper not present present PC2DU Passage 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper Paper not present present Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Mechanical adjustment 6 Mechanical adjustment 6 1 Adjusting the paper reference position Machine Adjust Printer Area FBrint Positioning Leading Eda it Positioning prin 51 Edge Drint Dosib ONIN Side Edge 4066F3E503DA e Extent 2 0 3 0m
75. DC 5 V generated by Finisher Max Power Consumption 65 W or less Dimensions 601 mm W x 603 mm D x 933 mm H 23 75 inch W x 23 75 inch D x 36 75 inch H Weight 41 6 kg 91 75 Ib G Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice eo 1 Product specification Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 eo o En js Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other Maintenance 2 Other 21 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items FS 603 A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Oncethe red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting 5 o 7 D Removal of PWBs
76. List of Malfunction Resetting Procedures Trouble Code Rank Resetting Procedures Trouble Reset Rank A ts For details of Trouble Reset see Adjustment Setting Rank B Opening Closing the front door or Trouble Reset Rank C Turning sub power switch OFF ON 355 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 Solution 16 5 1 C0204 Tray 2 Elevator failure Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Lift Up Sensor PC7 PC Tray 2 Control Board PWB Z PC Tray 2 Lift Up Motor M3 PC bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the M3 PC connector for proper u connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of M3 PC for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as necessary PC7 PC check Sensor check PWB Z PC PJ6Z PC 3 ON S 24 M3 PC operation check PWB Z PC PJ4Z PC 4 to 5 M 27 Change PWB Z PC 16 5 2 C0211 Manual Tray Rise Descent Error Relevant Electrical Parts Bypass Lift Up Sensor PC 14 Tray 2 Control Board PWB Z PC Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor M2 PC WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the M2 PC connector for proper _ _ connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of M2 PC for proper dri
77. Use Not Used Setting Procedure 260 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 7 9 NOTE List of the CS Remote Care error code 10 Service Mode Error codes in the shaded region may occur when transmitting from the machine to the center Error code Error Solution 0001 The line is busy Busy detection Transmit again manually 0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmit Check if the power of the ting When the transmission completes with modem is ON modem initial setting failed Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main unit 0003 Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting e Transmit again manually No response to ATD Check if the power of the modem is ON Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main unit 0004 response to incoming staring request Contact responsible person of 9 Sed KONICA MINOLTA MSG 0005 Timeout of CONNECT at receiving Check if the power of the No response to ATA modem is ON Checkthe connecting condition between the modem and the main unit 0006 Shut down of the data modem line Host No solution because the line is Carrier OFF is detected shut down at the host side 0007 Shut down of the data modem line Main unit Contact responsible person of Line is shut down forcibly due to event KONICA MINOLTA 0008 Timeout of start request telegram deliver
78. When removing the Connector Board use care not to drop the drawer from the guide rail 434815252300 Caution To prevent injuries press the guide rail 7 inside the machine o 7 E 434815252400 Remove the Drawer we 11 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Front Cover Assy 2 3 Disconnect the connector 3 434816252500 4 Remove screws 4 and the Inner Cover Assy 5 NOTE Do not peel off pulley protective 4 mylar sheet 43481252600 11 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Driver Cover 7 434818252700 6 Remove three screws 8 and remove the Driver Mounting Plate Assy 9 434815252800 NOTE When assembling be sure to engage rib of gear 1 10 with con vex section of gear 2 11 Maintenance 434815252900 7 Remove three screws 12 and remove the Reinforcement Bracket Assy 13 43485253060 Remove two C clips 14 Remove four Pulley Covers 15 10 Unhook four pulleys 16 fo 9 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 y 434816253300 434815253400 43481253600 3 Other 11 Remove the Ground Plate 17 12 Remove four Cable Holding Jigs 18 and remove the Main Drawer 19 NOTE Usecare not to bend the wires
79. necessary D fe Q E Q 30 SS KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FS 603 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision
80. 1 Machine Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 601 3 Original cover OC 501 4 Working Table WT 501 5 Auto Duplex Unit AD 503 6 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 103 7 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 203 NOTE 8 10 11 12 13 Paper Feed Cabinet PC 403 Desk DK 502 Finisher FS 501 Job Separator JS 601 Finisher FS 603 Punch Kit for FS 603 PK 501 Use the Desk or the paper feed cabinet without fail when installing on the floor in order to keep the function and quality of the unit o D N o a E is N a 1 System configuration 2 2 System Rear View Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038T1E102AA 1 Machine 2 Vender Kit VK 501 Only for Europe North America and Latin America only 120V area 3 Mount Kit MK 706 4 Dehumidifier Heater HT 501 5 6 7 8 Mount Kit MK 704 Local Interface Kit EK 702 Fax Kit FK 502 Only for Europe North America Latin America and Australia Key Counter Kit KIT 1 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Product specifications 2 Product specifications 2 1 Desktop type printer integrated with scanner Copying System Electrostatic dry powdered image transfer to plain paper Printing Process Tandem type indirect electrostatic recording system PC Drum Type OPC organic photo conductor Scanning Density Equivalent to 600 dpi Exposure Lamp White rare
81. 13 Remove four screws 20 and remove the Rear Trailing Edge Assy 21 14 Remove four screws 22 and remove the Front Trailing Edge Assy 23 15 Remove three C rings 24 the bush ing 25 and two gears 26 16 Remove the Take up Drum Assy 27 17 Remove two C rings 28 and the Take up Drum 29 NOTE Take care not to lose fixing pins When reinstalling the Take up Drum check that the direction of the wire coming from both Take up Drums are the same Install so that cut parts 30 at both ends of shaft face up 13 PC 403 G 7 E s 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 4 Cleaning procedure NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol PC 403 3 4 1 Separation Roller 1 Remove the Right Door ww 10 2 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 2 43485250960 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Separation Roller 3 clean of dirt 5 5 7 E 434815251000 3 4 2 Paper Take up Roller 1 Remove the Tray3 2 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy ts See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 14 Cleaning of Separation Roller 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Paper Take Up 4348F2C502DA Roller 1 clean of dirt 3
82. 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 2 2 Sensor check list A Sensor monitor 1 PC 103 PC 203 5 Sensor check Operation characteris Symbol Panel display Part Signal name tics Panel display 1 0 PC112 PC Device Detection Tray3 Device Detection Sensor Set Out of position PC115 PC Paper Empty Tray3 Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC113 PC Near Empty Tray3 Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC117 PC Vertical Transport Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC116 PC Take Up Tray3 Take up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC114 PC Upper Limit Tray3 Lift up Upper Sensor Raised Not raised Position PC121 PC Tray4 Device Detection Tray4 Device Detection Sensor Set Out of position PC124 PC Paper Empty Tray4 Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC122 PC Near Empty Tray4 Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC126 PC Vertical Transport Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC125 PC Take Up Tray4 Take up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC123 PC Upper Limit Tray4 Lift up Upper Sensor Raised Not raised Position 15 PC 103 PC 203 2 Pe i D lt 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Mechanical adjustment 6 1 Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE Make this adjustment after any of
83. 2 Pe i N D lt 249 bizhub C250 2 ae i 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 7 CS Remote Care 10 7 1 Outlines CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone line in order to control the machine CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs It also enables the computer at the center to contact the machine for the neces sary data Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups a Data which show the status of use of the machine such as Total count PM count b Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur c Data on adjustment d Data on setting 10 7 2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care NOTE Forresetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting ts For clearing the RAM see page 259 When using the telephone line for connection use the recommended modem For recommended modem contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA Step Procedure Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care Center 0 The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered Connecting the modem Turn the power for the modem OFF Connect the
84. 8 Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value 9 Check the copy image for any image problem NOTE If the setting value has been changed be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value 10 6 4 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment A 2nd Transfer Adjust Functions Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC on the 1st page and the 2nd page for Adjustment To increase the ATVC value in the direction of a foggier image Instructions decrease the setting value To decrease the ATVC value in the direction of a less foggy image increase the setting value 2 each paper type Use To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs Adjustment 5 O 5 to 5 ange N 5 lt Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment Transfer Output Fine Adjustment 3 Select the side of the image First side or Second side on which the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs Select the paper type with the transfer failure at the trailing edge Enter the new setting from the 4 keys Touch END to validate the adjustment value Check the copy image for any image problem 246 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode B 1st Transfer Adjust Functions Adjust the output val
85. C User Box 1 Public Personal User Box Functions To register or change the Box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine Use To register the shared or personal box for any purpose Setting Touch New to register the new box Procedure Select any displayed box to edit or delete it 2 Bulletin Board User Box Functions 7 To register or change the Bulletin Board User Box se Setting Touch New to register the new box Procedure Select any displayed box to edit or delete it D One Touch Registration List 1 Address Book List Functions To output the Address Book List Use To print the list of abbreviated addresses which are registered Setting 1 Select the Destination Type to be output Procedure 2 Specify the Registration No range to be output 3 Touch Print and select the Paper Feed Tray 4 Press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses 2 GroupList Functions To output the Group List Use To print out the list of addresses of the group which are registered Setting 1 Specify the Registration No range to be output Procedure 2 Touch Print and select the Paper Feed Tray 3 Press the Start key to output the list of the addresses of the group 194 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 3 Program List Functions To output the Program List Use To print
86. Change Scanner Motor 6 The problem has been eliminated NO Change CCD Unit through the checks of steps up to 5 D fe Q E Q 392 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 7 Scanner System moire A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 403615403300 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Moire distortions recur even after NO Change the original mode 1 the orientation of original has been select one other than that changed resulted in moire Basic Screen Moire distortions recur even after YES Select Text Mode or Photo 2 Quality Density the original mode has been Mode changed 3 Basic Screen The problem has been eliminated NO Change the zoom ratio Zoom through the checks of steps up to 2 d Q e Q 393 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 8 Scanner System skewed image A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 44 403615403400 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is skew YES Reposition original Original Glass Original Glass is in positive contact NO Reinstall the glass 2 with the flat spring without being tilt Check the original loading posi tion 2nd 8rd Mirrors Scanner Assy is
87. Clean the connection between the Toner Car tridge and the machine if dirty d Q e Q 2 Reinstall Toner Cartridge Change Toner Cartridge Change PWB M 363 bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 16 Malfunction code 16 5 31 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 C3301 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 M11 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM correct as necessary Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper x connection and correct as necessary 2 Check the fan for possible overload and _ M11 operation check PWB M CNDM1 12 ON PWB M CNDM1 14 LOCK L 2 Change PWB M 16 5 32 C3302 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 M13 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Location Electri cal Component Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the fan for possible overload and 2 correct as necessary m 3 M13 operation check PWB M 1 14 ON 1 1 PWB M 1 17 LOCK 4 Change PWB M 3
88. Color print 1 sided 25 pages min 2 sided 23 pages min Printer Language PCL5e c Emulation PCL6 XL Ver 2 1 Emulation PostScript 3 Emulation 3011 Print Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printer Fonts PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 136 Fonts Supported Operating Systems Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows Server Server 2003 Windows 98 Second Edition Windows Me Windows Client 2000 Windows XP or Windows NT 4 0 SP6a Mac OS 9 2 or later or Mac OS X 10 2 or 10 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Product specifications 2 8 Scan Functions Driver KONICA MINOLTA Scanner Driver Compatible Operating Windows 98 98SE Me Windows NT 4 0 SP6 or later Windows 2000 Systems Windows XP Scan Speed 25 pages min for both monochrome and full color 600 dpi A4 Scannable Range Same as the copier Max A3 Functions Scan to E Mail Scan to FTP Scan to SMB Scan to BOX Resolution 200 300 400 600 dpi NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice o e o a 2 N 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 o D N o a E is N a Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check Maintenance 3 Periodical check 3 1 Service schedule bizhub C250 Guarantee period 5 year or 600 000 prints Per cycle x 10 000 print Number x
89. D Sensors 2 Main Unit PC 403 Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name Operation Characteristics Panel Display 1 0 PC4 LCT LCT Lift Up Upper Lift Up Upper Sensor At raised Notat raised position position PC13 LCT Lift Up Lower Lift Up Lower Sensor At lower limit Not at lower limit PC12 LCT Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Home Sensor Athome Out of home PC11 LCT Shift Tray Stop Shift Tray Stop Sensor At stop posi Not at stop tion position PC1 LCT Take Up Paper Take up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC2 LCT Vertical Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not Transport present present PC3 LCT Paper Empty Paper Empty Board Paper Paper not present present PWB E Main Tray Empty Main Tray Empty Sensor Board Paper Paper not LCT present present PC9 LCT Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Empty Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC7 LCT Lower Over Run Lower Over Run Sensor Malfunction Operational NU1 LCT Manual Button Manual Button Down Board ON OFF Down PC14 LCT Division Board Division Board Motor Athome Out of home Position PC6 LCT Cassette Open Cassette Open Sensor In position Out of posi tion PC8 LCT Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC10 LCT Elevator Motor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked Pulse PCI DU Duplex Set Duplex Unit Door Set Senso
90. FIFO ERROR Contact responsible person of when Read Write error occurs at RX FIFO KONICA MINOLTA 0011 Baud Rate ERROR Check the Baud rate of the When selected Baud Rate is out of the software DipSW tion 9600 bps to 38400 bps ooie TX FIFO Level Error e Contact responsible person of When the threshold of the selected TX FIFO is P KONICA MINOLTA not error value 1 3 9 13 0013 FIFO Level Error Contact responsible person of When the threshold of the selected RX FIFO is KONICA MINOLTA not error value 0 4 8 14 0014 Receiving Data Over Error Contact responsible person of When the data whose size exceeds the transmit _ KONICA MINOLTA ting RING buffer is requested 0015 Status Error Contact responsible person of During modem operation is being confirmed KONICA MINOLTA 0016 Status Error During receiving Contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA 0017 Status Error Contact responsible person of During line is being shut down KONICA MINOLTA 0018 Machine ID has already been registered Setthe initial registrations Request telegram 2 SET UP comes from the again for all including the host main unit that has already registered Machine side ID 0019 Center ID Error Check Center ID setting of the Center ID of the host is not identical with the one main unit side of start request telegram Check Center ID setting of the main unit side 001A Device ID inco
91. Flipping ON key 7 of SW1 validates H H P H the setting made to the fixed sys 1234567 8 tem based on the paper size as changed from the lateral registra tion motion automatic through end face detection Toreturn the setting back to the lat eral registration motion flip OFF key 7 of SW1 17 Turn ON the Main Power Switch of the main unit 18 Reinstall the rear cover uw 7 FS 603 458315353000 The procedure must be carried out as specified In particular switching ON or OFF must be performed properly If a step or steps are wrongly performed in mid procedure stop the procedure immediately Then turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit wait for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch After performing these steps start the procedure over This adjustment is applicable only to the punch position center adjustment The adjustment range is 5 mm It does not adjust for variations in the punch hole positions 2 Pe i N D lt 49 6 Board switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 FS 603 Blank Page 2 5 n lt 50 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Jam Display Troubleshooting 7 Jam Display 7 1 Misfeed display FS 603 When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the
92. LED1003 1001 41002 41003 41004 458318351400 Symbol Description 1 SW1001 Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output 2 SW1002 Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output 3 SW1003 Used to register the number of punched holes and adjust the sensor output 2 Pe i n D lt 45 6 Board switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 2 1 Adjustment of the sensor output Be sure to make this adjustment after replacing the Punch Control Board the Side Reg istration Sensor Photosensor Board or LED Board or the Punch Dust Full Sensor Punch Dust Full Sensor Board or Punch Dust Full LED Board FS 603 1 Setthe bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control ON Board as shown on the Left figure 2 Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the P L P L Punch Control Board The sensor 7234 output will be automatically adjusted When all LED1001 LED1002 and LED1003 light up the adjustment has been completed 3 Set all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF 458316351500 6 2 2 Registration of the number of punch holes n order for the Finisher to recognize the number of punch holes that can be achieved by the installed Punch Unit such number of punch holes is registered in the IC on the Punch Control Board Make this registration whenever the Punch
93. Punch Motor M1P PK WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary I O sensor check PWB B PK J1006B PK 6 ON FS 603 2 4 PISP PK I O sensor check PWB B PK J1006B PK 9 ON FS 603 2 M1P PK operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 6 PWB B PK replacement E PWB B J1002B PK 1 to 2 FS 603 H 1 to 2 d Q e Q 65 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 12 C11C5 Punch Sensor malfunctions 1 Side Registration Sensor Relevant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor 2 Punch Control Board PWB B PK FS 603 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical components Step Action Check the sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 2 I O sensor check PWB B PK J1006B PK 3 ON FS 603 H 2 3 PWB B PK replacement 2 Wastes Full Sensor Relevant electrical parts Punch Control Board PWB B PK Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board PWB E PK Punch Trash Full LED Board PWB F PK WIRING DIAGRAM Locati
94. Q E Q 7 Jam Display 7 3 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 LCT Paper Take Up section Vertical Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description LCT Paper Take Up section misfeed detection The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Take up Motor PC1 LCT or the Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Take up Motor M1 LCT is energized LCT Vertical transport section misfeed detection The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor 8 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT has been blocked by a paper LCT Vertical Transport section Loop Registration Reversing JAM Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the Registration Roller at LCT take up LCT detection of paper remaining The Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The Paper Take up Motor PC1 LCT is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor The Paper Take up Motor PC1 LCT is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after
95. Scan to FTP with URL Notification Scan to PC with URL Notification Scan to E Mail Scan to HDD with URL Notification TWAIN Software Accessories 1 Driver CD PCL6 Printer Driver TWAIN Driver Font Manager BOX Utility OS Windows98 98SE Me NT4 0 2000 XP Server2003 Software Accessories 2 PageScope Web Connection has been built into the controller firmware Compatible Paper Size Max standard paper size A3 Wide Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Power Requirements Shared with Main Unit Operating Environ 10 30 mental Requirements 15 85 PCL Latin 80 Fonts Fonts PS Latin 136 Fonts Options Not available 1 The optional Local Interface Kit EK 702 is required 2 ET c o o v G o c S S 2 T 2 o o v G o c S fl o 1 Controller specifications 1 2 Supporting client specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 PC IBM PC and its compatible RAM 64 MB or more 128MB or more for XP OS Windows 98 98SE Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows NT 4 0 Windows Server 2003 Connection Ethernet 10Base T 100Base TX With a network method Interface ME Protocols Tele IPX SPX NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 x With a local connection IEEE1284 Compatible Nibble ECP 1 The following browser is required to use PageScope Web Connection Browser Netscape Communicator version 4 5 or later Java complia
96. See User s Guide Network Scanner Operations 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Troubleshooting procedures 7 4 E mail does not reach the destination when transmission 5 through Scan to E Mail Scan to Internet FAX is completed 5 8 Check Possible Cause Action Remark v s 5 The destination mail Enter the correct mail Bag Users Guid E Yes Network Scanner E address is wrong address o Operations An error message is returned from the mail server The receiving end is being unable to receive No Jor is not receiving stored in the POP3 server E d Q e Q 19 7 Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Standard Controller Blank Page D fe Q 20 7 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL DF 601 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show
97. essere 367 Compression hardware timeout sssseeeenene 368 Extraction hardware timeout esse 368 EITOE 368 JBIG ee eret i a Naa 368 SBIG 2 EITOE saei DOE I Ob XU 368 JBIGS Biro Lir rre tr rere DE LE d EUER CE UR M 368 Compressor 0 command buffer stop 368 Compressor 1 command buffer stop 368 Compressor 2 command buffer stop 368 Compressor command buffer stop 368 Main Motor s failure to turn 368 Main Motor Turning at abnormal 369 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to turn 969 Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn 969 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor s failure to 370 Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to 370 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn 370 Drive Home Sensor malfunction esses 371 Slider Over s eiie ni rra eani 371 Scanner Cooling Fan Motor s failure to turn 371 Xi bizhub C250 Maintenance 2 pe n UO lt Troubles
98. to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS DF 601 General 1 Product SpecifiCatioris cinere trot tta sn desecedsaedenedsnevestedstavaecavncaitcetseses 1 2 Mixed original feed 2 1 Mixed original feed chart eese enne ennt 3 2 2 Paper feed prohibited originals 4 4 2 3 Paper feed not guaranteed originals essen 4 Maintenance 3 Periodical Check as tien id be eek co E FX RT E ERR RES TEE 5 3 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 3 1 1 Jransport Belt ront aco pa tr Ec ER CD TUR OE CERA E EUER RR 5 3 1 2 Pic
99. 100 Specification Highlight 0 60 Setting Procedure Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Gradation Adjustment Select the appropriate mode for the Gradation Adjustment Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover Press the Start key The machine will then start scanning the test pattern Touch OK and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice a total of three times Touch Gradation Adjust to display the Adj Values and Conv Values of each color C M Y and K for Max and Highlight 10 Use the following procedures to check the Conv Value UNa 0 100 and Highlight 0 60 It completes the adjustment procedure If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above Perform steps from 2 to 6 2 x 5 n o lt fault is detected 0 is displayed for all values In this case turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch and perform Gradation Adjust once again If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max Density If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the spec ified range check the image f the image is faulty perform
100. 8 1 Adjustment of the tray 18 2 8 2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position 19 5 8 3 Adjustment of the document skew sse nnne 20 8 4 Adjustment of the document stop position sseseeeeene 8 4 1 Auto adjust Sub Scanning Direction 1 Sided Stop Position 8 4 2 Auto adjust Sub Scanning Direction 2 Sided stop position 8 4 3 Auto adjust Scanning Direction Image scan start position 23 8 4 4 Manual adjust Sub Scanning Direction 1 Sided 2 Sided document stop position 24 8 4 5 Manual adjust Scanning Direction Image scan position adjustment sire casi o rt ra 25 8 5 Adjustment of the loop value seessseeeeeeeeeeeneenrenenneee nennen 26 8 6 Automatic adjustment of the 27 Troubleshooting 5 9 Jam Display E 9 1 Initial check items iieri einer terae ate nid ue rni dere 29 9 2 Misteed display eodera ree a ee eric dE ERR ERIT 29 9 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 29 p 9 3 Sensor AVOUT est oen i Hr EEG FEE TEE EK 30 E 9 4 Sol tlOn fanis ROI RO ORAT FE era AL nda nag 30 2 9 4 1 Paper E
101. Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is MC C detected during the machine is starting CD013 Encryption ASIC mounting error The faulty of the installation of encrypted ASIC is C detected during the machine is starting CD2XX Trouble related to Security Contact the responsible people of KONIKA MINOTLTA before taking some countermeasures CDCXX Trouble related to Security Contact the responsible people of KONIKA _ MINOTLTA before taking some countermeasures CE001 Abnormal message queue MFP Control Board PWB MFP is faulty CE002 Message and Method parameter C failure CE003 Task error CE004 Event error C CE005 Memory access error C CE006 Header access error C 007 DIMM initialize error C CEEE1 MSC undefined malfunction An undefined malfunction occurs in the MSC of C 344 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank CEEE2 Scanner Section undefined An undefined malfunction occurs in the Scanner C malfunction Section Engine Section undefined An undefined malfunction occurs in the Engine C malfunction Section PWB M etc The machine displays an abort code CFXXX on the Touch Panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control When the system program is aborted check the electrical component unit option and connection relating to the specific type of the abort
102. Procedure The default setting is Unset Fax Main Set Unset Fax Sub Not Used local I F Set Unset JPEG Not Used NOTE After changing setting make sure to turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after 10 9 4 Consumable Life Reminder Functions To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime PM parts lifetime display An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached prompting the user to replace the part Applicable units Transfer Belt Unit Fusing Unit Imaging Unit C M Y K Use Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime Setting The default setting is Yes Procedure Yes No 268 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 9 5 Unit Change Functions To select who is to replace a unit When the unit life arrives the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit When User is selected Copying is inhibited When Service is selected Life warning bizhub C250 Use Upon setup Setting The following are the default settings Procedure US Japan Others 4 Europe Others1 2 3 Toner Cartridge User Service User Service Imaging Unit User Service User Service Waste Toner Box User Service User Service Punch Dust Box User Service User Service 10 9 6 Software Switch S
103. Standard Controller d Q e Q Standard Controller D fe Q E Q 7 Troubleshooting procedures 7 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E Mail Internet FAX Check Possible Cause Action Remark um The message Server Connect error appears The SMTP server is not in service Check with the network administrator IP address of the SMTP server is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address Port number is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number A timeout condition occurs Set a longer value for SMTP Connection Timeout The tim eout value depends on the network s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server See User s Guide Network Scanner Operations The network is disconnected during file transfer Send Ping from PC to the con troller and SMTP server to check to see if both parties are connected to the network or not E mail Size Over appears The size of the scan data exceeds the upper limit value set for Maximum E Mail Size Decrease resolution to make small the data size or change the setting for Scanned File Separation and Binary Divi Sion as necessary so that the scan data does not exceed the Maximum E Mail Size
104. bizhub C250 2 5 n o lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Connection Timeout Functions To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server Use To change the timeout period for connecting Setting 1 Touch Input Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10 Key Pad 5 FTP Client Functions To set whether to use Scan to FTP FTP transmission or not Use Notto use Scan to FTP FTP transmission Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 6 FTP Server Functions To set whether to use FTP server or not Use Notto use FTP server Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF E SMB Setting 1 Scan Setting Functions To set whether to use SMB or not in Scan mode Scan to PC Use Notto use SMB in Scan mode Scan to PC Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 2 Print Setting Functions To set whether to use SMB port or not in Printer mode Use Notto use SMB port in Printer mode Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 3 NetBIOS Name Functions To set NetBIOS name Use To set NetBIOS name Setting 1 Touch NetBIOS Name Procedure 2 Enter the NetBIOS name up to 15 characters on the on scr
105. current one f width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the current one Setting Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch Machine Printer Area Dup Print Positioning Side Edge 3 Select the paper source to be adjusted 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 6 If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 8 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy 9 If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 10 If width A falls within the specified range touch END 11 Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray 237 bizhub C250 2 Pe i 5 D lt bizhub C250 2 2 n El nl lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 4 5 Scan Area Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section f the Color Chart is not available a scale may be used instead A Image Position Side Edge B Image Position Leading Edge C Cross Direction Adjustment D
106. ey a ee emi me 9 p 3Q 8IA 1010W pesce eee e cedes oie es eme Rs e E aie 0 pei 100W HO 3 doo jo junowy 98 j 4 F i L HhNM9 BH ll coe ee Ne ae Ne des fea ed 01 100W Saye f oea a E E Ea o3 30 LW dn ayey 4 4 4 44 4 MO 0 13SQ uo uo aN3oS uo utis 0 ejejduio 4 dn ayey HIS 0 4x4 181 jeuibuo xg E ejejduio 0 puz HEIS 0 ejejduio dn ayey pug Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 455 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 hart iming 21 T vasvsds4 0v 6085 eDueuox3 351 epis _f SWOEEL _ eBueuox3 epis 95 gt 4699 ues 0 eBueuoxa epis puz yo 34 115 uo plouajog 90 215 plousjos 1x3 uo yo 30 119
107. reception b E 0 3 6 6 0 4 6 6 0 5 6 6 1 6 6 6 0 7 6 6 0 253 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 SW No Bit Functions 0 1 Default B SW 12 0 2 7 7 0 D 1 Dial request completed CONNECT 7 7 0 reception 2 2 7 7 0 5 3 7 7 0 4 7 7 0 5 7 7 0 6 7 7 1 7 T 7 0 SW 13 0 to 7 Reservation 0 SW 14 0 Timer 4 8 8 0 1 Line connection Start request g g 0 telegram delivery 2 8 8 0 3 8 8 0 4 8 8 0 5 8 8 1 6 8 8 0 y 8 8 0 SW 15 0 j Timer5 9 9 0 1 Wait time for other side s response 9 9 1 2 9 9 1 3 9 9 1 4 9 9 1 5 9 9 0 m 6 9 9 0 7 9 0 SW 16 0 to 7 Reservation 0 nl lt SW17 0to7 Reservation 0 SW 18 Attention display 0 To set weather to give the alarm display Do not call Call 1 when using the modem but the power for the modem is OFF 1 to 7 Reservation 0 SW 19 to SW 40 0 to 7 Reservation 0 254 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Baud rate 10 Service Mode Mode 01 6 01 4 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 2 Modem redial interval Mode 05 0
108. 1 Product specification Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 D Stapling Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode 3000 staples Staple Detection Available Nearly Empty 40 remaining staples Diagonal back side 45 1 point Rear Parallel 1 point Stapling Position B5R B5 to Stapled Paper Size x 11R 8 1 2 x 11 to 11 x 17 Manual Staple None E Sort and staple capacity 1 Stacking with no stapling with the same size paper 80g m Determined by the item whose value is reached first among number of stacked paper stacked height or mass of stack Determined by the stacked height when stacking with stapling and no stapling mixed Number of stacked paper FD No of Sheets 8 1 2 x 11R or smaller 1000 sheets B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger 500 sheets Stacked height FD Height 8 1 2 x 11R or smaller 150 mm B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger 75 Mass of stack FD Mass 8 1 2 x 11R or smaller correspond to 1000 sheets B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger correspond to 500 sheets 2 Stacking with stapling Reference Actual value Determined by number of Sets or number of Sheets based on number of bindings Number of stacked paper No of Sheets to be Stapled No of Sets No of Sheets 2 pages 100 sets 200 Sheets 3 to 5 pages 80 sets 400 Sheets 6to 10 pages 60 sets 600 Sheets 11 to 20 pages 40 sets 800
109. 1 Slide out the Tray 1 2 Lockthe Paper Lifting Plate 1 into position 3 Snap off the C clip 2 from the Tray 1 Feed Roller Assy 3 4 Remove the shaft for the Tray 1 Feed Roller Assy 3 from the front Bush ing 4038F2C001DA 5 Snap offthe C clip 4 one collar 5 and remove the Tray 1 Feed Roller a 6 t 6 To reinstall reverse the order of 9 removal 7 Select Service Mode Counter gt ELT Life and clear the count of 1st 6 NOTE Replace the Tray 1 Feed Roller and Tray 1 Separation Roller at the same time 5 s 7 E s 4037F2C003DB 3 5 2 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy 1 Slide out the Tray 1 2 Remove two Screws 1 and the Tray 1 Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy 2 4038F2C002DB 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 3 Take off the rubber stopper 3 shaft 4 spring 5 and guide plate 6 to remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy 7 bizhub C250 4038F2C003DB 4 Snap off the E ring 8 and the Tray 1 9 Paper Separation Roller Assy 9 wee 5 To reinstall reverse the order of removal p 6 Select Service Mode gt Counter Life and clear the count of 1st NOTE Replace the Tray 1 Feed Roller and Tray 1 Separation Roller at the same time 4037F2C509DA 7 E s
110. 10 10 5 Warning Functions To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type To clear the count of each counter Use To check the number of warning conditions that have been detected Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure Ifa counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation When a warning condition occurs an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the Basic screen Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen 9 Pe i N lt 10 10 6 Maintenance Functions To set a count value for maintenance of any given part Use When any given part is replaced Setting Maint Set Procedure Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10 Key Pad Maint Count Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the machine Pressing the Clear key will clear the count f the count is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation 275 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 10 7 Service Total Functions To display the count value for the service total counter o 2 Use Use to check the total No of printed pages including the ones printed by the Ser S vice Mode Setting Service Total No of pages printed by Use
111. 2 to the cleaning port 3 and clean it by putting the jig back and forth a couple times Soh NOTE Clean every PH Window of i DA 126 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 4 2 Image Transfer Belt Unit 4038F2C174DA 6 4 3 Tray 1 Feed Roller 4038F2C175DA 6 4 4 Tray 1 Separation Roller 4038F2C002DB 6 Other 1 Remove the Image Transfer Belt i Unit gt 31 3 N del 2 Using a dried soft cloth wipe the Image Transfer Belt 1 NOTE If itis difficult to clean with dried soft cloth dampen a soft cloth with a solvent Do not wipe out with water When solvent is used to dampen a cloth do not use the ones other than shown below isopropyl alcohol ethyl alcohol PPC Cleaner Sol mix AP 7 After cleaned with the solvent make copies more than 28 piece of A3 white paper to eliminate the image noise 7 g s 1 Slide out the Tray 1 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Tray 1 Feed Roller 1 clean of dirt 1 Slide out the Tray 1 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Tray 1 Paper Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy 2 127 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Tray 1 Separation Roller 3 clean of dirt bizhub C250 4038F2C176DA 6 4 5 Bypass Tray Feed Roller
112. 22 f 13 Select Service Mode Counter Life and clear the count of 2nd bizhub C250 403616259600 3 5 7 Replacing the Tray 2 Pick up Roller 1 Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy ts See the procedures 1 to 5 in page 20 Tray 2 Separation Roller 2 Remove the Tray 2 Right Rear Cover 64 3 Disconnect the Connector 1 7 g s 4038F2C014DA 4 Remove the Screws 2 and remove the Reinforcement plate 3 4038F2C015DA 5 Remove four Screws 4 and remove the Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy 5 4038F2C016DA 25 bizhub C250 5 5 7 g 3 Periodical check 4037F2C005DB 9 4037F2C006DB 4038F2C514DA 4 13 e 14 gt Q NG 40361259800 26 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove two Screws 6 and remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installa tion plate Assy 7 together with Frame 7 Remove two Screws 8 and Tray 2 Feed Roller cover 9 Remove two C rings 10 and two Bushings 11 and remove the Tray 2 Pick up Roller Assy 12 Snap off the C ring 13 and remove the Tray 2 Pick up Roller 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 3 5 8 Cleaning of the Registration Roller 1 Open the Right Door Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol w
113. 4 and cable holder 5 with one screw 6 6 Reinstall the Upper Rear Cover Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C572DA 4038F2C574DA 6 Other 7 Using four screws 8 secure the Counter Mounting Bracket 7 NOTE Secure the Counter Mounting Bracket passing the connector into the bracket Use the four long screws 9646 0418 14 4 18 in the Key Counter Kit to secure the Counter Mounting Bracket When installing the Key Counter to the other products use the short screws 9646 0408 14 4 8 8 Connect the Key Counter Socket connector 9 9 Using two screws 11 secure the counter socket 10 10 Using two screws 13 secure the Key Counter Cover 12 139 bizhub C250 o 7 E s bizhub C250 5 s 7 g 6 Other 14 p 4038F2C575DA 140 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 11 Fix the harness 15 with the cable clamp 14 as shown in the left figure 12 Select Service Mode Billing Set ting Management Function Choice Key Counter Press Set and set Color Mode and Mes sage t For details on setting see Adjust ment Setting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 7T Howto use the adjustment section e Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items
114. 5 PWB A FN replacement 9 3 4 C11A1 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC13 FN Control Board PWB A FN Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M13 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 2 1 for proper connection and correct as 8 necessary 8 Check the connector of motor for proper 2 coupling and correct as neces E sary 3 PC18 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A 15 ON FS 501 B 9 M13 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement PWB A FN PJ16A 1 to 2 FS 501 B 6 28 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Trouble code 9 3 5 C11A2 Storage Roller Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Storage Roller Home Position Sensor PC12 FN Control Board PWB A FN Storage Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M12 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 12 I O sensor check PWB A F
115. Changing Zoom Ratio Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification Use To prohibit the change on registered magnification Setting The default setting is Allow Procedure Allow Restrict G Expert Adjustment 1 AE Level Adjustment Functions To set the default setting for AE Auto Exposure The larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be Use To make the background level foggier Increase the setting value To make the background level less foggy Decrease the setting value Setting The default setting is 2 Procedure 2 0 to 4 176 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 2 Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Instructions Functions To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1 Use The PH Unit has been replaced The paper type has been changed The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction Afaint image occurs on the leading edge of the image Adjustment Specification Width A on the test pattern produced should 4 fall within the following range Width A Specifications 4 2 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments Adjustment If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur rent one If width A is shorter than the spe
116. FK 502 is mounted A Header Information Functions To register the name of the sender and Fax ID which will be printed when transmitting Fax Use To register or change the name of the sender and Fax ID Setting 1 Touch Sender Name and enter the name of the sender up to 30 characters on the Procedure on screen keyboard B Header Footer Position 1 Header Position Functions To set the position to print the header when transmitting Fax Use To change the position to print the Header Setting The default setting is Outside Body Text Procedure Inside Body Text Outside Body Text OFF 2 Footer Position Functions To set whether to print the Footer when transmitting Fax Use To print the Footer when transmitting Fax Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure Inside Body Text Outside Body Text OFF C Telephone Line Settings 1 Dialing Method Functions To set the Dialing method Use To change the dialing method The displays are different depending on the country Setting The default setting is PB Procedure 10 pps NOTE The displays are different depending on the country 215 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005
117. FS 603 Adjustment range 7 to 7 mm Increment 1 mm 5 2 1 Adjustment procedure 1 Set 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray 2 Touch these keys in this order Fold amp Staple OK 3 Setfive sheets of or 11 x 17 original blank paper acceptable in the Original Tray These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation 4 Press the Start Key 5 Setthe mode to the Service Mode ts For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the main unit service manual 6 Touch Finisher 7 Touch Half Fold Position Adj Finisher Adjustment Restore E Cenber Stapie wn E 3 Max 7 lt Min 7 4583F3E510DA 8 Check the finished copies for deviation of the stapling position of from the newly folded position Take the top surface of the finished copies as A and the under surface as B Standard 0 2 mm lt To side gt lt Standard gt lt To side gt A A A e B B B 458316350200 28 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Mechanical adjustment 9 Press the Clear Key 10 Adjust with the Keys When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A Adjust the value to the side When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B Adjust the value to the side 11 Touch END FS 603 Max 7 Min 7
118. Feed Direction Adjustment Original Reference 4038F3C517DA A Image Position Leading Edge Functions To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sen sor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction Use When the Original Glass is replaced When the Original Width Scale is replaced Adjustment B width on the color chart and one on the Specification Hi copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below An adjustment must have been completed V correctly of Print Positioning Leading Edge all of Printer Area Specifications B x 0 5 mm 10 x 0 5 mm if a scale is used Setting Range 5 0to 45 0 in 0 1 mm increments Adjustment If the copy image is less than the specified length increase the setting value Instructions If the copy image exceeds the specified length decrease the setting value Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Scan Area Image Position Leading Edge 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check point B on the image of the copy 6 If width B on the copy falls outside the specified range change the
119. Fusing Tem the problem of poor fusing perature performance and offset Service Mode The problem has been eliminated NO Change Fusing Unit through the checks of steps up to 2 d Q e Q 423 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 36 Printer 4 Color brush effect blurred image A Typical Faulty Images N S Brush effect Blurred image N a ABCDE C F ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 40385406160 403619403100 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp YES Change paper to one just 1 unwrapped from its package Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater 2 Paper type does not match YES Change the setting 3 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean dirty 4 Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched YES Change Fusing Unit Machine Changing fusing speed eliminates YES Readjust Fusing Transport 5 Fusing Trans the problem of brush effect and Speed port Speed blurred image Service Mode D Q E Q 424 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 37 Printer 4 Color back marking A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 403616406300 40365406260 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Ch
120. HO 4C HN MO 13SQ uo uo QN39S uo 459 21 Timing chart Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 bizhub C250 Blank Page 5 f lt 460 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL bizhub c250 Standard Controller 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005
121. Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting For displaying the keys with marks see 223 Administrator Security Level For displaying the keys with marks see 298 Administrator Feature Level o e o 5 1 It is displayed only when the optional Fax kit FK 502 is mounted 2 It is displayed when the certification is issued at PageScope Web Connection Utility Counter One Touch Address Registration Scan Book EMail gt 158 gt 158 HFTP Group H SMB H Program User Subject Text 4 bject 242196 Text H Fax 1 Address Abbr Dial 1 Book 1 2 ts 159 E H Group 1 H E Mail 1 2 E H Program 1 User Box 1 lt Subject Text 4 bject 1 for E mail 1 242189 Public Per Ll User Box sonal User Box Text 1 gt 160 Bulletin Board User Box 1 System Language Yser Setting Setting Selection gt 161 ts 161 Measurement Unit Setting Paper Tray Auto Tray Setting Select Setting 143 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005
122. Oncethe red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting 5 s 7 E s D Removal of PWBs A Caution When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS and follow the corresponding removal proce dures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Whenit is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Other 3 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list a No Section Part name Ref page 5 1 Right Door s 10 2 Rear Right Cover ts 10 3 Exterior parts Lower Right Cover ts 10 4 Front Right Cover ts 10 5 Rear Cover ts 10 3 2 2 Cleaning parts list No Section Part name Ref page 11 Separation Roller gt 2 Paper feed section Paper Take
123. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray 1 with the side having an arrow facing up 6 Press the Start key 458215350800 21 DF 601 Adjustment Setting DF 601 2 5 n D lt 8 Mechanical adjustment 8ub Scanning Direction i Side Adjustment Result OK ser Position K correction ei 0 nm nm Skew Level 4582F3E519DA 8 4 2 Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Service Mode Touch ADF Touch Auto Stop Position Adjustment Touch Sub Scanning Direction 2 Side Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Make sure that Result is OK Then touch SET 8 Touch END 9 Touch Exit on the Service Mode Screen If the Result is Unable Check and correct the skew of the document Manually correct the value of Position Correction Auto adjust Sub Scanning Direction 2 Sided stop position ADF Adjustment Auto Original Stop Position Adjustment Main Scanning E Direction Osition Sub Scanning Direction 2 Side gt 4582F3E520DA 45821350800 position 8Ub Scanning Direction 2 side gt B id3uspment Result Bosition Ck Correction 0 nn 0 nn 4582F3E521DA 2
124. Press the Utility Counter key Touch User Setting Printer Setting Print Reports Touch Configuration Page and press the Start key Code Description Action C A051 Standard controller change the MFP Control Board PWB MFP configuration failure C A052 Faulty controller hardware Change the MFP Control Board PWB MFP Change the MFP Control Board PWB MFP if the prob lem occurs again when turning OFF the Main Power Controller start failure Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after t For details of how to replace the MFP Control Board see the C250 Main Unit Service Manual 7 Troubleshooting procedures 7 1 Unable to print over the network Check Possible Cause Action Remark Is the print job dis played on the machine control panel Yes An error on machine side paper running out toner running out etc Correct the error Waiting its turn Check the machine control panel for jobs in print queue Priority may be changed as neces sary See User s Guide Copy Operations of the machine The job is locked Enter the password to unlock the job The correct division ID has not been entered Enter the correct divi sion ID in the printer driver and try re trans mitting the job again access code See User s Guide Print Operations No Data is yet to be received Go
125. Q A risk of fire exists S 10 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Service Materials NCAUTION Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid If this happens immediately wipe it off A risk of fire exists When using any solvent ventilate the room well Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort S 11 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 4 Used Batteries Precautions ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Germany VORSICHT Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemaBem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers France ATTENTION Il y a danger d explosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du m me type ou d un type quivalent recom mand par le constructeur Mettre au rebut les batteries usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant Denmark ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverand ren Finlan
126. System 2 gt Data capture Setting The default setting is Allow Procedure Allow Restrict E HDD Setting 1 Check HDD Capacity Functions To display the used space capacity total space capacity and the remaining capacity of the hard disk Use To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk 2 Delete Unused User Box Functions To delete the unnecessary box without data se Setting 1 Touch Delete Unused User Box Procedure 2 Touch Yes on the Check screen 224 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 3 Delete Secure Documents Functions 2 To delete the whole classified documents in the hard disk se Q Setting 1 Touch Delete Secure Documents 2 Procedure 2 Touch Yes on the Check screen a 4 Overwrite Data Functions To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting Use To be used when disposing the Hard disk Setting 1 Touch Overwrite All Data Procedure 2 Touch Overwrite 3 Touch the Yes key on the Check screen 4 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after 5 HDD Lock Password Functions To set the Lock Password for the hard disk Use To enter change or delete the Lock Password for the hard disk Setting 1 Touch HDD Lock Password Procedure 2 Enter the password 20 characters on the on s
127. The default setting is Stop Procedure Stop No Stop 298 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 12 Billing Setting 12 Billing Setting 12 1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure 12 1 1 Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 9 3 Billing Setting menu will appear o iD e o a 5 Service Mode Billing Setting Imaging Process Adaustment CS Remote Care Coverage Habe 4037F3E510DA 12 1 2 Exiting Touch the Exit 12 2 Billing Setting Function Tree o p 7 Service Mode zm Billing Setting Counter Setting gt 300 gt 300 5 Management Function Choice t 301 Coverage Rate Clear t 301 299 12 Billing Setting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 12 3 Settings in the Billing Setting S 12 3 1 Counter Setting Functions To set the counting method for the Total Counter and Size Counter X To set the size regarded as the Large size 2 counts Use Use to change the counting method for the counters Setting Total Counter Mode Procedure Mode 1 1 Count per 1 copy cycle Default US Others 4 Japan Mode 2 Large Size is double counts Default Europe Others 1 Others 2 Others 3 Large Size Counter Mode A3 11 x 17 When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan direction and 420 mm in the sub sc
128. Variable Name Variable Value home username 4036fs2621e0 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Firmware upgrade 3 1 4 Writing into the Compact flash 1 Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory C C250 in the below figure me NN File Edit View Favorites Tools Help EJ Qsearch yFolders WG GE X A Eg E deo 20050512_4038 F000 G00 01 000 R2 _CHECKSUM D2FC EXE 31 99 Applicat 5 12 2 1 object s 31 2 MB My Computer 4038F2E562DA NOTE The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release Date Version CHECKSUM exe 2 Double click the Firmware data and specify the directory to be uncompressed and then uncompress it v2 16 xi Install Directory cAc250 Reference Cancel 4038F2E563DA NOTE When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed delete it before uncompressing Standard Controller o G 7 E s 3 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Mount the Compact flash on the PC and check the Drive name which was recognized in the Windows F drive in the following figure Computer E nei xl File Edit View Favorites Tools Help back gt Ey Qusearch C Folders CBristory Address 2 My Computer v Local Disk
129. Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS FS 501 General 1 Product SDecIfICatiori erint tort treo serere ena anat e teh tardus 1 Maintenance 2 Other 2 4 Disassembly Adjustmen
130. bizhub C250 Blank Page 2 5 n lt 312 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 Jam Display Troubleshooting 15 Jam Display 15 1 Misfeed Display When a paper misfeed occurs the misfeed message misfeed location and paper loca tion are displayed on the Touch Panel of the machine bizhub C250 12 4038F4C501DA E Q e Q 313 15 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Display Code 1 Misfeed Location misfeed processing location Action 1 1101 Tray 1 feed section Right Door gt 318 e 2 3001 2nd Image Transfer section Right Door gt 319 E 1201 Tray 2 feed section Tray 2 Right Door ts 320 a 3 2001 Tray 2 vertical transport section Tray 2 Right Door 1001 Manual Bypass feed section Right Door 4 1501 LCT feed section LCT Right Door uw 322 2001 LCT vertical transport section LCT Right Door 9301 Duplex Unit transport section mu ts 325 5 Duplex Unit Right Door 9201 Duplex Unit pre registration section 6 1301 Tray 3 feed section tS 323 2001 Tray 3 vertical transport section Paper Feed Unit Right Door 7 1401 Tray 4 feed section gt 324 2001 Tray 4 Vertical transport section 8 3201 Fusing Exit section Right Door wu 327 9 7403 Horizontal transport Horizontal transport cover 2 8 7401 7402 vaga Finish
131. f width A is greater than the specified value Turn screw D counterclockwise ae iz If width A is smaller than the specified value z Turn screw D clockwise E E 5 28 lt 434815351300 11 Perform another test print and check the reference deviation 12 Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range 13 Tighten the adjustment screw 21 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 1 2 Dup Print Positioning Side Edge 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual 2 Touch Machine gt Printer Area 3 Touch Dup Print Positioning Side Edge 3rd PC 403 Machine Adjust Printer Area ioningiSide Restore E Leading Edge 4061F3E811DA 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specification 3 0 mm 1 0 mm 6 If the measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 7 Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the spec gt ified range 2 5 n lt 43481535090 6 2 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment 1 Slide out the
132. is energized The Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC has been blocked by a paper Tray 3 Vertical Transport section Loop Registration Reversing JAM Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the Registration Roller at Tray 3 take up Tray3 detection of paper remaining The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or mal function is reset The Tray3 Take up Sensor 116 is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor 117 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC117 PC has been blocked by a paper B Action Relevant electrical parts Tray3 Take up Sensor PC116 PC Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC Tray3 Take up Motor M122 PC Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Control Board PWB C2 PC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2
133. to Auto Setting Theinitial setting is A4 Procedure A3 B4 A4 NOTE The displays are different depending on the country 5 Incorrec t User Box No Entry Functions To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered Use To change the operation when the unregistered box number is entered Setting The default setting is Print Procedure Print Show Error Message Auto Create User Box 217 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N ke lt bizhub C250 2 ae i 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Tray Selection for RX Print Functions To select the Paper Tray to be fixed when printing the received text Use To fix the Paper tray when printing the received text Setting The default setting is Auto Procedure tems available for selection are different depending on the Paper feed option mounted Auto Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 7 Min Reduction for RX Print Functions To set the print magnification for received text Use To change the print magnification for received text Setting The default setting is 96 Procedure 96 87 to 96 x1 0 8 Print Separate Fax Pages Functions To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size Use To divide the origin
134. 1 0 Jul 2005 3 2 Firmware rewriting 5 The F W is updated using the Compact flash E 3 2 1 Updating method 5 N NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON 1 Open the Front Door and turn OFF the Main Power Switch 2 Remove the screw 1 and the Metal G Blanking Plate 2 2 Z E 5 N ZG 22 o gt d 2 je ML 5 4038F2C528DA 3 3 Insert the Compact Flash card 3 into the slot RIHFE Z MZ une lt R 2 of m 1 4038F2C529DA 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Firmware upgrade 4 Turn ON the Main Power Switch and Auxiliary Power Button 5 Control Panel shows up to four types of F W to be updated 6 Select the particular type of F W to be updated Select YES Standard Controller SCANNER PRINTER 4038F2C530DA F W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP Control Board PWB MFP 7 Press the START At this time the Start key starts blinking red 8 Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly Downloading Completed Check also the Check Sum value Check Sum XXXX shown on the Touch Panel The Start key blinks green 9 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch 10 Remove the Compact Flash card from the
135. 117 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Remove six Screws 4 and remove the Motor cover 5 bizhub C250 4038F2C156DA 7 Remove the Connector 6 and four Screws 7 and remove the Main Motor 8 5 s 7 g 4038F2C157DA 118 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 43 Fusing Drive Motor M4 Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the IR Right Cover 54 Remove the Harness from the Edge Cover 1 bizhub C250 4038F2C153DA 4 Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 2 7 g s 5 Remove the Screw 3 fixing the IR cable 4038F2C155DA 119 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Remove six Screws 4 and remove the Motor cover 5 bizhub C250 4038F2C156DA 7 Remove the Connector 6 and two Screws 7 and remove the Fusing Drive Motor 8 5 o 7 g 6 4038F2C158DA 120 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 44 Tray 2 Lift Up Motor M3 PC 2 0 4038F2C165DA 4038F2C166DA 6 3 45 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor M1 PC 2 0 4038F2C165DA 6 Other Pull out the Tray 2 Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover 63 If the optional paper feed cabinet is mounted remove it Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Reinforcement plate 2
136. 2 eerte niente ha tin ria 16 5 88 CD007 Hard Disk Error 3 nennen 16 5 89 0008 Hard Disk Error 4 nennen 16 5 90 CD009 Hard Disk Error 5 16 5 91 CDOOA Hard Disk Error 16 5 92 CDOOB Hard Disk Error 7 16 5 93 CDOOC Hard Disk Error 16 5 94 CDOOD Hard Disk Error 9 eeeeeeeeeeeeee enne tnnt ennt tnnt 16 5 95 CDOOE Hard Disk nennen 16 5 96 CDOOF Hard disk data transfer 16 5 97 CD010 Hard disk unformat 4 eese 16 5 98 CD011 Hard disk specifications 16 5 99 CD012 Encryption ASIC setting 16 5 100 CD013 Encryption ASIC mounting error 16 5 101 CE001 Abnormal message queue 16 5 102 CE002 Message and Method parameter failure 377 16 5 103 C E0093 Task eror i e ier nre ni t enne 377 16 5 104 CE004 Everit OTOT iee etre tetigere 377 16 5 105 CE005 Memory access error 377 16 5 106 06 Header access
137. 2 E Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions To set whether to receive printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy opera tion Use To restrict receiving printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy operation Accept Receives the Print data or Fax data and print Receive Only Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished Setting The default setting is Accept Procedure Accept Receive Only 8 6 7 Printer Setting A Local I F Timeout Functions To set the time until Timeout of communication input output Use To set longer time when Timeout occurs according to the network condition Setting Settings have to be done separately for IEEE1284 USB and Network Procedure Each default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 10 to 1000 B Parallel Functions To set the two way communication method for Parallel interface Use To change the two way communication method for Parallel interface Setting The default setting is ECP Procedure Compatible Nibble ECP 214 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode C IEEE 1284 USB Functions To set the interface to be used when mounting the Local kit Use To be used when using the Parallel interface Setting The default setting is USB Procedure IEEE1284 USB 8 6 8 Fax Setting e Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit
138. 25 Misteed display cen 25 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 25 G2 Sensotlayoutz eni i Rei cd Gt comida En e dir a E EO EE EDI Aa 26 7 3 Solution 7 3 1 Initial chie cle IEems ciis cec cree rn Ern ERE EO ORA ERR 27 7 3 2 LCT Paper Take Up section Vertical Transport section misfeed 28 8 29 81 Trouble code display zu eene rider rhe opp ren teen 29 g 8 2 Trouble code list nnne 30 5 8 3 Solution 8 3 1 C0001 LCT communication error 32 8 3 2 C0209 LCT Elevator Motor Failure een 32 8 3 3 C0210 ECT Lift Fam Ute citt tct cci rentrer 33 8 3 4 C0212 LCT Lock Release Failure seeenn 33 Hi 8 3 5 C0213 LCT Shift Gate Operation 34 8 3 6 C0214 ECT Shift Faille sis ssf aia iere e eiii 34 E 8 3 7 C0215 LCT Shift Motor Failure eee 35 D Q Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Product specification General 1 Product specification 8 A Type 9 Name Large Capacity Cabinet Type Front loading type LCC Installation Desk type Document Alignment Center B Paper type Type Plain paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m 16 to
139. 3 2 Stapling Unit 1 Holding both sides of the cover 1 lift the cover up and take it off 46841250100 FS 501 2 Remove two screws 2 disconnect the connector 3 and remove the Stapling Unit 4 from the moving cradle 5 SEN pl a 2 3 3 Job Separator JS 601 Option 7 s 1 Remove three claws 1 and remove the front cover of the Job Separator 2 4683F2C504DA 2 Remove three claws 3 and remove the rear cover of the Job Separator 4 4683F2C505DA FS 501 5 5 7 E s Other 4683F2C506DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Remove two screws 5 and the con nector 6 and remove the Job Sepa rator 7 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 3 Howto use the adjustment section e Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
140. 403 C 7 Ic PWB C1 LCT 4 PC2 LCT I O check Sensor check PJ5C1 LCT 5 ON PC 403 C 7 E 5 PC8 PC I O check Sensor check PWB Z PC PJ6Z PC 11 ON S 25 E 6 M1 LCT operation check PWB C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT 1 to 4 PC 403 C 8 a 7 Change PWB C1 LCT 8 Change PWB M 322 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 3 7 15 Jam Display Misfeed at Tray 3 Feed and Tray 3 vertical transport section PC 103 PC203 A Detection Timing Type Description Detection of misfeed at Tray 3 feed or Vertical Transport Section The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Take up Motor M122 PC has been energized The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor 8 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper Tray 3 Vertical Transport section Loop Registration Reversing JAM Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the Registration Roller at Tray 3 feed Detection of paper The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC is blocked when the Main left in Tray 3 Power Switch i
141. 5 48 C4553 Laser malfunction Yellow 16 5 49 C4554 Laser malfunction Black bizhub C250 Relevant Electrical Parts PH Unit PH Interface Board PWB D Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Change PH Unit Change PWB D Change PWB M 16 5 50 C4705 Image Output Time Out Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Select Service Mode State Confirma 1 tion gt gt Memory HDD Agj Memory Bus Check Check the connectors on PWB MFP for 2 proper connection and correct as neces sary 3 Change PWB MFP d Q e Q 367 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 51 C4761 Compression hardware timeout 16 5 52 C4765 Extraction hardware timeout 16 5 53 C4770 JBIGO Error 16 5 54 C4771 JBIG1 Error 16 5 55 C4772 JBIG2 Error 16 5 56 C4773 JBIG3 Error 16 5 57 C4780 Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure bizhub C250 16 5 58 C4781 Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure 16 5 59 C4782 Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure 16 5 60 C4783 Compressor 3 c
142. 6 Select the particular type of F W to be updated Select YES Firmware Update MFP CONTROLLER FAX BOARD CONTROLLERT bizhub C250 SCANNER 4038F2C530DA F W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP Control Board PWB MFP SCANNER Image Processing Board PWB C S PRINTER Mechanical Control Board PWB M g FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax Board 1 z 1 The Optional FAX kit is necessary for the above procedure 7 Press the START At this time the Start key starts blinking red 8 Check that the Touch Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly Downloading Completed Check also the Check Sum value Check Sum shown on the Touch Panel The Start key blinks green 9 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch 10 Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot 11 Turn ON the Main Power Switch and close the Front Door 12 Call the Service Mode to the screen 13 Select Firmware Version 14 Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated 49 bizhub C250 5 o 7 E 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 2 2 Action When Data Transfer Fails f NG appears on the Touch Panel indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful in which case the Start key lights up red take the following steps 1 Perform the data rewriting procedure again 2 Ifthe procedure is abnor
143. 8 C11B4 Stapler Folding Motor malfunctions 1 Wiring Relevant electrical parts Staple Drive Home Position Sensor P119 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 19 I O sensor check M7 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement D Q E Q PWB A FN CN6A FN 1 to 2 FS 603 B 3 62 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Stapler Crease Clock Sensor Stapler Section 8 Trouble code Relevant electrical parts Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI14 FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Power Switch is turned OFF and ON Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI14 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN4A FN 2 ON FS 603 G 6 M7 FN operation
144. 9 Authentication Setting Functions e To set the Authentication method to logon to SMTP server Use To change the Authentication method to logon to SMTP server Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure OFF POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication When selecting SMTP Authentication enter the User ID the password and the Domain name 209 bizhub C250 2 Pe i D lt bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Detail Setting POP Before SMTP Time Functions To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication Use To change the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication Setting 1 Touch Input Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10 Key Pad 2 E Mail RX POP E Mail RX Setting Functions To set whether to enable or disable the e mail reception setting Use To disable the e mail reception setting Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF lt POP Server Address gt Functions To set the POP Server Address Use To enter the POP Server Address Setting SMTP Server Address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 1 Touch Host Address 2 Select IP Addre
145. A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 40365403060 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean 3 Original Cover does not lie flat YES Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken 4 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 5 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 6 Mirror lens Mirror is dirty YES Clean 7 Lamp ens is dirty YES Clean and reflectors 8 Exposure Lamp is dirty YES Clean 9 Reflectors are dirty YES Clean Basic Screen The problem is eliminated when the NO another exposure level 10 Quality Density image is produced in the Manual Manual exposure setting 11 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy through the checks of steps up to 10 Change CCD Unit D Q E Q 390 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 5 A Typical Faulty Images 18 Image quality problem Scanner System blurred image blotchy image ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 40365403160 B Troubleshooting Procedure through the checks of
146. Authentication Volume Track is set Use To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device Setting The default setting is Reset Procedure Reset Do Not Reset When Original is set on ADF Functions To set whether to set the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to ADF Use To reset the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to ADF Setting The default setting is Do Not Reset Procedure Reset Do Not Reset 162 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode When NEXT JOB is selected Staple Setting Functions To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the Staple setting job started and Use the next job setting has become available Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When NEXT JOB is selected Original Set Bind Direction Functions To set whether to cancel the Original Set Bind direction when the job which original Use set bind direction is set started and the next job setting has become available Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When NEXT JOB is selected Reset Data After Job gt Functions To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting Fax when the scan Use ning is finished or Fax is transmitted making the next job setting
147. Belt 9 8 Disconnect two connectors 10 7 E s 458315251900 9 Remove the Stapler 11 ww 10 10 Remove three screws 12 and pull 13 out and remove the Saddle 13 458315252000 2 3 11 Finisher Tray 1 Remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover 8 Remove the Side Guide 9 Remove two screws 1 and discon 2 nect six connectors 2 vN 458315254600 11 2 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Pull out the Finisher Stopper Base 3 and disengage the front claw 5 and the rear claw 6 of the Finisher Stopper 4 FS 603 458318252200 5 Remove the Motor Harness 8 from two Harness Saddles 7 6 Disconnect three connectors 9 458318252300 Maintenance 7 Remove the C clip 10 and remove the spacer 11 and remove the Belt 13 from the Gear 12 8 Disconnect the connector 14 and remove the Harness 16 from the Wire Saddle 15 458318254700 9 Remove two screws 17 and remove the Finisher Tray 18 by slid ing it to the far side and lifting it 458318252500 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other 2 3 12 Paddle Section 1 Remove the Finisher Tray we 11 2 Place the Finisher Tray 1 as shown in the figure NOTE Becareful not to damage the Align ing Plate 2 FS 603 458315254800 3 Remove the Belt 3 and
148. Board PWB C failure MFP is faulty CA052 Controller hardware error Acontroller hardware error is detected in the net C 340 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank CA053 Controller start failure Acontroller start failure is detected in the control ler interface CB001 FAX Board Error 1 t See FK 502 Service Manual CB002 FAX Board Error 2 CB003 FAX Board Error 3 CB051 FAX Board mount failure 1 CB052 FAX Board mount failure 2 CB110 FAX Driver Error Instance Gen eration Error or Observer Regis tration Error CB111 FAX Driver Error Configuration Space Initialization NG CB112 FAX Driver Error Semaphore Acquisition Release Error CB113 FAX Driver Error Sequence Error among Main Body Tasks CB114 FAX Driver Error Message Queue Control Error CB115 FAX Driver Error Main Body Sequence Error among FAX C Boards CB116 FAX Driver Error FAX Board Nonresponse Nonresponse after Initialization CB117 FAX Driver Error ACK Waiting Timeout Error CB118 FAX Driver Error Receiving Undefined Frame CB119 FAX Driver Error DMA Transfer Error CB120 JC Soft Error CB122 Device Error GA LOCAL SRAM CB123 Device Error DRAM CB125 Device Error GA CB126 Timeout Error due to Nonre sponse from DC during Suspen sion Process bizhub C250
149. C Hole a be 403816300700 4 r 098 53006c0 If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of D 1 E 4 4 L L 4036fs3008c0 183 bizhub C250 7 L 7 E n El E lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Gradation Adjustment Functions To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner Use Color reproduction performance becomes poor The IU has been replaced The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced The Adj Values of Max and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen repre sent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output Conv Value shows the difference from the ideal image density The closer the Conv Value to 0 the more ideal the image bizhub C250 Printer Gradation It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts Printer Resolution It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts Copy It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts Adjustment Max 0
150. C 59 Control Panel Local Disk D Removable Disk F Standard Controller Compact Disc E 5 object s gl My Computer 4036152623 0 4 Click Start gt Program Accessories Command Prompt to open the mand Prompt Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory Specify the Drive of Compact flash which was recognized through the procedure 3 and execute the mkcf bat Input the C C250 card_work gt mkcf f Drive number in the below figure and push the Enter D Command Prompt Microsoft Windows 2666 Version 5 00 2195 lt C Copyright 1985 2668 Microsoft Corp C gt cd 25 5 s 7 E C C25 gt cd card vork C C25 card_work gt mkcf f n 4038F2E564DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Firmware upgrade 7 Once the mkcf bat is executed data writing into the Compact flash is started 8 Upon completion of writing CHECKSUM is executed If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched VERIFY OK appears Standard Controller Verify Check CHECK SUM VERIFY OK Finisht C C25 card_work gt 4038F2E565DA 9 Remove the Compact flash from PC s 7 E s NOTE When removing the Compact flash be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method 3 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver
151. Centering 149 bizhub C250 9 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Administrator System Expert ADF Adjust Original Stop Setting Setting Adjustment ment Position gt 173 ts 173 Centering Auto Adjustment Auto Adj of Stop Position List Counter Management Job Settings List List Paper Size Type Counter Standard Original Glass Size Original Size Setting Detect Foolscap Size Setting Administra Administra tor Machine tor Registra Setting tion gt 191 Input Machine Address One Touch scan Address Book E Mail Registration gt 191 H FTP H Group H SMB H Program User Subject Text for E mail Subject Text H Fax 1 Book Adar Dial 1 H Group 1 H E Mail 1 H Program 1 J User Box 1 Subject Text Vel d for E mail 1 Sublect 1 150 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Administrator One Touch User Box Publi
152. Check Item Result Action Image Check A white line or colored line in sub YES Clean the Comb Electrode by 1 scan direction moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever Image Transfer oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 2 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES dirty belt with a soft cloth 3 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged Cleaning Blade is not effective in YES Cleaning blade 4 removing toner completely Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Image Transfer 5 Transfer Roller scratched Roller Unit Unit 6 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter 2 path 3 7 Image Transfer Paper Separator Fin YES Clean or change E gers are damaged or dirty 5 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty YES Clean 5 8 E or damaged Change Fusing Unit 9 Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are YES Clean dirty 10 The problem has been eliminated NO Change MFP Control Board through the checks of steps up to 9 414 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 27 Printer 4 Color white lines in main scan direction white bands in main scan direction colored lines in main scan direction and colored bands in main scan direction A Typical Faulty Image
153. Control Board has been replaced However this registration is not necessary if the EEP ROM used on an old board has been reinstalled to a new board 1 Setthe bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control Board as shown on the Left figure ON n 458315351600 2 5 n lt 2 Press SW1002 on the Punch Control Board to select the number of punch holes Each time SW1002 is pressed the following display changes in the descending order shown below Number of punch holes xs ie in 2 Punch Unit J1 ON OFF OFF 2 3 Punch Unit K1 ON ON OFF 4 Punch Unit G1 OFF ON OFF 4 Punch Unit H1 OFF OFF ON 3 Press SW1003 on the Punch Control Board twice The number of punch holes will be registered in the Punch Control Board The pressing of SW1003 changes the steady lighting of the LED to flickering and the pressing of SW1003 again changes the flickering of the LED to steady lighting This com pletes the registration 4 Setall bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF 46 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Board switch 6 2 3 Procedure after replacing the EEP ROM IC1002 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit ON 2 Setthe bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1001 on the Punch Control P L L Board as shown on the Left figure 1234 3 Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Control Board simultaneously Th
154. E 10 4 5 SCAN ATO sirinata ente edere rre ee nni 10 4 6 Printer Resist LOOP nnne niente 10 4 7 Color Registration Adjustment essseeneenenn 10 4 8 Fusing Loop Size niente niit tnrba 10 4 9 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment 10 4 10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment sse E 10 5 Firmware VOrSiON wcities retten ttt er tne t nri 10 6 Imaging Process Adjustment sssssseseeeeeneneeneee nennen bizhub C250 5 o 7 E s Adjustment Setting Troubleshooting 5 lt vi Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 6 1 Gradation Adjust 10 6 2 DiMax amp 10 6 3 Background Voltage Margin esses 246 10 6 4 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment sese 246 10 6 5 StabllizOr2 te ee ERE ena Gnd er ECKE DX DR E EORR 247 10 6 6 Thick Paper Density Adjustment esee 248 10 6 7 TCR Toner Supply cr eo eer e eL n e D E exe 248 10 6 8 Monochrome Density Adjustment 249 10 6 9 Dev Blas Choice rer reet tr el tnr irren nci rer Rata 249 10 7 GS Remote BIO Laien 250 10 771 iiie ot pni e E pre ed errat eei era E ERR EC EAR ERAS 250 10 7 2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care 250 10 7 3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care 252 10 7 4 Setup confirmation
155. Finisher Entrance D Crease Clock 0 259825 sw 0 Punch Dust Paddle Home Paper D Self Prime 0 Punch Timing uon 0 Paper Surface O Front Door B BEER eas Front Align 0 0 Upper Cover 0 PunchtHome Back Align n0 9 Front Door SW 0 bdPEbcuone Alignment Tray 0 Lift Clock 0 Gers s deien 0 PPSASpore Door 0 2 Ug Belt 0 Lift Middle 0 Joint SV E Crease Position Slide Home Punch Depthi 0 75 Crease Tray Stapler Home O Punch Depth2 0 Crease Home 0 Staple Punch Depth3 0 5 Rotter Home B nhect O Punch Depth4 0 3 4583F3E524DA nl lt A Sensor monitor 4 FS 603 PK 501 Operation characteristics Symbol Panel display Part Signal name Panel display 1 0 PI1 FN Entrance Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI2 FN Paddle Home Paddle Home Position Sensor HP PI3 FN Bundle Roller Home Swing Guide Home Position Sensor HP PI4 FN Front Align Front Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI5 FN Back Align Rear Aligning Plate Home Position HP Sensor PI6 FN Alignment Tray Finisher Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI7 FN Home Exit Belt Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI10 FN Crease Position Folding Position Sensor Paper Paper not present present 24 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Sensor check Operation characte
156. Home Position Sensor PI5 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position The Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Rear Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position C11A4 Booklet Exit Motor malfunctions The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ini tial operation The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from its home position during an ordinary operation The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an initial operation The Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Exit Belt has started moving from a position not the home position during an ordinary operation C11B1 Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions The Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN is not unblocked even
157. Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 2 How to identify problematic part This chapter is divided into two parts Initial Check Items and Troubleshooting Proce dure a Particular Image Quality Problem When an image quality problem occurs first go through the Initial Check Items and if the cause is yet to be identified go to Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem 18 2 1 Initial Check Items A Initial Check Items 1 Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between Scanner and memory and between memory and printer Action Result Next Step Enter the Service Mode select State Confirmation gt Memory OK Initial Check Items 2 HDD Adj Memory Bus Check and select and carry out NG 372 367 gt and checks action as instructed B Initial Check Items 2 Letthe machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attrib utable to the Scanner or printer system Document Scan lt gt CCD Sensor Board PWB A Scanner system Image Processing Board PWB C Printer MFP Control Board PWB MFP system PH Interface Board Test Print PWB D 59 4038F4C508DA Evaluation Procedure Image Action Result Cause Next Step Problem From Service Mode select Test Mode gt YES Printer Initial Check Items 3 Lines Halftone Pattern
158. M 320 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 Jam Display 15 3 5 Misfeed at Manual Bypass feed section A Detection Timing N m Description 2 Detection ot The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor 5 misfeed at Manual PC1 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Bypass Paper Feed Bypass feed i Clutch CL5 has been energized section Manual Bypass Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at feed section front of the Registration Roller at Bypass feed Loop Registration Reversing JAM B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Registration Roller Sensor 1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Bypass Paper Feed Clutch CL5 WIRING DIAGRAM Pann Control Signal 1 Initial check items 2 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C 3 3 CL5 operation check PWB M CNTRY1 2 ON C 7 to 8 4 Change PWB M d Q e Q 321 bizhub C250 15 Jam Display 15 3 6 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Misfeed at LCT feed and LCT vertical transport section PC 403 A Detection Timing Type Description Detection of misfeed at LCT feed section The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Take up Sensor PC1 LCT or Vertical Transport Sensor
159. Main Color bands in Main Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean Original Glass Original Glass is dirty Wipe the surface clean with a 3 YES soft cloth Machine Scan The adjustment value for Image Readjust Area Image Position Leading Edge falls within 4 Position Top the specified range NO Edge Service Mode 5 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy through the checks of steps up to 4 Change CCD Unit 388 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 3 Scanner System color spots A Typical Faulty Images 18 Image quality problem LE I CE t 403616402900 B Troubleshooting Procedure through the checks of steps up to 3 Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean 3 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 4 The problem has been eliminated NO Scanner Assy Change CCD Unit 389 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 4 Scanner System fog
160. ON or OFF or blink to indicate a specific condition during Test Mode operations 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Test mode 7 Test mode 7 1 Test mode setting procedure Setting Procedure 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit 2 Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF position as necessary See Table below 3 Turn ON the Main Power Switch of the main unit 4 This sets the Finisher into the corresponding Test Mode operation FS 501 Resetting Procedure Flip all keys of the DIP switch to their respective initial positions Then turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit wait for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch 7 2 Test mode operations DIP Switch S3 LED Test mode operation 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1st Tray exit ON e Elevator Tray exit ON e O Finisher Tray exit ON ON e e Shifting operation ON ON e e Aligning Plate operation ON ON e e Stapling Unit CD movement ON ON e e e Exit Roller Rolls spacing Hi Storage Roller Rolls spacing ON ON e O O e Elevator Tray operation ON ON e e z Sensor test ON ON ON Indicates sensor state 5 Blinking OFF 3 lt Whenever the Control Board PWB A FN is to be replaced take note of the initial positions of all keys of the DIP switch After the repla
161. Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door Q D Q 25 403 D Q E Q 7 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 2 Sensor layout 5 4061F4C803DA 26 1 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC 3 Paper Take up Motor PC1 LCT 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Jam Display 7 3 Solution 7 3 1 Initial check items a When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items a Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures 15 a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if necessary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator worn Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper SELAR NECESAN Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator d Q e Q 27 403 D
162. PC1 LCT has been blocked by a paper The Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC2 LCT has been blocked by a paper B Action Relevant electrical parts Paper Take up Motor PC1 LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC Take up Motor M1 LCT Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Control Board PWB C1 LCT Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC1 sensor check 3 PC1 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT 2 ON PC 403 C 7 4 PC2 LCT I O sensor check PWB C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT 5 ON PC 403 C 7 5 PC8 PC sensor check PWB Z PC PJ6Z PC 11 ON C250 S 25 6 M1 LCT operation check PWB C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT 1 to 4 PC 403 C 8 7 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 PWB M replacement 28 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 Trouble code 8 1 Trouble code display PC 403 The main unit s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel Malfunction detected Please call Technical Representative TEL 1234567890 FAX 1234567890 0209 4061F4E704DA d Q Q 29
163. PC10 FN does not go HIGH malfunctions even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 FN has been energized to start returning the Elevator Tray to its home position The Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN does not go LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M8 FN has been energized to start moving the Elevator Tray for job offset C1183 Elevator Motor drive The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN is not malfunctions activated even after the lapse of a given period of time after M7 FN has been energized to start raising the Elevator Tray The Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch S2 FN or Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch S3 FN is actuated after M7 FN has been energized C1190 Aligning Motor drive The CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC9 FN does not go malfunction LOW even after the lapse of a given period of time after M5 FN has been energized to return the Aligning Plate to its home position C11A1 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC13 FN does not go Motor drive malfunction HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M13 FN has been energized to start spacing pressure sequence C11A2 Storage Roller Rolls The Storage Roller Home Position Sensor PC12 FN does not Spacing Motor drive go HIGH even after the lapse of a given period of time after M12 malfunction FN has been energized to start spacing pressure sequence C11BO St
164. PC2 LCT even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Take up Motor M1 LCT has been energized Detection of misfeed at LCT vertical transport section The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor 8 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT The Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper LCT Vertical Transport section Loop Registration Reversing JAM Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the Registration Roller at LCT feed Detection of paper left in LCT The Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Take up Sensor PC1 LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC Take up Motor M1 LCT Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Control Board PWB C1 LCT Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Ste Action i i Control Signal Location Electri cal Component 1 Initial check items 2 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C 3 PWB C1 LCT 3 PC1 LCT check Sensor check PJ5C1 LCT 2 ON PC
165. Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 7 3 2 A Detection timing Transport section misfeed Type Description Transport section signal from the main unit misfeed detection The Entrance Sensor PI1 FN does not detect paper even after the lapse of approx 1 5 sec after the Entrance Sensor PI1 FN has received the paper exit Paper is not removed from the Entrance Sensor PI1 FN even after the lapse of approx 2 sec after the Entrance Sensor PI1 FN has detected paper edge B Action Relevant electrical parts Entrance Sensor PI1 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16A FN 11 ON FS 603 B 8 3 PWB A FN replacement 53 FS 603 E Q e Q FS 603 D Q E Q 7 Jam Display 7 3 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Horizontal Transport s
166. Pe i N UO lt 13 5 Sensor check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Sensor check 5 1 Check procedure To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition PC 103 PC 203 Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual 2 Touch the State Confirmation key 3 Touch the Sensor Check key 5 2 Sensor check list 5 2 1 Sensor check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit Sensor Check Sensors 1 Trayi Upper Limit 0 Hear Empty 0 Paper Passage Deuice Vertical Registration Detection D Tray3 Transport 0 Bovier 0 Paper Empty 0 0 Take Up D Exit 0 Hear Empty 9 Paper Empty 0 Upper Limit 0 Detect o Hear Enpty 0 Manual R beeace OP 0 Tray2 fronapert SdA seRsor 2 0 PC Drive Detect 2 Betection 0 Take Up 0 Paper Empty 0 Kain sensor S 0 Paper Empty Upper Limit 0 Sab Sensor E 0 7 Mear Empty 0 Tray 4 Hain sensor 0 vertical g Bevice o Black BC Drive g rarnesport Detection Sub Sensor 5 Take Up O Paper Empty 0 E 4061F3E806DA E E lt
167. Seltllligus 8 5 5 Scanner 8 5 6 Print r Setting Dp n EU eR EE 8 6 Administrator Setting tremere eher cin eta n EC ER a 8 6 1 SYSIOM SOUMING 8 6 2 Administrator Machine Setting 8 6 3 One Touch Registration 8 6 4 User Authentication Account Track essere 8 6 5 Network Seting s 8 6 6 Gopier Seltlllig us coin cepa 8 8 6 7 Printer 5 8 6 8 Fax Setting nennen nnne 5 8 6 9 System 8 6 10 Security cicer cento e 9 Adjustment item cghcacssasaateevtceksdaayesssecasd shsevisssacnesatcnasebacebusesasceases 104 Service d EHE e E Po reo EE EDGE FRE EFE DHL BERE EXER ETE 10 1 Service Mode function setting procedure Adjustment Setting 10 2 Service Mode function tree eese eene nnne 10 3 Date Time Input mode isisisi enne ener nennen 10 3 1 Date amp Time Setting mode 10 4 Machine rrt nnper tno tht nbi otros 10 4 1 FUSING Temperature nione rrr inten rir ttes ES 2 10 4 2 Fusing Transport Speed E 10 4 3 Org Size Detecting Sensor Adj E 10 4 4 Printer Area hhe
168. Snap off the C clip 5 and remove the spring 6 and the guide plate 7 Remove the Bypass Paper Separa tion Roller Assy 8 5 Toreinstall reverse the order of removal 6 Select Service Mode Counter Life and clear the count of Manual Tray NOTE Replace the Bypass Tray Feed Roller and the Bypass Separation Roller Assy at the same time 3 5 5 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller 4038F2C011DA 4038F2C012DB 20 1 Slide out the Tray 2 2 Open the Vertical transport door 3 Remove two Claws 1 and remove the Vertical transport door 2 4 Remove two Screws 3 and remove the Jam processing cover 4 NOTE Make sure the position of the Mylar when installing the Jam processing cover Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C013DA 4038F2C508DA 4038F2C559DA 3 Periodical check 5 Remove two Screws 5 and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy 6 6 Remove two C rings 7 and the Shaft 8 and remove the Separation Roller fixing plate Assy 9 NOTE Use not to miss the Spring 10 7 Remove the C ring 11 and Guide 12 and remove the Tray 2 Separa tion Roller Assy 13 21 bizhub C250 5 o 7 bizhub C250 Maintenance 3 Periodical check 3 5 6 Replacing the Tray 2 Feed Roller 4038F2C014DA
169. Solution eo 7 3 1 Initial check items S When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action 9 Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures 15 a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if necessary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator worn Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator d Q e Q 21 103 203 D Q E Q 7 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 2 Tray3 Paper Take Up section Vertical Transport section misfeed 103 203 A Detection timing Type Description Tray3 Paper Take Up section Vertical transport section misfeed detection The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Take up Motor M122 PC
170. Support Operation Procedure 2 Set ON or OFF for each item 4 Printer Information Functions To set the Printer information Use To set the Printer information Setting 1 Touch Printer Information Procedure 2 Enter the Printer Name Printer Location and Printer Information on the on screen keyboard 3 Touch Print URI to check the Printer URI information D FTP Setting 1 Proxy Server Address Functions To set the Proxy server address Use To enter the Proxy server address Setting P address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 1 Touch Host Address 2 Select IP Address Input to enter the IP Address 3 Select Host Name Input to enter the Host name 2 Proxy Port Number Functions To set the Proxy server port number Use To enter the Proxy server port number Setting Press the Clear key Procedure Enter the Proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Key Pad 3 Port No Functions To set the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server Use To enter the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server Setting 1 Touch Input Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the Proxy Server Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Kay Pad 203 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt
171. Unit 5 B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Align the CCD Unit with the center of the graduations as illustrated on the left and then tighten the four screws 4038F2C071DA A cv gt Reinstall the Original Glass Turn ON the Main Power Switch Close the Front Door Carry out the Cross Direction Adjustment If the specifications are not met loosen the CCD Unit mounting screws and move the CCD Unit in the sub scan direction as neces sary 240 NOTE Hold the CCD Unit by hand when moving it NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens results When CCD unit is replaced Scan Calibration and Line Mag Setting under Sys tem 2 available in Service Mode should be OFF 72 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 18 Image Processing Board PWB C 1 Remove the Upper Rear Cover and IR Right Cover 57 54 Remove the CCD Unit Cover Refer to the step1 to 2 on page 135 Remove four Screws 1 and remove the IR Frame Protective Cover 2 bizhub C250 wo RN 4037F2C034DA 4 Remove three Screws 3 and remove the Original Size Detecting Sensor Assy 4 o 7 g s 4037F2C035DA 5 Remove six Screws 5 and remove the Board cover 6 4037F2C036DB 73 bizhub C250 Maintenance Other 4037F2C037DA 4038F2C
172. Vdc Around 400 V Vg Around 500 V Step Section Check Item Result Action State Confirma Check data for Vg and Vb NO Go to next step tion gt Table Color Vdc Around 400 V 1 Number Vg Around 500 V D Max Density Service Mode 2 State Confirma TCR data NO Go to next step tion gt Level His IDC output value is around 4 3 V NO Clean IDC Sensor tory1 Check Transfer Belt for dam Service Mode age Level History data Low TCR and low Vg and YES Go to step 8 check results Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc YES Goto step 11 6 TCR falling within specified range YES Go to step 8 and low Vg and 7 TCR falling within specified range YES Go to step 11 and high Vg and Vdc 8 Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean 9 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES with cleaning jig dirty 10 TCR Sensor win The color TCR Sensor window is YES Clean dow dirty Image Process The problem is eliminated after NO Go to next step Adjustment gt Background Voltage Margin has 11 Background Volt been adjusted age Margin Service Mode Image Process Conv Value falls within the speci YES Goto step 15 Adjustment fied range as checked through Gra 12 Gradation dation Adjust Adjust Max 0 100 Service Mode Highlight 0 60 Image Process The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step 13 Adjustment throug
173. a given period of time during a folding operation C11C1 Punch Control Board malfunctions No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during initial communications No response is received to a request made by the Finisher within a given period of time during ordinary communications There is no match in the checksum values of the backup data as checked twice The 24 V power source of the Punch Unit is OFF when an oper ation request is made from the Finisher C11C2 Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions The Side Registration Home Sensor 2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from its home posi tion The Side Registration Home Sensor PI2P PK is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Punch Side Registration Unit has started moving from a position not the home position C11C3 Punch Motor malfunctions The home position is not detected within a given period of time after the Punch Motor has been rotated a half turn An encoder clock input is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time during operation of the Punch Motor The setting value calculated during the initial operation falls out side the threshold value range C11C5 Punch Sensor malfunctions The light receiving voltage is 2 5 V or less when the illu
174. and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated bizhub C250 Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out N CAUTION Tounplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job proce dures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Dev
175. are as follows Procedure Copy 2 Exittray 2 Print 2 Exit tray 2 Fax 3 Exit tray 3 Reports 3 Exit tray 3 C Date Time Setting Functions To set the date time and the time zone to start the clock Use To change settings concerning the date time This setting should be carried out for set up Setting For time zone set the time difference with the world standard time Procedure Setting range for the time zone 12 00 to 12 00 by 30 minutes D Daylight Saving Time Setting 2 5 n lt Functions To set whether to set the daylight saving time To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time Use To set the daylight saving time Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When setting to ON set the time difference to move up 60 min 1 to 150 E Weekly Timer Setting 1 Weekly Timer ON OFF Setting Functions To set whether to use or not to use the Weekly Timer Use To set the Weekly Timer Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 174 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 2 Time Setting Functions 2 0 set the time to turn ON OFF the Weekly Timer for each day of the week se a Setting 1 Touch the key of the day to be set 2 Procedure 2 Using the 10 Key Pad input the ON time an
176. by the corresponding number in the parentheses 5 lt o 9 z N C jejer 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE Ensure appropriate security for Service mode function setting procedures They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs bizhub C250 Procedure Press the Utility Counter key Touch Details on Meter Count display Press the following keys in this order Stop 30205 Stop 05 1 NOTES When selecting CE Authentication under Enhanced Security available from Ser vice Mode authentication by CE password is necessary Enter the 8 digits CE password and touch END The initial setting for CE password is 92729272 If a wrong CE password is entered re enter the right password The machine will not enter Service Mode unless the CE password is entered correctly To return to the Basic screen turn OFF the Sub Power Switch and turn it ON again The service code entered is displayed as 4 The Service Mode menu will appear Service Mode maging Process ment D E N ES ida Ust i E as lt 4037F3E502DA NOTE Be sure to c
177. cal Component Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary M14 operation check PWB M CNLP 9 ON PWB M CNLP 11 LOCK 4 PWB M 16 5 66 C5357 Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor 1 M12 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary M12 operation check PWB M CNDM2 15 ON PWB M CNDM2 16 LOCK 4 Change PWB M um 16 5 67 5358 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 2 M9 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action D i Q E Q Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary 9 operation check PWB M CNLP 15 ON PWB M CNLP 16 LOCK 4 Change PWB M C 9 370 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 68 C6102 Drive Home Sensor m
178. characters Procedure Available number to be registered as Suffix is up to 64 characters 8 6 6 Copier Setting A Auto Zoom Platen Functions To set whether to function the Auto Zoom when the Tray is selected with document set on the Original Glass excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode Use To function the Auto Zoom when the Feed Tray is selected Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 213 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n o lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 B Auto Zoom ADF Functions To set whether to function the Auto Zoom when the Feed Tray is selected with docu ment set on the ADF excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode Use To function the Auto Zoom when the Tray is selected Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF C Select Tray when APS OFF Functions To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled Use To set the Tray Tray 1 for the default setting when cancelling APS Setting The default setting is Tray Before APS ON Procedure Tray Before APS ON Default Tray D Select Tray for Insert Sheet Functions U To select the initial value for the Tray for the Cover sheet paper se Setting Procedure The default setting is Tray
179. check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON een iE 5 PWB A FN replacement 3 Home Position Sensor Relevant electrical parts Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI11 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16A FN 6 ON FS 603 B 8 4 M7 FN operation check when the Main PWB A FN CN6A FN 1 to 2 FS 603 B 3 5 PWB A FN replacement 63 FS 603 d pa e Q FS 603 D i Q E Q 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Stapler Crease Clock Sensor Saddle Section Relevant electrical parts Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor 114 Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Staple Folding Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 Pl14 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN9A FN
180. condition Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CF001 CT_SingleList Table Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF002 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF003 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF004 Queue Full Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF011 ArrayLink Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF012 FAT Link Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF013 File Size Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF021 setDelayMessage Table MFP Control Board C OverFlow CF022 procSetBootParamTcpipAd Control Board C dress injustice CF023 MsgQue OverFlow MFP Control Board CF031 getUobPageToIPE page Control Board C number injustice CF032 getJobHDDPageToIPE Control Board C number injustice CF033 setDivTbl limitation over MFP Control Board C CF034 HDDQUEUE Over Flow Control Board C CF041 getAPPPtrFromAPPID MFP Control Board C abnormal CF042 getAPPIndexFromAPPID MFP Control Board C abnormal CF051 CC_InputPageEntry operator Control Board C page injustice CF061 IdeCommand Set status MFP Control Board C Abnormal CF062 IdeCommand Set parameter MFP Control Board C Abnormal CF091 PCI ASIC1 ERROR MFP Control Board C CF092 PCI ASIC2 ERROR Control Board CF093 PCI ASIC
181. copy sample is less than one on color chart increase the setting Instructions If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart decrease the setting Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Scanner Adjustment Horizon tal Adjustment 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check the C width on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make another copy 8 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met 187 bizhub C250 2 Pe i n D lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Vertical Adjustment Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section N S Use The Scanner Assy has been replaced E The Scanner Motor has been replaced X The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced Adjustment Measure D width on the color chart and on Specification the sample copy and adjust the gap to be P1 P1 within the following specification lt gt Specifications D D x 1 5 mm Setting Range 0 990 to 1 010 in 0 001 increments 4038F3C518DA A
182. ctiOn 414 5 18 3 27 Printer 4 Color white lines in main scan direction white bands in main scan direction colored lines in main scan direction and colored bands in main cupi M M 415 18 3 28 Printer 4 Color uneven density in sub scan direction 416 18 8 29 Printer 4 Color uneven density in main scan direction 417 Hi 18 8 30 Printer 4 Color low image density eene 418 18 3 31 Printer 4 Color poor color 419 E 18 8 32 Printer 4 Color incorrect color image registration 420 E 18 3 33 Printer 4 Color void areas white 5 421 lt 18 8 34 Printer 4 Color colored 422 18 3 35 Printer 4 Color poor fusing performance 423 18 3 36 Printer 4 Color brush effect blurred 424 H 18 8 37 Printer 4 Color back marking essen 425 F 18 3 38 Printer 4 Color uneven image 426 Appendix 19 Parts layout drawing thin er en leno tcn ek cha dn 427 19 1 Malim Bib
183. data connection for capture 226 Transfer complete ftp 58 bytes received in 0 005 580888 8080Kbytes sec ftp bi 4037F3E541DA 272 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode Setting 8 Using the get command transfer the data for capture to PC Procedure Select Command Prompt ftp ftp gt 1s 200 PORT command successful 15 Opening ASCII mode data connection for capture cpt cpt cpt cpt cpt 226 Transfer complete 56 bytes received in 8 880Seconds 508880 080Kbutes sec bizhub C250 set to I c7i6n cpt command successful 15 Opening BINARY mode data connection for capture 226 Transfer complete ftp 858351 bytes received 38Seconds 2288 94Kbytes sec i3 4037F3E542DA 9 Finish the command prompt NOTE When the data capture is set to ON all print job data will be stored in the hard disk After receiving capture data select Administrator Setting Security Set ting Security Detail and select Restrict for Print Data Capture in order to delete the job data stored in the hard disk i 7 7 L N El E lt 273 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 10 Counter The Counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the Technical Representa tive to check or set as necessary 10 10 1 Procedure 1 Touch Counter to show the Counter menu 2 Se
184. deformed or worn Clean or change the paper path Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or Clean or change the defective Paper Separa worn tor Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or change the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct A Set as necessary position to accommodate paper y Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation Correct or change the defective actuator d Q e Q 317 15 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 3 2 Misfeed at Tray 1 feed section e A Detection Timing Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor X misfeed at Tray 1 PC1 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 1 Paper Feed feed section Clutch CL2 has been energized Tray 1 Feed Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at section front of the Registration Roller at Tray 1 feed Loop Registration Reversing JAM B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch CL2 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Registration Roller Sensor PC1 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component 1 Initial check items Step Action Control Signal 2 PC1I O check Sensor check PWB M CN
185. digits Select ADF NOTE Do not teach this procedure to others unless it is absolutely necessary Service Made ADF Adjustment Firmware stration version Regi Loop ndi Machine 4582F3E513DA 6 2 Type of the Service Mode The ADF in the Service Mode has 7 items as follows Original Stop Position Adjust Registration Loop Adj Adjust Auto Stop Position Adjustment Adjust Paper Passage Test Sensor Check Test Original Tray Width Adjust Sensor Auto Adjust Adjust 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Service Test Mode 6 3 ADF Paper Passage The Paper Passage motion of the Automatic Document Feeder is checked Procedure Set the mode to the Service Mode Touch the ADF key Touch the Paper Passage key Select the Paper Passage Mode to be tested from 1 Sided No Detect 1 Sided Mixed Org and 2 Sided Set the Original in the Take up Tray The Start key color changes from orange to green 6 Press the Start key The operation starts NOTE After starting the operation by pressing the Start key if the Start key is pressed during the operation the operation will be suspended Then if the Start key is pressed again during the suspension the operation will be resumed If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation the test will be forced to end If there is no Origina
186. erase amount of the paper Use To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper Setting The default setting is 4 mm Procedure 4 mm 5 7 3 Finisher Adjustment ts For details of adjustment method see FS 603 Service Manual Center Staple Position 2 ae i 5 n lt Functions To adjust the positions of center staple for the Finisher Use Use when the center staple positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Staple function Adjustment Center staple position Specification The adjustment range is 7 0 mm to 7 0 mm in 1 mm increments Half Fold Position Functions To adjust the positions of folding for the Finisher Use Use when the center folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Fold function Adjustment Fold position Specification The adjustment range is 7 0 mm to 47 0 mm in 1 mm increments 180 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 4 Density Adjustment Thick Paper Image Density Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Functions To fine adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans parencies Use To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Adjustment Lighter 5
187. has been replaced The Adj Values of Max and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen repre sent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output Conv Value shows the difference from the ideal image density The closer the Conv Value to 0 the more ideal the image Gradation Mode It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts Resolution Mode It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts High Compression Mode It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts Adjustment Max 0x 100 Specification Highlight 0 x 60 Setting Touch Gradation Adjust Procedure Select the appropriate mode for the gradation adjustment Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover Press the Start key The machine will then start scanning the test pattern Touch OK and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice a total of three times Touch Gradation Adjust to display the Adj Values and Conv Values of each color C M Y and K for Max and Highlight 9 Use the following procedures to check the Conv Value Colo Max 0 100 and Highlight 0 60 It completes the adjustment proced
188. head unit should not be opened under any circumstances t 222 ERES F B D y PICS mE m T S Laser Aperture of 0 the Print Head Unit Oc c 4038P0C501DA S 13 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS U S A Canada CDRH Regulation This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan dard according to the Food Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990 Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration of the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation The label shown on page S 16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW Wavelength 775 800 nm Areas CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW Wavelength 775 800 nm Denmark ADVARSEL Usynlig laser
189. machine and the modem with a modem cable Connect the modem and the wall jack with a modular cable For connecting the modular cable see the manual for the modem Clearing the RAM 1 Select Service Mode CS Remove Care and touch Detail Setting 2 2 Touch RAM Clear 3 Select Set and touch END gt 259 Selecting the CS Remote Care function 3 Select Service Mode CS Remove Care System Selection and touch Modem Inputting the ID Code 4 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care ID Code and touch ID Code 2 Input the seven digits ID of the service person and touch ID Code again gt 258 Setting the date and time for Remote Care 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote and touch Detail Setting 5 2 Touch Date amp Time Setting 3 Input the date time and the time zone using the 10 Key Pad and touch Set gt 259 Setting the Center ID 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care and touch Detail Setting 2 Touch Machine Setting Center ID and input the Center ID five digits gt 259 250 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode Step Procedure Setting the Device ID 7 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care and touch Detail Setting 2 Touch Machine Setting Device ID and input Device ID nine digits gt 259 Setting the telephone number of the
190. more than 10 seconds after The change of the setting becomes valid when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON after the appropriate change has been made on the panel A Note on returning the setting from Controller 1 to Controller 0 Selecting Controller 0 will initialize the following settings made while Controller 1 was selected Reset the following items as necessary when using the Internal Standard Con troller Control Panel on the machine Setting items included in Network Setting available from Administrator Setting Except Status Notification Setting and Prefix Suffix Setting available from the follow ing setting Administrator Setting Network Setting Detail Setting Administrator Setting User Authentication Account Track General Settings External Server Administrator Setting System Connection IS OpenAPI Setting PageScope Web Connection SSL TLS 2 Pe i N lt 13 4 Checking the Image Controller Setting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Standard Controller Blank Page 2 5 n lt 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Troubleshooting 5 Checking the system configuration 5 Checking the system configuration When a malfunction occurs let the printer print a Configuration Page to check for system configuration 6 Status codes
191. n UO lt 6 Board switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 1 2 Adjustment of the center stapling position When a stapling position is adjusted adjust the stapling position to the folding position Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the stapling position must be changed for some reason NOTE Depending on the type of paper both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate In this case make adjustment independently from the Finisher In this independent adjustment from the Finisher set the adjustment value of Center Stapling Position and Folding Position in the service mode to on the main unit FS 603 1 Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure 458315351200 2 Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Fin direction lt a direction isher Control Board for the required times to adjust the stapling position H h One pressing of the switch moves the stapling position by approx 0 14 mm Press PSW1 to move the stapling position in the direction Press PSW2 to move the stapling position in the direction Press PSW1 and PSW2 simulta neously to clear the present set adjust 455515352300 ment value 2 5 N lt 3 After setting the adjustment value of the stapling position set all bits of SW1 on the Fin ish
192. of addresses to transmit the Fax data Use simultaneously Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed group to check edit or delete the setting Atleast one address of the group must be registered in order to register the group 3 Program Functions To register or change the Fax Program Use Setting Select any Program to check edit or delete the setting Procedure 193 bizhub C250 7 Pe i N lt bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Subject Text for E mail Subject Functions i M A 0 To register the e mail Subject for transmitting the Fax original by e mail se Setting Touch New to register the new subject Procedure Select any displayed subject to detail check edit or delete the setting The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing Set as Default Text Functions E To register the e mail message for transmitting the Fax original by e mail se Setting Touch New to register the new message Procedure Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing Set as Default
193. of the machine before starting the service job procedures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands 9 Pe i N UO lt 23 4 Sensor check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Sensor check 4 1 To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Check procedure eo o En js Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the main unit service manual 2 Touch the State Confirmation key 3 Touch the Sensor Check key 4 2 Sensor check list 4 2 1 Sensor check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit Sensors 4 Saddle stitch
194. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU Duplex Control Board PWB A DU Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU Mechanical Control Board PWB M Duplex Unit Switchback Motor M1 DU Duplex Unit Transport Motor M2 DU WIRING DIAGRAM Ste Action i i Control Signal Location Electri cal Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC1 DU I O check Sensor check Q 21 3 PC2 DU I O check Sensor check Q 21 4 M1 DU operation check PWB A DU PJ4A DU 1 to 4 R 22 5 M2DU operation check PWB A DU PJ5A DU 1 to 4 R 22 6 Change PWB A DU 7 Change PWB M gt gt d Q e Q 325 bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 15 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 3 10 at Duplex Unit pre registration section AD 503 A Detection Timing Type Description pre registration section Detection of The Registration Roller Sensor PC1 is not blocked even after the lapse of a misfeed at Duplex given period of time after a Duplex paper feed sequence has been started Loop Registration Reversing JAM detection Duplex Unit Pre Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at registration section front of the Registration Roller at pre registration fee
195. or other image troubles 7 Remove the PH Unit Black Move the front side of the PH Unit to left a little and remove the boss 9 from the locating hole 10 Lift up the front side of the PH Unit a little Remove the boss 11 at the rear side of the PH Unit from the locating hole 12 NOTE Since the back of the PH Unit is pushed to the right with the two plate springs 13 remove it by tilting the backside of the PH Unit to the left as shown in the left illustration Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 1 E 4037F2C112DB B Reinstall Procedure 4037F2C113DB 4037F2C114DA 6 Other Remove the PH Unit 14 8 Follow the same procedures to remove all PH Units 1 Fitthe back of the PH Unit 1 into the plate spring 2 of installation plate 2 Push the PH Unit 3 along the right side line of PH Unit installation plate all the way and fit it into the plate spring 4 3 Make sure that the two bosses 5 at front and rear side of the PH Unit fit in the locating hole 6 91 bizhub C250 7 E s bizhub C250 Maintenance Other 4038F2C117DA 92 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Reinstall the Stopper 7 NOTE When reinstalling the Stopper use care so that both ends of the Stop per will not open but stay parallel as shown on the left Keep using the Stopper a
196. out the list of the Program addresses which are registered Setting 1 Select the Destination Type to be output Procedure 2 Specify the Registration No range to be output 3 Touch Print and select the Paper Feed Tray 4 Press the Start key and output the list of Program 4 E Mail Subject Text List Functions To output the Subject or the Text list Use To print out the E mail Subject Text List which are registered Setting 1 Select the Paper Feed Tray Procedure 2 Press the Start key to output the Subject Text List 8 6 4 User Authentication Account Track A General Settings 1 User Authentication Functions To set the User Authentication method Use To select whether to authenticate the user by the External Server or MFP Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure OFF ON External Server ON MFP 2 Public User Access Functions To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when Use User authentication has been set Setting The default setting is Restrict Procedure Restrict Allow NOTE This setting is not available without User Authentication 3 Account Track Functions To set whether to enable the Account Track function or not Use To enable the Account Track function Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure OFF ON 195 bizhub C250 2 Pe i
197. prohibited items 51 6 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 52 6 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list 52 6 2 2 Cleanirigiparts ere Lern teh n enira macte tL rb E PE C 53 E 6 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure ssssssseeeeeeeenenenenns 54 8 6 3 1 IR Upper Right Cover IR Right Cover IR Upper Rear Cover 54 6 3 2 Left Cover Upper Front Cover IR Left Cover IR Upper Front Cover 55 6 3 3 Original Glass IR Front Cover Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 9 6 3 10 6 3 11 6 3 12 6 3 13 6 3 14 6 3 15 6 3 16 6 3 17 6 3 18 6 3 19 6 3 20 6 3 21 6 3 22 6 3 23 6 3 24 6 3 25 6 3 26 6 3 27 6 3 28 6 3 29 6 3 30 6 3 31 6 3 32 6 3 33 6 3 34 6 3 35 6 3 36 6 3 37 6 3 38 6 3 39 6 3 40 Exit Tray Upper Rear Cover Lower Rear Cover Rear Left Cover 57 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover Multi Bypass Tray Upper COVEN 58 59 64 Mechanical Control Board 66 DC Power Supply PW 69 Scanner Motor Drive Board 71 CCD
198. reception Mode 11 7 11 6 11 5 11 4 11 3 11 2 11 1 11 0 0 to 31 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 82 sec 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 33 to 255 sec 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 7 Timer 2 Dial request completed CONNECT reception Mode 12 7 12 6 125 124 12 3 122 12 1 120 0 to 63 sec 0000 0000 to 0011 1111 64 sec 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 to 255 sec 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 8 Timer 4 Line connection Start request telegram delivery Mode 14 7 14 6 14 5 14 4 14 3 14 2 14 1 14 0 0 to 31 x 100 msec 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 32 x 100 msec 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 33 to 255 x 100 msec 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 2 9 Timer 5 Wait time for other side s response E Mode 15 7 15 6 15 5 15 4 15 3 15 2 15 1 15 0 lt 0 to 29 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1101 30 sec 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 31 to 255 sec 0001 1111 to 1111 1111 256 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 7 4 Setup confirmation Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch CS Remote Care 3 Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed 10 7 5 Calling the Maintenance When CE starts maintenance inputting the ID code of CE seven digits numbers which CE can identify They are contro
199. remove two screws 4 4 Separate the section into the Tray Section 5 and the Paddle Section 6 7 E s 458315255000 13 FS 603 5 5 7 E s gt 2 Other 2 3 13 Exit Roller Upper 458318255100 458318255200 458318255300 458318255400 2 3 14 Paddle 458318255100 14 Field Service 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Paddle Section 13 Place the Paddle Section 1 as shown in the figure Turn the gear 2 in the direction indi cated by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller Upper section 3 Push up the Exit Roller Upper 4 from the bottom to release it from the shaft 5 Turn up the Exit Roller Upper 6 and then push it down to remove it Remove the front Exit Roller Upper 7 as well in the same way Remove the Paddle Section 13 Place the Paddle Section 1 as shown in the figure Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other 3 Turn the gear 2 in the direction indicted by an arrow to move up the Exit Roller Upper section 3 FS 603 458315255500 4 Push up the Safety Guide 4 from the bottom to release it on one side from the shaft 5 458315255600 5 Push up the Safety Guide 4 from the bottom to release it from the shaft 5 and remove it 7 E s 458315255700
200. sese 330 16 2 4 P 6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure esee 331 16 2 5 P 7 Magenta Imaging Unit failure eene 331 16 2 6 8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure esee 331 16 2 7 P 9 Black Imaging Unit failure esee 331 16 2 8 P 21 Color Shift Test Pattern 381 16 2 9 22 Color Shift Adjust 331 16 2 10 P 26 1st image transfer ATVC Black failure 932 16 2 11 27 2nd image transfer ATVC 332 16 2 12 P 29 1st image transfer ATVC Color 332 16 2 13 P 30 Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction 332 ix bizhub C250 Maintenance 2 L n El E lt Troubleshooting Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 2 14 P 31 Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction 16 8 Trouble COC EE 16 3 1 Trouble code list etit ies 16 4 HOW TO fOSOl ire reisen e 16 5 16 5 1 C0204 Tray 2 Elevator 16 5 2 C0211 Manual Tray Rise Descent bizhub C250 16 5 3 0301 Suction Fan Motor s failure to
201. should be within 4 1 mm to the FD scale DF 601 A Adjustment procedure 1 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray 1 with the side having an arrow facing up 2 Setup the following functions Auto Paper 1 sided original 1 side copy 45821350800 Press the Start key Fold the copy in half With reference to the crease check to see if the arrow is on the side of A B or B Specifications 2 mm from the cen ter f the deviation falls outside the speci fied range use the following proce dure to make an adjustment gt 45821350900 6 Loosen screw 2 two on the front side and three on the backside on the document feeding tray If the crease deviates on the side of A move the tray to the front If the crease deviates on the side of B move the tray to the rear 7 Make recheck 2 Pe UO lt 458215351000 19 8 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 Adjustment of the document skew Adjustment standard Skew should be 1 0 or less with respect to the document length within 3 0 mm for document of A4 size DF 601 1 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray 1 with the side having an arrow facing up 2 Setupthe following functions Auto Paper e 1 sided original 1 side copy
202. steps Std Darker 5 steps Adjustment Light color Touch the Darker key Instructions Dark color Touch the Lighter key Adjustment 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Density Adjustment Thick Paper Image Density Yellow Magenta Cyan Black 3 Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density Black Image Density Functions To fine adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy Use To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Adjustment Lighter 2 steps Std Darker 2 steps Adjustment If the black is light touch the Darker key Instructions If the black is dark touch the Lighter key Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Density Adjustment Black Image Density 3 Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density 5 Image Stabilization Image Stabilization Only Functions The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe cuted When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed Setting 1 Call the Adm
203. that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended Therefore this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that for performing maintenance and control of the product properly Keep this Service Manual also for future service DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION In this Service Manual each of three expressions DANGER WARNING and A CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning When servicing the product the relevant works disassembling reassembling adjustment repair maintenance etc need to be conducted with utmost care A DANGER Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injur A WARNING Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury A CAUTION Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound medium trouble and property damage Symbols used for safety and irr IT detined as follows Precaution when servicing the A product General Electric hazard High temperature precaution Prohibition when servicing the NV S product General Do not touch Do not prohibition with wet hand disassemble Directio
204. the domain name up to 64 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK Dynamic Authentication Functions To set whether to enable or disable the Dynamic Authentication Use To enable the Dynamic Authentication Setting The default setting is Disable Procedure Enable Disable NOTE The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous Reset All Settings Functions To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the Use shipping Setting 1 Touch Reset All Settings Procedure 2 Check the message and touch Yes H E Mail Setting 1 E Mail TX SMTP E Mail TX Setting Functions To set whether to enable or disable the E mail transmission setting Use To disable the E mail transmission setting Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF SMTP Server Address Functions To set the SMTP server address Use To enter the SMTP server address Setting SMP Server Address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 1 Touch Host Address 2 Select IP Address Input and enter IP Address 3 Select Host Name Input and enter the host name 208 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Binary Division Functions To set whether to carry out Binary division for data to be
205. the initial setting when APS is cancelled Setting The default setting is Tray Tray 1 Before APS OFF Procedure Tray Before APS ON Default Tray 167 bizhub C250 7 Pe i N UO lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n o lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 H Select Tray for Insert Sheet Functions To select the default setting of the Tray for Cover sheet paper se Setting P Procedure The default setting is Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions To set whether to accept the printing job for Print data or Fax data during copy opera tion Use To refuse Print data or Fax data during copy operation Accept Receives the Print data or Fax data to print Receive Only Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is fin ished Setting The default setting is Accept Procedure Accept Receive Only 8 5 5 Scanner Setting A JPEG Compression Level Functions To set the JPEG Compression method when scanning with JPEG while in Scanner mode Use To change the compression rate when JPEG scanning High Quality Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning Standard Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning High Compression Makes the compression rate higher and puts prior
206. the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit The Job tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor Transport section 1 of the Horizontal Transport Unit misfeed detection The Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit The Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit B Action Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN Paper Sensor PC1 HO Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN Storage Sensor PC3 FN Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC19 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ14A 6 ON FS 501 B 4 2 3 PC1 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A 6 ON FS 501 B 8 E 4 PC1 HO I O sensor c
207. the power cable must be connected to ter minals of the plug according to the following order Black or Brown L line e White or Light Blue N neutral ap Green Yellow PE earth Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product and results in fire or electric shock 5 3 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON SITE SERVICE KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met in order to protect the customer and customer engi neer hereafter called the CE from the risk of injury However in daily use any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure In order to maintain safety and reliability the CE must perform regular safety checks 1 Power Supply Connection to Power Supply NWARNING Check that mains voltage is as specified Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply voltage current capacity grounding and may result in fire or electric shock If proper wall outlet is not available advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the
208. the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges burrs or other pointed parts Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire 5 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints NWARNING Make sure that all screws components wiring connec tors etc that were removed for safety check and mainte nance have been reinstalled in the original location Pay Xpcs special attention to forgotten connectors pinched cables GD vr Pug forgotten screws etc S eu risk of product trouble electric shock and fire exists Handling of Consumables NWARNING Toner and developer are not harmful substances but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes etc It may be stimulative If the substances get in the eye rinse with plenty of water immediately When symptoms are noticeable consult a physician Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire You may be burned due to dust explosion lt Handling of Service Materials NCAUTION Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Drum cleaner isopropyl alcohol and roller cleaner ace el tone based are highly flammable and must be handled with care A risk of fire exists Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated
209. to 100 96 in 1 96 increments Absolute Humidity 100 1 increments 10 12 6 CCD Check Functions To display the D A value of CCD clamp gain for and B Use Used for troubleshooting for the CCD Sensor Setting Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values Procedure CLAMP The difference between the max and min output values should be within 100 GAIN The difference from the CLAMP values R B should be within 90 for R and B The difference from the CLAMP value G should be within 50 for G The difference between each pair of RO and RE GO and GE and BO and BE should be within 30 287 bizhub C250 2 5 n o lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 12 7 Memory HDD Adj Functions To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write read check Rough Check Acheck is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage Detail Check Acheck is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at the addresses and buses in all areas The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage Use f the copy image is faulty Adjustment Procedure 1 Call the S
210. to 255 0 to 255 7 Substitute 1 2 DNS Server Functions To set the Substitute DNS Server Use To enter the Substitute DNS Server Setting P address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 199 bizhub C250 7 Pe i N lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 IP Filtering Functions To set the IP Filtering N e Use To set whether to receive IP address within the specified range of the value E Setting Permit Access a Procedure 1 Select Enable or Disable on Permit Access 2 Select range Set 1 to Set 5 and input address using the 10 Key Pad 3 Touch OK Deny Access 1 Touch Deny Access 2 Select Enable or Disable on Deny Access 3 Select range Set 1 to Set 5 and enter address using the 10 Key Pad 4 Touch OK 9 RAW Port No Functions To set the RAW port No Use To set the RAW port number for the printer Setting 1 Select the necessary port number Procedure 2 Select to use or not to use 3 When using the selected port press the Clear key to clear the value and enter the RAW port number using the 10 Key Pad 4 Touch OK 10 DNS Host Name Functions To set the DNS Host name Hi Use To enter the DNS Host name 1 Touch DNS Host N
211. until it stops Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 3 6 5 Replacing the Imaging Unit C M Y K A Removal Procedure 1 Open the Front Door and turn OFF the Main Power Switch 2 Unplug the power cord 3 Press the unlocking knob 1 of Imaging Unit bizhub C250 4038F2C531DA 4 Pull out the Imaging Unit 2 and remove it from main body 7 E s 4038F2C532DA 2 B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Remove the Imaging Unit from its plastic bag 2 Peel off the Tape 1 so that the Mounting Bracket 2 can be removed Then remove the Mounting Bracket 2 NOTE Since the Imaging Unit is highly susceptible to light keep it shielded from light up to the time it is installed Carefully unseal the plastic bag black If the Imaging Unit is packed in the plastic bag black again seal the package using tape or another means 4038F2C533DA 35 bizhub C250 Maintenance 3 Periodical check 4038F2C534DA 4038F2C535DA 36 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Tilt the Imaging Unit 3 to the left and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice Then tilt it to the right and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice 4 Remove the Caps 4 on the end of the Imaging Unit and the bottom packing material 5 Keeping the Imaging Unit 5 in a level po
212. up Roller gt 11 3 Pick up Roller 12 4 Transport section Vertical Transport Roller 12 5 o 7 E s 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 3 1 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover PC 103 PC 203 4 4061F2C503DA Open the Right Door 1 Remove the Right Door 1 Remove two screws 2 and remove the Rear Right Cover 3 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Lower Right Cover 5 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Front Right Cover 7 s 7 E 3 2 434816282200 1 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Rear Cover 2 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 4 Cleaning procedure NOTE 3 Other The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol 3 4 1 Separation Roller 434815261200 434818261300 3 4 2 Paper Take up Roller 434815260100 Remove the Right Door 10 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Jam Access Cover 2 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 4 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Separation Roller 5 clean of dirt Repeat steps 1 to 4 similarly for the 4th Drawer Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from 4th row R
213. 0 2 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 12 Remove the C ring 16 and remove 4 16 the Paper Take up Roller 17 A 17 a gt NOTE Replace the Separation Roller Assy Paper Take up Roller and Pick up Roller at the same time 2 1 3 Replacing the Pick up Roller 1 1 Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover uw 10 2 Remove the Tray 3 3 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy ts See the procedures 1 to 2 in page Separation Roller Assy 4 Disconnect the connector 1 from the Main Control Board 5 o 7 g 5 Remove four screws 2 and remove the Paper Take up Unit 3 N SPX D 6 Remove two screws 4 and remove 4 the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 5 together with frame 43488251600 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 434816251800 2 Periodical check 7 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 8 Remove two C rings 8 two bush ings 9 and the Pick up Roller Assy 10 9 Remove the C ring 11 and remove the Pick up Roller 12 Replace the Separation Roller Assy Paper Take up Roller and Pick up Roller at the same time PC 403 7 g s 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Other 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibite
214. 0 Jul 2005 16 5 40 C3A01 Paper Stuck to Fuser Heater Roller e 16 5 41 C3A02 Paper Stuck to Fuser Pressure Roller Relevant Electrical Parts E X Fusing Unit DC Power Supply PU1 Exit Sensor PC2 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the Fusing Unit for correct installa E tion whether it is secured in position Check the Fusing Unit PWB M for proper 2 connection and correct or change as nec essary PC2 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNTH2 8 ON C 13 Change Fusing Unit Change PWB M Change PU1 a A 16 5 42 C4151 Polygon Motor C failure to turn 16 5 43 C4152 Polygon Motor M failure to turn 16 5 44 C4153 Polygon Motor Y failure to turn 16 5 45 C4154 Polygon Motor K failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts PH Unit PH Interface Board PWB D Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Change PH Unit 3 Change PWB D Change PWB M D Q E Q 366 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 46 C4551 Laser malfunction Cyan 16 5 47 C4552 Laser malfunction Magenta 16
215. 05 hart iming 21 T VQZvS3S4 0v 01 1X3 pig NE ejejduio2 epis pig f SWOEEL le awl eBueuox3 apis ___ gt p 4695 ues oi eBueuoxa epis _ yo 99 115 T plouajog yo 30 215 Plousjos 1x3 uo o Pp 0 yano 5 30 999 108095 1x3 uo Ho 40 524 108095 Janowny uo 30 299 208095 dnopid uo uo losueg uomensibau Weng 0 adeg yy 208495 idu 39 2 4A ZN uodsuei 100W GOLN 198 uo QN39S 0969 qnuziq xipueddy 458 hart iming c 21 T Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 0S29 qnuziq xipueddy vasrsassZeor ejejduio 6951 xa 01 1x3 reubuo pig 39 116 piouajog JeAouunj 30 218 Piouejos 1x3 c 40 170 yoinig S_6 S GIS 6 40 998 108095 1x3 90 809 108195 9 29 205098 dn yolg 40 124 Josueg Jaded 40 709 Jaded WIN 20095 Ajdw3 moo o AG EWN joo MO N99 HO uodsuei MO 0 200
216. 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS Standard Controller General 1 1 1 1 2 Maintenance 2 Checking the controller firmware version esee 3 3 Firmware HUD OFAC G5 ETE 3 3 1 Preparations for Firmware 3 3 1 1 Service environment 3 1 2 Applicatiorito be used u eti arenas eri dr Ed ER ER 3 3 1 3 Installing the 3 3 1 4 Writing into the Compact flash seseseeeeenennnenen 7 3 2 firmware eie rne heo rr engeren P ce eee eta hano NI Ert a 10 3 2 1 Updating Method ca Fe Ferd cnr Erb E a 10 3 2 2 Action When Data Transfer Fails sse 11 Adjustment Setting 4 Checking the Image Controller 5 13 Troubleshooting 5 Checking the system configuration 6 Status CODES d 7 Troubleshooting procedures 0 0 cee cee nennen 7 1 Unable to print over the eseeeeeeseaeeeeeeeenaaes 15 7 2 Unable to transmit data through Scan to 17 7 3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E Mail Internet FAX 18 7 4 E m
217. 073DB 74 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Disconnect two Connectors 7 7 Remove all the Connectors and the Flat Cables on the Image Processing Board 8 8 Remove six Screws 9 and two Bolts 10 and remove the Image Process ing Board 11 NOTE When the Image Processing Board is to be replaced rewriting the Firmware to the latest one Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 19 Slide Interface Board PWB SIF Remove the Lower Rear Cover we 57 Remove all the Connectors and the Flat Cable on the Slide Interface Board bizhub C250 4038F2C074DA 3 Remove five Screws 1 7 g s 4038F2C075DA 4 Disconnect the Connector 2 con necting to the MFP Control Board and remove the Slide Interface Board 3 4038F2C076DA 75 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other 6 3 20 MFP Control Board PWB MFP 4038F2C507DA 4038F2C077DA 4038F2C078DC 76 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Remove the Upper Rear Cover Lower Rear Cover and Rear Right Cover we 57 59 2 Remove the Slide Interface Board we 75 3 Remove thirteen Screws and remove the Shield cover 1 A Remove the NVRAM 2 on the MFP Control Board 5 Remove the DIMMO and DIMM1 3 on the MFP Control Board Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 Dis
218. 1 Remove the Original glass 2 Using the screw 2 mount the Origi nal Size Detection Sensor 2 PC204 1 and fix it bizhub C250 4037F2C113DB How to set the Harness PC203 PC204 5 o 7 E s 4037F2C114DB 136 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 3 Select Service Mode System 1 Original Size Detection and set Original Size Detection Change the Original Glass to Table2 bizhub C250 4037F2E530DA 4 Select Service Mode Machine gt Org Size Detecting Sensor Adj Org Size Detecting Sensor Adjustment gt 234 Sofor topeions Bet 5 Check to make sure that the Org Size Detecting Sensor Option Set oo 1 xr 2 3 is displayed on the Original Size g Detection Sensor Adjustment S Sensor 4 Sensor Sensor 6 screen 2 Sensor 7 Sensor 8 gt 4037F2E531DA 137 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other 6 6 Option counter Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 6 1 Installation method for the Key Counter 4038F2C570DA 4038F2C571DA 138 1 cutout the Knockouts 1 of the Upper Rear Cover 2 Remove the Upper Rear Cover ws 57 3 Pass the Key Counter Harness 2 through the hole 4 Mount the Connector 3 5 Secure the Counter cable
219. 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Machine Specifications Power Requirements Voltage AC 110 V 120 V 127 V 220 240 V Frequency 150 60 Hz 3 0 Hz Max Power Consumption Less than 1500 W 120 V 12A 220 240V 8 A Dimensions 653 2 W x 755 D x 771 8 mm 25 7 2 W x 29 8 D x 30 4 H inch Space Requirements 1857 W x 1102 D mm 4 73 W x 43 4 D inch 4 Mass Machine IU and TC Approx 94 kg Ib without IU and TC 8 9 kg 2 width when the bypass tray is closed 8 height up to where the original is placed 4 Space Requirements are the values when the Finisher is slid to the maximum the bypass tray is opened to the maximum and the front door is open 2 6 Operating Environment Temperature 10 to 30 50 to 86 F with a fluctuation of 10 C 18 F or less per hour Humidity 15 to 85 Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 20 h Difference between front and back right and left should be 1 degree or Levelness under 2 7 Print Functions Type Built in printer controller CPU PPC750 FX 466 MHz RAM 512 MB Shared with the C250 HDD 40 GB Shared with the C250 interface Standard Ethernet 10 Base T or 100 Base TX Option USB 1 1 USB 2 0 or IEEE 1284 Supported Protocols TCP IP IPX SPX NetBEUI AppleTalk EtherTalk Print Speed A4 8 5x11 Monochrome print 1 sided 25 pages min 2 sided 23 pages min
220. 1 Replacement parts A Main unit Qua Actual Descrip Ref Page No Classification Parts name durable Parts No in this ntity x tions cycle 1 manual 1 Tray 1 Feed Roller 1 200K 4034 3012 xx iw 16 Ta 2 y Separation Roller Assy 1 200K 4034 0151 xx i 16 3 Feed Roller 1 200K 4131 3001 xx oS 17 Bypass 4 Separation Roller Assy 1 200 4034 0151 gt 19 8 5 Feed Roller 1 300K 4030 3005 xx ur 22 S 6 2 Separation Roller Assy 1 300 K 4030 0151 ts 20 E 7 Pick up Roller 1 300 K 4030 3005 xx wu 25 8 2rid Image Tranter 1 120K 4038077600 2 gt 30 Conveyance Roller Unit section i 9 Dust Filter 1 120 m 9 gt 29 Vertical Conveyance 3 4038 0755 00 5 10 Fusing Unit 1 120K x gt 38 Fusing section I 4038 0754 00 6 11 Deodorant Filter 1 20K 3 we 29 12 Imaging Unit Y M C 1 45K gt 35 13 Imaging Unit 1 70K gt 35 14 Processing Ozone Filter 1 120K 2 28 15 section Toner Cartridge Y M C 1 12K gt 33 16 Toner Cartridge 1 20K 8 gt 33 17 Dust Filter Cooling Fan 1 30K 4 ws 29 18 Image transfer Image Transfer Belt Unit 1 120 4038 0777 00 2 gt 31 19 section Waste Toner Box 1 30 K 4065 611 4 7 gt 41 1 Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value 2 Also replace the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit Dust Filter Vertical Conveyance and Ozone Filter packed in the Image Transfer Belt Unit at the same time when 120 K is re
221. 1 sheet Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Product specifications 2 3 Types of Paper Paper Source Type Tray1 Tray2 Multiple Bypass o iD e o 2 5 N Plain paper 60 to 90 g m Translucent paper O O OHP transparencies crosswise feeding only Thick paper 1 91 to 150 g m Thick paper 2 151 to 209 g m Thick paper 3 210 to 256 g m 1 Postcards Copy paper type 20 sheets or less 10 sheets or less Envelopes Labels Copy paper Width 90 to 311 1 mm 139 7 to 297 mm 90 to 311 1 mm dimensions Length 139 7 to 457 2 mm 182 to 431 8 mm 139 7 to 457 2 mm 1 Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used Optional Paper Feed Cabinet Only the Plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g m is reliably fed Automatic Duplex Unit Only the Plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g m or Thick paper weighing 91 to 256 g m are reliably fed 2 4 Maintenance Machine Durability 600 000 prints or 5 years whichever is earlier No of pages printed per Color print 1 200 prints month Average Monochrome print 4 800 prints Color print 3 pages job Standard copy mode icd Monochrome print 3 pages job Standard Original Color print M Y 5 Density Monochrome print 5 o D N o 5 N a 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver
222. 10 Service Mode 10 4 7 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Color Registration Adjustment A Cyan Magenta Yellow Functions To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper Use To correct any color shift Adjustment 0 6 to 6 dot Range Adjustment If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting Instructions If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Setting Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure Touch these keys in this order Machine Color Registration Adjustment NO ola 8 Check Procedure Load Tray 1 with A3 11x17 or A4 8 1 2x11 Plain paper Press the Start key On the test pattern produced check for deviation between the black line and the line Select the color to be adjusted Using the 4 key change the setting value as necessary At this time only the of each color at positions X and Y line of the selected color moves Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation Check point X Y X 4036153004 0 If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of D es edes he d TEN eh de L L L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 esce oe e eb gt gt 40361300500 Adjustmen
223. 10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion line 0 DMA N ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion line 0 DMA AO CFEO01 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA A1 CFE02 ASIC10 Timeout Number of Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA A2 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 BO CFE04 ASIC10 Timeout Number of Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA B1 CFEO05 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA B2 CFEO06 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA C CFEO07 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA D CFEO08 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA E CFEO09 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA F CFEOA ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion linez0 G CFEOB ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA unde
224. 10 g m 13 1 4 to 29 1 4 Ib Plain Paper Metric area Detectable Document B6R to Size 1 Inch area 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 to 11 17 Capacity Standard Mode Mixed Original Detection Mode Document Feed Table 100 sheets 80 g m 21 1 4 Ib Original Exit Tray 100 sheets 80 g m 21 1 4 Ib Thick Paper Mode Document Feed Table 38 sheets 210 g m 55 3 4 Ib Original Exit Tray 38 sheets 210 g m 55 3 4 Ib 1 For the Combined Original Detection Mode Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled Size Combination Table a 1 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 D Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V supplied from the main unit DC 5 V generated within the DF 601 Max Power 60 W or less Consumption Dimensions 586 mm W x 519 mm D x 135 mm H 23 inch W x 20 1 2 inch D x 5 1 4 inch H Weight 14 2 kg 31 25 Ib E Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Mixed original feed 2 Mixed original feed 2 1 Mixed original feed chart 5 For Metric di or Me a sus 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm Mixed Or
225. 126 PC Vertical Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not Transport present present PC125 PC Take Up Tray 4 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC123 PC Upper Limit Tray 4 Lift Up Sensor At raised Notat raised position position PC14 Man Lift Up Position Bypass Lift Up Sensor Atraised Notat raised ual Sensor position position PC13 Paper Empty Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present 280 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name Operation Characteristics Panel Display 1 0 PC1 Paper Registration Registration Roller Sensor Paper Paper not Pas Roller present present PC2 Sage Exit Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC4 OHP Detect OHP Sensor OHP Not OHP PC3 Fusing Loop Fusing Paper Loop Sensor Loop present Loop not Detect present PC17 Color PC Drive Color PC Drum Main Sensor Blocked Unblocked Drive Main Sensor PC18 DeteC Color PC Drive Color PC Drum Sub Sensor Blocked Unblocked 1 Sub Sensor PC15 Black PC Drive K PC Drum Main Sensor Blocked Unblocked Main Sensor PC16 Black PC Drive K PC Drum Sub Sensor Blocked Unblocked Sub Sensor 281 bizhub C250 2 Pe i 5 N UO lt bizhub C250 2 5 n o lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005
226. 13 Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN 3 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN 14 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC11 FN 4 Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN 15 Shift Motor M8 FN 5 Storage Sensor PC3 FN 16 Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN 6 A 17 Staple Home Position Sensor PC14 FN 7 Front Door Sensor PC17 FN 18 Elevator Tray Paper Sensor PC8 FN 8 Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN 19 CD Aligning Motor M5 FN 9 puce Upper Limit Switeh 20 Lower Paddle Motor M9 FN 5 10 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED 21 Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PWB C FN PWB D FN 11 Elevator Motor M7 FN 22 Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN 438 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 Parts layout drawing 4038F5C503DA Upper Entrance Motor 4 Entrance Motor M1 FN Exit Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M13 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN Storage Roller Rolls Spacing Motor M12 FN Set Switch S1 FN ROM IC3 FN Control Board PWB A FN 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Exit Motor M3 FN Storage Roller Home Position Sensor PC12 FN Upper Paddle Motor M15 FN Upper Paddle Solenoid SL3 FN Elevator Tray Full Sensor PC7 FN Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC13 FN Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch S3 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN 439 bizhub C250 fas i lt 19 Par
227. 14 Printer Monocolor white lines in Sub Scan Direction white bands in Sub Scan Direction colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction 400 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 15 Printer Monocolor white lines in Main Scan Direction white bands in Main Scan Direction colored lines in Main Scan Direction colored bands in Main SCAN DITO COM D iida 401 2 18 3 16 Printer Monocolor uneven density in sub scan direction 402 5 18 3 17 Printer Monocolor uneven density in main scan direction 403 18 3 18 Printer Monocolor low image density esee 404 18 3 19 Printer Monocolor gradation reproduction failure 406 18 3 20 Printer Monocolor foggy background esee 407 18 3 21 Printer Monocolor void areas white 5 409 18 83 22 Printer Monocolor colored spots 410 18 3 23 Printer Monocolor blurred image seeeeeenn 411 18 3 24 Printer Monocolor blank copy black 412 18 3 25 Printer Monocolor uneven 413 18 3 26 Printer 4 Color white lines in sub scan direction white bands in sub scan direction colored lines in sub scan direction and colored bands in sub scan 8 diro
228. 2 5 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder 1 in the docu ment feeding tray NOTE Make sure that the blank surface of the chart faces up 6 Press the Start key 7 Check that Result is OK and then touch SET 8 Touch END 9 Touch Exit on the Service Mode Screen If the Result is Unable Check and correct the skew of the document Manually correct the value of Position Correction Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 4 3 Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Service Mode Touch ADF Touch Auto Stop Position Adjustment Touch Main Scanning Direction 8 Mechanical adjustment Auto adjust Main Scanning Direction Image scan start position ADF Adjustment Auto Original Stop Position Adjustment FSUE SG Direction 1 51 Position Main Scanning Direction 4582F3E522DA 45821350800 Position Main Scanning Direction Bdsustment Result OK ser ion Position Correction on 0 4582F3E523DA 8 9 Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray with the side having an arrow facing up Press the Start key Check that Result is OK and then touch SET Touch END Touch Exit on the Service Mode Screen If the Result is Unable Check and correct the skew o
229. 2 Rear Left Cover 63 24 Tray 2 Right Rear Cover gt 64 25 Front Cover gt 64 26 Mechanical Control Board 66 27 DC Power Supply gt 69 28 Scanner Motor Drive Board iw 71 29 CCD Unit 71 30 Image Processing Board gt 73 31 Slide Interface Board wu 75 32 MFP Control Board t 76 33 DIMMO DIMM1 gt 78 34 Hard Disk Drive gt 78 35 High Voltage Unit t 80 36 Tray 1 Paper Size Board gt 81 37 Tray 2 Control Board gt 81 38 Tray 2 Paper Size Board 83 39 Inverter Board gt 85 52 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other No Section Part name Ref Page 40 Board and etc PH Interface Board gt 85 41 Multi Bypass Unit ts 87 42 PH Unit s 89 43 Unit Transport Drive Assy ts 93 44 Hopper Drive Assy ts 95 45 Right Door Assy gt 46 Scanner Motor ts 100 47 IR Scanner Assy ts 103 48 Scanner Drive Cables 104 49 PWB Box gt 112 50 Color Developing Motor oe 115 51 Color PC Drum Motor gt 116 52 Toner Supply Motor C K ts 116 53 Toner Supply Motor Y M ts 116 54 Others Main Motor gt 117 55 Fusing Drive Motor ts 119 56 Tray 2 Lift Up Motor ce 121 57 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor ce 121 58 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor ce 123 59 IDC Registration Sensor 1 IDC Registration Sensor 2 gt 124 6 2 2 Cleaning pa
230. 2005 D Security Details 1 Password Rules Functions To set whether to apply the Password rules Use To apply the password rule to enhance security Passwords to be covered Password for CE Administrator Box user authentication Fax confidential print Classified document User authenti cation and Box transmission Details of the Password Rules Password except User password Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of one bite alphanumeric characters Case sensitive User password shall be 8 digits of one bite alphanumeric characters Case sensi tive Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of one bite alphanumeric characters Password with only the same letter is prohibited Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited When the password rule is set to ON the password cannot be changed or registered unless it follows the above conditions Setting Procedure The default setting is OFF ON OFF 2 Manual Destination Input Functions To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the Destination Input screen Use To prohibit entering the destination address manually Setting The default setting is Allow Procedure Allow Restrict 3 Print Data Capture Functions To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the Print Job Data Use To be used when carrying out Service Mode
231. 22 Color Shift Adjust failure The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction The skew correction amount is greater than the speci fied value P 26 1st Image Transfer ATVC K failure An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of Black P 27 2nd Image Transfer ATVC failure An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value P 29 1st Image Transfer ATVC color failure An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of color 30 Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction The output from the Color PC Drive Main and Sub Sen sors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1 000 ms while the Color PC Drum Motor is turning sta bly and the Lock signal is active LOW O P 31 Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction The output from the Black PC Drive Main and Sub Sen sors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1 000 ms while the Main Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active LOW O 329 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 2 Solution 16 2 1 S 1 CCD clamp gain adjus
232. 223 Next request comes during MFP Control Board processing of startWorkLoad C Output CF300 IR Bus Check Timeout MFP Control Board C CF411 Parity error MFP Control Board CF421 Overrun error MFP Control Board C CF431 Parity error Overrun error MFP Control Board C CF441 Framing error MFP Control Board C CF451 Parity error Framing error MFP Control Board C CF461 Overrun error Framing error MFP Control Board C CF471 Parity error Overrun error MFP Control Board C Framing error CF412 Parity error Control Board C CF422 Overrun error MFP Control Board C CF432 Parity error Overrun error MFP Control Board C CF442 Framing error MFP Control Board C CF452 Parity error Framing error Control Board C CF462 Overrun error Framing error Control Board C CF472 Parity error Overrun error MFP Control Board C Framing error CF510 Parity error MFP Control Board CF520 Framing error MFP Control Board C CF530 Parity error 4 Framing error MFP Control Board 540 Overrun error MFP Control Board C 346 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CF550 Parity error Overrun error MFP Control Board C CF560 Overrun error Framing
233. 24 Ib Size A4 8 5 x 11 Capacity 2500 sheets 80 g m 21 25 Ib C Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V 10 supplied from the main unit DC5Vzx5976 Max Power 45 W or less Consumption Dimensions 570 mm W x 548 mm D x 263 mm H 22 5 inch W x 21 5 inch D x 10 25 inch H Weight 26 0 kg 57 25 Ib D Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 1 Product specification Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 eo 9 oO Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Periodical check Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 1 1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy PC 403 1 Remove the Right Door ww 10 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 2 434815250900 3 Remove two C rings 3 and the shaft 4 and remove the Paper Sep aration Roller fixing Bracket Assy 5 NOTE Becareful not to lose spring at this time 7 E 4348F2C503DA 4 Remove the C ring 6 the Guide 7 and remove the Separation Roller os 7 8 d 4348F2C504DA NOTE Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine Make
234. 277 10 12 State ConfitmatiOn iiic cr err ege hene ne ec cea rci ca ir ne rae aia co o esis 278 10 12 1 Sensor Check 278 10 12 2 Table Number 286 10 12 83 A sierran re eer trennt E teres 287 10 12 4 Level Histoty2 ciment intanto enun tp nrbe 287 10 12 5 Temp amp Humidity teen 287 E 10 12 6 Check ist ttti 287 E 10 12 7 Memory HDD Adj rrr rentia 288 10 12 8 Memory HDD State nete enne nnne nnne 290 10 129 Color ROSU 290 10 12 10 10 eiiiai iaiia 290 101241 Adjustment Data List Herr eee tts 290 x 10 13 Test Mode inneren renun 291 8 lt 10 13 1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output 10 13 2 Gradation Pattern 291 10 13 93 HalftoniePatlermi iiie Hee meret rete ien 292 bizhub C250 Maintenance 2 2 N El lt Troubleshooting Appendix Viii Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 13 4 Lattice Pattern 10 13 5 Solid Patterson coenam 10 13 6 ni eret cerni a o ER Er cen eT FUE EE ERR ERROR 10 13 7 8 Color Solid enar tnn nerunt eher non 294 10 13 8 Running Mode ian iioi ceteris ran dE e rk P dei EE a x Le s 294 10 138 9 FAX NOSU 10 14
235. 3 Fusing Heaters do not Operate Relevant Electrical Parts Primary Interlock Switch S2 DC Power Supply PU1 Fusing Unit WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Is the power source voltage applied across Check wiring from PJ2PU1 1 to 3 on PU1 power outlet to S2 to 1 During this time the Right Door should be NO PJ2PU1 closed Is the power source voltage applied across YES Fusing Unit 2 CN30 1 and 3 or across 2 and 3 VETT NO Change PU1 17 4 Power is not Supplied to Option 17 4 1 Power is not Supplied to ADF WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location 1 Is DC24 V being output from CN51 1 on DF Y 8 YES Malfunction in DF 601 601 Is DC24 V being output from PJ12PU1 6 Check wiring from PU1 2 Pu1 QtoR 8 NO M CN4 to ADF 3 Is the fuse on PU1 conducting YES Change PU1 Malfunction in DF 601 17 4 2 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location 1 Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connector 26 NO Malfunction in Paper CN12 2 Feed Cabinet Is DC24 V being output from CNCST 2 on Check wiring from 2 PWB M J 23 NO PWB M to CN12 to Paper Feed Cabinet Is the fuse on PU1 conducting YES Change PU1 3 Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet 380 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 17 Power supply trouble 17 4 3 Power
236. 35 NOTE After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place DO NOT leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged 5 s 7 g s gt S 6 Remove the Screw 1 and remove the Connector protective cover 2 4038F2C051DA 64 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 7 Disconnect two Connectors 3 bizhub C250 4038F2C052DA 8 Disconnect two Connectors 4 5 o 7 g 4038F2C053DA 9 Remove four Screws 5 4038F2C054DA 65 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Unhook six tabs 6 and remove the Front Cover 7 bizhub C250 4038F2C055DA 6 3 14 Mechanical Control Board PWB M NOTE If a Finishing Option is installed remove if from the main unit before trying to remove the Mechanical Control Board g When removing the Finishing Option support the Horizontal Transport Unit with S your hand to prevent if from dropping 1 Remove the Exit Tray ww 57 2 Remove the Rear Left Cover uw 57 3 Remove twelve Screws 1 to remove the protective sheet of DC Power Supply 2 4 Remove the Harness 4 from three Wire saddles 3 NOTE When installing the Mechanical Control Board make sure to fix the Ha
237. 358 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 8 C2255 Color Developing Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts DC Power Supply PU1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Color Developing Motor M3 bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as necessary 3 Check the PU1 connector for proper _ connection and correct as necessary 4 Check the PWB M connector for proper _ _ connection and correct as necessary 5 operation check PWB M CNDM2 5 REM C 20 to 21 PWB M CNDM2 8 LOCK 6 Change PU1 7 Change PWB M 16 5 9 C2256 Color Developing Motor s turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts DC Power Supply PU1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Color Developing Motor M3 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri Step Action Control Signal cal Component operation check PWB M CNDM2 5 REM PWB M 8 LOCK C 20 to 21 2 Change PU1 3 Change PWB M 16 5 10 C2451 Transfer Cleaner Unit New Article Release 2 N e Ke 5 Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board PWB M
238. 4 and remove the Upper Front Cover 5 Remove four Screws 6 and remove the IR Left Cover 7 Remove two Shoulder Screws 8 and the Screw 9 and remove the IR Upper Front Cover 10 AAWN gt 55 bizhub C250 5 5 7 g s 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 3 Original Glass IR Front Cover 4 3 2 4 1 4037F2C035DA BEARER 56 Remove the IR Upper Right Cover 54 Remove each Screw 1 and remove the Original Glass fixing bracket near side inmost side 2 Remove the Original Glass 3 Remove the IR Right Cover and IR Upper Front Cover 54 55 Remove the IR Left Cover 55 Remove five Screws 4 and remove the IR Front Cover 5 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 4 Exit Tray Upper Rear Cover Lower Rear Cover Rear Left Cover 6 4 5 1 bizhub C250 7 10 9 4037F2C036DA 5 s 7 g s Remove the Left Cover 55 Remove the Sub Tray 1 Remove three Screws 2 and remove the Exit Tray 3 Remove the Dust Filter Cooling Fan 4 Remove four Screws 5 and remove the Upper Rear Cover 6 Remove seven Screws 7 and remove the Lower Rear Cover 8 Remove three Screws 9 and remove the Rear Left Cover 10 NOOR S 57 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 5 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover Multi Bypass Tray Right Cov
239. 4 3 Pick up Roller 1 Remove the Tray3 2 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy te See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 14 Cleaning of Separation Roller 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Pick up Roller 1 clean of dirt 43488251300 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 4 4 Vertical Transport Roller JE Ici 434815251900 3 Other Open the Right Door Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Vertical Transport Roller 1 clean of dirt 15 403 7 E s 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 PC 403 7 E Blank Page 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section e AdjustmentSetting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by PC 403 Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate e
240. 4 ERROR Control Board C CF101 SCAN TIME OUT Control Board C CF111 Compress TIME OUT MFP Control Board C CF112 Compress Table OverFlow MFP Control Board C CF113 Compress Table check MFP Control Board C 345 bizhub C250 d Q e Q bizhub C250 D Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CF121 Expand TIME OUT e MFP Control Board C CF122 Expand Table OverFlow MFP Control Board C CF123 Expand ExpandLine Abnormal MFP Control Board C CF131 Print TIME OUT MFP Control Board C CF201 startlRReadAnd MFP Control Board C Compress Sequence CF202 startWorkSave Sequence MFP Control Board C Abnormal CF203 convAPItolJCParameter page MFP Control Board C Abnormal CF204 calcCompresserUse CmpEx MFP Control Board C pID Abnormal CF211 setParameterBandColorPlane MFP Control Board C Table OverFlow CF212 convAPltolJCParameter page MFP Control Board C Abnormal CF213 calcExpandUse CmpExpID MFP Control Board C Abnormal CF221 startPrintOutput outputsize zero e MFP Control Board C CF222 Next request comes during MFP Control Board C processing of startPrintOutput CF
241. 403 D Q E Q 8 Trouble code 8 2 Trouble code list Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Description C0001 LCT communication error Due to a software malfunction etc the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed C0102 LCT Vertical Transport Motor malfunction The Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the LCT Vertical Trans port Motor is turning C0209 LCT Elevator Motor Failure The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT cannot detect both edges of H L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor M5 LCT is turning backward forward raise lower C0210 LCT Lift Failure The Lift Up Upper Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up operation began The Lift Up Upper Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift up operation began The Lift Up Lower Sensor PC13 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift up operation began The Lift Up Upper Sensor PC4 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up operating The Lift Up Lower Sensor PC13 LCT is not blocked even after the set pe
242. 4038F5C511DB 1 Developing Clutch K CL4 8 Waste Toner Full Sensor PC8 2 Exit Sensor PC2 9 Color PC Drive Main Sensor PC17 3 Temperature Humidity Sensor SES 10 Color PC Drive Sub Sensor PC18 4 Registration Roller Sensor PC1 11 Black PC Drive Main Sensor PC15 5 OHP Sensor PC4 12 Black PC Drive Sub Sensor PC16 6 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction 13 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Position Sensor PC6 Clutch CL3 7 Registration Roller Clutch CL1 dad o i Q Q lt 431 19 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 1 3 Tray 1 bizhub C250 4038F5C508DA 1 Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch CL2 4 1 Paper Size Board PWB I 2 Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor PC10 5 Tray 1 Paper Near Empty Sensor PC11 3 Tray 1 CD Paper Size Sensor PC9 6 Tray 1 Device Detection Sensor PC12 lt Q Q lt 432 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 1 4 Tray 2 Multiple bypass tray 19 Parts layout drawing 4038F5C504DA 1 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor M2 PC 2 Tray 2 Door Set Sensor PC5 PC 3 Bypass Lift Up Sensor PC14 4 Bypass Paper Feed Clutch CL5 5 Bypass Pick Up Solenoid SL2 6 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC 7 Bypass Paper Empty Sensor PC13 8 Bypass Paper Size VR UN1 9 Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor PC9 PC 10 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor PC6 PC
243. 4th row 3 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy ts See the procedures 1 to in page Replacing the Separation Roller Assy 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the harness from two wire saddles 5 Remove four screws 2 and remove the Paper Take up Unit 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 434816261700 434816260500 434816261800 434816261900 10 2 Periodical check Remove two screws 4 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 5 together with frame Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 Remove two C rings 8 two bush ings 9 and remove the Pick up Roller Assy 10 Remove the C ring 11 and remove the Pick up Roller 12 Repeat steps 1 to 8 similarly for the 4th Drawer Replace the Separation Roller Assy Paper Take up Roller and Pick up Roller at the same time PC 103 PC 203 7 g s 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Other 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field PC 103 PC 203 B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required
244. 5 ON FS 603 G 8 M7 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON RE ENE LUE fone ee 5 PWB A FN replacement 8 3 9 C11C1 Punch Control Board malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Punch Control Board PWB B PK WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Turn OFF the Main Power Switch wait 1 for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch Check the connection condition 2 between the Punch Unit and PWB A FN Measure the voltage between CN14 5 3 and CN14 3 of the PWB A FN Is the voltage 24VDC Initialize Punch Unit EEP ROM PWB B PK replacement PWB A FN replacement 64 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 3 10 C11C2 Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Side Registration Home Sensor 2 Punch Control Board PWB B PK FS 603 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 PI2P PK I O sensor check PWB B PK J1006B PK 3 ON FS 603 H 2 3 PWB B PK replacement 8 3 11 C11C3 Punch Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Punch Home Position Sensor 1 Punch Control Board PWB B PK Punch Motor Clock Sensor
245. 5 PC 403 G to H 6 PWB C1 LCT replacement i d Q e Q 35 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 PC 403 Blank Page D fe Q 36 memmen ea KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL AD 503 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 Th
246. 5 62 16 5 63 16 5 64 16 5 65 16 5 66 16 5 67 16 5 68 16 5 69 16 5 70 C3452 C3751 C3752 C3851 C3852 C3461 C3A01 C3A02 C4151 C4152 C4153 C4154 C4551 C4552 C4553 C4554 C4705 C4761 C4765 C4770 C4771 C4772 C4773 C4780 C4781 C4782 C4783 C5102 C5103 C5351 C5353 C5354 C5357 C5358 C6102 C6103 C6301 Press Heater Trouble Abnormal High Temp Heater sse 365 Abnormal High Temp Press 365 Abnormal Low Temp 365 Abnormal Low Temp Press 365 Fusing Unit New Article 365 Paper Stuck to Fuser Heater 366 Paper Stuck to Fuser Pressure 366 Polygon Motor C failure to turn 366 Polygon Motor M failure to turn see 366 Polygon Motor Y failure to 366 Polygon Motor K failure to 366 Laser malfunction Cyan sess 367 Laser malfunction Magenta sese 367 Laser malfunction Yellow 967 Laser malfunction Black 967 Image Output Time
247. 5250700 5 3 5 Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the Exit Motor M3 FN Timing Belt 1 Loosen three screws 1 2 Tighten three screws 1 so that the distance D between the upper end face of the head of three screws 1 and the upper end face of the slot in the mounting bracket 2 measures about 0 5 mm ol 468416250900 Set the sensor test mode Turn VR1 on PWB A FN fully counterclockwise Using a sheet of paper block the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED PWB C FN Check that LED4 on PWB A FN turns OFF If it stays ON slowly turn VR1 clockwise and stop turning it as soon as the LED turns OFF 13 FS 501 9 pe n D lt FS 501 2 x 5 n lt 6 Board switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Board switch LED1LED2 LED3 PH O ILLI 46841545030 Symbol Description 1 1 Used to run the Test Mode operation 2 2 Used to run the Test Mode operation 3 S3 DIP switch used to set the Test Mode operation 4 LED1 to4 Turn
248. 64 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 33 3451 Heat Heater Trouble 16 5 34 C3452 Press Heater Trouble 16 5 35 C3751 Abnormal High Temp Heater 16 5 36 C3752 Abnormal High Temp Press 16 5 37 3851 Abnormal Low Temp Heater 16 5 38 C3852 Abnormal Low Temp Press bizhub C250 Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Unit DC Power Supply PU1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the Fusing Unit for correct installa ER tion whether it is secured in position Check the Fusing Unit PWB M and PU1 2 for proper connection and correct or change as necessary Change Fusing Unit 4 Change PWB M Change PU1 16 5 39 C3461 Fusing Unit New Article Release Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Unit Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the Fusing Unit for correct installa _ tion whether it is secured in position Check the Fusing Unit PWB M for proper 2 connection and correct or change as nec essary Reinstall Fusing Unit d Q e Q 4 Change Fusing Unit E Change PWB M 365 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1
249. 8 Image quality problem 18 3 18 Printer Monocolor low image density A Typical Faulty Images Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 403615403600 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action State Confirm Check data for Vg and Vdc NO Go to next step Table Number Color Vdc Around 400 V 1 Service Mode Vg Around 500 V Black Vdc Around 400 V Vg Around 500 V 2 State Confirma Check TCR data NO Go to next step tion gt Level IDG output value is around 4 3V NO Clean IDC Sensor toyi Check Image Transfer Belt for Service Mode damage 4 Level History data Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 8 check results Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc YES Go to step 13 6 TCR falling within specified range YES Go to step 8 and low Vg and Vdc 7 TCR falling within specified range YES Go to step 13 and high Vg and Vdc 8 Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean 9 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES with cleaning jig dirty 10 TCR Sensor win The color TCR Sensor window on YES Clean dow the LED Assy is dirty 11 Image Transfer Image Transfer Belt Unit makes posi NO Check and correct contacts Belt Unit tive contact with plates on rails 12 Cam gear operates properly NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 13 Hopper Unit Connectors are loose YES Reconnect 14 Gear is cra
250. 8DA 32 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4583F3C519DA A 4583F3C520DA ARAB 5 Mechanical adjustment Remove the Middle Transport Unit 10 Remove the front cover 7 Loosen two screws 2 on the Tray Section Move the Tray Section 3 back and forth and move the positioning dow els 4 right and left to adjust 33 FS 603 D E 2 N lt 5 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 e If it is deviated downward A move lt A gt the positioning dowels to the left e If itis deviated upward lt B gt move the positioning dowels to the right NOTE The folding line will move along with the staples FS 603 lt B gt 4583F3C523DA 7 Carry out the test copy to see if there is any folding deviation If the deviation is not adjusted repeat the procedure from Step 8 to adjust the Saddle Section position 8 Loosen three set screws 5 on the Saddle Section 4583F3C521DA D N 5 n c lt 34 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4583F3C522DA D 4583F3C524DA 5 Mechanical adjustment 9 Move the two positioning dowels 6 to adjust e If itis deviated downward lt C gt move the positioning dowel to the left e If it is deviated upward D move the positioning dowel to the ri
251. Action Control Signal 2 1 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON o PWB C2 PC a 5 3 PC125 PC I O check Sensor check PJ10C2 PC 8 ON PC 103 203 G 6 5 PWB C2 PC X x gt 4 126 I O check Sensor check PJ11C2 PC 2 ON PC 103 203 G 6 PWB C2 PC 5 PC117 PC I O check Sensor check PC 103 203 C 4 PJ6C2 PC 11 ON PC 103 203 G 6 to 7 Change PWB C2 PC Change PWB M 6 M123 PC operation check PWB C2 PC PJ9C2 PC 1 to 4 324 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 Jam Display 15 3 9 Misfeed at Duplex transport section AD 503 A Detection Timing Type Description The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Transport Detection of Sensor 1 PC1 DU misfeed at Duplex The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU is not unblocked even after the Transport section lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper bizhub C250 The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper Detection of paper Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 left in Duplex PC2 DU is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is Transport Section opened and closed
252. Cartridge and found as error EEPROM access error The error was found when reading outthe counter C value C2A03 Yellow Toner Cartridge C EEPROM access error C2A04 Black Toner Cartridge EEPROM C access error C3301 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 s The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C3302 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 s The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary 337 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Description Rank C3451 Heat Heater Trouble The Heating Roller Thermistor 1 TH1 and the Heating Roller Thermistor 2 TH3 fails to raise a given degree of temperature even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Heating Roller Heater lamp 1 H1 is turned ON The detected temperature of the Heating Roller Thermistor 1 TH1 is lower for a given level of A degree than one of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 TH2 after the Front Door is opened or closed the Main Power Switch is turned ON or TROUBLE RESET is implemented The counter value of zero cross signal input is not updated for a given period of time bizhub C250 C3452 Press Heater Trouble The Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 TH2 fails to
253. Center 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care and touch Detail Setting 8 2 Touch Machine Setting Center Telephone Number 3 Input the telephone number of the Center using the 10 Keys Pad and P T W keys ts 259 Inputting the Device telephone number 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care and touch Detail Setting 9 2 Touch Machine Setting gt Device Telephone Number 3 Input the Device telephone number using the 10 Key Pad and P T W keys gt 259 Inputting the AT command for initializing the modem 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care and touch Detail Setting 2 Touch AT Command 3 Input AT Command 10 Change this Command only when it is necessary They do not need to be changed in normal condition For details on AT Command see the manual for the modem s 260 Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care 11 NOTE This setting is not normally necessary Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition Executing the initial transmission 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care and touch Detail Setting 2 Touch initial transmission on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission 3 When the machine is properly connected with the Center CS Remote Care setting screen will 12 be displayed NOTE The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the Center ID the Devic
254. Changing Adjustment Adjustment Zoom Ratio 9 5 n lt Printer Leading Edge Adjustment Adjustment H Centering Centering Duplex 2nd Side Media Adjustment Erase Lead ing Edge Finisher Center Sta Adjustment ple Position Half Fold Position 148 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Thick Paper Image Den sity Yellow Administrator System Expert Density Setting Setting Adjustment Adjustment 173 gt 173 bizhub C250 Thick Paper Image Den sity Magenta Thick Paper Image Den sity Cyan Thick Paper Image Den sity Black Image Stabilization Black Image Density Color Regis tration Adjus Yellow Color Regis tration Adjust Color Regis tration Adjus Magenta Color Regis tration Adjus Cyan Gradation Adjustment Copy 2 Pe i N D lt Printer Gradation Printer Resolution Scanner Leading Edge Adjustment Adjustment eK Centering Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment ADF Adjust ment
255. D N o 2 E is N a a 4038F4C511DA 1 Exit Sensor PC2 5 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC E 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU 6 2 Paper Take Up Sensor 9 E 3 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor2 PC2 DU 7 Vertical Transport Sensor PC2 LCT E 4 1 Registration Roller Sensor PC1 8 Paper Take up Sensor PC1 LCT 4 1 Sensor 4 1 Two different types of sensors are located in the area near 4 316 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 Jam Display 15 3 Solution 15 3 4 Initial Check Items g When a paper misfeed occurs first make checks of the following initial check items 2 Check Item Action 5 Does paper meet product specifications Change paper Change paper Is paper curled wavy or damp pap y p Instruct user in correct paper storage Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path
256. DA and press SET If adjustment result is NG Check the document position and cor rect it Make a manual adjustment on Original Stop Position H List Counter 1 Management List Functions 0 To output the value set by the setting menu se Setting 1 Touch Job Settings List Procedure 2 Select the Paper Feed tray and press the Start key 190 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 2 Paper Size Type Counter Functions To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type and to set Use the count Setting 1 Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys Procedure 2 Select the paper type 3 Touch the paper size key to select the paper size Standard Size Setting 1 Original Glass Original Size Detect Functions To change the document size detection table Use Use to change the setting for the document size detection table Setting The default setting is Tablet Procedure Table1 Table2 2 Foolscap Size Setting Functions To set the size for Foolscap paper Use Upon setup To change the size for Foolscap paper Setting Select the size from among the following five Procedure 220 330 81 2x 13 81 4 x 13 81 8 x 131 4 8 x 13 8 6 2 Administrator Machine Setting A Administrator Registration Functions To register the informati
257. DC2 t should normally be around 4 3 V The output range is 0 V to 5 V Reading taken last means Latest toner density When the Start key is pressed the output value is displayed while a test print is being produced Relevant Components IDC Sensor Transfer Belt Unit Temp Belt Shows the temperature of the Heating Roller Temp Heat and the Fusing Pressure Temp Press Roller Temp Press in 1 increments Relevant Components Fusing Unit 383 bizhub C250 d Q e Q bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 1 3 Level History 2 State Confirmation Level History 2 IDC Sensor Adjusti ATVC C 0 IDC Sensor Adjust2 D ATVC H ATVC Y ATVC K ATVC 2nd 4038F4E516DA IDC Sensor Adjust 1 IDC Sensor Adjust 2 Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255 The value becomes greater as the Transfer Belt Unit has been used more Relevant Components IDC Sensor Transfer Belt Unit ATVC C ATVC M ATVC Y ATVC K ATVC 2nd Shows the latest ATVC level which varies according to the paper type 300 V to 3000 V ATVC C M Y K 300 V to 5000 V ATVC 2nd Relevant Components Transfer Belt Unit High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 384 Field Service Ver 1 0
258. Drawer and remove it 2 Liftthe Main Drawer 1 and remove two screws 2 fixing the Shift Tray NOTE When reinstalling use caution because the wire of the Main Drawer comes off easily 434815350100 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Mechanical adjustment 3 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Shifter 4 PC 403 4 Pushthe tab 6 of the Shift Tray 5 as shown on the left and release the lock 5 Remove the Shift Tray 5 434815350300 6 Loosen the screw 7 fixing the Ten sion Pulley Assy as shown to the left and move it in the direction of the arrow 7 After moving the Shifter tighten the fixing screw 7 434818350400 2 Pe N lt 23 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 PC 403 Blank Page 2 5 n lt 24 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Jam Display Troubleshooting 7 Jam Display 7 1 Misfeed display PC 403 When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit 4061F4C801DA No Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1501 LCT Paper Take Up section 1 Right Door gt 28 2001 LCT Paper Vertical Transport Section 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure
259. Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC2 FN _ Transport Lower Lower Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC6 FN Full Non sort1 1st Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC20 FN Full Non sort3 Job Tray Full Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC7 FN Full Elev Tray Elevator Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC5 FN Empty Finisher Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Paper Paper not present present PWB D Surface Elev Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ Paper Paper not FN present present PC8 FN Empty Elev Elevator Tray Paper Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC9 FN Home CD Align CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC14 FN Staple Standby Staple Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC12 FN Home store roller Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC13 FN Home Exit roller Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked Home Stapler Stapler Home Sensor Unblocked Blocked Empty St Needle Staple Empty Detecting Sensor Unblocked Blocked Self Priming Self Priming Sensor Unblocked Blocked S2 FN Elevate Tray Raised Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch ON OFF S3 FN Lowered Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch PC10 FN Home Shift Shift Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC11 FN Shift Speed Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Unblocked Blocked 11 FS 501 9 Pe i N lt 5 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Mechani
260. F2C023DA 6 Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the Image Transfer Belt Unit 3 a little 4038F2C024DA 31 bizhub C250 Maintenance 3 Periodical check 4038F2C025DA B Reinstallation Procedure 4038F2C026DA 4038F2C027DA 32 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Hold the position 4 as shown in the left and remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit 5 NOTE Do not touch the surface of the Image Transfer Belt Unit Cover the Image Transfer Belt Unit with something such shade cloth to protect its surface from dust or for eign matter 1 Insert the Transfer Belt Unit 1 NOTE Insert the Transfer Belt Unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part Do not touch the surface of the Image Transfer Belt Unit Cover the Image Transfer Belt Unit with something such shade cloth to protect its surface from dust or for eign matter 2 Install the Image Transfer Belt Unit with two Screws 2 NOTE Replace the 2nd Image Transfer Roller the Ozone Filter and the Dust Filter Vertical Conveyance which are supplied with the Image Transfer Belt Unit at the same time 3 Close the Right Door 4 Reinstall the Imaging Unit and the Waste Toner Box 5 Turn ON the Main Power Switch 6 Close the Front Door 7 Select Service Mode Imaging Process Adjustment Gradatio
261. FN 2 Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN 8 WIRING DIAGRAM Q 3 Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC5 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A 2 ON FS 501 H 3 3 M3 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ8A 1 to 4 FS 501 B 1 4 PWB A FN replacement 24 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Jam Display 8 3 7 Stapler section misfeed A Detection timing 5 Description a Stapler section The Stapler does not return to its home position within a given period of time after E misfeed detection the forward drive of the Stapler has been started B Action Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor PC 14 FN Control Board PWB A FN Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC14 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ22A 3 ON FS 501 H 5 3 M6 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ10A 1 to 4 FS 501 3 4 Stapling Unit replacement 5 PWB A FN replacement a 8 3 8 Horizontal Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description The Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has Horizontal unblocked the Pape
262. FN CN13A FN 3 to 6 FS 603 B 4 4 55 FS 603 d Q e Q FS 603 D Q E Q 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 1 Trouble code display e The main units CPU performs self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel Malfunction detected Please call Technical Representative TEL 1234567890 FAX 1234587890 C 1180 4583F4E504DA NOTE Before starting the troubleshooting in relation to the Punch Mechanism C11CX be sure to turn OFF the main power switch of the machine 8 2 Trouble code list Code Item Description C1180 Transport System Drive The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN is not malfunctions unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from its home position The Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Roller has started moving from a position not the home position C1181 Paddle Motor The Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN is not unblocked malfunctions even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from its home position The Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN is not blocked even after the la
263. Finisher Installation Freestanding Document Alignment Center Supplies Staple Cartridge Option Job separator JS 601 B Functions Modes Group Sort Offset Group Offset Sort Sort Staple and Group Staple C Paper type No of Sheets to Mode Size Type Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray be Stapled Plain paper 250 sheets Thick paper OHP Film A6R to Wide Translucent 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R 60 to 256 g m paper 9 st Group Sort 5 4 2 x 8 1 2 to 16 to 68 Ib sanae MAY 12 1 4 x 18 Postcard Envelope Label paper Letterhead Plain paper 1 000 sheets Offset B5R B5 to A4R se Wide 2 81 2x11R Group 7 1 4 x 10 1 2R __ 60 to 209 Offset Sort 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 to Thick paper 16 to 55 1 2 Ib 500 sheets y x 8 x 12 1 4 x18 B4 8 1 2 x 14 or larger 60 to 90 g m 1 000 sheets B5R B5 to 195228 Sort 7 1 4 10 1 2R 8 1 2 11R Elevator 30 sheets Plain paper Cover Mode or smaller 60 to 80 g m Group Staple 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 to Tray gm 11x17 91 to 209 g m 500 sheets 16 to 21 1 4 Ib 24 1 4to 4 8 1 2 x 14 55 1 2 Ib or larger 20 sheets if originals of high ID Color Wise 3 is used 15 sheets when using Color Copy 90 paper 20 sheets when using Hammermill Laser Print90 paper o o E 00
264. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Double click the Firmware data and specify the directory to be uncompressed and then uncompress it WinSFX32 2 16 4 8 _ x Install Directory cAc250 Reference bizhub C250 4038F2E563DA NOTE When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed delete it before uncompressing 3 Mount the Compact flash on the PC and check the Drive name which was recognized in the Windows F drive in the following figure 5 s 7 E my Computer E loj xj Ele Edit View Favorites Tools gt search Folders CBristory Ug 05 gt Local Disk C 55 Control Panel Local Disk D JRemovable Disk F Compact Disc E object s my Computer 3 403615262360 46 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 4 Click Start Program Accessories Command Prompt to open the Com mand Prompt 5 Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory 6 Specify the Drive of Compact flash which was recognized through the procedure 3 and execute the mksf bat Input the C C250 card_work gt mkcf f Drive number in the below figure and push the Enter bizhub C250 E MC Microsoft Windows 2666 Version 5 00 2195 1 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2666 Microsoft Corp C gt cd c258 C C25 gt cd
265. HO Transport Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked Unblocked 25 FS 603 2 Pe i N lt 5 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Mechanical adjustment 5 1 Adjustment of the stapling position FS 603 The stapling position is adjusted by aligning the stapling position to the folding position This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more Forthe effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm refer to 6 Board switch te 40 Adjustable range 7 to 7 mm Increment 1 mm 5 1 1 Adjustment procedure 1 Set 11 x 17 to the Feed Tray 2 Touch these keys in this order Fold amp Staple OK 3 Setfive sheets of or 11 x 17 original blank paper acceptable in the Original Tray These five sheets are used for adjustment to minimize variation 4 Press the Start Key 5 Setthe mode to the Service Mode te For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the main unit service manual 6 Touch Finisher 7 Touch Center Staple Position Adj 2 5 n o lt Max 7 Min 7 4583F3E506DA 8 Renew the center folding of the finished copi
266. Heating Roller 0 to 10 step 5 C Thick 3 Range 7 10 to 10 step 5 others Pressure Roller 0 to 10 step 5 C Thick 3 1 10 to 10 C step 5 Adjustment If fusing performance is poor increase the setting Instructions If wax streaks occur decrease the setting If offset is poor decrease the setting Setting Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Fusing Temperature 3 Select the paper type and Fusing Roller type 4 Enter the new setting from the key 5 The temperature does not change immediately when the setting is change Wait a while before performing the subsequent steps NOTE Asa general rule do not adjust the fusing temperature on the pressure appli cation side 6 Touch END to validate the adjustment value 7 Check the copy image for any image problem 8 Make the adjustment for each type of paper 233 bizhub C250 2 Pe i lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 4 2 Fusing Transport Speed Functions To adjust the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed Use Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmen
267. Internal Que Table Control Error create enque deque CB171 Page Control Instance Genera C tion Error CB172 Page Control Timeout Error C CB173 Page Control Interface Error C CB174 Page Control Semaphore SUA C Acquisition Release Error CB175 Page Control Observer Regis C tration Error CB176 Page Control Unable to Check C TTI Domain CB177 Page Control Error Return from C TTI Rasterizer CB178 Page Control Receiving Job C Generation Error CB185 Page Control Receiving Data Size Logic Error Receiving Data C D are not Multiples of DotLine CB186 Page Control ImageBuf Acquisi C ES tion alloc Error CB187 Page Control Error Return from C E Compressor CB188 Control BandBuf Control C Error newInstance get free CCO001 Vendor connection failure e Itis detected that communications with the ven dor are interrupted for a given period of time or C more with Installed selected for the setting of vendor installation CC151 ROM contents error upon Afault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents C startup MSC check of the MSC PWB MFP during starting CC152 ROM contents error upon Afault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents C startup Scanner check of the PWB C during starting 343 bizhub C250 D Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005
268. L 3 8 CN27 E 7 to 8 3 CN8 D 7 9 CN29 E 9 4 CN6 E 3 to 4 10 CN32 E 12 5 CN22 E 8 11 CN9 E 2 6 CN58 U 16 12 CN25 U 15 2 lt lt 447 21 Timing chart Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 21 Timing chart 21 4 Main unit bizhub C250 Print request received Polygon Motor Main Motor M1 Color PC Drum Motor M2 Developing Bias DC Y M C K Color Developing Motor M3 Drum Charge Corona Bias Y M C K 1st Image Transfer pressure retraction Fusing Drive Motor M4 LD compulsion luminescence 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor M5 Color Developing Bias AC Black Developing Bias AC Main Erase Lamp Y LA4 Main Erase Lamp M LA3 Main Erase Lamp C LA2 Main Erase Lamp K LA1 TOD Signal LU Video Data Y Video Data M Video Data C Video Data K 4038F5E514DA 5 f lt 448 hart iming c 21 T Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 21 2 Automatic Document Feeder 06 qnuziq 1 sided mode xipueddy vasesas4Zeor le swzs6 dn ye URIS 0 _ jeuibuo puz uoissiusueJ jeubis 13 R jeuiBu o pug ues 1 pug ejejduio 0 eB
269. LL 52 FECE Uc ITE 53 7 3 1 Initial cheek OMS cer dire sri ke E E 53 7 3 2 Transport section misfeed eese 53 7 3 3 Horizontal Transport section 54 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 4 Folding position section misfeed 7 3 5 Stapler Section misfeed esee 7 3 6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed seen 55 8 8 Mmm 56 E 84 Trouble code display ee or rra EO XR ETE on tect 56 8 27 THEE EET 8 3 onion ooa 8 3 1 C1180 Transport System Drive malfunctions 8 3 2 C1181 Paddle Motor malfunctions seen 8 3 3 C1183 Elevate Mechanism malfunctions sese 60 8 3 4 C1192 Front Aligning Plate Motor 60 8 3 5 C1193 Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions 61 8 3 6 C11A4 Booklet Exit Motor 61 8 3 7 C11B1 Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions eese 62 8 3 8 C11B4 Stapler Folding Motor malfunctions esses 62 8 8 3 9 C11C1 Punch Control Board malfunctions 64 5 8 310 11 2 Punch Side Registration Motor malfunctions
270. M 371 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 71 C6704 Image Input Time Out Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Image Processing Board PWB C bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Select Service Mode State Confirma 1 tion gt Memory HDD Agj Memory Bus Check Scanner Memory Check the connectors between PWB C 2 PWB MFP for proper connection and correct as necessary Change PWB MFP Change PWB C Z 16 5 72 6751 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board PWB A Image Processing Board PWB C WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Correct the harness connection between u PWB A and PWB C if faulty Check for possible extraneous light and 2 correct as necessary Clean the lens mirrors CCD surface and 3 PES shading sheet if dirty 4 Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if E faulty or change Scanner Change PWB A Change PWB C D Q E Q 372 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 73 C9401 Exposure Lamp s failure to turn ON 16 5 74 C9402 Exposure La
271. Main Command C Response Sequence Error CB150 Line Control External Class C Instance Acquisition Error CB151 Line Control Job Start Error Starting Job Parameter Error C Child Job Generation Error CB152 Line Control Doc Access Error Report Buf Access Error CB153 Line Control Response Wait Timeout from External Task CB154 Line Control Internal Que Table Control Error create enque C deque D Q E Q CB160 1 Destination Control Instance Generation Error CB161 1 Destination Control Timeout Error CB162 1 Destination Control Interface Error 342 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank CB163 1 Destination Control Message FK 502 Service Manual 2 C Que Control Error CB164 1 Destination Control Sema E n C c phore Acquisition Release Error CB165 1 Destination Control Observer C Registration Error CB166 1 Destination Control Reception C Resource Check Error CB167 1 Destination Control Deploy ment Error of Sending Image C Information CB168 1 Destination Control Serializa C tion Error of Receiving Image CB169 1 Destination Control Access C Error to Quick Memory Data CB170 Page Control
272. Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step WIRING DIAGRAM Action Control Signal Location Electri cal Component Initial check items PC2 check Sensor check PWB M CNTH2 8 ON C 13 PC1 DU check Sensor check Q 21 Change PWB A DU oj A wl Change PWB M 327 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 1 Alert code The machine s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunction gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the State Confirm screen bizhub C250 06 1505 Ready to copy Henory 100 B alibu Density Separate Scan Maintenance call mark Machine Status D i Q E Q 4038F4E512DA 328 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 1 1 Alert list 16 Malfunction code f an image stabilization or Scanner fault occurs the corresponding warning code appears Code Item Description S 1 CCD clamp gain adjustment failure It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty P 5 IDC Sensor Front failure P 28 IDC Sensor Back failure All outputs of Se
273. N Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN Paddle Motor M2 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Check the connector of motor for proper 8 2 drive coupling and correct as neces n sary 5 PI2 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN9A FN 2 ON FS 603 B 8 E PI3 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN9A FN 8 ON FS 603 G 9 M2 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 6 PWB A FN replacement PWB A FN CN10A FN 9 to 12 FS 603 B 6 59 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 3 C1183 Elevate Mechanism malfunctions 1 Upper Limit Sensor Relevant electrical parts Shift Upper Limit Sensor PI15 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN FS 603 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 15 I O sensor check PWB A FN CN15A FN 12 ON FS 603 G 5 3 PWB A FN replacement 8 3 4 C1192 Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Finisher Control Board PWB A FN PI4 FN Front Aligning Motor M4 FN
274. N PJ20A 6 ON FS 501 H 6 M12 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON PWEAFN PJBA 5 t06 5 PWB A FN replacement 9 3 6 C11B0 Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Staple Home Position Sensor PC14 FN Control Board PWB A FN Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 14 I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ22A 3 ON FS 501 H 5 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch move the Stapling Unit out of its home posi 4 tion and turn ON the Main Power PWB A FN PJ10A 1 to 4 FS 501 B 3 Switch Operation check of the Stapling Unit Moving Motor M6 FN at this time 5 PWB A FN replacement 29 FS 501 d Q e Q 9 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 3 7 C11B2 Stapling Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Stapling Motor FS 501 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical components Step Action Check the Stapling motor connectors for 1 proper connection and correct as nec essary Check the connector of Stapling motor 2 for proper drive coupling and correct as
275. NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice eo E a lt 1 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 eo E a lt Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Periodical check Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 4 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol AD 503 2 1 1 Cleaning Transport Roller Roll 1 2 1 Open the Duplex Unit Door 1 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Transport Roller Roll 1 2 2 3 clean of dirt 5 o 7 3 4066F2C503DA 2 1 2 Cleaning Transport Roller Roll 3 Remove the Duplex Unit uw 6 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Transport Roller Roll 3 1 clean of dirt 4066F2C504DA AD 503 Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 1 3 Cleaning Ventilation Section 4066F2C505DA 4066F2C506DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the outside of the Ventilation Section 1 clean of dirt 2 Open the Duplex Unit Door 2 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the inside of the Venti lation Section 3 clean of dirt Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Other 3 Other 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited item
276. OTE The Ozone Filter is supplied with the Transfer Belt unit Replace it when replacing the Transfer Belt Unit Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 3 5 12 Replacing the Deodorant Filter 1 Holding onto the hook take out the Deodorant Filter 1 NOTE The Deodorant Filter is supplied with the Toner Cartridge Black Replace it when replacing the Toner Cartridge Black bizhub C250 4038F2C545DA 3 5 13 Replacing the Dust Filter Vertical Conveyance 1 Ifthe optional Automatic Duplex Unit AD 503 is mounted remove it t See AD 503 Service Manual B 2 Remove the Dust Filter Vertical Con 5 veyance 1 E NOTE z The Dust Filter Vertical Conveyance is supplied with the Transfer Belt Unit Replace it when replacing the Transfer Belt Unit 4038F2C020DB 3 5 14 Replacing the Dust Filter Cooling Fan 1 If the Dust Filter Cooling Fan is con taminated by dust or foreign matter clean it up 2 Remove the Dust Filter Cooling Fan 1 NOTE The Dust Filter Cooling Fan is sup plied with the Waste Toner Box Replace it when replacing the Waste Toner Box 4038F2C544DA 29 bizhub C250 5 5 7 E s gt 3 Periodical check 3 6 Replacing the unit 3 6 1 4038F2C021DA 4038F2C022DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit A Removal Proced
277. OU ED EA RI 317 15 3 1 Initial Check Items erret nnne 317 15 3 2 Misfeed at Tray 1 feed section 318 15 3 3 Misfeed at 2nd Image Transfer section 319 15 3 4 Misfeed at Tray 2 feed Tray 2 vertical transport section 320 15 3 5 MMisfeed at Manual Bypass feed 321 15 3 6 Misfeed at LCT feed and LCT vertical transport section PC 403 322 15 3 7 Misfeed at Tray 3 Feed and Tray 3 vertical transport section POIO PCI NERO Ht 323 15 3 8 Misfeed at Tray 4 Feed and Tray 4 vertical transport section PC203 324 15 3 9 Misfeed at Duplex transport section 503 325 15 3 10 Misfeed at Duplex Unit pre registration section AD 5093 326 15 3 11 Misfeed at Fusing Exit section seesssssseeeeneen 327 16 Malfunction code trennen nitri thirteen 328 16 1 Alert code rente eret nn ttti rte itr eet 328 1621 1 zc etn t 329 16 2 SOMONE sine rh eret m Fa ai era Due EE EC cO E HR AREE Cre ERE Duda 330 16 2 1 5 1 CCD clamp gain adjustment 330 16 2 2 P 5 IDC Sensor Front failure sene 330 16 2 3 P 28 IDC Sensor Back failure
278. Other 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 2 3 1 Exit Tray 1 Remove four screws 1 and remove P the Exit Tray 2 FS 603 458315252600 2 3 2 Front Cover 1 Remove the Middle Transport Unit ww 10 2 Open the Front Door 1 3 While pinching the claws 2 remove the Folding Jam Release Dial 3 4 Remove two screws 4 458315252700 o 7 E s 5 Remove the screw 5 and remove the Front Cover 6 45831252800 2 3 3 1 Remove the Middle Transport Unit ww 10 2 Remove two screws 1 and remove the Rear Cover 2 458315252900 45831253000 FS 603 5 s 7 E s gt 2 Other 2 3 4 Upper Door 458318253100 Si aN mm 190 4 y i5 2 3 5 Finisher Tray Upper Cover 458318253300 458318253400 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Open the Upper Door 1 and remove the Door Band Holder 2 by turning it clockwise Remove the Door Band 3 Remove the screw 4 and remove the grounding wire Remove the screw 5 remove the Finisher Tray Rear Cover 6 and remove the Upper Door 7 Remove the Front Cover Pondus the Rear Cover ons the Upper Door A the connector 1 Disconnect the connector 3 while holding up the Finisher Tray
279. Other 3 Remove the Flat Cable 3 4 Remove the Control Panel 4 1 Slide out the Tray 1 1 2 Slide out the Tray 1 3 while press ing the Slide Locks 2 at both ends 61 bizhub C250 7 g s bizhub C250 5 5 7 g s 6 Other 6 3 10 Tray2 4038F2C045DB 4038F2C046DB 62 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Slide out the Tray 2 1 2 Remove the Screw 2 and remove the Stopper 3 3 Slide out the Tray 2 while pressing the Slide Locks 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 11 Tray 2 Rear Right Cover Tray 2 Rear Left Cover 1 Unhooktwo tabs 1 and remove the Wiring cover 2 bizhub C250 4038F2C047DA 2 Remove four Screws 3 and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover 4 5 o 7 g 4038F2C048DA 3 Remove three Screws 5 and remove the Tray 2 Rear Left Cover 6 4038F2C049DA 63 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 12 Tray 2 Right Rear Cover 1 Remove two Screws 1 and remove the Tray 2 Right Rear Cover 2 bizhub C250 4038F2C050DA 6 3 13 Front Cover Remove the Front Door 59 Remove the Left Cover Upper Front Cover and Exit Tray 55 57 Remove the Toner Cartridges C M Y K 33 Remove the Waste Toner Box 27 Remove the imaging Units C M Y K
280. P Control Board C ing mode error CFAO6 getOnelmgIndexNumFromTh Control Board C No applied thread CFAO07 setBufBandFromOut MFP Control Board C No applied thread CFAO8 chkStartOutput No applied MFP Control Board C thread CFAO9 rptReleaseMemResultACS Control Board C No applied thread CFA10 rptEndBandTrans No applied MFP Control Board C thread CFA11 cancelTransExec No applied Control Board C thread CFA12 CC_ImgTransInfo allocTransin Control Board C dex CFA13 CC_MultiThreadProfile rptBuf2 MFP Control Board C MemClrEnd CFA21 Outside image input start Control Board C 22 Inside image outside output start s MFP Control Board C CFA23 Engine Input start MFP Control Board C CFA24 Buffer memory gt File memory MFP Control Board C transfer Start CFA25 BTC compression CMM start MFP Control Board C CFA26 Inside image PCIBridegDMA MFP Control Board C input output start CFA27 File memory gt Buffer memory MFP Control Board C transfer Start CFA28 BTC extension start MFP Control Board C CFA29 JPEG compression start MFP Control Board C CFA30 JPEG extension start Control Board C CFA31 Software resolution conversion MFP Control Board C start CFA32 Hardware resolution conversion Control Board C start 348 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code
281. P Control Board C page information Queue CF7D4 Touch panel coordinate data MFP Control Board C Queue CF7E4 Direct Key data Queue MFP Control Board C CF802 SIO Sending Port ENG Control Board Engine C CF806 SIO Sending Control Board C CF812 SIO Sending Port Fiery Control Board C CF815 SIO Sending Port Control Board C PIC PIC Terminal CF8ED SIO Sending Port EPNet Control Board C CF902 SIO Receiving Port ENG MFP Control Board Engine C CF906 SIO Receiving Port IRC Control Board C 347 bizhub C250 fe o e Ke 5 fe bizhub C250 D Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CF912 SIO Receiving Port Fiery MFP Control Board C CF915 SIO Receiving Port MFP Control Board C PIC PIC Terminal CF9ED SIO Receiving Port EPNet MFP Control Board C CFAO01 getOnelmgTransInfoFromTh MFP Control Board C No applied thread 2 chkEnableAllocExec default MFP Control Board C error setTransBandAndRepeatNum Control Board C error CFA04 Application ID error MFP Control Board C CFAO5 Thread selection image process MF
282. Part Signal Name tics Panel Display E 1 0 a PC201 Scan Home Sensor Scanner Home Sensor At home Out of ner home 201 Org Cover Size Reset Switch Lowered Raised PC202 Detecti 20 Degree Original Cover Angle Sensor Less than 20 or ng 20 more Sensor PC203 Original Size Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Original Originalnot Detection 1 loaded not loaded mounted PC204 Original Size Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original Originalnot Detection 2 loaded not loaded mounted Original Size m Detection 3 Not Usea gt gt Original Size m Detection 4 Not Used m Original Size Detection 5 Not Used n Original Size E Detection 6 Not Used gt Original Size Detection 7 m E u Original Size Not Used u u Detection 8 0 E 10 12 2 Table Number E 3 Functions To display the Vg Vdc output values calculated for the image density of the test pat tern amount of toner sticking produced on the Transfer Belt during an AIDC detec tion sequence Reference values C M Y K Vdc around 390 V Vg around 550 V Use Used for troubleshooting of image problems Setting If the value is high correct so that the image density becomes low Procedure e f the value is low correct so that the image density becomes high 286 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 12 3 Level History1 Functions To display TCR T C ratio IDC Regist Sensor output values and fu
283. Q Functions To make the various settings language paper size fixed zoom ratios etc according 2 to the applicable marketing area 5 Use Upon setup Setting Marketing Area Procedure Select the applicable marketing area and touch END to set the marketing area JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 These are the languages that can be selected on the Utility screen according to dif ferent marketing area settings Japan English Japanese US English French Spanish Japanese Europe English French Italian German Spanish Japanese Others1 English French Spanish Japanese Others2 Others3 English Japanese German French Italian Spanish Others4 lt Fax Target gt 1 Touch the Fax Target 2 Select the applicable marketing area using and keys and touch END D 10 8 2 Tel Fax Number Functions To enter the TEL FAX number of the service contact that will appear on the Touch Panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine Use Upon setup El Setting Enter the Tel Fax Number 19 digits from the 10 Key Pad S Procedure Use Interrupt key to enter 10 8 3 Serial Number Functions To register the serial numbers of the machine and options The numbers will be printed on the list output Use Upon setup Setting Type the serial numbers 9 digits 0 to 9 Procedure Printer Scanne
284. R When not Using the Product for a long time NWARNING When the product is not used over an extended period of time holidays etc switch it off and unplug the power gt cord g Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire S 6 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Ventilation NCAUTION The product generates ozone gas during operation but it will not be harmful to the human body If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases ventilate the room a When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b When taking a lot of copies c When using multiple products at the same time Stability NCAUTION Be sure to lock the caster stoppers In the case of an earthquake and so on the product may slide leading to a injury Inspection before Servicing CAUTION Before conducting an inspection read all relevant docu mentation service manual technical notices etc and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro A cedure using only the prescribed tools Do not make any qa adjustment not described in the documentation If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used the prod uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists Before conducting an inspection be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet
285. RING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Turn OFF the Main Power Switch wait 1 for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch 2 PWB C1 LCT replacement m 8 3 2 C0209 LCT Elevator Motor Failure Relevant electrical parts Elevator Motor M5 LCT Interface Board PWB H LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT Control Board PWB C1 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC10 LCT I O sensor check FWERH b rr LCT5 5 403 G to H 4 M5 LCT operation check PWB H LCT PJ2H lt B gt LCT 6 to 7 PC 403 G to H 5 PWB H LCT replacement PWB C1 LCT replacement D Q E Q 32 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 3 C0210 LCT Lift Failure 8 Trouble code Relevant electrical parts Lift Up Upper Sensor PC4 LCT Lift Up Lower Sensor PC13 LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT Lower Over Run Sensor PC7 LCT Control Board PWB C1 LCT WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Check the sensor connector
286. Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making loop at front of the Registration Roller when the sensor at front of the Registration Roller is blocked at Paper feed B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Sensor PC2 Registration Roller Sensor PC1 OHP Sensor PC4 Registration Roller Clutch CL1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Pur nd Control Signal piod nd 1 Initial check items 2 1 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C 3 3 PC2l O check Sensor check PWB M CNTH2 8 ON C 13 4 PC4 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 6 ON C 3 5 CL1 operation check PWB M CNSEN 18 ON 4 6 Change PWB M 319 bizhub C250 d pa e Q 15 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 3 4 Misfeed at Tray 2 feed Tray 2 vertical transport section e A Detection Timing N e Type Description gt Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor lt misfeed at Tray 2 8 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 2 Paper feed section Feed Motor M1 PC has been energized The Registration Roller Sensor 1 is not blocked even after the lapse of a Detection of given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sen misfeed at Tray 2 PC8 PC ver
287. S Replace the Imaging Unit abrasion on the PC drum Transfer Roller There is any stain damage 6 deformation or abrasion on the YES Replace the Transfer Roller Transfer roller Fusing Unit There is any stain damage deformation or abrasion on the A T Roller and Drive section of the YES Replace the Fusing unit Fusing Unit 8 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the Image Transfer Belt through the check of step 7 unit D Q E Q 426 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Appendix 19 Parts layout drawing 19 1 Main unit 19 1 1 IR section 19 Parts layout drawing 7 4038F5E513DA 1 Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 PC204 2 Image Processing Board PWB C 3 CCD Sensor Board PWB A 4 Size Reset Switch S201 5 Inverter Board PU201 6 Exposure Lamp FL201 7 8 9 10 11 12 Scanner Home Sensor PC201 Original Cover Angle Sensor PC202 Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 PC203 Scanner Cooling Fan Motor M202 Scanner Motor Drive Board PWB IC Scanner Motor M201 427 bizhub C250 da o i Q Q lt bizhub C250 fas o 5 a a lt 19 Parts layout drawing 19 1 2 Engine section Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F5C506DA 1 2 3 4 5 6 428 IDC Registration Sensor 2 SE2 Control Panel UN201 IDC Regis
288. SEN 3 ON C 3 3 CL2 operation check PWB M CNLP 13 ON C 9 to 10 4 Change PWB M D fe Q E Q 318 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 3 3 15 Jam Display Misfeed at 2nd Image Transfer section A Detection Timing Type Description Detection of misfeed at 2nd Image Transfer section The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor PC2 even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Registration Roller Clutch CL1 has been energized The Registration Roller Sensor PC1 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper Detection of paper left in 2nd Image Transfer section The Registration Roller Sensor PC1 is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The Sensor is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The Exit Sensor PC2 is blocked when the Image Transfer Belt Unit is being cleaned Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor Registration Roller Sensor PC1 does not transmit the paper even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked PC1 at Tray 1 feed 2nd Image Transfer section Loop Registration Reversing JAM
289. Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting 3 User Box Functions To register change the Box address when storing the Fax original in the box of the Use hard disk in the machine Setting A new address can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting At least one user box should be registered in order to register the Box address 159 bizhub C250 2 5 n o lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 B Group Functions 0 To register change a group of addresses to send Fax data simultaneously se Setting Anew group can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed group to check edit or delete the setting Atleast one address should be registered in order to register the group C Program Functions To register change the Fax program Use Setting Select any program No to check edit or delete the settin Procedure y prog 9 D Subject Text for E mail 1 Subject Functions 0 register the e mail subject when transmitting the Fax original se Setting Anew subject can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed subject to detail check edit or delete the setting The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject disp
290. Sensor 125 is blocked when the Main Power Switch is Set to ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva tion of sensor The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC126 PC has been blocked by a paper B Action Relevant electrical parts Tray4 Take up Sensor PC125 PC Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC Tray4 Take up Motor M123 PC Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Control Board PWB C2 PC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items PC1 I O sensor check PWB M CNSEN 8 ON C250 C 3 PC125 PC I O sensor check PWB C2 PC PJ10C2 PC 8 ON PC 203 G to H 6 AJ oj N PC126 PC I O sensor check PWB C2 PC PJ11C2 PC 2 ON PC 203 G to H 6 5 PC117 PC I O sensor check 103 PC 203 PWB C2 PC PJ6C2 PC 11 ON C 4 M123 PC operation check PWB C2 PC PJ9C2 PC 1to 4 PC 203 G to H 5 7 PWB C2 PC replacement um 23 103 203 gt gt d Q e Q 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 1 Trouble code display The main unit s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detec
291. Sensor 4 with a brush or the like Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Other 4 Other 4 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items DF 601 A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs Caution When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS and follow the corresponding removal proce dures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and Screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 5 o 7 11 4 Other Field Service
292. Sensor 1 PC1 DU is Transport section blocked by the paper The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU is blocked by the paper Detection of paper The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 remaining in the PC2 DU are blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON a door or cover Duplex Unit is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset transport section B Action Relevant electrical parts Duplex Control Board PWB A DU Mechanical Control Board PWB M Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU Duplex Unit Switchback Motor M1 DU Duplex Unit Transport Motor M2 DU 14 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C250 C 3 3 1 DU I O sensor check C250 Q 21 4 PC2DU I O sensor check C250 Q 21 2 5 M1 DU operation check PWB A DU PJ4A 1 to 4 C250 R 22 E 6 M2 DU operation check PWB A DU PJ5A 1 to 4 C250 R 22 9 7 PWB A DU replacement E E 8 PWB M replacement 5 memmen ea KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL FS 501 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC
293. Sheets 21 to 30 pages 33 sets 1000 Sheets Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Product specification F Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V supplied from the main unit DC 5 V generated by Finisher Max Power Consumption 63 W or less Dimensions 538 mm W x 637 mm D x 978 mm H 21 1 4 inch W x 25 inch D x 38 1 2 inch H Weight 38 1 kg 84 Ib G Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice ue 1 Product specification Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 o E 1 Blank Page Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other Maintenance 2 Other 21 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items FS 501 A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Oncethe red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resi
294. Software Switch 269 10 9 7 Scam GCaribration EC EE Ra 10 9 8 LCT Paper Size Setting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 9 9 Line Mag Setting 10 97 10 Data asisten e Eh ha Erb ribs ehe rea Eee t ei 271 g pem exeun 274 10 10 14 PrOCedUre usn ostro peei ies in dde ang in sicht 274 2 RAD 274 x NO DANN E 275 10 10 4 Service Call 275 10 105 275 1010 6 Maintenance ILES 275 10 10 7 276 10 10 8 Counter of Each Mode sese 276 10 10 9 Service Call History Data 276 10 10 10 ADF Paper Pages 10 10 11 Paper Jam History 10 10 12 Fax Connection coacta dette e eek e eaae 276 8 10 11 iSt OUIpUE cierre bnt 277 S 10 11 1 Machine Management List sess 277 E 10 11 22 Adjustment ner rro p ret rr ee 277 10 11 3 Parameter LiSt iic er decent nee eere ct ci RI ct eb e e end na 277 WO MLA Service Parameler ciere 277 gt 10 11 5 Protocol aCe sisi sass tsa Greci roter ti ice rr ha ber tian Gn er a ers e D 277 E 10 11 6 Fax Setting Lister
295. Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the Vendor connector for proper _ _ connection and correct as necessary Check the PWB M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 3 Change PWB M 16 5 79 CC151 ROM contents error upon startup MSC 16 5 80 CC152 ROM contents error upon startup Scanner 16 5 81 153 ROM contents error upon startup PRT 16 5 82 154 ROM contents error upon startup PH WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri cal Component 1 Check the ROM version Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card Control Signal 3 Replace the appropriate board 16 5 83 163 ROM contents error PRT Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component 1 Check the ROM version Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card 3 Change PWB M Step Action Control Signal D i Q E Q 374 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 84 CD002 JOB RAM save error Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP Hard Disk bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the Hard Disk connector for proper a connection and correct as necessary
296. The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a prede timing termined continuous period of time while the B Motor remains stationary 339 bizhub C250 d Q e Q bizhub C250 D Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 work I F Code Item Description Rank C5351 Power Supply Cooling Fan The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter Motor 1 s failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C5353 Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C5354 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motors The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C5357 Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C5358 Power Supply Cooling Fan The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter Motor 2 s failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C6102 Drive Home Sensor The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect the malfunction Scanner located at its home position The Scanner Home Sen
297. Touch Panel of the main unit 4583F4C505DA No Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1 7401 Transport section Front Door gt 53 2 7403 Horizontal Transport section Horizontal Transport Cover gt 54 3 7407 Folding Position section Front Door gt 54 4 7405 Stapler section Front Door gt 55 5 7404 Paper Stack Exit section Front Door gt 55 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door Q e Q 51 7 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 2 Sensor layout FS 603 4 458316452100 1 Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO 3 Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN 2 Entrance Sensor PI1 FN 4 Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN D Q E Q 52 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 Solution 7 3 1 Initial check items 7 Jam Display When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if necessary Are the
298. Unit and part B 3 of the Bypass Unit Cover are aligned in a straight line 2 L N El E lt 4038F3C004DB 307 bizhub C250 2 2 i n EI nl lt 14 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 When the Bypass Paper Size Unit base is mounted align the lever position of the Bypass Paper Size Unit with the tab at the center in a straight line 4038F3C512DA 4 After the Bypass Paper Size Unit base has been mounted check that the lever of the Bypass Paper Size Unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the Bypass Guide 5 Call the Service Mode to the screen and select Machine Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment Then carry out Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment tw 243 308 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 Mechanical adjustment 14 4 PH Unit Mechanical Adjustment 14 4 1 Skew Adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case When PH Unit is replaced 1 Turn on the Main Power Switch 2 Select Service Mode Test Mode gt Gradation Pattern and output the test pattern with the fol lowing conditions Conditions SINGLE HYPER Gradation 4 Color 3 Using the output test pattern check if each color of CMYK is printed in correct pattern If the pattern is not correct any trou bles suc
299. Upper Cover 2 and remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other 2 3 6 Upper Cover Remove the Front Cover 7 Remove the Rear Cover 7 Remove two screws 1 Open the Upper Door 2 and remove the Upper Cover 3 FS 603 458315253500 3 2 3 7 Side Guide Remove the Exit Tray 7 Remove the Front Cover 7 Remove the Rear Cover 7 Derail the Exit Tray Support Plate Front 1 and the Exit Tray Support Plate Rear 2 to the outside off the respective rail grooves 5 Remove four screws 3 7 E s AROREN REM 458315253700 6 Pull down the Side Guide 4 lightly disengage the Exit Tray Home Posi tion Detecting Lever Rear 5 and then remove the Side Guide 4 458315253800 n reassembling ensure of exact installation with the Exit Tray Home Position Detecting Lever Rear 5 set in the slot of the Exit Tray Home 6 Position Detecting Lever Center 6 After reassembly press each of these levers for several times to make sure of exact installation 458315253900 2 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 3 8 Middle Transport Unit 1 Remove four screws 1 an 2 Hold up the Middle Front Cove
300. Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 42 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 2 No Section Part name Ref page m 1 Front Cover 12 a Exterior Parts 2 Rear Cover 12 4 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 4 3 1 Front Cover Rear Cover 5 5 7 E s 458216252100 1 Open the Paper Take up Section Cover 1 and the Paper Exit Section Cover 2 2 Remove the Front Cover 4 by removing two screws 3 3 Remove the Rear Cover 6 by removing two screws 5 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 5 Howto use the adjustment section e Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine e Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by DF 601 Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that m
301. Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 8 7 Initialization A Data Clear 2 Functions To initialize the setting data 48 Use To clears the setting data 9 t For details on items to be cleared see 302 Contents to be cleared by Reset function NOTE When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below be sure to clear the data Referring data One Touch Registration User Authentication Account Track Setting Call the Service Mode on the screen Procedure 2 Select the key as follows System 1 gt Initialization Data clear 3 Press the Start key 4 When OK is displayed turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after lt B System Error Clear Functions e To reset the trouble data Use Use to clear the Jam Trouble Error displays and other improper displays t For details on items to be cleared see page 302 Contents to be cleared by Reset function Setting Pro 1 Call the Service Mode on the screen cedure 2 Select the key as follows System 1 gt Initialization System Error Clear 3 Press the Start key 4 When OK is displayed turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more 2 than 10 seconds after E 10 8 8 Install Date E 5 Functions To register the date the main unit was installed z Use Upon setup Setting 1 Call the Service Mode on the scre
302. When the setting is changed the function becomes valid by turning the Sub Power Switch OFF and ON again 2 5 n lt 270 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 9 10 Data Capture Functions When an error occurs it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error Use e When error occurs this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the print job data Setting NOTE Procedure The following conditions are necessary for this function When selecting Security Setting Security Details Print Data Capture in Administrator Setting Allow must be set The hard disk must be mounted to the machine When selecting Administrator Setting Network Setting FTP Setting FTP Server ON must be set 1 Select Service Mode System 2 and touch Data Capture Select ON While the Data Capture setting is ON the print job data from the PC will be stored in the hard disk 2 Check the IP address of the machine 3 Connect the PC Windows and the machine with Ethernet cable 4 Start the DOS command prompt of the PC and specify the IP address of the machine to start FTP TEE x Microsoft Windows 2000 Ve on 5 00 21951 lt gt Copyright 1985 2000 Microsoft Corp C gt ftp 172 16 80 225 Connected to 172 16 0 225 226 KONICA MINOLTA FTP server ready
303. X Report Use To print out the Confidential RX Report Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 6 Bulletin TX Report Functions To set whether to print out the Bulletin TX Report or not Use To print out the Bulletin TX Report Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 7 Broadcast Result Report Functions To set the format to output the Broadcast Result Report Use To print out the Broadcast Result Report All Dest Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses 1 Dest at time Outputs report after each transmission Setting The default setting is All Dest Procedure All Dest 1 Dest at a time 8 Paper Tray for Reports Functions U To set the Paper Feed Tray to output reports se Setting The default setting is Tray 2 Procedure e Items available to be selected are different depending on Paper feed option mounted Bypass Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 9 TX Result Report Check Functions To set whether to display the TX Result Report screen Use To display the TX Result Report screen Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF H Job Settings List Functions z The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed se Setting 1 Touch Administrator Setting gt gt Fax Setting Job Settings List Procedure 2 Select th
304. a one kokako j a eee Mo Sujg suoi 1 4 5 1384 uoissiwsues 13Sa yo 13sq uo ue 398 uo ues dn ye AC eBueuox3 E xg jeurBuo Ur ejejduio e fe uf 0 1x3 1 pug o11X3 puz pie o weis dr oye UIP or oue he Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 451 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 hart iming 21 T Val psas4Zeor 0 4x4 jeuibuo ui 1651 aw E 11651 eui 0 4x4 yo 39 115 ut piouajog Janoun 41 718 plouajos 1 9 uo yo uo TF yoinig uonensibeu yo 90d 20809 39 90 S uo 40 604 os Josuag AOUN 024 uo Josueg dn yoid yo 41 199 uo 105099 4909 Jedeg UM Josuag dwg 29 G E 1010 13 100W podsues 100W 39 dn eyej 198 uo yo uo 9 0959 qnuziq xipueddy 452 hart iming c 21 T Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 ion mode detect igi
305. account for Account Track Setting 1 Select the proper Account Procedure 2 Input the Account Name and the Password 3 Set the Output Permission and Max Allowance Set and touch OK 2 Account Track Counter Functions To display the status of use of the copier printer scanner and Fax for each account Use To check the status of use of the copier printer scanner and Fax for each account Setting 1 Select the account Procedure 2 Select the key for the item to be checked 3 For clearing the counter touch Clear Counter 4 For clearing the all counters touch Reset Counters D Print without Authentication Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified Use To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified Setting The default setting is Restrict Procedure Allow Restrict Procedure 2 Select the Paper Feed Tray 3 Press the Start key 2 E Counter List E Functions To print out the User counter and the account counter Use To output the user counter and account counter to be checked Setting 1 Touch Counter List The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication or Account Track 8 6 5 Network Setting A Setting 1 TCP IP Setting Functions To set whether to enable
306. acement NOTE Each sensor is automatically adjusted when the Power Switch is turned ON as special means for detecting a paper misfeed If a sensor adjustment error occurs through this procedure a misfeed is detected as paper remaining misfeed at the corresponding sensor d Q e Q 33 10 Set error detection Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Set error detection When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected the Panel of the main unit will have the following display DF 601 Close Section properly 2 4582F4E501DA lt Panel display and detection timing for each gt Description of error Detection start Detection timing display 1 Paper Exit section Cover When the Main Power Paper Exit section Open Close set error Switch turn ON Sensor when light blocked 2 Transport Tray section When the Main Power Transport Tray Open Close Sensor Cover set error Switch turn ON when light blocked Paper Take Up section When the Main Power Paper Take Up Section Open Cover set error Switch turn ON Close Sensor when light blocked When the document is set Size Reset Switch on the main unit ADF set error in the ADF when turned ON D Q E Q 34 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL PC 103 PC 203 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revis
307. ach indi e vidual machine N Sensor Check EMD 3 2 1 Sensors 1 a Tray1 Upper Limit Near Empty D Paper Passage C2 Betection D Tray3 Tranaport o Barier anion Paper Empty O Betaction 0 Take Up O Exit 0 F Near Empty D Paper Empty 0 Upper Limit 0 Detect Hear Empty D Manual 2 AEA D ii sehsbPe2 0 PC Drive Detect Betection 0 Take Up O Paper Empty 0 Rain sensor 0 Paper Empty 0 Upper Limit 0 Eb Sensor i 0 Wear Empty 0 Tray 4 Hain sensor 0 Vertical Device _ Black BC Drive Transport 0 Detection 0 Sub Senso 0 Take Up Di Paper Empty 0 Sensor Check 1 Sensors 2 LCT pappot Button Bauerse densor D 2nd Transfer EE Lift Up Upper 0 0918231095892 Retraction Lift Up Lower 0 Cassette Open OJ Transfer Belt rj ghate Tray o Bhift Motor ol Retraction Trey o BigUator Motor p Maste Toner NX Take Up 0 Duplex Toner Full Transport 0 Set 0 Paper Empty D Paper Passagel Ol 5 Main Tray 0 Paper Passage 0 Shift Tray 0 Horizontal Empty Trans Unit Lower Over Run 01 420001 0 Sensor Check EMD 3 1 Sensors 3 Side sbibch Finisher Exit Hon sort12D Empty Elev 0 Shift Speed 0 Exit Mon sort3 0 Hone CD Align 0 Exit Finisher 0 Staple Standby 0 Boss PEDBre D Transport LowerO 0 5 Full Hon sorti 0 Hone Stapler 0 7 Ful
308. ached Part No of the Transfer Kit 4038 0777 00 8 Also replace the Deodorant Filter packed in the Toner Cartridge K at the same time when 20 K is reached 4 Also replace the Dust Filter Cooling Fan packed in the Waste Toner Box at the same time when the Waste Toner Box is replaced 5 220 240 V areas only 6 110 V to 120 V areas only 7 A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check B Option Qua Actual Descrip Ref Page No Classification Parts name ua durable Parts No Hp in this ntity x tions cycle 1 manual 1 Pick up Roller 2 200K 4582 3022 xx Replace 2 DF 601 Feed Roller 1 200K 4582 3014 xx those three parts at the 3 Separation Roller 1 200K 4582 3047 same time 22 4 PC 103 Pick up Roller 1 300 4030 3005 xx Replace 5 PC 208 Feed Roller 4030 3005 xx those three PC 408 parts at the 6 7 Separation Roller Assy 1 300 K 4030 0151 same time 1 Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value 2 See each Option Service Manual 3 3 2 Cleaning parts Descrip Ref Page No Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle 1 UR in this manual 1 Processing comb Electrode When is replaced 20 34 section 2 Registration Roller Upon each call 60 K ts 27 sec
309. achine which is detected Yellow TCR Sensor determined by Toner replenishing amount control B mechanism is 12 or more for a given number of times consecutively C2557 Abnormally low toner density TC ratio in the developing machine which is detected Black TCR Sensor determined by Toner replenishing amount control B mechanism is 5 or less for a given number of times consecutively C2558 Abnormally high toner density TC ratio in the developing machine which is detected Black TCR Sensor determined by Toner replenishing amount control B mechanism is 12 or more for a given number of times consecutively C2559 Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment TCR Sensor automatic adjustment does not func B failure tion properly failing to adjust to an appropriate C255A Magenta TCR Sensor value adjustment failure C255B Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment B failure C255C Black TCR Sensor adjustment B failure C2651 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM The re written data which has been read out C access error checked and founded as error is read out again C2652 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM found as error access cnr dd error was found when reading out the counter value C2653 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM C access error C2654 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM c access error C2A01 Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM The re written data which has been read out C access error checked and founded as error is read out again C2A02 Magenta Toner
310. ackside of the 2 sided copy deviates in the main scan direction Adjustment Width A Specification idt Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range For measurement use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments Adjustment Instructions f width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the current one f width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the current one Setting Procedure 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Printer Adjustment Centering Duplex 2nd Side 3 Select the paper source to be adjusted 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 6 If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 8 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy 9 If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 10 If width A falls within the specified range touch OK 11 Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the M
311. after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from its home position The Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Stapler Unit has started moving from a position not the home position 57 FS 603 d Q e Q FS 603 D Q E Q 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Description C11B4 Stapler Folding Motor malfunctions The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the clinch operation has started An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during a clinch operation The Folding Home Position Sensor 11 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Folding Unit has started moving from a position out of the home position during an initial operation The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding oper ation has been started during an ordinary operation The Folding Home Position Sensor PI11 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a folding oper ation has been started and the sensor has been unblocked dur ing an ordinary operation An encoder clock input is not detected within
312. ail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E Mail Scan to Internet FAX is completed 19 Standard Controller Maintenance 7 L n El E lt Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2212101279 Blank Page Bumes uewysn py Bunoouse qnoa j ii Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Controller specifications General 1 Controller specifications 1 1 Type Type Built in type controller Print Speed 25 ppm Color B amp W A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 paper and simplex 23 ppm Color B amp W A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 paper and duplex Printer Language PCL5e c Emulation PCL6 XL 2 1 Emulation PostScript Emulation 3011 xx xx CPU PPC750 FX 466 MHz Program ROM 64 MB RAM 512 MB Hard Disk 40 GB Host Interface Standard Ethernet 10Base T or 100Base TX Optional USB 1 1 USB 2 0 or IEEE 1284 1 Network Protocol IPX SPX Auto Ethernet Il 802 2 802 3 802 3 SNAP NetBEUI TCP IP SMTP POPS FTP SNMP HTTP 1 1 DHCP ARP ICMP BOOTP SLP Apple Talk Network Print Service Pserver NDS NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 x Pserver Bindery NetWare 4 x NDPS NetWare 5 x 6 x SMB RAW Port Printing Port 9100 To be changed from PageScope Light IPP 1 1 LPD Network Scan Functions
313. aintenance procedure Periodical check parts NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol 3 1 1 Transport Belt 45825250100 458215250200 45821250300 458215250400 A Replacing procedure 1 Remove two C clips 1 2 Remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy 2 from the belt 3 connected 3 Pull out and remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy 4 NOTE In reassembling ensure that the Transport Belt Roller Assy is set exactly to the connection belt 4 Remove two screws 5 and pull up the Roller Section 6 DF 601 7 s DF 601 5 s 7 E s 3 Periodical check 5 gt lt 3 1 2 Pick up Roller Paper Take up Roller A 1 2 Ly 9 458218250700 3 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Transport Belt 7 Replacing procedure Open the Paper Take up Section Cover 1 press inward and unlock the locking claws 2 at both ends of the Paper Take up Section Guide the Inner Cover and remove the Paper Take up Section Guide 3 Remove the screw 4 on the rear side of the Pick up Paper Take up Roller Assy shaft positioning plate and two C clips 5 at both ends of the Pick up Paper Take up Roller Assy shaft and remove the Pick up Paper Take up Roller As
314. al into pages when it is longer than the standard size Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 9 File After Polling TX Functions To set whether to delete the original which Polling transmission has been completed Use For not deleting the original which polling transmission has been completed Setting The default setting is Delete Procedure Delete Save E Function Setting 1 Function ON OFF Setting F Code TX Functions To set whether to use the F Code transmission Use Tocancel the F Code transmission Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF NOTE When the setting is changed turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after 218 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 2 Memory Functions To set whether to use the forced memory RX function Use To store the received text in the hard disk without printing and print it out when ordered Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF Enter the password up to 8 digits for printing when set to ON 3 Closed Network RX Functions To set whether to use the closed network function Use To receive data only from the device which password matches Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When set to ON enter the password up t
315. al parts Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Exit Motor M3 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces E 3 PIZ FN I O sensor check PWB A FN 5 FN 6 ON FS 603 G 5 E M3 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement PWB A FN CN13A FN 3 to 6 FS 603 B 4 61 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 7 C11B1 Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Slide Motor M8 FN FS 603 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 j for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI18 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN11A FN 3 ON FS 603 B to C 5 M8 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement PWB A FN CN7A FN 3 to 6 FS 603 B 5 8 3
316. alfunction 16 5 69 C6103 Slider Over Run N Relevant Electrical Parts amp Scanner Home Sensor PC201 Scanner Motor Drive Board PWB IC 5 Scanner Motor M201 Image Processing Board PWB C WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Correct or change the Scanner drive m E cable pulley gear belt if it is faulty Correct the Scanner Motor set screw if loose Adjust Image Position Leading Edge and Feed Direction Adjustment Check the PC201 M201 PWB IC and 4 PWB C connector for proper connection and correct as necessary 5 PC201 I O check Sensor check PWB C PJ11C 8 ON 7 13 201 operation check PWB IC 1 REM PWB IC PJ3IC 3 LOCK 7 PWB IC 8 Change PWB C Z Y 7 16 5 70 C6301 Scanner Cooling Fan Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Cooling Fan Motor M202 Image Processing Board PWB C Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the connector of motor for proper E connection and correct as necessary 5 2 Check the fan for possible overload and _ correct as necessary 3 M202 operation check PWB C PJ81C 2 REM T0 to 11 PWB C PJ81C 3 LOCK 4 Change PWB C Change PWB
317. am Display 74 Misfeed display scissura isaisa 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 7 2 1 7 3 1 Initial Check Items coi itat en ied cr ee En OX GR 7 3 2 Duplex Unit pre registration section misfeed AD 503 7 3 3 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed 503 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 0S dV 2212101279 Blank Page Bumes uewysn py Bunoouse qnoa j ii Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Product specifications General 1 Product specifications A Type Name Duplex Unit Type Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Installation Mounted on the right side door of main unit Document Alignment Center B Paper type Type Plain paper 64 to 256 g m 17 to 68 Ib Size ASR to Wide 5 5 x 8 5R to 12 x 18 Print paper size width 139 7 to 311 1 mm 5 5 x 12 25 inch length 148 0 to 457 2 mm 5 75 x 18 inch C Machine specifications Power Requirements DC 24 V x 10 6 supplied from the main unit DC 5 V 5 supplied from the main unit Dimensions 110 mm W x 440 mm D x 345 mm H 4 25 inch W x 17 25 inch D x 13 5 inch H Weight 3 0 kg 6 5 Ib D Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit
318. amage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or fire D S 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints NWARNING Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage Current can leak leading to a risk of trouble or fire Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit P H unit incorporating a laser make sure that the power cord has been disconnected ab The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight Do not remove the cover of the write unit Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount ing position Q The laser light can enter your eye leading to a risk of loss of eyesight When replacing a lithium battery replace it with a new lith ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by q local authority Improper replacement can cause explosion After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied e g Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly If the interlock does not function you may receive an qb electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product e g for clearing paper jam optical lamp and fixing lamp be sure to check the installa tion state A risk of fire exists Make sure
319. ame Procedure 2 Enter the DNS Host name on the screen key board and touch OK 7 E E 11 DNS Domain Name S Functions To set the DNS Domain name Use To enter the DNS Domain name Setting 1 Touch DNS Domain Name Procedure 2 Enter the DNS Domain name using the keyboard on the screen and touch OK B NetWare Setting 1 NetWare Setting Functions To enable or disable the NetWare setting Use To use NetWare setting Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 200 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 2 Ethernet Frame Type Functions To set the Ethernet Frame Type Use To specify the Frame type for transmission Setting The default setting is Auto Detect Procedure Auto Detect 802 2 802 3 Ethernet Il 802 2SNAP 3 Operating Mode Functions To set the Operation Mode Use To change the Operation Mode Setting The default setting is PServer Procedure PServer Nprinter Rprinter 4 Status Functions To display NetWare status Use To check NetWare status Setting 1 Touch Status Procedure 2 Touch UP Down arrow keys to select the server to check 3 Check the NetWare status 5 Print Server Name Print Server Password Functions To set the Print server name and Print server password Use To enter the print server name or the p
320. an direc ion exceeds 399 mm at FAX scan it is regarded as the Large Size A3 BAH1 x 17 81 2 x 14 When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan direction and 355 mm in the sub scan direc ion exceeds 337 mm at FAX scan it is regarded as the Large Size A3 11 x 17 B4 81 2 x 14 Foolscap When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan direction and 330 mm in the sub scan direc ion exceeds 313 mm at FAX scan it is regarded as the Large Size However the size in the main scan direction changes according o the Foolscap Size Setting Not counted Default US Others 4 Japan A3and 11 x 17 5 B4 11 x 17 and 81 2 x 14 Default Europe Others 1 Others 2 Others 3 B4 Foolscap 11 x 17 11 x 14 and 81 2 x 14 Count up Table E 5 3 Copying 1 Sided 2 Sided Sizes other Sizes other Size than Large Large sizes than Large Large sizes sizes sizes Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Counter Type 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 Total 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 Size 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 2 2 sided Total 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 No count 1 1 count 2 2 counts 3 3 counts 4 4 counts 300 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 12 Billing Setting 12 3 2 Management Function Choice e Functions To set whether or not the Key Counter and Management Device are installed Use Use to change the counting method for the administrative units 2 Setting Key Counter 5 P
321. anced Security settings 21 Parallel adjustment of Scanner Mirrors Carriage 22 1 Positioning Exposure Unit 23 2 Scanner Motor belt adjustment 24 PH skew adjustment 25 F W upgrading 26 Installation of Original Size Sensor 27 Remounting of Parameter Chip Control Board 28 Remounting of NVRAM MFP Control Board 29 Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit 30 226 9 Adjustment item list This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 0829 qnuziq 1ueunsn py peog xv4 227 M 4 e1n2ex3 uondo einoex3 O einoex3 a 01 Q 493un02 Aey sig 108095 e ejdeu eoejdeu peog p1eog 1 Josueg 1euueog Assy Jauueos 2 1 JOJOW Jeuueog 2 1 4 1euueog 2 3 1 Hd X 3 Josueg gt a Bunoejeq ezig eoejdeu been replaced Priority order if applicable during the adjustment procedures is indicated
322. anual Bypass Tray 179 bizhub C250 9 Pe i n D lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Media Adjustment Functions Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC on the 1st page and the 2nd page for D each paper type E This function is provided to open Transfer Output Fine Adjustment 2nd Transfer N Adjust of Service Mode up to Administrator and the fine adjusted value is reflected in 2 the Service Mode setting Use To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs Adjustment Nn Specification 5 Adjustment To increase the ATVC value in the direction of a foggier image Instructions increase the setting value in direction To decrease the ATVC value in the direction of a less foggy image increase the setting value in direction Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Expert Adjustment Printer Adjustment Media Adjustment 3 Select the side of the image Front side or Back side on which the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs Select the paper type with the transfer failure at the trailing edge Enter the new setting from the Touch OK to validate the adjustment value Check the copy image for any image problem NOUA lt Erase Leading Edge gt Functions To set the leading edge
323. aple loaded loaded Stapler Connect Stapler connection detected MS3 FN Stapler Safety SW Safety Switch Rear Open MS4 FN Staple Safety Switch Front 121 Self Prime Self Priming Sensor READY 122 Front Door Front Door Open Sensor Open PI23 FN Upper Cover Upper Cover Open Sensor Open 284 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode Operation Characteris Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name tics Panel Display A 1 0 MS1 FN Sad Front Door SW Front Door Open Sensor Open 2 dle Remain in Paper Reverse Section horiz side in MS2 FN isher Joint SW Joint Open Sensor Open Punch Punch Depth1 Unit Punch Punch Depth3 Punch Depth4 Punch Dust Punch trash full Punch Timing PI3P PK Punch Motor Punch Motor Clock Sensor Blocked Clock Punch Home Punch Home Position Sensor HP PI2P PK Punch Depth Side Registration Home Sensor HP Home PC6 HO Horizontal Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked Unblocked Transport Door 2 Pe i N D lt 285 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 G Sensors 5 Main Unit Symbol Operation Characteris e Panel Display
324. apling Unit Moving The Staple Home Position Sensor PC14 FN does not go HIGH Motor drive malfunction even after the lapse of a given period of time after M6 FN has been energized to return the Stapling Unit to its home position C11B2 Stapling Motor drive Stapling Motor is not deenergized even after the lapse of a given malfunction period of time after it has been energized to start a stapling sequence 26 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Trouble code 9 3 Solution 9 3 1 C1182 Shift Motor drive malfunctions 5 10 Relevant electrical parts A Shift Home Position Sensor PC10 FN Control Board PWB A FN Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC11 FN Shift Motor M8 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC10 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A 12 ON FS 501 H 2 4 PC11 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A 14 ON FS 501 H 2 5 M8 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ5A 3 to 4 FS 501 H 7 6 PWB A FN replacement 9 3 2 C1183 Elevator Motor drive malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN Control Board PWB A FN Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch S2 FN Elevat
325. at DMA D 3 image MFP Control Board C output interface 1 CFB72 Underrun at DMA G image out e Control Board C put interface 1 CFB73 Overflow at DMA A B image MFP Control Board C output interface 1 CFB74 Underrun at DMA F ASIC 1 MFP Control Board C image output interface CFB75 Overflow at DMA C ASIC 1 MFP Control Board C image input interface CFB76 Target abort MFP Control Board C CFB77 Master abort Control Board C CFB78 Forced stoppage MFP Control Board C CFB79 Retry error detection of PCI MFP Control Board C master CFB7A Master read data parity error MFP Control Board C CFB7B Master write data parity error MFP Control Board C CFB7C System error Control Board C CFB7D Slave read data parity error MFP Control Board C CFB7E Slave write data parity error Control Board C CFB7F Address parity error MFP Control Board C CFB80 DMA M error interruption MFP Control Board C CFB81 DMA NO error interruption MFP Control Board C CFB82 DMA N1 error interruption MFP Control Board C CFB83 DMA N2 error interruption Control Board C CFB84 DMA NG error interruption MFP Control Board C CFC01 Color Number faulty Control Board C CFCO02 Thread Sequence malfunction MFP Control Board C CFCO03 Thread Service Sequence MFP Control Board C malfunction CFC04 Thread Message Q malfunction MFP Control Board 12 O
326. available The address will be cleared even when OFF is selected Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF E Auto Color Level Adjustment Functions To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black and white original in the Auto Color mode Use To change the criterion level for the partly colored image to be taken as a black and white original Setting Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3 Procedure Black Standard Full Color 1 2 e 4 5 8 5 2 Display Setting A Sub Screen Display ON OFF Functions To set the Sub Screen Display on the control panel Use To change the Sub Screen Display Setting Value An illustration of the selected key will be displayed Job List The list of job which are being executed will be displayed Setting The default setting is Setting Value Procedure Setting Value Job List 163 bizhub C250 9 pe i N lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 B Scan Basic Screen Default Seeing 1 Default Tab Functions To set the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode Q 2 Use To change the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode a Setting The default setting is Program Procedure Program Group Address Book Direct Input 2 Program Default Functions To set the d
327. ay cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Caution to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands 2 Pe i N lt 13 DF 601 iz 2 5 lt 6 Service Test Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Service Test Mode The Service Test Modes are set from the Service Mode screen of the main unit 6 1 Service Mode setting procedure Press the Utility Counter key Touch the Details Check key Press the keys STOP gt 0 0 STOP 0 1 in this order Enter the service code 8
328. bine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select Use To cancel selecting the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select Setting The default setting is Auto Display Zoom Ratio Procedure Auto Display Zoom Ratio OFF D Sort Group Auto Change Functions To set whether to automatically switch Sort Group according to the number of origi nals and the copies Use Tocancel the function to automatically sort two originals or more when they are set to ADF Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF E Auto Magnification Selection Platen Functions To set whether to function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected with document set on the Original Glass excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode Use To function the Auto Magnification when the Tray is selected Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF F Auto Magnification Selection ADF Functions To set whether to function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected with document set on the ADF excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode Use To function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF G Specify Default Tray when APS Off Functions To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled Use To set the Tray for
329. biting the user from changing the Copy program Setting 1 Touch the key for the appropriate Copy program Procedure 2 Touch OK 175 bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Delete Saved Program Jobs Functions To delete the registered Program Job Use To delete the registered Program Job Setting 1 Touch the appropriate Program Job Procedure 2 Touch Delete 3 Touch Yes on the Check screen to delete the Program Job 3 Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the Job Use To Restrict the change on the print priority for the Job Setting The default setting is Allow Procedure Allow Restrict lt Deleting Other User s Jobs Functions To set whether to allow or restrict Job delete by other users when the user is authen ticated Use To allow other users to delete the Job when the user is authenticated Setting The default setting is Restrict Procedure Allow Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address Use To prohibit the change on the registered address Setting The default setting is Allow Procedure Allow Restrict
330. ble connecting Connector is connected properly NO Reconnect 1 and with no pins bent printer 2 Image Processing Connectors on the Image Process NO Board PWB C ing Board are connected properly MFP Control Data on previous page is mixed NO Reinstall expanded memory 3 PWB with data on current page MFP Test Mode The problem is eliminated as NO Change interface connection 4 Service Mode checked with the image on a test cable pattern produced Image Processing The problem is eliminated after the NO Change Image Processing 5 PWB C interface connection cable has Board been changed MFP Control The problem has been eliminated NO Change MFP Control Board 6 Board through the checks of steps up to 5 PWB MFP d Q e Q 399 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 14 Printer Monocolor white lines in Sub Scan Direction white bands in Sub Scan Direction colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction A Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub White bands in Sub Colored lines in Sub Colored bands in Sub Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction bizhub C250 403616402100 403615402200 4036154023 0 403615402400 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Image check white lin
331. ble only when carrying out the User Authentication and Account Track 7 of Counters Assigned for Users Functions To set the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account reg istration Use To change the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account registration Setting The default setting is 500 Procedure The total number to be registered for the User Authentication and Account Track is 1000 The number for the User registration will be set When setting the of Counters Assigned for Users to 50 the number available for Account Track will be 950 NOTE The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication and Account Track 196 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode B User Authentication Setting The settings are available only when carrying out the User Authentication 1 Administrative Setting at lt User Name List gt 2 5 gt Functions To set whether to display or not the list key for User names on User Authentication 5 Screen Use To display the list key for User names on User Authentication screen Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF Default Function Permission Functions e To set the default value for the Function Permission in User Authentication by the External Server Use set the function which authenticated user ca
332. bove specifications When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path such as when working around the printerhead and PC Drum be sure first to turn the printer OFF If the job requires that the printer be left ON take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path Use utmost care when handling tools on the user s premises The Print Head is not to be disassembled or adjusted in the field Replace the Unit or Assembly including the Control Board Therefore remove the Laser Diode and do not perform Control Board trimmer adjustment S 17 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on in the machine When accessing these areas for maintenance repair or adjustment special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock AN High voltage e This area generates high voltage Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock This area generates high voltage Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock 4038P0C506DA S 18 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Do not position the used Waste Do not burn used Toner Cartridges Toner so that it is standing Toner expel
333. c Per Text 1 Setting Registration sonal User Box 173 gt 191 Bulletin Board User Box 1 JOne Touch address Book Registration Li 1 ist List Group List H Program List E Mail Sub ject Text List User Authenti General cation Account Settings Track 9 te 195 User Authenti _ Administra User Name cation Setting tive Setting List User Default A Function Registration S Te Permission User Counter Account Account Track Track Setting Registration Print without Account Track Authentication Counter Counter List Network TCP IP Setting Setting gt 198 NetWare Setting H IPP Setting H FTP Setting H SMB Setting 151 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N D lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Administrator Network AppleTalk 2 Setting Setting Setting 173 198 2 LDAP Enabling 4 Setting LDAP a Setting Up LDAP E Mail E Mail TX Setting SMTP E Mail RX POP Detail Device Setting Setting Time Adjust ment Setting Status Noti Notification i Address cation Setting Setting PING Confir Notification mation Item Setting 2 PSWC Notification E Setting Time Set
334. cabinet is mounted disconnect the Connector 1 4038F2C089DA 81 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 3 Remove the Screw 2 and remove the Metal blanking plate 3 bizhub C250 4038F2C090DA 4 Remove the Harness 5 from the Wire saddle 4 L 5 5 7 g 5 4038F2C091DA 5 Remove all the Connectors on the Tray 2 Control Board 4038F2C092DA 82 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 Remove four Screws 6 and remove the Tray 2 Control Board 7 bizhub C250 4038F2C093DA 6 3 26 Tray 2 Paper Size Board PWB I PC 1 Slide out the Tray 2 Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover and Tray 2 Rear Left Cover 63 3 If the optional paper feed cabinet is mounted disconnect the Connector 1 5 o 7 B 4038F2C089DA 3 4 Remove the Screw 2 and remove the Metal blanking plate 3 4038F2C090DA 83 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Remove the Harness 5 from the Edge cover 4 bizhub C250 4038F2C094DB 6 Remove three Screws 6 and remove the Tray 2 Control Board Assy 7 5 s 7 g 4038F2C095DA 7 Remove two Claws 8 and the Con nector 9 and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board Assy 10 10 4038F2C096DA
335. cal adjustment 5 1 Adjustment of the solenoids this time find a position at which the clearance at portion A becomes 0 5 mm or less Then tighten the screw 1 5 5 1 1 Adjustment of the Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 1 Loosen the screw 1 that secures B y the solenoid in position E 2 Move the solenoid 2 up and down 1 and lower the lever 3 downward At 5 468418250300 5 1 2 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid SL2 FN 1 Loosen the screw 1 that secures n the solenoid in position PI DC 2 Move the solenoid 2 to the right or left and when dimension B mea B sures 3 6 mm tighten the screw 1 5 2 Timing belt tension adjustment 468418250400 5 2 1 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Timing Belt 1 Loosen two screws 1 2 Move the mounting bracket 2 and tighten the screw 1 so that the cen 3 2 ho M ter of the screw 1 on the upper right side is located at the marked position E 3 of the mounting bracket 2 2 2 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Timing Belt 1 Loosen two screws 1 2 Move the mounting bracket 2 and when the belt deflects 2 mm at C NA tighten two screws 1 E 9 2 5 n D lt 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 2 3 0 46841
336. card_work C C25 card_work gt mkcf f n 5 G 7 4038F2E564DA 7 Once the mkcf bat is executed data writing into the Compact flash is started 8 Upon completion of writing CHECKSUM is executed If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched VERIFY OK appears ify Check CHECK SUM VERIFY Finisht C C25 card_work gt 4038F2E565DA 9 Remove the Compact flash from PC NOTE When removing the Compact flash be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method 47 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 2 Firmware rewriting The F W is updated using the Compact flash 3 5 2 1 Updating method 5 NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON 1 Open the Front Door and turn OFF the Main Power Switch AN 0 2 2 Remove the screw 1 and the Metal BL 2 Blanking Plate 2 2 Z 2 n2 j 2 ZZ ZG SUE hd ef g 2 S PSU 4038F2C528DA 3 3 Insert the Compact Flash card 3 into the slot CZ 2 Al M nn 2 E 22 22 ZY 4038F2C529DA 48 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 4 Turn ON the Main Power Switch and the Sub Power Switch 5 Control Panel shows up to four types of F W to be updated
337. ce Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 12 Remove eight Screws 18 and remove the PWB Box 19 bizhub C250 4038F2C148DB 5 o 7 g 6 3 38 Color Developing Motor Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the Connector 1 and four Screws 2 and remove the Color Developing Motor 3 4038F2C149DA 115 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other 6 3 39 Color PC Drum Motor M2 4038F2C150DA 6 3 40 Toner Supply Motor C K M7 4038F2C151DA 6 3 41 Toner Supply Motor Y M M6 4038F2C152DA 116 N N Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the Connector 1 and four Screws 2 and remove the Color PC Drum Motor 3 Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the Connector 1 and two Screws 2 and remove the Toner Supply Motor C K 3 Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the Connector 1 and two Screws 2 and remove the Toner Supply Motor Y M 3 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 42 Main Motor M1 Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the IR Right Cover 54 Remove the Harness from the Edge Cover 1 bizhub C250 4038F2C153DA 4 Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 2 7 g s 5 Remove the Screw 3 fixing the IR cable 4038F2C155DA
338. ce of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 3 Dirty on the outside YES Clean 4 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES with cleaning jig dirty 5 Image Transfer Cam gear operates properly NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Belt Unit The problem has been eliminated NO Change IU 6 through the checks of steps up to 5 Change PH Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 402 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 17 Printer Monocolor uneven density in main scan direction A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 403615404600 403618404700 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 2 Dirty on the outside YES Clean 3 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES with cleaning jig dirty 4 Image Transfer Image Transfer Belt Unit makes NO Check and correct contacts Belt Unit positive contact with plates on rails 5 Cam gear operates properly NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit 6 through the checks of steps up to 5 Change PH Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing Q e Q 403 bizhub C250 D Q E Q 1
339. cement procedure has been completed be sure to flip all keys of the DIP switch on the new Control Board PWB A FN to their respective initial positions 15 FS 501 2 2 2 n El nl lt 7 Test mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 Operation in each test mode operation 7 3 1 S1 FN ON S2 FN ON 7 3 2 S1 FN ON S2 FN OFF 7 3 3 gt S1 FN ON S2 FN OFF 7 3 4 S1 FN ON t S2 FN ON 16 1st Tray Exit Motors and solenoids Energized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid SL2 FN Motors and solenoids Deenergized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid SL2 FN Elevator Tray Exit Motors Energized Entrance Motor M1 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Motors Deenergized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Finisher Tray Exit Motors and solenoids Energized Entrance Motor M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN Motors and solenoids Deenergized Entrance Moto
340. cessary 3 Check the PU1 connector for proper u u connection and correct as necessary 4 PC114 PC I O sensor check PWB C2 PC PJ6C2 PC 3 ON PC 203 3 PC123 PC sensor check PWB C2 PC PJ10C2 PC 3 ON 203 G to H 5 6 M124 PC operation check PWB C2 PC PJ4C2 4 to 5 ida i 7 M125 PC operation check PWB C2 PC PJ8C2 PC 12 to 18 PC 203 G to H 8 8 PWB C2 PC replacement PWB M replacement 10 replacement 25 d Q e Q 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 PC 103 PC 203 Blank Page D fe Q 26 KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL PC 403 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the cor
341. ch wait for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch Check the connectors for proper con nection on the PWB A FN 3 PWB A FN replacement x d Q e Q 67 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 FS 603 Blank Page D fe Q 68 KONICA MINOLTA 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to inpr ach avoid disclosure of confidential information
342. cifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Setting Procedure 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment 3 Select the Normal 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 6 If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 8 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 9 If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 10 If width A falls within the specified range touch OK 11 Following the same procedure adjust for Thick 1 to 3 OHP and envelope 177 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Centering Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source N S Use The PH Unit has been replaced A paper feed unit has been added X The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction Adjustment Width A Specification idt Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm incremen
343. cked Unblocked PC20 FN Full Non sort3 Job Tray Full Sensor Paper Paper no present present 7 Full Elev Tray Elevator Tray Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC5 FN Empty Finisher Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Paper Paper no present present PWB D Surface Elev Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor Paper Paper no FN present present PC8 FN Empty Elev Elevator Tray Paper Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC9 FN Home CD Align CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC14 FN Staple Standby Staple Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC12 FN Home Store Storage Roller Home Position Sen Blocked Unblocked roller sor PC13 FN Home Exit roller Exit Roller Home Position Sensor Blocked Unblocked 1 Unblocked Blocked Empty Empty 1 Unblocked Blocked Self Priming Staple Self Priming 1 Unblocked Blocked S2 FN Elevator Tray Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch ON OFF S3 FN Upper Limit Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch PC10 FN Shift Home Shift Home Position Sensor Unblocked Blocked PC11 FN Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Unblocked Blocked 283 bizhub C250 2 pe i N UO lt bizhub C250 2 5 n o lt 10 Service Mode F Sensors 4 FS 603 PK 501 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005
344. cked YES Change gear Image Process Toner is properly supplied when NO Go to next step 15 Adjustment gt TCR Toner Supply is run TCR Toner Supply Service Mode 404 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Process Conv Value falls within the speci YES Goto step 19 Adjustment 16 Gradation Adjust Service Mode fied range as checked through Gra dation Adjust Max 0 100 Highlight 0 60 through the checks of steps up to 18 Image Process The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step 17 Adjustment through the adjust of D Max D Max Density Service Mode Image Process After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step Adjustment sequence has been completed run 18 Stabilizer gt Gradation Adjust Reset Stabilizer Service Mode The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit Change MFP Control Board Change PH Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutraliz ing 405 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 19 Printer Monocolor gradation reproduction failure A Typical Faulty Images 9 a 5 N a B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Photo Density Original typ
345. connect the Connector 4 and Flat Cable 5 bizhub C250 4038F2C079DA 7 Remove four Bolts 6 and six Screws 7 and remove the Interface cover 8 2 7 7 Tome 3 4038F2C080DA 5 o 7 g 8 Remove thirteen Screws 9 and remove the MFP Control Board 10 NOTE When the MFP Control Board is replaced mount the removed NVRAM to the new MFP Control Board When the MFP Control Board is replaced make sure to update the firmware 4038F2C081DA 77 bizhub C250 5 5 7 E s gt 6 Other 6 3 21 DIMMO Work0 DIMM1 Work1 4038F2C507DA 4038F2C082DB 6 3 22 Hard Disk Drive HDD 4038F2C507DA 78 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Upper Rear Cover Lower Rear Cover and Rear Right Cover 57 59 Remove thirteen Screws and remove the Shield cover 1 Remove the DIMMO 2 and DIMM1 2 Remove the Upper Rear Cover Lower Rear Cover and Rear Right Cover 57 59 Remove thirteen Screws and remove the Shield cover 1 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C083DA 4038F2C084DA 5 4038F2C515DA 6 Other 3 Disconnect the Connector 2 bizhub C250 4 Remove the four Screws 3 and remove the Hard Disk Drive Assy 4 o 7 g s 5 Remov
346. creen keyboard and touch OK 3 Re enter the password to confirm 4 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after 2 Pe i 5 N UO lt 225 9 Adjustment item list Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Adjustment item list 2 Replacement Part Service Job 5 o E A 2 5 5 lE 515 m 5 N 8 S o sS ololr 5 S Siga 1 5 amp amp sis 3 amp Adjustment Setting Items No 2 e 2 2 Print Positioning Leading Edge 1 O Printer Print Positioning Side Ed 2 rint Positioning Side Edge Dup Print Positioning Side 3 Image position Leading Edge 4 Machine Image position Side Edge 5 4 Area Cross Direction Adjustment 6 3 Feed Direction Adjustment 7 3 Org Detecting Sensor Adj 8 Touch Panel Adjust 9 8 State Memory HDD R W Check 10 5 HDD Adjust HDD Format 11 5 mation Table Number 12 Firmware Version 13 Reentry of Setting Values 14 2 System1 Serial Number 15 E 2 Scan Calibration 16 1 Line Mag Setting 17 2 Counter Life Counter Clear 18 O O Image Process Adjustment Gradation Adjust 19 ojo Re entry of Utility settings 20 Re entry of Enh
347. ct the unit displayed on the LCD display Use To change the unit displayed on the control panel Setting The default setting varies depending on the marketing area Procedure mm Numerical Value inch Numerical Value inch Fraction C Paper Tray Setting 1 Auto Tray Select Setting Functions To set the Tray for automatic selection when APS is being set To establish the priority for switching the Tray when ATS is being set Use To specify the Tray to be used when APS is being set To establish the priority of the Tray when ATS is being set Setting Select the Tray on the Auto Tray Select screen Procedure Set the priority on the Tray Priority screen 2 Auto Tray Switch ON OFF E Functions To set whether to automatically switch to another Tray with same size paper when the Paper Feed Tray runs out of paper during printing Use To switch the Paper Feed Tray automatically El Setting The default setting is Restrict E Procedure Allow Restrict 3 No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Functions To set whether to switch to another Tray automatically when the specified Tray runs out of paper during printing Stop Printing Tray Fixed It stops printing when the specified Tray runs out of paper Switch Trays Tray Priority To switch to another Tray with the specified paper and print when the Tray is out of paper Use Setting The defau
348. ct to the destina tion appears The FTP server is not in service Check with the network administrator IP address of the FTP server is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address Proxy setting is wrong Check with the network administrator and make the correct proxy setting Port number is wrong Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number A directory not existing in the FTP server is specified Check with the network administrator and enter the correct directory Failed to log on to the FTP server because of the wrong user account Check with the network administrator and enter the correct user name and password A timeout condition occurs Set a longer value for FTP Connection Time out The timeout value depends on the net work s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server See User s Guide Network Scanner Operations Connect appears The message Server error The network is discon nected during file trans fer Send Ping from PC to the controller and FTP server to check to see if both parties are connected to the network or not The FTP server hard disk becomes full dur ing file transfer Check with the network administrator The FTP server stops during file transfer Check with the network administrator 17
349. ction Clutch CL3 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the M1 connector for proper connec tion and correct as necessary 2 PC6 I O check Sensor check 3 operation check PWB M CNDM 1 11 ON L 2 4 M operation check PWB M 1 5 REM PWB M CNDM1 8 LOCK 5 Change PWB M 16 5 6 C2253 Color PC Drum Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor M2 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal 1 Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as necessary 3 Check the PWB M connector for proper E _ connection and correct as necessary 4 2 operation check C0018 PWB M CNDM3 5 REM C 21 PWB M CNDM3 8 LOCK 5 Change PWB M 16 5 7 C2254 Color PC Drum Motor s turning at abnormal timing D Q E Q Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor M2 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal PWB M CNDM3 5 REM PWB M CNDM3 8 LOCK 2 Change PWB M 1 M2 operation check C 21
350. d B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Duplex Unit Switchback Motor M1 DU Duplex Unit Transport Motor M2 DU Duplex Control Board PWB A DU Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Location Electri cal Component 1 Initial check items PC1 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C 3 M1 DU operation check PWB A DU PJ4A DU 1 to 4 R 22 M2 DU operation check PWB A DU PJ5A DU 1 to 4 R 22 Change PWB A DU jN Change PWB M 326 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 3 11 Misfeed at Fusing Exit section A Detection Timing 15 Jam Display Type Description Detection of misfeed at Fusing Exit Section PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of tim has blocked the Exit Sensor PC2 e after the paper The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Exit Sensor PC2 has been unblocked by the paper during a switchback sequence Detection of paper left in Exit Section Exit Sensor PC2 is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turn cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset ed ON a door or B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Sensor PC2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU Duplex Control Board PWB A DU
351. d Sweden VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat tillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion Norway ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner S 12 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 5 FUSE CAUTION Double pole neutral fusing ATTENTION Double p le fusible sur le neutre 6 Laser Safety This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product There is no possibility of danger from a laser provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual 6 1 Internal Laser Radiation semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW Maximum average radiation power 8 0 uW Wavelength 775 800 nm at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM Therefore the print
352. d with plug and connector on each end specified by KMBT Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock Do not bundle or tie the power cord Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing ab dust may result in fire Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand S The risk of electric shock exists When unplugging the power cord grasp the plug not the cable The cable may be broken leading to a risk of fire and electric shock 5 5 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Wiring NWARNING Never use multi plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet If used the risk of fire exists Q When an extension cord is required use a specified one Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited so using a too long extension cord may result in fire Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up Fire may result 2 Installation Requirements Prohibited Installation Places NWARNING Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola tile materials that may catch fire Q A risk of fire exists Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain Q X LL A risk of fire and electric shock exists E
353. d items PC 403 A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Oncethe red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting 5 s 7 E s D Removal of PWBs A Caution When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS and follow the corresponding removal proce dures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Whenit is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Other 3 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list
354. d remove the Jam Access Cover 2 3 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount ing Bracket Assy 4 o 7 E s 434816261200 4 Remove two C rings 5 and the shaft 6 and remove the Paper Sep aration Roller Fixing Bracket Assy 7 NOTE Becareful not to lose spring at this time 4061F2C501DA 10 a and remove the Separation Roller 9 Cex Assy 10 8 6 Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the N d 4th Drawer 4061F2C502DA t 5 Remove the C ring 8 the Guide 9 2 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 NOTES Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed eo e e m n 434818262300 NOTE Replace the Separation Roller Assy Paper Take up Roller and Pick up Roller at the same time 2 1 2 Replacing the Paper Take up Roller 1 Remove the Rear Right Cover S Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row z u 10 2 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from 4th row 3 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy ts See the procedures 1 to in page Replacing the Separation Roller Assy 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the harness fro
355. d the OFF time 5 3 For cancelling the setting press Clear 3 Date Setting Functions To select the date or the day of the week for the Weekly Timer to function se Setting 1 Select the Year Month with keys Procedure 2 For setting by the date touch the appropriate key of the day 3 For setting by the day of the week touch the appropriate key of the week by Daily Setting 4 Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted and touch OK 4 Select Time for Power Save Functions To set the time to turn power OFF ON when the Weekly Timer is set and the power is ON Use To turn power OFF for a certain period of time when the Weekly Timer is set Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF Set Time for Power Save Using the 10 Key Pad input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again Hi D 5 Password for Non Business Hours Functions To set whether to input the password before using when the Weekly Timer is set Use To set the password for turning the power ON temporarily when the Weekly Timer is F set Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When setting to ON enter the password eight digits F Restrict User Access 1 Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Functions e To set the prohibition for modifying the registered Copy program Use To be used when prohi
356. de using the Fold amp Staple function Upon setup of the Finisher FS 603 Adjustment Center staple position Specification The adjustment range is 7 0 mm to 7 0 mm in 1 mm increments Fold position The adjustment range is 7 0 mm to 7 0 mm in 1 mm increments 2 Pe i 5 N UO lt 295 11 Enhanced Security Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 11 Enhanced Security 11 1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure 11 1 1 Procedure bizhub C250 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Press the following keys in this order Stop 5 05 Clear 3 Enhanced Security menu will appear Service Mode EnhancedSecur ity Passuord F CS Remote Care Pesture Level Catan Counter List Output 4037F3E508DA 11 1 2 Exiting Touch the Exit 11 2 Enhanced Security Function Tree Service Mode Enhanced Security CE Password gt 297 ts 297 Administrator Password 297 2 ae i 5 n lt Administrator Feature Level ts 298 CE Authentication 298 IU Life Stop Setting ts 298 296 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 11 Enhanced Security 11 3 Settings in the Enhanced Security 11 3 1 CE Password Functions To set and change the CE Password 2 Use Use to change the CE Passw
357. djustment If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart increase the setting Instructions If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart decrease the setting Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Scanner Adjustment Vertical Adjustment 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check the D width on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make another copy 8 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 2 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met E 9 ADF Adjustment 2 lt Centering gt El Functions To make a manual adjustment of the document centering position in each of the ADF lt modes Use To use when the Centering Auto Adjustment cannot make adjustment completely Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the Procedure Screen L 2 Touch System Setting Expert possem B Adjustment ADF Adjustment gt Centering 3 Enter the numeric value using the D key Adjustment range 3 mm to 3 mm i To read the image in direction A use 4038F3C502DA key
358. dress Type Symbol Dis play No of Char J acters for Dest Display Copy Operat al ing Screen Fax Active crean TX Display 4 RX Display H Initial Setting gt 166 Copier Auto Paper Settin Select for 9 Small Original gt 166 8 Utility Mode 145 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N D lt bizhub C250 9 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode User Setting Copier Setting Auto Magnifi cation Selec tion Platen gt 161 146 s 166 Auto Magnifi cation Selec tion ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Scanner Setting JPEG Com pression Level t 168 Black Com pression Level TWAIN Lock Time Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Printer Setting Basic Setting PDL Setting gt 169 Number of Sets Original Direction Jobs in HDD Spool Print before RIP 4 lt gt LTR LGR Auto Switch Paper Setting Paper Tray Default Paper Size 2 Sided Print Bind Direction Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005
359. dt dons net key esent Local Package Denctery Drowse um E 4037F2E548DA 8 Click Next N 21515 8 el of v y RAT CRUSH TI NES FR 5 C prev Gat Category gt Ab 49 Admin Game 49 Delaut Giaptecs 49 Delaul oft Lek ome 9 Click Complete to start installing Ep Create Icons Tell setup you want to create a few icons for convenient access to the GC gem errronmert v Cieste icon on Desktop Add con lo Slat Mera 4037F2E550DA 3 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 After installing open the Property of My Computer and click the Environmental Vari able of Advanced tab 11 Click the New in System Variable Setting Environment Variables 1 xl r User variables For Administrator 5 o o v 2 G o S S o New Edit Delete System variables Variable Value _ x ComSpec C WINNT system32 cmd exe NUMBER OF PR 1 05 Windows NT Os2LibPath CHWINNTIsystem32ios2 dl Path CHYWINNTIsystem32 CAWINNT CAWIN C CEA 8 sosets2e2000 12 Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable i 3 Variable name Variable value CYGWIN ntsec HOME home username New System Variable 2 Variable Name CYGWIN Variable Value ntsec New System Variable
360. e ee KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL bizhub c250 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS seseeneeennnenennn 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE 5 1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION 1 SAFETY WARNINGS 2 ritiene rit ets WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT S 20 Composition of the service manual Notation of the service manual nennen nennen nnns bizhub C250 Main Unit Gefleral E octets Deae Ris 1 Maintenance verset retis ned a Cat ev dude eau 9 Adjustment Setting Troubleshooting neenon rtr nentes eren Devenir dan seb Standard Controller GIC REM xL CEP EE 1 ert 3 Adjustment Setting 13 Troubleshooting m te e ce eme te ke RA EU D EH Re Ee EET Y dne 15 DF 601 Gerieral sss ei Aveiro ees ANE 1 Maintenant E e 5 Adjustment Setting roo ety a a e ee eret a 13 Troubleshooting PC 103 PC 203 General vA t o Mt ss 1 Maintenance REM 3 Adjustment Setting prece tee rre eno tete Ce denote ER TEES ERE ENS eo oe 13 Troubleshoolihig
361. e Scan Area Feed Direction Adjust ment 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check the D width on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make another copy 8 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met 10 4 6 Printer Resist Loop Functions To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of Tray 1 to Tray 4 Bypass and Duplex To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the Registration Rollers Use Paper Passage for paper passage check Use When a paper skew occurs When a paper misfeed occurs Adjustment Different setting ranges are set for different transport speeds Range Tray 1 to Tray 4 LCT Bypass 110 mm s 8to 8 55mm s 15to 15 Duplex 110 mm s 8to 8 55mm s 8to48 Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Printer Resist Loop 3 Select the transport speed 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 key pad 241 bizhub C250 2 pe i n UO lt bizhub C250 D 2 2 N El nl lt
362. e cover 2 a bizhub C250 4038F2C028DA 5 Disconnect the Connector 3 5 o 7 g s gt 4038F2C029DA 6 Remove the Screw 4 and remove the Connector protective cover 5 4038F2C030DA 38 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 7 Disconnect two Connectors 6 bizhub C250 4038F2C031DA 8 Open the Right Cover 9 Open the Fusing Unit Cover 10 Remove two Screws 7 and remove the Fusing unit 8 5 o 7 g 4038F2C032DA 39 4 Service tool Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Service tool 4 1 CE Tool list Tool name Shape Personnel Parts No Remarks Scanner Drive Cable 2 4581 7901 xx Holding Jig 403616200100 PH Window Cleaning Jig 1 4038 2083 4038F2C557DA Cleaning Jig Ss 1 4038 2084 xx 4038F2C558DA Color chart 1 403618257700 bizhub C250 5 s 7 E s 40 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Service tool 4 2 Copy materials 4 2 1 Imaging Unit Single Parts IU Also replace the Dust filter packed in the Imaging Unit Black at the same time Parts name Replacing period IU Black 70 000 copies IU Yellow 45 000 copies IU Magenta 45 000 copies IU Cyan 45 000 copies ts For the predetermined conditions see page 15 4 2 2 Toner Cartridg
363. e gt Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment 3 Touch Max Width 4 Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 301 mm 5 Press the Start key and check that the results are OK 6 Touch Min Width 7 Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 89 mm 8 Press the Start key and check that the results are OK Make the adjustment again if the results are NG 10 4 10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment Functions To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper Use To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper Setting The default setting is 4 mm Procedure 4 mm 5 7 mm 10 5 Firmware Version Functions To check the Firmware version Use Use when the firmware is upgraded When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch Firmware Version 3 Select the appropriate key from 1 to 3 to check the Firmware Version 243 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 6 Imaging Process Adjustment 10 6 1 Gradation Adjust Functions To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner bizhub C250 Use Color reproduction performance becomes poor The IU has been replaced The Image Transfer Belt Unit
364. e Q bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 18 Image quality problem 18 3 12 Scanner System blank copy black copy A Typical Faulty Images Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Blank copy 403618403800 Black copy 403615403900 B Troubleshooting Procedure changed Step Section Check Item Result Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly NO 1 and with no pins bent printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image Pro NO Reconnect 2 PWB C Board are connected properly 3 CCD Unit Connectors of the CCD Unit are NO Reconnect connected properly Test Mode The problem is eliminated as NO Change connection cable 4 Service Mode checked with the image on a test pattern produced Image Processing The problem is eliminated after NO Change Image Processing 5 PWB C the I F connection cable has been Board 398 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 13 Scanner System abnormal image A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 ABCDE EABXCIDE ABCDE Data on previous page ABCDE A A Data on current page 40365404050 4036140410 403619404200 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Ca
365. e 0 DMA N MFP Control Board CFFOO ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state o DMA band preparation register setting DMA_AO MFP Control Board CFF01 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state o DMA band preparation register setting DMA A1 MFP Control Board CFF02 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state o DMA band preparation register setting DMA A2 MFP Control Board ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state DMA band preparation register setting DMA BO MFP Control Board CFF04 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state o DMA band preparation register setting DMA B1 MFP Control Board CFFO5 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state o DMA band preparation register setting DMA_B2 MFP Control Board CFFO6 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state o DMA band preparation register setting DMA_C MFP Control Board 353 bizhub C250 d Q e a 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CFFO07 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA D CFFO08 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA E CFFO09 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA F CFFOA ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of Control Board DMA ba
366. e Care Detail Setting At this time in the cases of Initial transmitting Administrator transmitting Mainte nance Start transmitting Maintenance Finish transmitting the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen For the communication result the following message will be displayed based on its suc cess or failure Display of Hie Cause Solution Communication result Communicating Communication trouble Although the machine tries to communi See the list of error message with the Center cate with the Center there is any trouble confirm the corresponding and the communication completes point unsuccessfully ts 261 Complete successfully Modem trouble Although the machine tries to communi e Check if the Power of modem cate with the Center there is any trouble in ON in the modem Check if there is any problem in connection between the modem and the main unit Busy line Although the machine tries to communi e Communicate with the Center cate with the Center the line to the again ter is busy No response Although the machine tries to communi e Communicate with the Center cate with the Center there is no again response from the Center Check the communication envi ronment of the Center side 264 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 8 System 1 10 8 1 Marketing Area
367. e ID Telephone number of the Center and the Device tele phone number have been input gt 258 251 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 7 3 Software SW setting for C8 Remote Care NOTE SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made In case you changed bit data by accident be sure to restore the previous state o N o 5 N a A Input procedure 1 Select Service Mode CS Remote Care Detail Setting and touch Software Switch Setting 2 Touch Switch No and input the SW number two digits using the 10 Key Pad 3 Touch Bit Assignment and select SW bit number using the arrow keys and input 0 or 1 using the 10 Key Pad For setting by hexadecimal numbers touch HEX Assignment key and input using the 10 Key Pad or A to F keys 4 Touch Fix NOTE About functions of each switch see to List of software SW for CS Remote Care B List of software SW for CS Remote Care NOTE Do not change any bit not described on this table SW No Bit Functions 0 1 Default SW 01 0 Dial Mode Pulse Tone 1 1 Reservation 0 2 2 Reservation 0 E 3 Reservation 0 4 Baud rate 1 1 0 E 5 1 1 0 6 1 0 lt 7 1 SW 02 0 Emergency transmissio
368. e Paper Feed Tray and press the Start key 221 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt bizhub C250 2 ae i 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 6 9 System Connection A IS OpenAPI Setting 1 Access Setting Functions To allow or restrict the access from other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page Scope Data Administrator Use To restrict access from other systems with IS OpenAPI Setting The default setting is Allow Procedure Allow Restrict 2 Port No Functions To set the access port for other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page Scope Data Administrator Use To change the access port number for other systems with IS OpenAPI Setting 1 Select Port No or Port Number SSL and touch Input Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Key Pad 3 SSL Functions To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page Scope Data Administrator Use To encrypt access by SSL from other systems using IS OpenAPI Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF NOTE Touse SSL the certification needs to be issued at PageScope Web Connec tion before hand 4 Authentication Functions To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which use
369. e Single Parts T C Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the T C Black at the same time Parts name Replacing period 1 T C Black 20 000 copies T C Yellow 12 000 copies T C Magenta 12 000 copies T C Cyan 12 000 copies 1 Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90 even with product to product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration when the is used under the conditions of B W ratio 5 for each color 4 2 3 Waste Toner Box Replace the Dust Filter Cooling Fan supplied with the Waste Toner Box at the same time Parts name Replacing period Waste Toner Box 30 000 copies 1 1 A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions ts For the predetermined conditions see page 15 4 2 4 Maintenance Kit There is no setting for the Maintenance Kit 41 bizhub C250 5 o 7 E s 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 5 1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting 5 1 1 Service environment OS Windows 2000 Drive which enables writing reading of Compact flash Compact flash with 128MB or more o N o a E is N a 5 1 2 Application to be used Cygwin Free software 5 1 3 Installing the Cygwin The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC 1 Double click the
370. e and screen pattern are NO Change screen pattern selected properly 2 Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean 3 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES with cleaning jig dirty 4 TCR Sensor win TCR Sensor window is dirty YES Clean dow State Confirma IDC output value is around 4 3 V NO Clean IDC Sensor 5 tion Level His Check Image Transfer Belt for tory 1 damage Service Mode Image Process Conv Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 9 Adjustment fied range as checked through Gra 6 Gradation dation Adjust Adjust Max 0 100 Service Mode Highlight 0 60 Image Process The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step 7 Adjustment gt through the adjust of D Max D Max Density 2 Service Mode 8 Image Process After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step 8 Adjustment sequence has been completed run 5 gt Stabilizer gt Gradation Adjust E Reset Stabi lizer Service Mode The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit through the checks of steps up to 8 Change MFP Control Board 9 Change PH Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 406 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 20 Printer Monocolor foggy background A Typical Faulty Images 18 Image quality problem ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 403615403000 B Troubleshooting Procedure Service Mode Black
371. e condition Q 2 Use To set the e mail address for notifying the machine condition a Setting 1 Touch E mail Address Edit Procedure 2 Enter the E mail Address up to 320 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK Notification Item Setting Functions To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e mail Use To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e mail Setting 1 Select the item to be notified and touch ON Procedure 2 Touch OK Notification Time Setting Functions To set the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e mail Use To change the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e mail Setting 1 Press the Clear key Procedure 2 Enter the time for notifying between 1 and 10 using the 10 Key Pad 4 PING Confirmation Functions To set the TCP IP network diagnosis by PING Use To check the condition of TCP IP network D Setting 1 Touch Host Address for PING transmission Procedure 2 Select IP Address Input to enter IP address 3 Select Host Name Input to enter the host name 2 4 Touch Check Connection key to check the connection E 3 5 PSWC Setting Functions To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection Use Notto use the PageScope Web Connection Setting The default setting is Enable Procedure Enable Disable 6 SLP Settin
372. e exceeds the specified length decrease the setting value Setting Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Scanner Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check point B on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make another copy 8 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met a 185 bizhub C250 2 x 5 lt 8 Utility Mode Centering Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Functions To adjust part to part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction Use When the CCD Unit is replaced When the Original Glass is replaced The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced Adjustment Specification A width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below E An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Leading Edge Adjustment of the Printer Adjustment
373. e four screws 5 and the Flat cable 6 and remove the Hard Disk Drive 7 NOTE When the Hard Disk is replaced select State Confirmation gt Memory HDD Adj HDD For mat in Service Mode for Logical format 79 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 23 High Voltage Unit HV1 1 Remove the PWB Box w 112 SN 2 Disconnect four Connectors 1 bizhub C250 4038F2C085DA 3 Remove five Screws 2 and the tab 3 and remove the High Voltage Unit 4 NOTE When installing the High Voltage Unit make sure that the terminal end surely contacts 5 o 7 g s gt 4038F2C086DA NOTE When installing the High Voltage Unit make sure that the claw 5 shown in the left illustration is surely set up 4038F2C087DA 80 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 24 Tray 1 Paper Size Board PWB I Slide out the Tray 1 Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove two Screws 1 and Connec tor 2 and remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board Assy 3 2 3 397 bizhub C250 4038F2C088DA 4 Remove the Lever 4 5 Remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board 5 7 g s 4038F2C516DA 6 3 25 Tray 2 Control Board PWB Z PC 1 Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover and Tray 2 Rear Left Cover S 63 2 If the optional paper feed
374. e or black line in sub NO Clean the Comb Electrode by moving scan direction is sharp the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever 2 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 3 Dirty on the outside YES Clean Contact terminals make good con NO contact terminals 4 nection between each IU and machine 5 Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and check ter makes good connection minal position 6 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES Clean with cleaning jig dirty The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit 7 through the checks of steps up to 6 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change PH Unit D fe Q E Q 400 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 15 Printer Monocolor white lines in Main Scan Direction white bands in Main Scan Direction colored lines in Main Scan Direction colored bands in Main Scan Direction A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 White lines in Main White bands in Main Colored lines in Main Colored bands in Main Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction 403616402500 403615402600 40361940270 40361540280 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Image check white line or black line in sub NO Clean the Comb Electrode by mov
375. e range of 63 0 mm x 1 mm When out of the given range 28 n case of 64 1 mm or more N E Retry to put the spring on the catch B EN 27 In case of 61 9 mm or less Retry to put the spring the catch C 5 5 7 E 40365256760 Rear 29 17 Wind the bead end of the cable 29 B2 around pulley F 30 and pulley 31 31 then hook the bead 32 onto b the Adjustable Anchor 33 30 18 Wind the hook end of the cable 34 36 around pulley D 35 and pulley E N 86 35 e 2 40365256960 110 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 19 Fit the hook end of the cable 37 to the spring 38 and then hook the e Ac spring to the catch A in the frame e 20 Measure the Spring length and 2 5 check if its length is within the range 4 ve of 63 0 mm 1 mm lt When out of the given range gt n case of 64 1 mm or more 37 38 Retry to put the spring on the catch B E Incase of 61 9 mm or less Retry to put the spring on the catch C E 40365257050 21 Remove the Cable Holding Jigs from the front and rear pulleys 22 Adjust the focus positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit s 305 23 Adjust the position of the Scanner and 2nd 3rd Mirrors Carriage s 306 NOTE Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed be sure to car
376. e revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS AD 503 AD 503 General 1 tiroteo tere atta e nnper taedas Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 1 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 1 1 Cleaning Transport Roller Roll 1 2 2 1 2 Cleaning Transport Roller Roll 3 see 2 1 3 Cleaning Ventilation Section ssessseeeeneeeenen 3 GI PHI xD 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items 3 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 3 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure sse 3 8 1 IBS Wd Maintenance Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section 5 Sensor CHOC 5 1 Checkprocedu re nme tte tron t ere ne rettet ina 5 2 Sensor check list niece eie ele ads eer dd en eas 5 2 1 Sensor check SGEE oae tena dere dpt ig pu e 5 2 2 Sensor clieck list iiia nm be ee EE HG Lee Adjustment Setting 6 Mechanical adjustment sssrinin inisinia riiai 6 1 Adjusting the paper reference Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 7 J
377. e stabilization control 5 Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe cuted When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment Stabilization Only 3 Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence 4 Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green 247 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 B Initialize Image Stabilization Functions To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili zation control has been initialized Q Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe cuted a Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer Mode has been executed Use when adjusting the skew Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment Initialize Image Stabilization 3 Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence 4 Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green 10 6 6 Thick Paper Density Adjustment Functions T
378. e the Belt Ten sion Roller 17 458315250600 36 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 458315250700 45831525080 458315250900 458316251000 458316251100 10 5 Mechanical adjustment Remove the Timing Belt 18 11 Remove the E Ring 19 and remove 12 13 14 15 the Staple Position Confirm Gear 20 Turn the Gear 21 to position the hole 22 in the Gear of the Staple Driver to the hole behind Insert a pin of approx 2 23 alter natively 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used into the hole and fix the Gear Turn the Gear 24 to position the hole 25 in the Cam of the Staple Clincher to the hole behind Insert a pin of 2 26 alter natively 2 mm hexagonal wrench or the like can be preferably used into the hole and fix the Cam 37 FS 603 2 Pe N lt FS 603 Adjustment Setting 5 Mechanical adjustment 28 27 458318251200 458318251300 38 458318251400 38 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Set the Timing Belt 27 to the Gear 28 and Gear 29 with the Gear and the Cam in the fixed condition 17 Install the Staple Position Confirm Gear 32 in such a way that the blue mark 30 of the Gear comes face to face with the hole 31 in the frame NOTE The p
379. e the harness from the Har ness Guide 2 Remove two screws 3 and remove the Side Registration Motor 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 3 Howto use the adjustment section e Adjustment Setting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by FS 603 Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks must be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Caution to unplug the power cord
380. e to turn Motor Lock signal detects H for a given period B C4154 Polygon Motor K failure to turn time consecutively during the Polygon motor is B rotating C4551 Laser malfunction Cyan SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of B C4552 Laser malfunction Magenta a given period of time after staring the laser out B put C4553 Laser malfunction Yellow SOS signal is not detected for a given period of B C4554 Laser malfunction Black time during printing or IDC sensor adjustment B C4705 Image Output Time Out No image data is output from the MFP Control C Board PWB MFP C4761 Compression hardware timeout The hardware involved with the compression function offered by the MFP Control Board PWB C does not respond C4765 Extraction hardware timeout The hardware involved with the extraction func tion offered by the MFP Control Board PWB C does not respond C4770 JBIGO Error The MFP Control Board PWB MFP is faulty C C4771 JBIG1 Error C C4772 JBIG2 Error C C4773 JBIG3 Error C C4780 Compressor 0 command buffer c stop failure C4781 Compressor 1 command buffer C stop failure C4782 Compressor 2 command buffer C stop failure C4783 Compressor command buffer C stop failure C5102 Motors failure to turn The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede termined continuous period of time while the B Motor is turning C5103 Motor turning at abnormal
381. ec or less Warmup Tims at ambient temperature of 23 C 73 4 F and rated source voltage Leading edge 4 2 mm Trailing edge copier printer 4 2 mm Image Loss Trailing edge FAX 3 mm Rear edge 3 mm Front edge 3 mm First Copy Time Tray1 A4 full size Monochrome print 8 4 sec or less Color print 11 7 sec or less que color 111 mm sec Thick Paper 90 to 256 g m OHP Post card 55 5 mm sec Envelope Label sheet Monochrome print 1 sided 25 copies min 2 sided 23 copies min Copying Speed for Multi copy Cycle Color print A4 8 1 2 x 11 crosswise Text Mode Text Photo 25 copies min 2 sided 23 copies min feeding Mode Special Quality Mode Fixed Zoom Ratios Full size x1 000 Metric Area 0 500 x0 707 x0 816 x0 866 Reduction Inch Area 0 500 x0 647 x0 733 x0 785 Metric Area 1 154 x1 224 x1 414 x2 000 Inch Area x1 214 x1 294 x1 545 x2 000 Zoom ratios memory 3 memories Variable Zoom Ratios x0 250 to x4 000 in 0 001 increments Copy Paper Size to A5 B6R Wide 12 25x18 A6R Thick Paper 11x17 to 5 5x8 5 A3 Wide 12 25x18 4x6R Thick Paper Metric Area to B5 Enlargement Metric Area Tray1 Bypass Inch Area Tray2 Inch Area 11x17 to 8 5x11 8 5x11R Copy Exit Tray Capacity Plain Paper 350 sheets Thick Paper 20 sheets OHP transparencies
382. eck Item Result Action 1 2nd Image Trans Image Transfer Roller is scratched YES Change 2nd Image Transfer fer Roller Unit or dirty Roller Unit 2 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 3 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean or change scratched or dirty 4 Lower Fusing Roller is scratched or YES Change Fusing Unit dirty Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 5 matter is evident on the Transfer See Maintenance Belt The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt 6 through the checks of steps up to 5 Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing d Q e Q 425 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 38 Printer 4 Color uneven image A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 213816450700 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Toner Cartridge The Toner Cartridge of every color is surely installed 2 PHUnit The PH Unit is surely installed NO Re install it Uneven pitch occurs in 3 0 mm pitch 1 NO Re install it YES Replace the PH Unit Holder Toner Cartridge There is any stain or breakage on Clean replace the Toner Car 4 the Drive section of the Toner YES tridae Cartridge ge 5 Imaging Unit There is any stain damage or YE
383. ection misfeed A Detection timing Type Description horizontal transport section misfeed detection The Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO B Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 6 I O sensor check PWB A FN 21 FN 5 ON FS 603 G 7 3 PWB A FN replacement 7 3 4 Folding position section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Folding position section misfeed The Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN does not detect paper even after the set period of time after the paper has been fed from the Transport Booklet Tray to the stapling position during stapling operation Paper is not removed from the Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN even after the detection lapse of approx 10 5 sec after the Staple Folding Motor M7 FN has been driven during stapling operation B Action Relevant electrical parts Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial chec
384. ecurity Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 11 3 3 Administrator Feature Level Functions To set which Modes to be allowed for the Administrator to use in Service Mode Use Use when allowing the Administrator to use some Modes in Service Mode The Modes allowed for the Administrator to use in each setting are as follows Administrator Setting Function Level 1 Level 2 Printer Adjustment Erase Leading Edge Leading Edge Adjustment Centering System Setting gt Adustment Horizontal Adjustment Expert Setting Vertical Adjustment Centering ADF Adjust Original Stop Position ment Centering Auto Adjustment Auto Adj of Stop Position O Standard Size Original Glass Original Size Detect Setting Foolscap Size Setting Setting The default setting is Prohibit Procedure Level1 Level2 Prohibit 11 3 4 CE Authentication Functions To determine whether or not to authenticate CE Password as entering Service Mode Use Use when authenticating CE Password as entering Service Mode Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 11 3 5 IU Life Stop Setting Functions To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life Use Use to select not to stop the print cycle when the IU reaches its service life Setting
385. ed Position PC12 LCT Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Home Sensor At home Not at home PC11 LCT Shift Tray Stop Shift Tray Stop Sensor Return Not at return position position PC1 LCT Take Up Paper Take up Motor Paper Paper not present present PC2 LCT Vertical Transport Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC3 LCT Paper Empty Paper Empty Sensor Paper Paper not present present PWB E Main Tray Empty Main Tray Empty Sensor Board Paper Paper not LCT present present PC9 LCT Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Empty Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC7 LCT Lower Over Run Lower Over Run Sensor malfunction operational UN1 LCT Manual Button Down Manual Button Down Board ON OFF PC14 LCT Division Board Position Division Board Position Sensor At home Not at home PC6 LCT Cassette Open Cassette Open Sensor Set Out of position PC8 LCT Shift Motor Pulse Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC10 LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Blocked Unblocked 19 PC 403 7 Pe i n D lt 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Mechanical adjustment 6 1 Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed When the PH Unit has been replaced When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the ima
386. ed if the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF is not turned OFF within a preset time after the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF was tuned ON Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor in the 2 Sided Mode Sided mode Misfeed due to paper Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is not turned OFF within remaining at the Exit Sensor a preset time after the Exit Sensor PC6 DF was tuned ON Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor PC6 DF is not turned ON within a preset time after the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF was turned ON in the 2 B Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Control Board PWB A DF Exit Sensor PC6 DF 8 Exit Motor M3 DF E e zs WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC5 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A 3 ON DF 601 C 4 3 PC6 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN9A 6 ON DF 601 C 4 4 M3 DF operation check PWB A DF CN3A 1 to 4 DF 601 C 7 5 PWB A DF replacement 30 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Jam Display 9 4 2 Paper Take Up section misfeed A Detection timing 5 Description Md Misfeed due to paper not Misfeed is detected if the Registration Sensor PC1 DF is not turned 2 reached the Registration ON within a preset time after the Take up Motor M1 DF started normal Sensor rotation Misfeed is detected if the Pick up Senso
387. eed 12345678 458315352800 FS 603 10 Feed one sheet of paper through the machine Fold the copy fed out of the machine in half and check that the punch holes are aligned with each other Specifications 0 x 2 mm f the specified range is not met use the following procedure to adjust the Punch center position 11 Press PSW1 or PSW2 of the Fin gt FRONT SIDE isher Control Board once according to the direction of deviation Pressing PSW1 moves the punch position to the front Pressing PSW2 moves the punch position to the rear Each press of PSW1 or PSW2 moves the position 1 mm The adjustment range should be within x 5 mm 12 Feed another sheet of paper If the punch hole position is not properly adjusted make the adjustment once again REAR SIDE 458315352860 2 5 n lt When the adjustment procedure has been completed use the following pro cedure to finish the adjustment mode 13 Turn OFF key 1 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board 458315352700 14 Turn OFF keys 5 6 and 7 of SW1 of the Finisher Control Board 15 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit E2 gt om om uU om 458315352300 48 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Board switch 16 Turn ON key 7 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board NOTE
388. een keyboard and ouch 10 NDS Tree Name Functions To set the NDS Tree name Use To set the NDS Tree name Setting 1 Touch NDS Tree Name Procedure 2 Enter the NDS Tree name up to 63 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK 11 Printer Name Functions To set the Printer Name Use To set the Printer Name Setting 1 Touch Printer Name Procedure 2 Enter the Printer Name up to 63 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK 12 Printer Number Functions To set the Printer number Use To set the Printer number Setting 1 Touch Auto and cancel the reverse display Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10 Key Pad C IPP Setting 1 IPP Setting Functions To set whether to enable or disable IPP setting Use To disable IPP setting Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 202 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 2 Accept IPP job Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job Use e To restrict the IPP job Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 3 Support Operation Functions To set the Operation support information Use Forthe response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function Setting 1 Touch
389. een keyboard and touch OK 204 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 4 Print Service Name Functions To set the Print service name Use To set the Print service name Setting 1 Touch Print Service Name Procedure 2 Enter the Print Service name up to 13 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK 5 Workgroup Functions To set the Workgroup Use To set the Workgroup Setting 1 Touch Workgroup Procedure 2 Enter the Workgroup up to 15 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK F AppleTalk Setting 1 AppleTalk Setting Functions To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting Use To use AppleTalk setting Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 2 Printer Name Functions To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network Use To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network Setting 1 Touch Printer Procedure 2 Enter the Printer name up to 31 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK 3 Zone Name Functions To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network Use To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network Setting 1 Touch Zone Name Procedure 2 Enter the Zone name up to 31 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK 4 Cur
390. efault display for the program screen during Scanner mode Use To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scanner mode Setting The default setting is PAGE 1 Procedure Temporary One Touch PAGE1 to PAGE27 3 Address Book Default Index Functions To set the default display for the Address Book screen during Scanner mode Use To keep the default display instead of search string on the Address Book which fre quently changes during Scanner mode Setting The default setting is Main Procedure Main ABC to WXYZ etc 4 Address Type Symbol Display D Functions To set whether to display the Address Type Symbol on each address key when 2 selecting the address to transmit scanned data Use To cancel displaying the Address Type Symbol on the address key Setting The default setting is ON Procedure lt ON OFF C Fax Basic Screen Default Setting 1 Default Tab Functions To set the basic screen display during Fax mode Use To change the basic screen display during Fax mode Setting The default setting is Program Procedure Program Group Address Book Direct Input 2 Default Program Functions To set the default display for the program screen during Fax mode Use To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during Fax mode Setting The de
391. egarded as a closure failure Original Take Up Unit Interlock Trans port Convey Exit Cover and Middle Tray Of these sensors Transport Convey changes from to 1 when PC202 mounted on the IR of the main unit detects a predetermined condition ADF is raised to an angle of 20 or more Output display of Width The operation of the sensor can be checked whether it is normal or faulty by changing the guide width of the Document Take up Tray to change the output value 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 A Sensor monitor 7 Sensor Check Operation characteristics Symbol Panel display Part Signal name Panel display 1 0 PC4 DF Empty Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC3 DF Original Take Up Unit Take up Cover Sensor OPEN CLOSE Interrock PC202 Transport Convey Original Cover Angle Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC7 DF Exit Cover Exit Cover Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC8 DF Middle Tray Tray Open Close Sensor OPEN CLOSE PC1 DF Registration Registration Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC6 DF Exit Section Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC5 DF Reverse Turnover Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC2 DF Timing Pick up Sensor Paper Paper not present present R1 DF Width Document Size Volume 17 DF 601 2 Pe i n lt 8 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Mechanical adjustment 8 1 Adjustm
392. el with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual 2 Touch the State Confirmation key 3 Touch the Sensor Check key 5 2 Sensor check list 5 2 1 Sensor check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit Sensor Check 4061F3E809DA Sensors 2 LCT Bounce Sueton Reverse Sensor D 2nd Transfer Lift Up Upper 0 51922101 Retraction Lift Up Lower 0 Cassette Open 0 Transfer Belt hiet Tray n Motor 0 Retraction Tray Boise Motor Waste Toner p Take Up Duplex Toner Full Transport 0 Set 0 27 Paper Empty Paper Passagel 0 Main rav Paper Passage 0 t Shif Tray p Horizontal 7 Empty Trans Unit E Lower Over Run 0 Pronsport 0 15 lt 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 2 2 Sensor check list A Sensor monitor 2 5 Sensor check Operation characteristics Symbol Panel display Part Signal name Panel display 1 0 PC4 LCT Lift Up Upper Lift Up Upper Sensor Raised Not raised Position PC13 LCT Lift Up Lower Lift Up Lower Sensor Lowered Not lower
393. eld Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 2 2 Maintenance call per 60 000 print ica ip D No Class Parts to be replaced Number of Check Clean Replace Lubrica Desctip personnel tion tions E 1 Paper feed and image e a Overall conditions 2 Appearance e e 3 Registration Roller e section 4 Image Trans Around waste toner port e fer section 5 Pick up Roller e 6 Paper Take up Roller e 7 DF 601 Separation Roller e Transport Belt Roller 8 and Roll 9 503 DUP Roller and Roll e 2 3 2 3 Periodical parts replacement 1 per 120 000 print E i ip Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace Lupe DOSUBB personnel tion tions 1 Paper feed and image e Overall conditions 2 Appearance e e 2nd Image Transfer 3 1 e Conveyance Roller Unit5 section i i 4 Dust Filter Vertical 1 Conveyance 5 mage Trans Image Transfer Belt Unit 1 fer section Processing Ozone Filter 1 e section 7 Fusing Unit 1 e section 1 Replace those four parts at the same time 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 3 2 4 Periodical parts replacement 2 per 200 000 print No Class Parts to be replaced Numbero
394. eloping Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands 9 Pe i N D lt 141 bizhub C250 9 i 5 N lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 1 Touch Panel Adjustment Functions To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display Use Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action Use during the setup procedure Setting 1 Press the Accessibility key Procedure 2 Touch Touch Panel Adj 3 Using the tip of a pen or similar object touch the four crosses on the screen in Sequence These crosses may be touched in any order but be sure to touch the center of each cross Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen Touch Panel Adjustment Adjust the position of Keys on touch screen Touch 4 check keys located on corner and press START To reset press CLEAR To cancel press STOP 4037F3E512DA 4 Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in green 5 Press the Start key 142 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 2 Utility Mode function tree The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen NOTE
395. emove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy See the procedures 1 to 3 in page 11 Cleaning of the Separation Roller Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Paper Take up Roller 1 clean of dirt Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer 11 PC 103 PC 203 5 o 7 103 203 5 5 7 E s 3 Other 3 4 3 Pick up Roller 3 4 4 Vertical Transport Roller 434815262000 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from 4th row Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy See the procedures 1 to 3 in page 11 Cleaning of the Separation Roller Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Pick up Roller 1 clean of dirt Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer Open the Right Door Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Vertical Transport Roller 1 clean of dirt Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 How to use the adjustment section Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section e AdjustmentSetting contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce dures for this machine Throughout this Adjustment Setting the default settings are indicated by PC 103 PC 203 Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem the following advance checks m
396. en Procedure 2 Select the key as follows System 1 gt Install Date 3 Enter the date Year 4 digit gt Month 2 digit date 2 digit from the 10 Key Pad 4 Touch Entry to set the date of installation 10 9 System2 10 9 1 HDD Functions iiu Not Used Setting Pro cedure 267 bizhub C250 2 x 5 n o lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 9 2 Image Controller Setting Functions To set the type of the controller Peripheral Mode appears when Others is selected Use When setting up the controller Setting Image Controller Setting Procedure Select the controller to be used Controller 0 The standard controller is used Controller 1 An external controller is used Controller 2 An external controller is used Controller 3 An external controller is used Others An external controller is used Peripheral Mode Select the operating mode of the Scanner Mode 1 Not use Mode 2 Not use Mode 3 Not use NOTE After changing setting make sure to turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after 10 9 3 Option Board Status Functions To set when the Optional Fax Mount Kit Local Interface Kit is mounted Use Use when setting up the Optional Fax Mount Kit Local Interface Kit is mounted Setting Setting modes are Fax Main and local I F
397. ent of the tray volume DF 601 Read out the value of maximum width and minimum width of the document width detec tion volume interlocked with the Document Take up Tray Edge Guide Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Service Mode 2 Touch ADF 3 Touch Original Tray Width A Adjustment procedure 1 Widen the width across the edge guides 1 by sliding them to their maximum width 2 Touch Max Width 458218350400 3 Press the Start key Confirm that the Original Tray Width Result is OK Bdiusrment diuspmenv Hesuit 4582F3E516DA 4 Narrow the width across the edge guides 2 by sliding them to their minimum width 2 5 n lt 45821350600 5 Touch Min Width Original Tray Made 6 Press the Start key Confirm that the own Te Result is OK 7 Touch END gt 8 Touch Exit on the Service Mode UK Screen 4582F3E517DA If the Result is NG Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection volume wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the PWB CONT 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Mechanical adjustment 8 2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position Adjustment standard Displacement of the document edge
398. er mistor 2 TH3 is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly dur ing Ready mode Low Power mode or printing D Q E Q C3852 Abnormal Low Temp Press The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 TH2 is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly dur ing Ready mode Low Power mode or printing 338 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank C3A01 Paper Stuck to Fuser Heater The temperature of the Heating Roller Thermistor Roller 1 TH1 goes down by a given level of degree compared to the temperature of a given period of A time before when the paper passes on the Timing Roller and blocks the Exit Sensor PC2 C3A02 Paper Stuck to Fuser Pressure The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Roller Thermistor 1 TH2 goes down by a given level of degree compared to the temperature of a given A period of time before when the paper passes on the Timing Roller and blocks the Exit Sensor PC2 C4151 Polygon Motor C failure to turn The Polygon motor fails to turn stably even after B C4152 Polygon Motor M failure to turn the lapse of a given period of time after activating B the Polygon motor C4153 Polygon Motor Y failur
399. er Control Board to OFF 4 Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit and confirm that the stapling position has been correctly adjusted If not redo the adjustment 42 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Board switch 6 1 3 Adjustment of the Alignment Plate position Alignment plate should be adjusted when there is a faulty alignment the staple position deviates FS 603 A Alignment procedure NOTE If a step or steps are wrongly performed in mid procedure stop the procedure immediately Then turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit wait for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch After performing these steps start the procedure over 1 Turn main power switch OFF and remove the Finisher from the ON machine 2 Remove the rear cover form the Fin Ga a a a m i sher 1234567 8 7 3 Check to make sure that all SW1 on ASBSESES taba the Finisher Controller Board are set to OFF NOTE When not all of them are OFF write down the switch status and turn them OFF lt 4 gt 4 With the rear cover of the Finisher ON removed install the Finisher to the machine and turn main power uU UL switch ON 2345678 5 When the initial operation of the Fin isher is complete turn on the follow ing switches of SW1 When adjusting with A4 3 5 ON When adjusting with Letter 3 6 2 Pe i N D lt r 4
400. er FS 501 Finisher Door 2 7405 Job Separator JS 601 7406 7401 7403 11 7404 Finisher FS 603 Finisher Door 8 7405 7407 6401 6402 Automatic Document Feeder 12 6403 DF 601 Document Feeder Door 4 6404 1 JAM Code is displayed at Paper Jam History under Counter available from Service Mode 2 See the optional FS 501 Service Manual 8 See the optional FS 603 Service Manual 4 See the optional DF 601 Service Manual 15 1 1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure D Q E Q Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door 314 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 Jam Display 15 2 Sensor layout System Mounted with PC 203 o iD N o a 2 E 4038F4C510DA E 1 Exit Sensor PC2 6 Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor 9 E 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU 7 Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC E 3 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU 8 Tray 3 Take up Sensor PC116 PC 4 1 Registration Roller Sensor PC1 9 Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC 4 1 Sensor 4 10 Tray 4 Take up Sensor PC125 PC 5 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC 1 Two different types of sensors are located in the area near 4 315 15 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 System Mounted with PC 403 1 1 o
401. er Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover 2 bizhub C250 5 5 7 E s gt 4037F2C037DA Unhook the tab 1 and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover 2 Remove the Screws 3 and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover 4 Remove the Tray Extension 5 Remove two Screws 6 and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover 7 ROMS 58 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 6 Front Door 2 1 Open the Front Door Remove the Screw 1 each to remove the Right and Left Stoppers 2 bizhub C250 4038F2C038DB 3 Pull out the Right and Left Pins 3 to remove the Front Door 4 7 E s lt h MESE 4038F2C039DA 6 3 7 Rear Right Cover Disconnect the IR Connector 1 Open the Right Door Remove three Screws 2 and remove the Rear Right Cover 3 N T im Y s SEN y NEN 7 oe S r NS 4038F2C501DA 59 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 8 Control Panel UN201 1 1 4038F2C040DB 1 Remove four caps 1 at both ends of Control Panel bizhub C250 5 5 7 g T 2 Remove four Screws 2 2 4038F2C041DB 60 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 4038F2C042DA 4038F2C043DB 4037F2C044DA 6
402. er the shift operation began shift to the right The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the shift operation began shift to the right The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began shift to the left The Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the return opera tion began shift to the left The Shift Tray Stop Sensor PC11 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT after the return operation began shift to the left C0215 LCT Shift Motor malfunction The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT cannot detect both edges of H L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Tray Motor M4 LCT is turning backward forward raise lower Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF the Main Power Switch Then wait for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch to reset the malfunction display 31 PC 403 d Q e Q 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 Solution 8 3 1 C0001 LCT communication error PC 403 Relevant electrical parts Control Board PWB C1 LCT WI
403. error Control Board CF570 Parity error Overrun error MFP Control Board C Framing error CF580 Frame distortion of ADF MFP Control Board C CF600 Report receiving of print start MFP Control Board Engine C that is out of sequence CF601 Report receiving of paper feed MFP Control Board Engine C ing that is out of sequence CF604 Outside IF Command Queue Control Board C CF614 Output sequence Queue Control Board C CF624 Panel LCD date Queue Control Board C CF704 Common data Delete waiting MFP Control Board HDD accumulated job ID C Queue CF714 IRC Command Queue Control Board C CF724 Engine Command Queue MFP Control Board Engine C CF734 Panel Command Queue MFP Control Board Control Panel C CF744 File Memory Transfer start wait e MFP Control Board C ing Command Queue CF754 File Memory Compression MFP Control Board C requesting Command Queue CF764 Panel instruction delete job MFP Control Board C Queue CF774 Warning delete job Queue MFP Control Board C CF784 Application instruction delete job e Control Board C Queue CF794 Output page information for MFP Control Board C Duplex back side Queue CF7A4 Paper feed completion output Control Board C pate information Queue 7 4 Exposure compaction output Control Board C page information Queue CF7C4 Pre discharge completion output MF
404. ervice Mode 10 11 List Output 10 11 1 Machine Management List Functions To produce an output of a list of setting values adjustment values Total Counter val ues and others Use Atthe end of setup or when a malfunction occurs Setting Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source Procedure Press the Start key which will let the machine produce the list The time of day and date will also be printed 10 11 2 Adjustment List Functions To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment process adjustment etc in Service Mode Use Atthe end of setup or when a malfunction occurs Setting Load the A4R plain paper to a paper source Procedure Press the Start key which will let the machine produce the list The time of day and date will also be printed 10 11 3 Parameter List ts For details see FK 502 Service Manual 10 11 4 Service Parameter ts For details see FK 502 Service Manual 10 11 5 Protocol Trace ts For details see FK 502 Service Manual 10 11 6 Fax Setting List ts For details see FK 502 Service Manual 277 bizhub C250 2 Pe i 5 N UO lt bizhub C250 2 ae i 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 12 State Confirmation 10 12 1 Sensor Check Functions To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches whe
405. ervice Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order State Confirmation Memory HDD Adj Memory Check 3 Select the desired type of check either Rough Check or Detail Check 4 Press the Start key to start the check procedure 5 When the check procedure is completed the results are shown on the screen If the check results are NG check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence Only Rough Check B Compress Decompression Check Functions To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly Use f the copy image is faulty Adjustment 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order State Confirmation Memory HDD Adj Compress Decompression Check 3 Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression decom pression check sequence 4 The check result will be displayed C Memory Bus Check Functions To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory and from memory to printer Use f the copy image is faulty Adjustment 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order State Confirmation Memory HDD Adj Memory Bus Check 3 Select either Scanner gt Memory Memory gt PRT or both 4 Pressing the Start k
406. ervice schedule maintenance steps ser vice tools removal reinstallation methods of major parts and firmware version up method etc ADJUSTMENT SETTING Explanation of utility mode service mode and mechanical adjustment etc TROUBLESHOOTING Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes and their countermeasures etc APPENDIX Parts layout drawings connector layout drawings timing chart overall layout drawing are attached Notation of the service manual A Product name In this manual each of the products is described as follows 1 PWB MFP 2 bizhub C250 3 Microsoft Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP MFP Control Board Main Unit Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 or Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP When the description is made in combination of the OS s mentioned above B Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company C 2 Windows 95 98 Me Windows NT 4 0 2000 Windows NT 2000 XP Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP KONICA MINOLTA SERVICE MANUAL bizhub c250 Main Unit 2005 07 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Ver 1 0 Revision history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance There
407. es Take the top surface of the finished copies as A and the under surface as B 9 Check the deviation of the stapling position from the newly folded position NOTE n checking the deviation refer not to the folded position by the Finisher but to the newly folded position 26 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Mechanical adjustment Standard 0 2 mm To side Standard To side A B A FS 603 458316350100 10 Press the Clear Key 11 Adjust with the Keys f When the stapling position is shifted p center etapie 1 to the direction A Adjust the value to Position adi the side HaSiCEGId 77777 When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B Adjust the value to the side 12 Touch END Max 7 Min 7 4583F3E508DA 13 Make the copy and check again 2 Pe i N UO lt 27 5 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 2 Adjustment of the folding position The folding position is adjusted by aligning the folding position to the stapling position This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1 mm or more Forthe effective adjustment of a minimal displacement smaller than 1 mm refer to 6 Board switch te 40
408. etn bcr e Fe da cmd COH EL e XR EXER CH RE SERE ARX EA E ERI 134 6 4 14 50 1 135 6 5 Mount the original size detecting sensor 2 204 136 a 6 6 Option enirn codon or n 6 6 1 Installation method for the Key Counter 2 Adjustment Setting 7 How to use the adjustment section 141 E Y PL nce cm 142 8 8 1 Touch Panel Adjustment 142 8 2 Utility Mode function tree cee 143 8 3 Utility Mode function setting procedure 157 8 3 1 iu e 157 7 8 3 2 EXiting PE AEE ae caa aeta ei ente 157 2 8 3 3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions 157 E 84 One Touch Registration e rien tne eiecti i Ese 158 8 4 1 o 158 8 4 2 159 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 4 3 User 8 5 User Settingan einsa nione 161 g 8 5 1 rhe erar n REL EN GR CD LEE ERE 161 8 5 2 Display 5610 163 2 8 5 3 Initial Setting 8 5 4 Copier
409. etting Functions Use Setting Procedure Not Used 10 9 7 Scan Caribration Functions To set whether to use the calibration adjustment value set prior to the shipping Use To be used when CCD unit has bee changed After replacing the CCD unit the default value needs to be set since the calibration 2 value set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on E each scanner CCD gt Setting The default setting is ON E Procedure ON OFF E lt When the setting is changed the function becomes available by turning the Sub Power Switch OFF and ON again 10 9 8 LCT Paper Size Setting Functions To set the paper size for the LCT Use Use to change the paper size for the LCT Setting The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area Procedure A4 81 2x 11 269 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 9 9 Line Mag Setting Functions To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping Use To be used after replacing the CCD unit After replacing the CCD unit the default value needs to be set since the magnifica tion offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner CCD Setting The default setting is ON Procedure bizhub C250 ON OFF NOTE
410. ey will start the memory bus check and be terminated automati cally 5 The check result will be displayed OK or NG 288 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode D Work Memory In Out Check Functions To check to see if input and output of image data of work memory are correctly per formed Use e f the print image is faulty Adjustment 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order State Confirmation gt Memory HDD Adj Work Memory In Out Check 3 Select either Input Check Output Check or both 4 Pressing the Start key will start the work memory input output operation check sequence and be terminated automatically 5 The check result will be displayed OK or NG E HDD R W Check Functions To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly and if read write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed Use When the hard disk is mounted Adjustment 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order State Confirmation gt Memory HDD HDD R W Check 3 Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R W check sequence and be termi nated automatically 4 The check result will be displayed OK or NG F HDD Format Functions To format the hard disk The function proceeds in the order of Physical Format to L
411. f check Clean Replace Lubtice Deserip personnel tion tions 1 Paper feed and image e Overall conditions 2 Appearance e e 3 1 Feed Roller 1 e 4 Bypass Separation Roller Assy 1 e 5 Pick up Roller 2 e 6 DF 601 Feed Roller 1 7 Separation Roller 1 e 3 2 5 Periodical parts replacement 3 per 300 000 print No Class Parts to be replaced Numberof Check Clean Replace peii Descriptions personnel cation Paper feed and image 1 zi e Overall conditions 2 Appearance e e 3 Pick up Roller 1 e 4 Tray2 Feed Roller 1 e 5 Separation Roller Assy 1 e 6 103 Pick up Roller 1 e nepara 7 203 Feed Roller 1 e ose ree PC 403 parts at the 8 E Separation Roller Assy 1 e same time 9 B Feed Roller e FS 501 9 10 FS 603 Transport route Guide e 11 Sensor e 11 bizhub C250 5 o 7 E s 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 3 Maintenance parts To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life it is rec ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 5 x 11 Standard mode and Low Power Mode OFF o D N o 5 N a 3 3
412. f the document Manually correct the value of Position Correction 23 DF 601 2 Pe i N D lt 8 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 4 4 Manual adjust Sub Scanning Direction 1 Sided 2 Sided document stop position adjustment Adjusted range 7 mm to 7 mm DF 601 A Adjustment procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Service Mode 2 Touch ADF 3 Touch Original Stop Position Ror Sean 4582F3E524DA 4 Select Sub Scanning Direction 1 Side or Sub Scanning Direction 2 Side 5 Enter the value from the ten key pad Press the ID key to change the code To shift the position in the direction of F set the code to To shift the position in the direction of E set the code to 6 Touch END m 2 5 n lt 24 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Mechanical adjustment 8 4 5 Manual adjust Main Scanning Direction Image scan position adjustment Adjusted range 3 mm to 3 mm A Adjustment procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Service Mode 2 Touch ADF 3 Touch Original Stop Position DF 601 ADF Adjustment Original Stop Position Restore Sab Scan Direction 1 Side eT Main Scanning 3 0 3 0 4582F3E525DA 4 Select Main Scanning Direction 5 Enterthe va
413. fault setting is PAGE 1 Procedure Temporary One Touch PAGE1 to PAGE27 164 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 3 Address Book Default Index Functions To set the default display for abbreviation address screen during Fax mode Use To keep the default display instead of abbreviations address search string which fre 2 quently changes during Fax mode a N Setting The default setting is Main 2 Procedure Main ABC to WXYZ etc 4 Address Type Symbol Display Functions To set whether to display the Address Type symbol on each address key when selecting the address to transmit Fax Use To cancel displaying the Address Type symbol on each address key Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 5 No of Characters for Dest Display Functions To set the number of characters for the address displayed on the address key when selecting the address to transmit Fax Use To display the whole address which consists of over fifteen characters Setting The default setting is 14 char Procedure 14 char 24 char D Copy Screen 1 Copy Operating Screen Functions To set the display on the control panel screen during printing Use To display the screen to indicate printing when printing is being carried out ON The screen shows that the printing is being carried out The job can be reserved with Prog
414. fore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS bizhub C250 Main Unit General 1 System configuratiOri nititur torti t hatte la deserit da dnas 2 Product specifications MEE EET 2 2 dicar ba ni Evers UH GER AE ELE e REOR 2 3 Iypes ot Papel s 2 4 M
415. from CD ROM select the cygwin folder in CD ROM drive Described below is the sample procedure when CD ROM drive is E drive 7 Click Next N EE Select Local Package Directory Select a deechory where you Setup to nose the installation fier i dovenioads The deectery val be crested t ders rel abend esst Local Package Diectery EM Drewes 4037F2E548DA 43 bizhub C250 s 7 s 5 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Click Next N I ns Select Packages Select the packages you want setup to instal C Pree Gat Mew 3 Package bizhub C250 Category Cu AE 4v Del Advin amp y Defui chive 69 Delaut Baie amp Delad Databave 4 Dea Dovel y Deli Doc 49 Detak Eton Del Garner Detour 49 New xi lt Back Newt gt Carcel 4037F2E549DA 9 Click Complete to start installing 21515 Create Icons Tell setup you want to croate a few icons for convenient accert to the c3 errerormeri v Create icon on Desktop T T7 ukd con lo Stat Meru 4037F2E550DA 10 After installing open the Property of My Computer and click the Environmental Vari able of Advanced tab 11 Click the New in System Variable Setting Environment Va
416. from the rear toward the front side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 403616255500 3 Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counter clockwise from the front toward the rear side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 7 E s 403816255600 4 Slip the Cable Holding Jig 3 onto the pulley to secure the cable in posi 3 lec tion 40365255760 Rear 4 5 Position the round bead 4 of the gt Scanner Drive Cable in the 5 5 as shown S E i NOTE Make sure that the bead snugly 4 rests in the slit in the pulley 403615255800 107 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other 40365255960 40365256060 40365256160 gt 40365256260 108 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clock wise from the front toward the rear side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 7 Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counter clockwise from the rear toward the front side NOTE Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other 8 Slip the Cable Holding Jig 6 onto the pulley to secure the cable in posi tion 9 Install the front and rear pulleys 7 and bushings 8 onto
417. fter once stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other image troubles 5 Reinstall the Gear 8 NOTE Make sure that the gear claw is fit in 6 Connect the Connector and the Flat Cable NOTE Make sure the Harness is installed along with the Harness guide 7 Follow the same procedures to install all the PH Units 8 Install the Imaging Unit Guide Rail 9 NOTE Make sure that the two claws 10 at rear end of the rail are fit in the locating hole on the main unit 9 Reinstall the Image Transfer Belt Unit 10 Reinstall the Front Cover 11 Make skew adjustment of the PH Unit t 309 When replacing the PH Unit make sure to conduct PH Unit skew adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 31 Transport Drive Assy BARARWREN ED Remove the PWB Box 112 Remove the High Voltage Unit 80 Remove the Color Developing Motor 115 Remove the Color PC Drum Motor 116 Remove the Main Motor 117 4038F2C118DA 4038F2C119DA 4038F2C120DA 6 Other 6 Remove three Screws 1 and remove the Reinforcement plate 2 of the Right Door and spring 3 7 Remove the Shoulder Screw 4 8 Remove two Screws 5 and remove the Metal blanking plate 6 93 bizhub C250 7 g s bizhub C250 5 5 7 g Other 4038F2C121DA 4038F2C122DA 4038F2C123DA
418. g Functions To set whether to use SLP or not Use Notto use SLP Service Location Protocol Device search will be available with TWAIN by setting SLP Enable Setting The default setting is Enable Procedure Enable Disable 212 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 7 LPD Setting Functions To set whether to use LPD during printing or not Use e Not use LPD during printing Setting The default setting is Enable Procedure Enable Disable 8 SNMP Setting Functions To set whether to use SNMP or not Use Notto use SNMP Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF Read Community name Enter the Read Community name Write Community Name Enter the Write Community Name 9 Prefix Suffix Setting lt ON OFF Setting gt Functions To set whether to add Prefix or Suffix to the address when calling or entering an address Use To add Prefix or Suffix to the address Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF Prefix Suffix Setting Functions To register or change the Prefix or Suffix Eight types of Prefix and Suffix can be added Prefix Letters added to the top of the text Header part Suffix Letters added to the bottom of the text Footer part Use To register or change the address displayed for Prefix or Suffix Setting Available number to be registered as Prefix is up to 20
419. gas fluorescent lamp 30 W Print Density Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction x 600 dpi in sub scanning direction Platen Stationary mirror scan Original Scanning Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD one shot reading system Registration Rear left edge Paper Feeding System Standard Three way system Multiple Bypass 100 sheets Tray1 250 sheets Tray2 500 sheets Exposure System Four multi array PH unit system Two beam LD polygon mirror exposure system for Y M C and 8 beams in total Exposure Density Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction x 600 dpi in sub scanning direction Developing System HMT developing system Charging System DC comb electrode Scorotron system with electrode cleaning function manual Electrode cleaning function is mounted only on the K imaging unit Image Transfer System Intermediate transfer belt system Paper Separating System Selection either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding lower pressure paper separate claws Fusing System Roller fusing o iD N o 2 5 N 2 Product specifications Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 2 Functions Types of Original Sheets books and three dimensional objects 2 Max Original Size A3 or 11 x 17 Ledger a Max Original Weight Max 2 kg Multiple Copies 1 to 999 110 s
420. ge PC 403 6 1 1 Print Positioning Side Edge 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual 2 Touch Machine gt Printer Area 3 Touch Print Positioning Side Edge 3rd Print Positioning Leading Eda Par ant Positioning Sade Edd aa Dei 4061F3E810DA 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specification 3 0 mm 1 0 mm 6 If the measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 7 Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the spec gt ified range If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value perform adjustment according to the following procedure iz 2 5 n D lt 434816350900 20 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Mechanical adjustment SS 8 Press the Drawer Release button 1 and then slide out the drawer 2 from the Paper Feed Cabinet PC 403 434816351000 9 Open the Right Door 10 Loosen the adjustment screw 3 and turn screw D 4 to make the adjust ment NOTE Donot damage the passage surface of the Right Door 434816351100
421. ght NOTE Only the folding line will move 10 Feed out the test copy and check if there is any folding deviation 35 FS 603 D 2 Pe E N lt 5 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 5 Stapler Phase Adjustment Make phase adjustment of the Stapler following the procedures given below whenever the Gear or Timing Belt in front of the Stapler has been replaced or removed for some reason since such replacement or removal will cause mistiming between the staple driving by the Staple Driver the lower unit of the Stapler and the staple clinching by the Staple Clincher the upper unit of the Stapler FS 603 458318250400 5 5 1 Adjustment procedure 1 Remove the Stapler ww 10 2 Remove the E Ring 1 and remove the Jam Release Dial 1 2 3 Remove the Jam Release Dial 2 3 4 Remove the three screws 4 and remove the Stapler Front Cover 5 458315254300 5 Remove the Gear Cover 7 from the Staple Driver 6 6 Remove the E Ring 8 and remove the Side Cover 10 from the Staple 6 Clincher 9 Adjustment Setting 458318250500 7 Remove two E Rings 11 remove the Staple Jam Release Gear 12 the Timing Belt 13 and the Middle Gear 1 14 8 Remove the spacer and the spring located behind the Staple Jam Release Gear 9 Remove the screw 15 and the spring 16 and remov
422. ginal Glass fixing brackets 4 at the front and rear 3 Remove the Original Glass 5 4 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Scanner Rails 6 clean of dirt NOTE Apply lubricant after cleaning Remove the Original Glass 56 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Mirror 1 1 and Mirror 2 3 2 133 bizhub C250 5 o 7 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other 6 4 12 Lens 4038F2C182DA 6 4 13 Original Glass 4038F2C183DA 134 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Original Glass gt 56 Remove two Screws 1 and Lens cover 2 3 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Lens 3 clean of dirt 1 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Original Glass 1 clean of dirt Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 4 14 CCD Sensor Remove the Original Glass ww 56 Remove seven Screws 1 and CCD Unit protective cover 2 bizhub C250 0 4038F2C069DA 3 Remove two hooks 3 and the lens cover 4 5 o 7 g 4038F2C184DA 4 Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the CCD Sensor 5 clean of dirt 4038F2C137DA 135 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 5 Mount the original size detecting sensor 2 PC204
423. gt If the step value confirmed in step 4 is 7 turn the skew adjustment dial of PH Black to the left direction for 7 clicks bizhub C250 4038F3C005DB 8 Close the Front door and touch Imaging Process Adjustment Stabilizer Initial ize Image Stabilization 9 After image stabilization is completed display Service Mode State Confirmation Color Regist again and check if the Step Value X of Black is within the specifi cation NOTE Each color s Step value displayed on Color Regist changes every time the image stabilization is conducted Therefore the value may change even if skew adjust ment is not made e f the value is out of the specification repeat step 5 to 6 to continue the adjustment until it satisfies the specification e f the value satisfies the specification proceed to step 9 iz 2 Z lt n lt 10 Check if the Step Value X of each color C M Y is within the specification Specification within 4 State Confirmation Color Regist Front Back Front Back 281 481 383 542 87 41 4 H 123 440 21 418 122 25 m 243 203 175 353 51 80 12 211 1 550 0 308 1 1 0 4038F3E515DA 310 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 Mechanical adjustment e f either value is out of the specifica tion follow the pr
424. h as connecting failure in PH Unit of the corresponding color may occur which should be modified If there isn t any problem proceed to step 4 Gradation Pattern SINGLE wasents rer Ew Yellow Black 4PC 4038F3E513DA 4 Touch Service Mode gt gt Imaging Process Adjustment Stabilizer Initialize Image Stabilization 5 Display Service mode State Confirmation Color Regist and check if the Step Value X of Black k is within the specification Specification within 4 State Confirmation Color Regist Front Back Front Back os ihe X Y x Y x Y Y G 281 481 383 542 BT 41 12 4 H 123 440 21 418 122 25 23 1 243 203 175 353 51 80 13 12 C9 211 1 550 0 308 1 uli 0 4038F3E514DA 309 bizhub C250 7 Pe i N UO lt 14 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 f the value is out of the specification follow the procedures shown below to adjust it to satisfy the specification e f the value satisfies the specification proceed to step 9 6 Open the Front Door 7 Turn the Skew adjustment dial of PH Black for numeric of Step value with flathead screwdriver To the left When the step value goes direction To the right When the step value goes direction lt Adjustment sample
425. h the adjust of D Max 407 bizhub C250 d Q e Q bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Step Section Check Item Result Action 14 Image Process Adjustment Stabilizer Reset Stabilizer Service Mode After the Reset Stabilizer sequence has been completed run Gradation Adjust NO Go to next step 15 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 14 NO Change Imaging Unit Change MFP Control Board Change PH Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 408 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 24 Printer Monocolor void areas white spots A Typical Faulty Images Void areas White spots bizhub C250 403615405100 40365405060 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check There are void areas at the front YES s 404 side or high density section 1 There is void area at the rear side YES Perform Transfer Adjust of 2 section Image Process Adjustment under Service Mode 3 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 4 Dirty on the outside YES Clean 5 Toner Cartridge Foreign matter or caked toner in YES Remove fo
426. hange PWB M 3 Change PU1 16 5 63 C5351 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 1 M8 DC Power Supply PU1 Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary 3 M8 operation check PWB M CNLV3 2 ON PWB M CNLV3 3 LOCK 4 Change PU1 16 5 64 5353 Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor 2 M22 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary M22 operation check PWB M CNR2FAN 4 ON PWB M CNR2FAN 6 LOCK 4 Change PWB M 369 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 65 C5354 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor M14 Mechanical Control Board PWB M bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal
427. hange the CE Password from its default value For the procedure to change the CE Password see the Enhanced Security 296 B Exiting Touch the Exit key C Changing the Setting Value in Service Mode Functions Use the key to enter or change the setting value Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the setting value To change the setting value first press the Clear key before making an entry 228 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 2 Service Mode function tree The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen 1 Settings are available only when the Optional FAX Kit FK 502 is mounted bizhub C250 Service Mode Machine Fusing Temperature gt 233 Fusing Transport Speed Print Positioning Leading Edge Org Size Detecting Print Positioning Side Edge Sensor Adj Printer Area Dup Print Positioning Side Edge Scan Area Image Position Leading Edge Image Position Side Edge Printer Resist Loop Cross Direction Adjustment Feed Direction Adjustment Color Registration Adjustment Gyan Fusing Loop Size Magenta Manual Bypass Tray Yellow Adjustment Lead Edge Erase Adjustment Firmware Version is 243 Imaging Process Adjustment ws 244 7 Pe i
428. hanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 4 Adjustment of the Folding Position Folding position is adjusted by adjusting the Tray Section and the Saddle Section Adjust the folding position by aligning the Tray Section Adjust the position of the Saddle Section if the position is still not proper FS 603 Deviation amount which will be adjusted Amount of deviation which will Amount of deviation which will Total amouni which Paper Size be adjusted by aligning the Tray be adjusted by aligning the s will be adjusted Section Saddle Section position A3 0 55 mm 0 55 mm 1 1 mm A4 0 4 mm 0 4 mm 0 8 mm B4 0 5 mm 0 5 mm 1 0 mm Ledger 0 55 mm 0 55 mm 1 1 mm Letter 0 35 mm 0 35 mm 0 7 mm 5 4 1 Adjustment procedure A Checking the deviation amount 1 Load the Paper Take up Tray with paper 2 Select Fold amp Staple and touch OK 3 Place the Original Blank paper acceptable to the original tray and dmm press the Start key 4 Checkthe fed out copy to see if there irection os is any deviation Deviated downward Deviated upward 1 lt Exit direction 4583F3E525DA 2 5 n lt B Adjusting the folding deviation 1 Turn main power switch OFF and remove the Finisher from the machine 2 Remove the cable and remove the Horizontal Unit 1 4583F3C51
429. has started rotating during the 2nd Image Transfer Roller is pressuring C2152 Transfer Belt Separation The 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Posi tion Sensor doesn t turn ON Retracting even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Clutch has turned ON during the Transfer Belt is retract ing The 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Posi tion Sensor doesn t turn OFF Pressuring even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Clutch has turned ON during the Transfer Belt is pressur ing C2253 Color PC Drum Motor s failure to turn The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede termined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning C2254 Color PC Drum Motor turning at abnormal timing The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a prede termined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary C2255 Color Developing Motor s failure to turn The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a prede termined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning C2256 Color Developing Motor s turning at abnormal timing The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a prede termined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary C2451 Transfer Cleaner Unit New Article Release A new installation is not detected when a new Transfer Cleaner Unit Image Transfer Be
430. has been used Yellow IU Period of time over which the Yellow Developing Unit has been used Black IU Period of time over which the Black Developing Unit has been used LCT Parts Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT ADF Feed Number of sheets of paper fed through the take up section of the ADF ADF Reverse Number of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of the ADF Sorter Finisher Number of sheets of paper fed out of the Sorter Finisher 274 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 10 3 Functions To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the at machine clear the count of each counter 2 N Use To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure Ifa counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation 10 10 4 Service Call Counter Functions To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the machine To clear the count of each counter Use To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure Ifa counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation
431. he Copy mode scanner mode or Fax mode set on the panel Carry out this setting after the necessary setting for each mode Factory Default Mode set prior to the shipping The corresponding setting will be the one which has been set prior to the shipping by carrying out this setting from each mode screen 8 5 4 Copier Setting A Auto Paper Select for Small Original Functions To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small or no original is being set Use To copy the original such as business cards with which the Original detection is not effective Copy on Small Size Copies on A5 paper Copy on A4 Letter Copies on A4 or Letter size paper Prohibit Copy Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected Paper Feed Tray needs to be selected prior to pressing the Start key Setting The default setting is Prohibit Copy Procedure Copy on Small Size Copy on A4 Letter Prohibit Copy 166 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode B Auto Booklet ON when Fold amp Staple Functions To set whether to set the Auto Booklet when Fold amp Staple is selected Use To cancel setting the Auto Booklet when Fold amp Staple is selected Setting The default setting is Auto Select Booklet Procedure Auto Select Booklet OFF C Auto Zoom for Combine Booklet Functions To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when Com
432. he default setting is Low Power Procedure Low Power Sleep 4 Entering Power Save Mode Fax Functions To set whether to immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode Use To immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode Normal Switches to the Power Save Mode according to the normal Power Save Mode after the printing Immediately Switches to the Power Save Mode immediately after the printing Setting The default setting is Normal Procedure Normal Immediately 173 bizhub C250 2 Pe i lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 B Output Setting 1 Print Fax Output Settings Functions To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or Fax received Use Batch Print Starts printing when all data are received Page Print Starts printing every time data for each page are received bizhub C250 Setting Printer Procedure The default setting is Page Print Fax The default setting is Batch Print 2 Exit Tray Setting Functions To set the priority output tray for each application Copy print Printer Fax and Print Reports This setting is available only when FS 501 is mounted Use To change the output tray according to the application Setting The default settings
433. he machine receives the telegram whose size KONICA MINOLTA exceeds the specification 0022 Transmitting Phase Response NG Contact responsible person of Transmitting phase response MSG is not appro KONICA MINOLTA priate 0023 Timeout of Transmitting Phase Response MSG Contact responsible person of Transmitting phase response MSG is timeout KONICA MINOLTA 0024 Event Data Acquisition Function Error Contact responsible person of Although the transmitting phase response MSG KONICA MINOLTA is OK the function for Data acquisition shows No event 0025 Timeout of Driver transmitting check MSG Contact responsible person of Transmitting check MSG from the driver task is KONICA MINOLTA timeout 0026 Detection of Internal Contradiction Contact responsible person of Unknown event is detected Condition value is KONICA MINOLTA not correct or so on 0027 Transmission Receiving collision Try communication again Receiving is detecting during transmitting pro cessing 263 bizhub C250 2 Pe i 5 N UO lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 7 10 Troubleshooting for C8 Remote Care If communication is not done properly during use of the modem check the condition by fol lowing the procedures shown below 1 Shift the screen in the order of Service Mode CS Remot
434. he scale Press the Start key to make a copy 5 Check the C width on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make another copy 8 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met 12 ae i 5 n lt 240 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode D Feed Direction Adjustment Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section Use The Scanner Assy has been replaced The Scanner Motor has been replaced The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced Adjustment Specification Measure D width on the color chart and on the sample copy and adjust the gap to be within the following specification P1 P1 lt gt An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Paper Feed Direction Adj of D Printer Area Specifications D x 1 5 mm 4038F3C518DA Setting Range 0 990 to 1 010 in 0 001 increments Adjustment Instructions If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart increase the setting If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart decrease the setting Setting Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Machin
435. he screen Touch Machine Printer Area Print Positioning Side Edge Select the paper source to be adjusted Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the 4 key Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again width A falls within the specified range touch END 11 Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the Bypass 236 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode C Dup Print Positioning Side Edge Instructions Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2 Sided mode Use The image on the backside of the 2 sided copy deviates in the main scan direction Adjustment od Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range For measurement use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 43 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments Adjustment f width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the
436. heck PWB A FN PJ15A 4 ON FS 501 B 5 E 5 PC4 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ20A 9 ON FS 501 H 6 3 6 PC2 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A 8 ON FS 501 B 8 5 7 I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ20A 3 ON FS 501 H 7 8 1 operation check PWB A FN PJ9A 1 to 4 FS 501 B 2 9 M4 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ9A 5 to 8 FS 501 B 2 10 2 operation check PWB A FN PJ9A 9 to 12 FS 501 B 2 11 PWB A FN replacement 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 3 8 Jam Display Tray1 Exit section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Tray1 misfeed detection Exit section The 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked B Action Relevant electrical parts 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC1 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ19A 6 ON FS 501 B 8 3 PWB A FN replacement 8 3 4 Job Tray Exit section misfeed JS 601 A Detection timing Type Description Job Tray Exit section misfeed detection JS 601 The Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked B Action Relevant electrical parts Job Tray Exit Sens
437. her Tray Sensor PI6 FN Exit Tray Sensor PI8 FN Exit Tray Home Position Sensor PI9 FN 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Saddle Tray Sensor PI13 FN Shift Motor Clock Sensor PI17 FN Stack Full Sensor PI24 FN Shift Lower Limit Sensor P116 FN Exit Belt Home Position Sensor PI7 FN Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 FN Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 FN Shift Upper Limit Sensor PI15 FN Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI14 FN Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 9 PK 501 Option 19 Parts layout drawing 4037F5C517DA 1 2 3 4 5 Punch Motor 1 Side Registration Home Sensor PI2P PK Punch Motor Clock Board PI3P PK Photo Sensor Board PWB C PK LED Board PWD D PK 6 7 8 9 10 Side Registration Motor M2P PK Punch Trash Full LED Board PWB F PK Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board PWB E PK Punch Control Board PWB B PK Punch Home Position Sensor 1 443 bizhub C250 2 lt lt 19 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 10 Horizontal Transport Unit 4 bizhub C250 38 Re 7 3 4037F5C518DA 1 Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 HO 3 Paper Sensor PC1 HO 2 Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO 4 Horiz
438. hes the reference value If the toner density is found to be higher than the refer ence value only a developer agitation sequence is carried out Aw 248 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 6 8 Monochrome Density Adjustment e Functions To fine adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy Use To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy 2 gt Adjustment Lighter 2 steps Std Darker 2 steps E Range Adjustment If the black is light touch the Darker key Instructions If the black is dark touch the Lighter key Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment Monochrome Den sity Adjustment 3 Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density 10 6 9 Dev Bias Choice Functions To change the setting of the developing bias voltage When this function is turned ON it decreases the developing bias voltage thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring Use Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pressure such as in high altitudes If ON is set the screen doesn t display Service Mode Imaging Process Adjust ment Gradation Adjust and the Gradation Adjust is not allowed Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF
439. hooting Appendix bizhub C250 Maintenance 2 2 N El lt Troubleshooting Appendix Xii Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 71 C6704 Image Input Time Out 16 5 72 C6751 CCD clamp gain adjustment 372 16 5 73 9401 Exposure Lamp s failure to turn 373 16 5 74 C9402 Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing 373 16 5 75 CAO051 Standard Controller configuration failure 373 16 5 76 CAO052 Controller hardware error 373 16 5 77 CAO053 Controller start failure 373 16 5 78 CCO001 Vendor connection failure essen 374 16 5 79 CC151 ROM contents error upon startup 374 16 5 80 CC152 ROM contents error upon startup Scanner 374 16 5 81 CC153 ROM contents error upon startup PRT 374 16 5 82 CC154 ROM contents error upon startup 374 16 5 83 CC163 ROM contents error 16 5 84 CD002 JOB RAM save error eene 16 5 85 CD004 Hard disk access error 16 5 86 CD005 Hard Disk Error 1 16 5 87 CD006 Hard Disk Error
440. ical component refer to Handling of PWBs and follow the corresponding removal procedures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and Screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 5 o 7 51 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 6 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list o No Section Part name Ref Page 8 1 IR Upper Right Cover gt 54 2 IR Right Cover gt 54 3 IR Upper Rear Cover gt 54 4 Left Cover 55 5 Upper Front Cover gt 55 6 IR Left Cover gt 55 7 IR Upper Front Cover gt 55 8 Original Glass gt 56 9 IR Front Cover gt 56 10 Exit Tray gt 57 11 Upper Rear Cover gt 57 12 Lower Rear Cover gt 57 8 13 Exterior parts Rear Left Cover gt 57 5 14 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover gt 58 15 Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover gt 58 16 Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover gt 58 17 Front Door 59 18 Rear Right Cover we 59 19 Control Panel 60 20 Tray 1 61 21 Tray 2 gt 62 22 Tray 2 Rear Right Cover 63 23 Tray
441. ice Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode List Output 277 State Confirmation Sensor Check s 278 Table Number bizhub C250 Level History1 Level History2 Temp amp Humidity CCD Check Memory HDD Adj Memory HDD State Color Regist IU Lot No Adjustment Data List Test Mode Gradation Pattern ws 291 Halftone Pattern Lattice Pattern Solid Pattern Color Sample 8 Color Solid Pattern Running Mode 2 Pe i N D lt Fax Test ADF Original Stop Position gt 294 Registration Loop Adj Auto Stop Position Adjustment Paper Passage Sensor Check Original Tray Width Sensor Auto Adjust FAX 1 Modem ECU 1 gt 294 NetWork 1 System 1 231 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 FAX 1 Fax File Format 1 294 Communication 1 List Output 1 bizhub C250 Function Parameter 1 MM Initialization 1 Finisher we 295 10 3 Date Time Input mode This mode is used to set time of day and date 10 3 1 Date amp Time Setting
442. iddle Transport Roller E 2 3 19 Punch Unit 2 3 20 Finisher Control 2 3 21 het nk 21 23 22 ransport Motor aea dank 22 2 3 23 Middle Transport nnne nennen 22 2 93 24 PUNEN MOTON uc oriri opere ri Een rr eii nee Eas 22 2 3 25 Side Registration Motor cseccsecsssscsscessscesseessescssesesesesessseesseesseaseeees 22 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Adjustment Setting E 3 How to use the adjustment section ssssssssssseeeeeennennneennenn 23 A Sensor check R A 24 4 tente ae eet Me 24 4 2 Sensor Check list 24 4 2 1 Sensor check SereBr ose corte tinte p e ti e dida ada 24 5 Mechanical adjustment erroe cir er terrere cin 26 5 1 Adjustment of the stapling position 26 5 1 1 Adjustment procedure inii irc nr cer eer c eek Xu Ee FLEX EE 26 5 2 Adjustment of the folding position 28 5 2 1 Adjustment procedure iiic nte xk a er n E ERE ER ETE XR Een 28 5 3 Adjustment of height and inclination seeeeenennenenn 30 5 4 Adjustment of the Folding Position 32 5 4 1 Adjustment
443. ield Se rvice Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 2 4 P 6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure 16 2 5 P 7 Magenta Imaging Unit failure 16 2 6 P 8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure 16 2 7 P 9 Black Imaging Unit failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Image Transfer Belt Unit Imaging Unit M High Voltage Unit HV1 Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit K Step Action 1 Select Imaging Process Adjustment D Max Density and if the setting value is negative readjust 2 Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary Clean the IDC Registration Sensor 1 SE1 or IDC Registration Sensor 2 SE2 window if dirty Clean the contact of the Imaging Unit connector if dirty Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary Change Imaging Unit Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit 16 2 8 P 21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure Relevant Electrical Parts Image Transfer Belt Unit Step Action 1 Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth if it is dirty 2 Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged 16 2 9 P 22 Color Shift Adjust failure Relevant Electrical Parts IDC Registration Sensor 1 SE1 IDC Registration Sensor 2 SE2 Step Action 1 Slide out the Imagi
444. ield Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 35 Scanner Assy 3 4038F2C521DA 4038F2C522DA 6 Other Remove the Original Glass 56 Move the Scanner Assy 1 to the notch position shown in the left illus tration and remove the mounting screws 2 at front and rear Do not remove the Scanner Posi tioning Screws red painted 3 3 Take out the Scanner Assy 4 by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown 103 bizhub C250 5 o 7 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Remove the Screw 5 and remove the Holder 6 5 Peel off the aluminum tape and remove the flat cable 7 6 Remove the Scanner Assy 8 bizhub C250 4038F2C136DA 6 3 36 Scanner Drive Cables A Removal Procedure Remove the Upper Rear Cover 57 Remove the Control Panel 1 60 NS Maintenance 4038F2C566DA 3 Remove three Presser Bars 2 of Flat Cable 4038F2C138DA 104 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C139DA 4038F2C551DA 4038F2C552DA A a 10 11 12 Remove the IR Front Cover 56 6 Other Remove the Screw 3 and remove the Ground cable from the Wire Sad dle 4 Remove four screws 5 and remo
445. ight Cover and the Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover ws 58 2 Disconnect five Connectors 1 87 bizhub C250 o 7 g s 5 5 7 g bizhub C250 88 Other 4038F2C104DA 4038F2C105DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Remove four Screws 2 and remove the Multi Bypass Unit 3 NOTE When installing the Multi Bypass Unit fit the position of dowel shown in the left illustration Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 30 PH Unit Removal Procedure Remove the Front Cover 64 Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit 31 RNAP bizhub C250 3 Remove the Screw 1 and discon nect the Connector 2 respectively and remove three Imaging Unit Guide rails 3 4 Disconnect the Flat Cable 4 and the 4 Connector 5 of the PH Unit Black 5 o 7 g 4038F2C107DA 5 Unhook the tab 6 and remove the Gear 7 of the PH Unit Black 4038F2C108DB 89 bizhub C250 Maintenance Other 4037F2C111DB 90 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Remove the Stopper 8 of the PH Unit Black NOTE When removing the Stopper use care so that both ends of the Stop per will not open but stay parallel as shown on the left Keep using the Stopper after once stretched out may cause uneven pitch
446. iginal Size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R A5R A3 OK OK 297 mm A4 OK OK B4 OK OK OK OK 257 mm B5 OK OK OK OK A4R OK OK OK OK OK OK 210 mm A5 NG NG OK OK OK OK 182 mm B5R NG NG OK OK OK OK OK 148 mm A5R NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK For Inch S 11 8 1 2 5 1 2 Size Mixed Original Size 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 14 8 1 2 11R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R 11x17 OK OK 8 1 2 x 11 OK OK 8 1 2 x 14 OK OK OK OK OK 8 1 2 8 1 2x 11R OK OK OK OK OK 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 NG NG OK OK OK 5 1 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R NG NG NG NG NG OK OK Mixed Original Feed available Tilted with in 1 5 or less NG NO Mixed Original Feed Can not Set Original 2 Mixed original feed Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 2 e f fed trouble occurrence will be highly possible Paper feed prohibited originals a Type of Original Possible Trouble Sheets stapled or clipped together Take up failure damaged sheet defective drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Sheets glued together Take up failure damaged sheet Sheets of 211g m 56 1 4 Ib or more Take up failure Sheets of 110g m 29 1 4 Ib or more in 2 Sided Mode Take up failure Sheets folded torn or wrinkled Take up failure damaged sheet Sheets severely curled Sheets misfed due to being dog eared or fed in askew OHP Film Transparency Film Take
447. ilable with normal LDAP server When failing to authenticate with Digest MD5 it automatically switches to CRAM MD5 GSS SPNEGO Method available with Window s Active Directory Kerberos authentication Setting The default setting is anonymous Procedure anonymous Simple Digest MD5 GSS SPNEGO lt Login Name gt Functions To set the Logon name to connect to LDAP server Use To set the logon name to connect to LDAP server Setting 1 Touch Login Name Procedure 2 Enter the logon name up to 255 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK NOTE The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous Password Functions To set the password for connecting to LDAP server Use To set the password for connecting to LDAP server Setting Touch Password Procedure Enter the password up to 63 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK NOTE The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous 207 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt bizhub C250 9 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Domain Name Functions To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server Use To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server Setting 1 Touch Domain Name Procedure 2 Enter
448. ing scan direction is sharp the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever 2 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 3 Dirty on the outside YES Clean Contact terminals make good con NO contact terminals 4 nection between each IU and machine 5 Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and check ter makes good connection minal position 6 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES Clean with cleaning jig dirty The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit 7 through the checks of steps up to 6 Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change PH Unit d Q e Q 401 bizhub C250 D Q E Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 16 Printer Monocolor uneven density in sub scan direction A Typical Faulty Images 40361404300 403616404400 40365404550 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action High image density original Uneven density in Sub Scan Direc tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to 50 mm when a multi copy cycle is run using an original with high image density 50 or more YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of paper with no originals placed as the IU fails to keep up with a high demand for toner 2 Imaging Unit The surfa
449. ing option Rear Aligning Motor malfunction C11A1 Finishing option Exit Roller B pressure retraction failure C11A2 Finishing option Storage Roller B pressure retraction failure C11A4 Finishing option Exit Motor B malfunction C11BO Finishing option Stapler Unit CD B drive failure C11B1 Finishing option Stapler Unit B Slide Motor malfunction C11B2 Finishing option stapling B mechanism malfunction 1 11 4 Finishing option Staple Folding B Motor malfunction C11C1 Finishing option Punch Cam C Motor drive failure C11C2 Finishing option Punch Unit C Board malfunction C11C3 Finishing option Punch Side C ES Registration Motor malfunction 2 C11C5 Finishing option Punch Sensor C E malfunction C1401 Finishing option Backup RAM B failure 335 bizhub C250 D Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Description Rank C2151 2nd Image Transfer Roller Separation The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor doesn t turn ON Retracting even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor has started rotating during the 2nd Image Transfer Roller is retracting The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor doesn t turn OFF Pressuring even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor
450. inistrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Image Stabilization Image Stabilization Only 3 Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence 4 Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green 181 bizhub C250 7 Pe i N lt bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Initialize Image Stabilization Functions To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili zation control has been initialized Use Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe cuted Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Image Stabiliza tion has been executed Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Image Stabilization gt Initialize Image Stabilization 3 Press the Start key to start Stabilizer The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence 4 Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green 182 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Color Registration Adjust Color Registration Adjust Yellow Magenta Cyan 8 Utility Mode
451. int 1 bizhub C250 Min Reduction for RX Print 1 Print Separate Fax Pages 1 File After Poll ing TX 1 Function Function ON F Code Setting 1 OFF Setting 1 TX 1 Memory 1 Closed Net work RX 1 Forward TX Setting 1 Confidential RX Password Check 1 PC Fax RX Setting 1 9 5 n lt PBX CN TSI User Box Set 1 Setting 1 Report Activity Settings 1 Report 1 H TX Report 1 Sequential TX Report 1 Timer Reserva tion TX Report 1 Report Confidential Settings 1 RX Report 1 Bulletin TX Report 1 154 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Administrator Fax Setting Report Broadcast Result Setting i Settings 1 Report 1 N gt 173 215 o Paper Tray for 2 Reports 1 N Job Settings TX Result List 1 Report Check 1 System IS OpenAPI Access Connection Setting Setting 222 L Security Set Administra Port No ting tor Password 223 Usar ser Box H HSSL 2 Admin Setting i H Administrator 4 Authentica
452. intenan6e niu nen eir et ird e Eh KE ti te i Era Eel E EE Do RR Ra ERE RE LEER REOS 2 5 Machine Specifications 2 6 Operating 2 7 Priit FUNCIONS si 2 8 SCAN FUNCTIONS ertt irent aote deo ea e t deve o FE Maintenance 3 Periodical check erret err nere ben 3 1 Setvice rre eset t tente ties 3 2 Maintenance items e enitn rennen eser rires i aiiin aasi 9 3 2 1 Parts to be replaced by users CRU 9 3 2 2 Maintenance call per 60 000 print eee 10 3 2 8 Periodical parts replacement 1 per 120 000 print 10 3 2 4 Periodical parts replacement 2 per 200 000 11 3 2 5 Periodical parts replacement per 300 000 11 3 3 Maintenance netten tnra tre trn tho rii enata rane 3 3 1 Replacement parts 3 3 2 Cleaning parts trennt reet tret nre rines itera 3 4 Concept of parts lifo nere tentare teneras 14 3 5 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 16 3 5 1 Replacing the Tray 1 Feed Roller sese 16 3 5 2 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller
453. intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Caution to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands FS 501 9 Pe i N D lt 4 Sensor Check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Sensor Check 4 1 Check procedure FS 501 To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safel
454. ion history After publication of this service manual the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance Therefore the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required Revision mark To indicate clearly a section revised show to the left of the revised section A number within N represents the number of times the revision has been made To indicate clearly a section revised show A in the lower outside section of the correspond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS PC 103 PC 203 General 1 Product SpecifiCatioris einer ttt tiroteo tenera arr asta e nep taedas Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 1 Maintenance procedure Pe
455. ions 0 To register change e mail address to send scanned data se Setting Anew address can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting 2 FTP Functions 0 register change FTP address to send scanned data se Setting Anew address can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting 3 SMB Functions register change SMB address to send scanned data se Setting Anew address can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting 4 User Box 5 Functions To register change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the D Use hard disk in the main unit Setting Anew address can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting E Atleast one User Box must be registered for registering a Box address Functions U To register change a group to send scanned data simultaneously se Setting Anew address can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed group to check edit or delete them Atleast one address must be registered for registering a new group C Program Functions To register change the Scan Program Use Setting Select any program No to check edit or delete
456. ipe the Registration Roll ers 1 clean of dirt bizhub C250 4038F2C017DA 3 5 9 Replacing the Waste Toner Box 1 Open the Front Door 2 Press the Waste Toner Box release lever 1 7 E s 3 Remove the Waste Toner Box 2 NOTE Raise the Waste Toner Box gently before removing it If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port do not tilt the Waste Toner Box when removing it Do not leave the Waste Toner Box in a tilted condition after removing it 27 bizhub C250 5 s 7 g s gt 3 Periodical check 4038F2C543DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port u 28 5 Remove the Waste Toner Box from its box and remove the packing material 6 Setthe Waste Toner Box 3 in place 7 Close the Front Door NOTE Replace the Dust Filter Cooling Fan supplied with the Waste Toner Box at the same time 3 5 10 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port 4038F2C018DB 3 5 11 Replacing the Ozone Filter 4038F2C019DA 28 1 Remove the Waste Toner Box ws 27 2 Wipe the areas around the Waste Toner Collecting Port 1 clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alco hol 1 Holding onto the hook remove the Ozone Filter 1 N
457. is not Supplied to Automatic Duplex Unit WIRING N Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action 2 Location 2 N 1 Is 24 V being output from CN19 2 on K 22 NO Malfunction in Duplex Duplex Check wiring from 2 Is DC24 V being output from CNDUP 2 on J 22 NO PWB M to CN19 to PWB M Duplex 3 Is the fuse on PU1 conducting YES Change PU1 NO Malfunction in Duplex 17 4 4 Finisher WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to Malfunction in Finisher 1 CN60 11 and CN60 1 respectively of the E 26 to 27 NO isher Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to 8 Check wiring from PU1 2 PJ6PU1 1 on PU1 and CNFIN 1 on PWB M G 26 NO to PWB M to Finisher respectively 3 Is the fuse on PU1 conducting YES Change PU1 NO Malfunction in Finisher d Q e Q 381 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 1 How to read Element date As part of troubleshooting procedures the numeric values set for State Confirmation available from Service Mode can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem o N o a E d N a Service Mode State Confirmation CS Remote Care Level System 1 System 2 eo Hom ida ty 4038F4E514DA 18 1 1 Tab
458. is will initialize the EEP ROM After the initialization all LED1001 LED1002 and LED1003 light up 4 Adjust the sensor output and regis ter the number of punch holes 5 Setall bits of DIP SW 1001 to OFF 458316351700 6 2 4 Punch center position adjustment This adjustment is made when the Punch lateral movement is changed from the lateral registration motion automatic through end face detection to fixed system based on the paper size 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit ON 2 Remove the Rear Cover u 7 3 Check that all keys of SW1 of the 12345678 Finisher Control Board are OFF 4 Turn ON the Main Power Switch of the main unit and wait until the Fin isher completes its initial operation 458316352300 Use the following procedure to clear the adjustment of the Punch lateral movement 5 Turn ON keys 4 5 6 and 7 of SW1 i L L E i P i of the Finisher Control Board 123456 7 8 458316352400 6 Turn ON key 1 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board 7 Press PSW1 and PSW2 of the Finisher Control Board at the same ime 12345678 458316352500 47 FS 603 2 Pe i N D lt 6 Board switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Turn OFF key 4 of SW1 of the Fin isher Control Board 9 Wait until the machine becomes capable of paper f
459. ity in lower ing the data volume while scanning Setting The default setting is Standard Procedure High Quality Standard High Compression B Black Compression Level Functions To set the monochrome compression method for scanning in the monochrome mode while in Scanner mode Use To be used when changing the monochrome mode while in Scanner mode Setting The default setting is MMR Procedure MH MMR C TWAIN Lock Time Functions To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning se Setting The default setting is 120 sec Procedure 120 sec 30 to 300 sec 168 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 5 6 Printer Setting A Basic Setting 1 PDL Setting Functions To set the PDL Page Description Language for PC printing Use To fix the PDL as necessary It usually switches automatically Setting The default setting is Auto Procedure Auto PCL PS 2 Number of Sets Functions To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing Use Touse when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS etc Setting The default setting is 1 Procedure 1 1 to 999 3 Original Direction Functions B To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printi
460. ive sensor or harness Setting Procedure 1 Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper on the Original Glass and lower the Orig inal Cover 2 Call the Service Mode to the screen 3 Touch these keys in this order Machine Org Size Detecting Sensor Adj 4 Press the Start key 234 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 4 4 Printer Area A Print Positioning Leading Edge Instructions Functions To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1 Use The PH Unit has been replaced The paper type has been changed The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction Afaint image occurs on the leading edge of the image Adjustment Specification Width A on the test pattern produced should 4 fall within the following range Width A Specifications 4 2 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 43 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments Adjustment If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur rent one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Setting Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch Machine Printer Area Print Positioning Leading Edge 3 Select the Plain Paper 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Check the dimension of width A on
461. k items 2 PI10 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16A FN 2 ON FS 603 B 8 3 PWB A FN replacement 54 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 5 Stapler section misfeed A Detection timing 7 Jam Display Type Description Stapler section misfeed detection been driven The Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN is not turned OFF or does not return to its home position even after the set period of time after the stapler has B Action Relevant electrical parts Staple Drive Home Position Sensor PI19 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control signal Location Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PI19 FN I O sensor check 3 PWB A FN replacement 7 3 6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Paper stack exit The Finisher Tray Sensor PI6 FN remains activated when a copy stack which section misfeed has been stapled together is fed out detection B Action Relevant electrical parts Exit Motor M3 FN Finisher Tray Sensor Pl6 FN Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM PWB A FN replacement Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PI6 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN 5 FN 3 ON FS 603 G 5 3 M3 FN operation check PWB A
462. k up Roller Paper Take up 6 3 1 3 Separation DE an Ha ke rk a Ex a 7 3 1 4 Pick up Roller Paper Take up Roller Separation Roller 8 3 1 5 Registration 8 3 1 6 patei HM 9 3 1 7 mE 9 3 1 8 SSIisor s sss cr een ir bo ie ER Pret rin dara EP Xia FEE I LIRE RAM EE AERE RR RAS 9 4 auum ETE 4 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items 5 4 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 4 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure sesseeeeeneneeneeneeennen 12 4 3 1 Front Cover Fiear Cover siitin 12 Adjustment Setting 5 How to use the adjustment section 1 13 6 Service Test Mode 6 1 Service Mode setting procedure ssssseeeeeeennene nenne 14 6 2 the Service Mode oerte tn ttes 14 6 3 ADF Paper Passage uiui irt rne tide Ro EXER FREE AVR ELS ERA ER 15 Ime SUMUS 16 7 1 Check procedure 7 2 Sensor checklist 16 7 2 1 Sensor check SCl en iiii ci einen oh cha a EUR ARRAS LAKE KR ANREDE RR 16 DF 601 Maintenance D oO 2 L n El E lt Troubleshooting Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Mechanical adjustment
463. ke a manual adjustment on Center ing 189 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n D lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Auto Adj of Stop Position Front Functions Adjust the document stop position for the first side Check for skew Use Upon setup of the ADF Setting Procedure 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the Screen 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment ADF Adjustment gt Auto Adj of Stop Position Front 3 Set the furnished Chart on the Original Feed Tray the side with arrow faces up and press the Start key 4 Make sure that adjustment result is OK 4038F3C504DA and press SET If adjustment result is NG Check the document position and cor rect it Make a manual adjustment on Original Stop Position Auto Adj of Stop Position Back Functions Adjust the document stop position for the second side Use Upon setup of the ADF Setting Procedure 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the Screen 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment ADF Adjustment gt Auto Adj of Stop Position Back 3 Set the furnished Chart on the Original Feed Tray blank side faces up and press the Start key 4 Make sure that adjustment result is OK 4038F3C504
464. l 2005 403615405200 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched YES Change Imaging Unit Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent through the checks of steps up to 6 2 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 3 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Image Transfer 4 Transfer Roller scratched Roller Unit Unit 5 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 6 Fusing Unit Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched YES Change Fusing Unit 7 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit 422 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 35 Printer 4 Color poor fusing performance offset A Typical Faulty Images Poor fusing performance Offset CF bizhub C250 403615405900 4036fs4060c0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Paper Paper type does not match YES Change the setting Machine Setting Changing fusing temperature elimi YES Readjust Fusing Temperature
465. l Mon sort3 0 Redile 0 2 Full Elev Tray 0 Self Priming OJ s Enpty Finisher 0 5835849 508 0 5 Surface Elev 0 Hone Shift 0 gel Sensor Check E END lt 1 Sensors 4 Saddle stitch Finisher Entrance 0 Crease Clock 0 853829 0 Punch Dust 0 Paddle Home D Paper D Self Prime D Punch Timing RETE D Paper Surface 0 Front Door 9 RUPSP Front Align 9 0 Upper Cover 0 Punch Hone Back Align o 0 Front Door SV 0 Alignment Tray O Lift Clock mangin in Be 0 Bert 0 Lift Middle 0 Joint SW 0 Crease PositionD Slide Home 0 Punch Depthi 0 Crease Tray 0 Stapler Home 0 Punch Depth2 0 Crease Home 0 Staple 0 Punch Depth 0 Roii amp r 01 C nhect 0 Punch Depth4 0 Sensor Check E END 1 1 Sensors Scanner 0 Home Sensor Detecting Original Size Sen amp or Detection 3 Original Cover O 052921842426 0 20 Degree D Be gebion S Ol Original size Detection Original Size Detection 7 Original Size al Detection 8 4038F3E511DA 279 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 C Sensor Check List 1 Sensors 1 Main Unit PC 103 PC 203 N e Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name Operation Characte
466. l set in the Take up Tray the Start key will not work All Originals set in the Take up Tray are passed through Upon the completion of all Originals passed through the Paper Through Test ends ROND gt DF 601 a 9 pe i n D lt 4582F3E514DA 15 7 Sensor Check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Sensor Check 7 1 Check procedure DF 601 To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Service Mode 2 Touch the ADF key 3 Touch the Sensor Check key 4 Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like and check the screen display Paper detected 1 No paper detected 0 7 2 Sensor check list 7 2 1 Sensor check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit ADF Adjustment Sensor Check Enpty 0 Registration 0 Unit faterrock 0 Exit Section o Transport Convey 0 Reverse 0 Exit Cover 0 Timing 0 Middle Tray 0 Width 4582F3E515DA iz 2 Z lt N lt Note that each of the following sensors changes from 0 to 1 when the corresponding part is opened which is r
467. larger 5 5 x 8 5 No of 5 5 x 8 5 to Sheet 1000 500 12 25 x 18 Height 150 mm 75 mm Envelop 60 to 256 g m 20 sheet OHP Film 16 to 68 Ib Label Paper Thick Paper 1 Controlled by whichever reached earlier 2 Sort offset Sort group No of Type Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray Sheets to be Stapled Plain Paper A5 B5R B5 to 90 g m A4R B4 1st paper s to A3 16 to 24 Ib 85 11 85x14 exit tray or smaller or larger 8 5 x 11R No of 8 5 x 11 to Sheets 1000 500 11x17 Height 150 mm 75 mm Controlled by whichever reached earlier eo o En 92 1 Product specification 3 Sort staple Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 No of Sheets to Type Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray be Stapled Plain Paper B5R B5to Normal Mode 4 B4 1st Normal Mode 1 2 8 5 11 85x14 Thick Paper A3 60 to 90 g m or smaller or larger A4R B4 8 5 x 11R 16 to 24 Ib No of exit tray 8 5x11R 85x14 8 5 x 11 to Sheets 1000 500 or smaller or larger 11x17 Cover Mode 190mm 21050 21025 60 to 209 g m Sets 30 30 1610 55 5 0 Controlled by whichever reached earlier 1 The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high density images Color Wise 20 sheets x 20 sets 4 Center Staple amp Fold No of Sheets to Type Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray be Stapled Plain Paper A4R B4
468. layed on the screen and pressing Set as Default 2 Text Functions E To register the e mail message when transmitting the Fax original se Setting Anew message can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting The subject can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing Set as Default 8 4 3 User Box A Public Personal User Box Functions To register change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine Use Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use Setting Anew box can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed box to change or delete it B Bulletin Board User Box Functions 0 To register change the Bulletin Board User Box se Setting Anew box can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed box to change or delete it 160 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 5 User Setting 8 5 1 System Setting A Language Selection 2 Functions To select the language on the LCD display Use e To change the language on the control panel to another language Setting The language options depend on the marketing area selected in Marketing Area Procedure available from System 1 under Service Mode B Measurement Unit Setting Functions To sele
469. le Number State Confirmation Table No Vde C vg C 0 Vde M 0 Vg M 0 Vdc Y Vg Y 0 Vdc K g K 0 4038F4E517DA Vdc C Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced 2 Vdc M Standard values Around 400 V Vdc Y Acorrection is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater 5 Vdc K Acorrection is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller 2 Relevant Components Imaging Unit High Voltage Unit Developing Bias 3 Vg C Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced Vg M Standard values Around 500 V Vg Y Acorrection is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater Vg K Acorrection is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller Relevant Components Imaging Unit High Voltage Unit Developing Bias 382 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 1 2 Level History 1 State Confirmation Level History 1 TER E 9 90 IDC1 0 00 TCR M 10 00 IDC2 D 00 TCR 9 99 Temp Heat nt TCR K 0 01 Tenp Press ob 4038F4E515DA TCR C Shows the T C ratio in 0 01 increments TCR M Standard value 8 2 TCR Y Relevant Components PH Unit TCR Sensor K TCR K IDC1 Shows the IDC bare surface output reading taken last in 0 01 V increments I
470. lect the specific counter to be displayed 3 Toclear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once touch Counter Reset select the specific counters to be cleared and touch END Two or more counters can be selected o N o 2 5 is N a 10 10 2 Life Functions To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used To clear the count of each counter Use When each of the maintenance parts is replaced Setting To clear the count of a counter select the specific part and press the Clear key Procedure If a counter is cleared mistakenly press the Interrupt key which will undo the clearing operation It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the Fusing Unit Transfer Belt Unit and IU which are provided with a new unit detection function 1 Fusing Unit Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through Transfer Unit Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through 1st Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 1 2 2nd Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 2 3rd Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 3 4th Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 4 Manual Tray Number of sheets of paper fed from the Bypass lt 2 gt Cyan IU Period of time over which the Cyan Developing Unit has been used lt e Magenta lU Period of time over which the Magenta Developing Unit
471. lectric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Caution to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands 2 Pe i N lt 17 5 Sensor check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Sensor check 5 1 Check procedure PC 403 To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the pan
472. led from the fire is dan on end or tilted otherwise toner gerous may spill TONER A WARNING ATTENTION LACK SCHWARZ AN WARNUNG E A ATENCI N AVVISO A AVISO Do not burn used Imaging Units Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous A AVISO A CAUTION A ATTENTION A CUIDADO High Temperature Temp rature lev e Alta temperatura A VORSICHT A PRECAUCI N A ATTENZIONE A gt gt AFA Oberll che iTemperatura alta Alta temperatura We ia ge The area around the Fusing Unit is extremely hot Touching any part other than those indicated may result in burns 4038P0C504DA CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label Do not remove caution labels If any caution label has come off soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read contact our Service Office MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1 accident has occurred the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage 2 Ifa report of a serious accident has been received from a customer an on site evalua tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified 3 To determine the cause of the accident conditions a
473. lled by the distributor will transmit the information to the Center side and tells that the maintenance has started When the maintenance is fin ished touching Maintenance Complete key will transmit the information to the Center and tells that it is finished When starting the Maintenance Select Service Mode and touch CS Remote Care Touch ID Code and input ID Code Touch ID Coke gt The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out B When finishing the Maintenance 1 Select Service Mode and touch CS Remote Care 2 Touch Maintenance Complete 257 bizhub C250 2 Pe i 5 N UO lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 7 6 Calling the Center from the Administrator When the CS Remote Care setup is complete the administrator can call the Remote Care center 1 Select Administrator Setting and touch System Connection 2 Touch Admin transmission 3 Press the Start key When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out the Admin transmission key will not be displayed and the transmission is not available NOTE Fortransmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time refer to the manual for CS Remote Care Center o N o 5 N a 10 7 7 Checking the transmission log The transmission log list will be output to be checked Select Ser
474. lt gt LCT 1 ON PC 403 G to H 6 M3 LCT operation check PWB H LCT PJ2H lt B gt LCT 2 to 3 PC 403 G to H 6 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 3 6 C0214 LCT Shift Failure Relevant electrical parts Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT Shift Tray Stop Sensor PC11 LCT Shifter Home Position Sensor PC12 LCT Control Board PWB C1 LCT Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical components Check the sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 PC8 LCT sensor check PWB H LCT 2 lt gt LCT 3 PC 403 G to H 5 ON 3 PC11 LCT I O sensor check PNEH M da LCT7 56 408 G to H 4 4 PC12 LCT I O sensor check FEST E LCT8 5 408 G to H 4 5 PWB C1 LCT replacement 34 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 3 7 C0215 LCT Shift Motor Failure Relevant electrical parts em Shift Tray Motor M4 LCT Control Board PWB C1 LCT Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT E WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 8 PC8 LCT I O sensor check en NET LCT3 PC 403 G to H 5 M4 LCT operation check PWB H LCT PJ2H B LCT 4 to
475. lt Unit is installed C2551 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor TC ratio in the developing machine which is determined by Toner replenishing amount control mechanism is 5 or less for a given number of times consecutively C2552 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor TC ratio in the developing machine which is determined by Toner replenishing amount control mechanism is 12 or more for a given number of times consecutively C2553 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor TC ratio in the developing machine which is determined by Toner replenishing amount control mechanism is 5 or less for a given number of times consecutively 336 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank C2554 Abnormally high toner density TC ratio in the developing machine which is detected Magenta TCR Sensor determined by Toner replenishing amount control B mechanism is 12 or more for a given number of times consecutively C2555 Abnormally low toner density TC ratio in the developing machine which is detected Yellow TCR Sensor determined by Toner replenishing amount control B mechanism is 5 or less for a given number of times consecutively C2556 Abnormally high toner density TC ratio in the developing m
476. lt setting is Stop Printing Tray Fixed Procedure Stop Printing Tray Fixed Switch Trays Tray Priority 161 bizhub C250 7 ae i 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Print Lists Functions U To set the Paper Feed Tray for output the list for the Meter count or the Unit check se Setting a Procedure The default setting is Tray 1 D Reset Setting 1 System Auto Reset Functions To set the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning Use To change the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning Setting Priority Mode Procedure To set the functions displayed during System Auto Reset from Copier Scanner and the Fax The default setting is Copy Copy Scan Fax System Auto Reset Time The default setting is 1 min 1 min 1 to 9 OFF 2 Auto Reset Functions To set the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning in Copier Scanner and the Fax Use To change the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning Setting The default setting is 1 min Procedure 1 min 1 to 9 OFF 3 Job Reset When Account is changed Functions To select whether to reset the copying mode functions to the default ones when the Key Counter is unplugged a magnetic card is pulled out User
477. lue from the ten key pad Press the ID key to change the code To scan the image in the direction of C the code to To shift the image in the direction of D Set the code to 6 Touch END jua ne tee set i 458215351800 2 Pe i N D lt 25 8 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 5 Adjustment of the loop value Adjusted range 5 mm to 5 mm Default value 0 Loop value 5 mm DF 601 The loop value is increased by the entered value and decreased by the entered value Too much loop value may result in dog eared document and too little loop value may result in askew document Adjustment Procedure Set the mode to the Service Mode Touch ADF Touch Registration Loop Adj Touch Loop Value 5 Min 5 4582F3E526DA 5 Enter the value from the ten key pad Press the ID key to change the code 6 Touch END iz 7 Z n lt 26 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Mechanical adjustment 8 6 Automatic adjustment of the sensor The detection level of the document through path sensor is automatically adjusted The adjustment has two modes Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj and ADF Sensor Auto Adj Make this adjustment as appropriate after the replacement of the ADF board o
478. m qu Plai A4 Dbip r 4066F3E504DA 45351635060 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Ser vice Mode screen see the Adjust ment Setting of the main unit service manual 2 Touch Machine Printer Area gt Dup Print Positioning Side Edge 3 Touch 1st and then press the Start key A test print will then be pro duced 4 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specifications 3 0 mm 2 0 mm 5 If the measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 6 Produce another test print and check for width A AD 503 2 Pe i N D lt 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 AD 503 Blank Page 2 5 n lt 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Jam Display Troubleshooting 7 Jam Display 7 1 Misfeed display AD 503 When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 9201 Duplex Unit pre registration section misfeed ww 13 Duplex Unit Door 9301 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed gt 14 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of
479. m two wire saddles 4348F2C502DA 5 Remove four screws 2 and remove the Paper Take up Unit 3 6 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Mounting Frame 5 for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Periodical check 7 Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 PC 103 PC 203 8 Remove the C ring 8 and remove the bushing 9 9 Shift the Shaft Assy 10 in the orien tation as shown on the left and remove the C ring 11 and the gear 12 5 7 B 434816260700 10 Remove the C ring 13 the bushing 14 and remove the shaft Assy 15 103 203 5 o 7 E s 2 Periodical check 434815261000 NOTE Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 11 Remove two E rings 16 and the bushing 17 and remove the Pick up Roller Fixing Bracket Assy 18 12 Remove the C ring 19 and remove the Paper Take up Roller 20 13 Repeat steps 1 to 11 similarly for the 4th Drawer Replace the Separation Roller Assy Paper Take up Roller and Pick up Roller at the same time 2 1 3 Replacing the Pick up Roller 4348F2C502DA 1 Remove the Rear Right Cover Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row uw 10 2 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Tray4 from
480. mally terminated change the Compact flash for a new one and try another rewriting sequence 3 If the procedure is still abnormally terminated change the board that has caused NG and carry out data rewriting procedure MFP CONTROLLER MFP Control Board PWB MFP SCANNER Image Processing Board PWB C PRINTER Mechanical Control Board PWB M FAX BOARD CONTROLLER 1 Fax Board 1 50 1 The Optional FAX kit is necessary for the above procedure Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 Other 6 1 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field bizhub C250 B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs N CAUTION When removing a circuit board or other electr
481. maximum power consumption If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result f two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet If excessive current flows in the wall outlet fire may result Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely Contact problems may lead to increased resistance overheating and the risk of fire Check whether the product is grounded properly If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product you may suffer electric shock while operating the product Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet 5 4 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord NWARNING When using the power cord set inlet type that came with this product make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product When securing measure is provided secure the cord with the fixture properly If the power cord inlet type is not connected to the prod uct securely a contact problem may lead to increased resistance overheating and risk of fire Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on Overheating may occur there leading to a risk of fire Check whether the power cord is damaged Check whether the sheath is damaged If the power plug cord or sheath is damaged replace with a new power cor
482. minating voltage is set to 4 4 V The light receiving voltage is 2 5 V or more when the illuminating voltage is set to 0 V The illuminating voltage setting is 4 4 V or more after the adjust ment has been made C1401 Backup RAM malfunction Data written in the Backup Memory differs from what is recorded in it and writing operation is not correctly performed even with two retry sequences total of three writing sequences NOTE The Punch Unit detects punch related malfunctions and notifies the Finisher of any malfunction detected 58 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 3 Solution 8 3 1 C1180 Transport System Drive malfunctions e Relevant electrical parts Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Transport Motor M1 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PI12 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN16A FN 9 ON FS 603 B 8 M1 FN operation check when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 5 PWB A FN replacement PWB A FN CN10A FN 3 to 6 FS 603 B 6 8 3 2 C1181 Paddle Motor malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Paddle Home Position Sensor PI2 F
483. mode screen Date amp Time Setting Year Month Date Hour Min 4038F3E510DA Date Time D of n 0 0 Year Month Date Hour Min gt 0 Sec p 5 12 lt A Date amp Time Setting mode setting procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Press the following keys in this order Stop gt 1 gt 1 gt 4 gt 4 gt Clear 3 Enter year month day hour and minute in that order from 10 key Pad Year 4 digits Month 2 digits Day 2 digits gt Hour 2 digits Minute 2 digits NOTE When setting the month day hour or minute enter 0 first if the data one digit 4 Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch Entry 5 Touch END to return to the Service Mode 232 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 4 Machine 10 4 1 Fusing Temperature Functions To adjust individually the temperature of the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure Roller for each type of paper thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions Use When fusing performance is poor or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmental conditions change By setting the temperature higher gloss of print transparencies can be improved By setting the temperature lower Exit Roller mark or uneven transparencies of OHP can be reduced Adjustment
484. mp turning ON at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy Image Processing Board PWB C Flat Cable bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal Check the flat cable for proper connection and correct or change as necessary 2 Change Scanner Assy 3 Change PWB C 16 5 75 CA051 Standard Controller configuration failure 16 5 76 CAO052 Controller hardware error 16 5 77 CA053 Controller start failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made Service Mode gt System 2 Image Controller Setting If changing the setting turn OFF the Main Power SW and turn it ON again after 10 seconds or more Check the connectors of the MFP Control 2 PWB MFP for proper connection and correct as necessary 3 Change PWB MFP E Q e Q 373 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 78 CC001 Vendor connection failure Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board PWB M Coin Vendor Japan Coin Vendor Kit North America Europe bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component
485. mpened with alcohol wipe the Tray 2 Feed Roller 7 and the Tray 2 Pick up Roller 8 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 4 8 Tray 2 Separation Roller Slide out the Tray 2 Open the Vertical transport door Remove two Claws 1 and remove the Vertical transport door 2 IER bizhub C250 4038F2C011DA 4 Remove two Screws 3 and remove the Jam processing cover 4 NOTE Make sure the position of the Mylar when installing the Jam processing cover 5 7 g 4038F2C012DB 5 Remove two Screws 5 and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy 6 4038F2C013DA 131 bizhub C250 5 o 7 E s gt 6 Other 4038F2C523DA 6 4 9 Tray 2 Transport Roller 4038F2C180DA 6 4 10 Scanner Rail 1 4038F2C503DA 132 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Tray 2 Separation Roller 7 1 Openthe Vertical Transport Door 2 Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol wipe the Tray 2 Transport Roller 1 1 Remove three Screws 1 and the IR Upper Right Cover 2 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 y t ONO 4038F2C504DA 4038F2C505DA 6 4 11 Mirrors 1st 2nd 3rd 4038F2C506DA 6 Other 2 Remove two Screws 3 and two Ori
486. mponent Imaging Unit if faulty Clean or correct each contact of the 7 operation check PWB M 10 to 13 Reinstall Imaging Unit K Change Imaging Unit K Change PWB M OQ on A w Change PWB MFP 362 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 23 2651 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error 16 5 24 C2652 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error 16 5 25 C2653 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error 16 5 26 C2654 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error bizhub C250 Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Mechanical Control Board PWB M Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit K WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Clean the connection between the Imaging Unit and the machine if dirty 2 Reinstall Imaging Unit Change Imaging Unit Change PWB M 16 5 27 2 01 Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error 16 5 28 2 02 Yellow Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error 16 5 29 C2A03 Magenta Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error 16 5 30 C2A04 Black Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error Relevant Electrical Parts Toner Cartridge C Mechanical Control Board PWB M Toner Cartridge M Toner Cartridge Y Toner Cartridge K WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control Signal Electrical Component
487. n Adjust and carry out Gradation Adjust Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 3 6 3 Replacing the Toner Cartridge C M Y K A Removal Procedure 1 Open the Front Door 2 Pressing the Toner Cartridge Lock Claw 1 pull it toward bizhub C250 4038F2C560DA 3 Pullthe Toner Cartridge 2 toward to remove it 7 E s B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Take out the new Toner Cartridge 1 from the unitary packing box and shake it well up and down 5 to 10 times y 4038F2C539DA 33 bizhub C250 5 s 7 E s gt 3 Periodical check 4038F2C540DA 3 6 4 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 34 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Insert the Toner Cartridge 2 by fit ting it to the groove on the main unit NOTE Make sure the colors are matched between the Toner Cartridge and label on the machine Make sure the Toner Cartridge is inserted all the way When replacing the Toner Cartridge black replace the Deodorant Filter supplied with it at the same time 3 Clear the Comb Electrode gt 34 1 Open the Front Door 2 Clean the Comb Electrode by mov ing the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever 1 In and Out several times Only for the Imaging Unit K NOTE Move the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever slowly forward and backward
488. n Do not call Call 1 1 Auto call on date specification Do not call Call 1 2 Reservation 0 3 Reservation 0 4 Reservation 0 5 Auto call on the IC Life Do not call Call 1 6 en cem Gain Do not call Call 1 7 Reservation 0 SW 03 0 Reservation 0 1 Auto call on the toner empty Do not call Call 1 2 Reservation 0 3 Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Do not call Call 1 4407 Reservation E 0 SW 04 0 to 7 Reservation 0 252 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode SW No Bit Functions 0 1 Default SW 05 0 Modem redial interval 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 0 3 2 2 0 4 to 7 Reservation 0 SW 06 0 Modem redial times 8 3 0 1 3 3 1 2 3 3 0 3 3 3 1 4 3 3 0 5 3 3 0 6 3 3 0 7 Reservation 0 SW 07 0 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1 1107 Reserved 0 SW 08 0 Retransmission interval on E Mail deliv 4 4 0 1 ery error 4 4 1 2 4 4 1 3 4 4 0 4 to 7 Reservation 0 SW 09 0 Retransmission times on E Mail 5 5 0 1 delivery error 5 5 1 2 5 5 0 3 5 5 1 4 5 5 0 5 5 5 0 6 5 5 0 7 Reservation 0 SW 10 0 to 7 Reservation 0 SW 11 0 1 6 6 0 1 RING reception CONNECT 6 6 0
489. n exe uoissiusue jeufis 13 dn exe je ejejduio2 eBueuox3 151 uo pig NO moo n i HO 39 MO 13SQ uo QN39S uo 0959 qnuziq xipueddy 450 qnuziq xipueddy hart iming c 21 T vdorsassZeor SwL6EL Suet p 9 xg eu uo SUE 99 xa reubuo WU eui eu amp uo dn exe 1 yo 4a H1s uo piouajog 1e ouunj yo 4 15 Plousjog 1x3 uo yo u oH 110 50 E TENDERE AAM 30 999 10sues 1X3 uo yo MI o i 40 898 10sueg uo tt za uo rT e te 90409 uo Josuag uojeqsiiey aded WIM 105195 dwg 0 go JQ EN joi m JO uodsuei sugg jo sugg gt MO I p 4 4j H M w rF trt4zRF F d4 GON nee enge
490. n the machine remains stationary Use Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs Setting The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real time Procedure basis t be checked as long as the 5 V power line remains intact even when a door is open A 278 Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper feed section of the machine the Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor is considered to be responsible for it Remove the sheet of paper misfed From the Sensor Check List that follows check the panel display of the Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor For the Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor you check the data of Take Up of Tray 2 Call the Service mode to the screen Select State Confirmation 2 Sensor Check and then select the screen that contains Take Up under Tray 2 For Take Up under Tray 2 select 1 on the left hand side of the screen Check that the data for Take Up under Tray 2 is 0 sensor blocked Move the actuator to unblock the Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor Check that the data for Take Up under Tray 2 changes from 0 to 1 on the screen If the input data is 0 change the sensor Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode B Sensor Check Screens These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on e
491. n use when initially authenticating the user by the External Server Items available for setting Copy operation Scan operation Fax operation and print ing and User Box operation Setting The default settings are Allow Procedure Allow Restrict 2 User Registration Functions To register or change the user Use To register change or delete the user for authentication Setting 1 Select the user 2 Procedure 2 Input the User Name User Password and E Mail address 5 0 The setting is not available when carrying out the external server authentica tion 3 Set the Output Permission Max Allowance Set and Function Permission and E touch OK z 3 User Counter Functions e To display the status of use of the copier printer scanner and Fax for each user Use e To check the status of use of the copier printer scanner and Fax for each user Setting 1 Select the user Procedure 2 Select the key to check to see the status of use 3 For clearing the counter touch Clear Counter 4 For clearing the all counters touch Reset All Counters 197 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 C Account Track Setting The settings are available only when carrying out the Account Track 1 Account Track Registration Functions To register and change the Account E Use To register change or delete the
492. n when servicing the Q e product General Unplug Ground Earth instruction S 1 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY WARNINGS 1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability This reliability is achieved through high quality design and a solid service network Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical physical and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors For this reason unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited the points listed below are not exhaustive but they illustrate the reason ing behind this policy Prohibited Actions NDANGER Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire metal clips solder or similar object Disabling relay functions such as wedging paper between relay contacts Q gt 9 e Disabling safety functions interlocks safety circuits etc Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and S injury e Making any modification to the pr
493. n with specified solvent 1 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES dirty belt with a soft cloth 2 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 3 Terminal is dirty YES Clean 4 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall Transfer Roller properly Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Image Transfer 5 scratched Roller Unit The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt 6 through the checks of steps up to 5 Unit Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing d Q e Q 417 bizhub C250 D 2 Q E Q 18 Image quality problem 18 3 30 Printer 4 Color low image density A Typical Faulty Images Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 403615403600 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater 2 Image Transfer Terminal is dirty YES Clean Belt Unit 3 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall Transfer Roller _ properly 4 Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or NO Change 2nd Image Transfer scratched Roller Unit 5 IDC Sensor Se
494. na Mixed or obici xipueddy 2 929 4 60 5 296 SUPE dn eye gt aul gt o ATS uo JeAouunj ie 30 218 Plous og 4x3 10997 yo uot F9 Vini uowensibey Jo 39 994 108095 1x3 uo yo 30 39 Josuag Janoun uo eBueuox3 epis 151 f doo jo junowy 598 uonegsibeu 4 jeublg 1384 R ojdio puz dn ye je ejejduio2 eBueuox3 131 eBueuox3 151 swos jo junowy 4 jeufis PASIN ues dn eyej 131 o uo 108095 ym 109195 idus 09 MOT HO 30 5 1010N Wa MoO pud 0 1aS0 911409 39 294 208095 dnopig uo moq AZN vodsueit 3 HN dn oye uo yo uo 395 453 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 hart iming 21 T VGevsds4 0v HEIS or
495. nd materials must be recorded through direct on site checks in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT 4 For reports and measures concerning serious accidents follow the regulations speci fied by every distributor S 20 Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options Theory of Operation section gives as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product a rough outline of the object and role of each function the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system and the timing of operation of each part Field Service section gives as information required by the CE at the site or at the cus tomer s premise a rough outline of the service schedule and its details maintenance steps the object and role of each adjustment error codes and supplementary information The basic configuration of each section is as follows However some options may not be applied to the following configuration Theory of Operation section OUTLINE Explanation of system configuration product specifications unit configuration and paper path COMPOSITION OPERATION Explanation of configuration of each unit operating system and control system Field Service section GENERAL Explanation of system configuration and product specifications MAINTENANCE Explanation of s
496. nd preparation register C setting DMA G CFFOB ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA HO CFFOC ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA H1 CFFOD ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA H2 CFFOE ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e Control Board bizhub C250 DMA band preparation register C setting DMA I CFFOF ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA J CFF10 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA PCI Bridge CFF11 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA 19 ASIC1 CFF12 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA JPEG CFF13 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of e MFP Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA NO CFF15 ASIC10 Timeout Number of Control Board DMA band preparation register C setting DMA N D Q E Q 354 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 4 How to reset Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble code
497. ng se Setting The default setting is Portrait Procedure Portrait Landscape 4 Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP Functions To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during Rip Use process of the current job Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 5 4 lt gt LTR LGR Auto Switch Functions To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter size paper and A3 and Ledger size paper in reading Use To output Letter size document to A4 size and Ledger size document to A3 size To output A4 size document to Letter size and A3 size document to Ledger size NOTE When switching the size the image will be printed in the same magnification The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 169 bizhub C250 2 Pe i 5 n lt bizhub C250 S 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 B Paper Setting 1 Paper Tray Functions To set the Paper Feed Tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC print ing Use To use when Paper Feed Tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing from Windows DOS etc Salting The default setting is Auto Procedu
498. ng Unit and reinstall it in position 2 Reinstall or reconnect SE1 or SE2 if it is installed or connected improperly 3 Check the Vertical Transport Guide for installed position and correct as necessary 331 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 2 10 26 ist image transfer ATVC Black failure 16 2 11 P 27 2nd image transfer ATVC failure 16 2 12 P 29 1st image transfer ATVC Color failure bizhub C250 Relevant Electrical Parts High Voltage Unit HV1 Image Transfer Belt Unit Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action 1 Check the contact of the Transfer Belt Unit and that of HV1 for connection and clean or correct the contact as necessary Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit Change HV1 Change PWB M 16 2 43 P 30 Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drive Main Sensor PC17 Transport Drive Assy Color PC Drive Sub Sensor PC18 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action 1 Perform the faulty sensor check procedure 1 2 Check the sensor for which a faulty condition has been checked for installed position and proper connector connection Wipe the sensor for which a faulty condition has been checked clean of dirt if any If P 30 occurs again change the Transport Drive Assy Change PWB M
499. ng the scanned data by SMB se Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting User Box Functions To register or change the Box address for storing the scanned data to the Box in the Use hard disk of the Machine Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting Atleast one user box must be registered in order to register the Box address 2 Group Functions To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simulta Use neously Setting Touch New to register the new group Procedure elect any displayed group to check edit or delete the setting Atleast one address must be registered in order to register the group 3 Program Functions To register or change the Scan Program Use Seung Select any program No to check edit or delete the settin Procedure y prog i 9 4 Subject Text for E mail Subject Functions 0 register the e mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e mail se Setting Touch New to register the new subject Procedure Select any displayed subject to detail check edit or delete the setting The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing Set as Default 192
500. nistrator to use the system The Box Administrator is the special administrator for box who is allowed to browse contents in Common Box Individual Box without the password NOTE Allow cannot be set when the User Authentication or Account Track is not carried out Setting The default setting is Restrict Procedure Allow Restrict The password is input when setting it to Allow 2 3 C Administrator Security Level Functions To set the level for Administrator setting item open to the user Use To make part of the Administrator setting items open to the user z Level 1 Power Save Setting Auto Magnification Selection Platen Auto Magnification Selection ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off and Select Tray for Insert Sheet are available to users Level 2 Power Save Setting Output Setting Date Time Setting Daylight Savings Time Setting AE Level Adjustment Auto Magnification Selection Platen Auto Magnification Selection ADF Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet and Print Jobs During Copy Operation are available to users Prohibit Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2 Setting The default setting is Prohibit Procedure Level 1 Level 2 Prohibit 223 bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul
501. not properly YES Perform Focus Positioning of the 3 Carriage aligned with 2nd 3rd Mirrors Car Scanner and 2nd 8rd Mirrors Car riage riage and Scanner Position Adjustment The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy through the checks of steps up to 3 Change CCD Unit D Q E Q 394 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 9 Scanner System distorted image A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 403615403500 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Installation Machine is installed on a level sur NO _ Reinstall face 2nd 3rd Mirrors Scanner Assy is not properly YES Perform Focus Positioning of the 2 Carriage aligned with 2nd 3rd Mirrors Car Scanner and 2nd 8rd Mirrors riage Carriage and Scanner Position Adjustment 3 Scanner Motor Scanner Motor turns smoothly NO Change belt Change Scanner Motor 4 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy through the checks of steps up to 3 Change CCD Unit d Q e Q 395 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 10 Scanner System low image density rough image A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 403615403600 B Troubleshooting Procedure
502. nsistency Check Device ID setting of the Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main unit side of start request telegram Check the setting of the host side 001B Device ID Unregistered Check Device ID setting of the Request telegram 2 Constant data transmitting main unit side Emergency call comes from the main unit that e Check the setting of the host has not registered Machine ID yet side 001C Grammar Error Contact responsible person of Received response telegram is unregulated for KONICA MINOLTA mat 001D Impossible to change Unchangeable items Contact responsible person of Host requests to change the setting of items KONICA MINOLTA which are not allowed to change 001E Impossible to change During printing Try again when the machine is Setting cannot be changed because the setting not printing change is made during the machine is printing or starts printing 001F Impossible to change Unread items Contact responsible person of The host tries to make writing on the items the current value has not been read KONICA MINOLTA 262 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode Error code Error Solution 0020 Timeout of Telegram Delivery Try communication again At waiting mode of telegram delivery the machine fails to receive the telegram in a given time 0021 Telegram Size Over Contact responsible person of T
503. nsor is dirty YES Clean with blower brush Image Process Conv Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 9 Adjustment fied range as checked through Gra 6 Gradation dation Adjust Adjust Max 0 100 Service Mode Highlight 0 60 Image Process The problem has been eliminated NO to next step 7 Adjustment through the adjust of D Max Den D Max Density sity Service Mode Image Process After the Reset Stabilizer NO Go to next step Adjustment sequence has been completed run 8 Stabilizer Gradation Adjust Reset Stabi lizer Service Mode The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt through the checks of steps up to 8 Unit 9 Change MFP Control Board Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 418 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 31 Printer 4 Color poor color reproduction A Typical Faulty Images 18 Image quality problem 403618405800 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater 2 Image Transfer Terminal is dirty YES Clean Belt Unit 3 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is installed NO Reinstall Transfer Roller properly 4 Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or NO Change Image Transfer R
504. nsor photoreceiver section from the detection point unprinted surface on the Image Trans fer Belt are 0 5 V or less or 4 3 V or more at output checking during IDC Registration Sensor adjustment All outputs of Sensor photoreceiver section from the detection point unprinted surface on the Image Trans fer Belt are 1 9 V or less or 4 4 V or more at density setting during IDC Registration Sensor adjustment The output of Sensor photoreceiver section from the detection point toner pattern on the Image Transfer Belt is 1 0 V or less after the adjustment P 6 Cyan Imaging Unit failure P 7 Magenta Imaging Unit failure P 8 Yellow Imaging Unit failure P 9 Black Imaging Unit failure All density readings taken from the density pattern pro duced on the Transfer Belt are 0 5 g m IDC Sensor photoreceiver output or less during max density adjustment Vg Vdc adjustment All density readings taken from the density pattern pro duced on the Transfer Belt are 4 5 g m IDC Sensor Photoreceiver output or more during max density adjustment Vg Vdc adjustment P 21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure The number of points detected in the main scan direc tion is more or less than the specified value during main scan direction registration correction The number of points detected in the Sub Scan Direc tion is more or less than the specified value during sub scan direction registration correction P
505. nt Internet Explorer version 5 5 or later Java compliant 1 The optional Local Interface Kit EK 702 is required NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Checking the controller firmware version Maintenance 2 Checking the controller firmware version The version of the controller firmware can be checked on the Control Panel of the machine 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch Firmware Version 3 Checkthe firmware versions 3 Firmware upgrade 3 1 Preparations for Firmware rewriting 3 1 1 Service environment OS Windows 2000 Drive which enables writing reading of Compact flash Compact flash with 128MB or more 3 1 2 Application to be used Cygwin Free software 3 1 3 Installing the Cygwin The software for writing the Firmware into Compact flash is installed into the PC 1 Double click the setup exe on CD ROM in which Cygwin is stored isetup exe 4037F2C501DA 2 Click Next N Cyowin Setup Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This wizard wil guide you through the instalon and updating the Cymin envitonimant and a piethora of GNU packages Setup ese vertion 2249 25 Copyright 2000 2001 Red Hat Inc J ecurces redhat Heiz Cornel 4037F2E545DA Standard Controller 7 E s 3 Firmware u
506. nt D Max Density 3 Select COPY or Printer 4 Select the color to be adjusted 5 Enter the new setting from the 10 key Pad 6 Touch END to return to the Process menu screen 7 Touch Stabilizer 8 Touch Stabilizer Mode 9 Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value 10 Check the copy image for any image problem NOTE If the setting value has been changed be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value 2 Pe i N D lt 245 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 6 3 Background Voltage Margin Functions To adjust the highlight portion fog level to the target reproduction level by making an e auxiliary manual fine adjustment of y of each color after Gradation Adjust E Use Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem Adjustment Range 0 5 to 5 Adjustment To make the background level foggier increase the setting value Instructions To make the background level less foggy decrease the setting value Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment Background Volt age Margin 3 Select the color to be adjusted 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 key Pad 5 Touch END to return to the Image Adjust menu screen 6 Touch Stabilizer 7 Touch Stabilization Only
507. o 4 digits to be used 4 Forward TX Setting Functions To set whether to use the Forward Fax function Use To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified Forward amp Print Forward the received text and print all out Forward amp Print If TX Fails Forward the received text and prints out only when fails to be forwarded Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure OFF Forward amp Print Forward amp Print If TX Fails When set to ON set the address to forward to 5 Confidential Password Check Functions Use Setting Procedure To check the password set in the confidential box 6 PC Fax RX Setting Functions To set whether to use the PC FAX reception function Use To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When set to ON specify the address to store the file 219 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 TSI User Box Setting Functions To set whether to use TSI distribution or not Use To use TSI distribution Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When set to ON set
508. o fine adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans parencies Use To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Adjustment m Range Lighter 5 steps Std Darker 5 steps Adjustment Light color Touch the Darker key Instructions Dark color Touch the Lighter key Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment Thick Paper Den sity Adjustment 77 3 Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density 5 10 6 7 TCR Toner Supply N nl lt Functions To adjust the set T C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T C after large numbers of copies have been made of origi nals having a high image density Use When there is a drop in T C Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment TCR Toner Sup ply Select the color for which supply of toner is to be replenished Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and if the density is lower than a reference value a toner replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run 5 These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density reac
509. ocedures shown below to adjust it to satisfy the specifi cation e f the value of all color C M Y sat isfy the specification proceed to step 14 11 Open the Front Door 12 Turn the Skew adjustment dial of the corresponding PH with flathead screwdriver Tothe left When the step value goes direction Tothe right When the step value goes direction Adjustment sample If the yellow value among the step values confirmed in step 9 is 5 which means out of the specification turn the skew adjustment dial of PH Yellow to the left direction for 5 clicks bizhub C250 4038F3C006DB 13 Close the Front door and touch Imaging Process Adjustment Stabilizer Initial ize Image Stabilization 14 After image stabilization is completed display Service mode State Confirmation Color Regist again and check if the Step Value X of each color C M Y is within the specification NOTE Each color s Step value displayed on Color Regist changes every time the image stabilization is conducted Therefore the value may change even if skew adjust ment is not made 2 pe N lt f either value is out of the specification repeat step 10 to 13 to continue the adjustment until all CMYK colors satisfy the specification 15 Exit the Service Mode 311 14 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005
510. oduct unless instructed by KMBT S Using parts not specified by KMBT gt w S 2 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 2 POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used the area In that case it is obligation of customer engineer hereafter called the CE to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply Power Cord Set or Power Plug NWARNING Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod uct s rated voltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and aD provided with three conductor cable having enough cur rent capacity and the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock Attach power plug which meets the following criteria having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product s rated voltage and current and the plug has pin terminal s for grounding and aD meets regulatory requirements for the area Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect ing to inadequate power supply voltage current capacity grounding and may result in fire or electric shock Conductors in
511. ogical Format If the hard disk is yet to be formatted the malfunction code C D010 will appear Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure Use When the hard disk is mounted When the hard disk is to be initialized Physical Format to Logical Format Adjustment 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order State Confirmation Memory HDD Adj HDD Format 1 Physical Format 1 Touch Physical Format 2 Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence 3 The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed 4 Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after 2 Logical Format Only when initial is set up 1 Touch Logical Format 2 Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence 3 The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed 4 Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it 289 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 12 8 Memory HDD State Functions To display the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk o 2 Use Use to check the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk N Setting When an add on memory is mounted the machine a
512. oller scratched Unit 5 IDC Sensor Sensor is dirty YES Clean with blower brush Image Process Conv Value falls within the speci YES Go to step 9 Adjustment fied range as checked through Gra 6 Gradation dation Adjust Adjust Max 0 100 Service Mode Highlight O x 60 Image Process The problem has been eliminated NO Go to next step 7 Adjustment through the adjust of D Max Den D Max Density sity Service Mode Image Process After the Reset Stabilizer NO to next step Adjustment sequence has been completed run 8 Stabilizer Gradation Adjust Reset Stabi lizer Service Mode The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt through the checks of steps up to 8 Unit 9 Change MFP Control Board Change High Voltage Unit Image Transfer Neutralizing 419 bizhub C250 d Q e Q bizhub C250 D Q E Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 32 Printer 4 Color incorrect color image registration A Typical Faulty Images 403616403200 B Troubleshooting Procedure turned ON Step Section Check Item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is dis YES action according to the 1 played on the panel warning code shown on the State Confirm screen Machine Vibration is given to the machine YES Turn off
513. olor reproducibility and uneven density of each color N Pattern a a a SINGLE 3 HYPER Gradation Density 255 Setting e it of Print 1 to 999 Procedure Select SINGLE single copy or MULTI multi copy Select FEET or HYPER Select Gradation or Resolution if HYPER has been selected Type the density level 0 to 255 10 13 8 Running Mode Functions To test the printing operation in Running Mode Use Use to check the printing operation in Running Mode from each paper source Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Test Mode Running Mode 3 Select the paper size Tray 1 Bypass only 4 Select the paper type 5 Press the Start key to start the Running Mode 6 Pressing the Stop key will stop operation 10 13 9 Fax Test ts For details see FK 502 Service Manual 2 x 5 lt 10 14 ADF ts For details see DF 601 Service Manual 10 15 FAX ts For details see FK 502 Service Manual 294 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 16 Finisher t For details on adjustment see the Service Manual for Option FS 603 g Functions To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for the Finisher 2 Use Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the 5 copies ma
514. ommand buffer stop failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP DIMMO WorkO DIMM Workt WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component When the error is displayed after the mem 1 ory check remove and insert the DIMMO and DIMM1 again to recheck C4765 2 Change PWB MFP 16 5 61 C5102 Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor M1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M DC Power Supply PU1 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Check the M1 connector for proper connec u tion and correct as necessary Check 1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary D 2 Q E Q Check the PWB M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary M1 operation check PWB M CNDM1 5 REM PWB M CNDM1 8 LOCK Change PWB M Change PU1 L 2 368 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 62 5103 Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor M1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M DC Power Supply PU1 Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Control Signal M1 operation check PWB M 1 5 REM PWB M 1 8 LOCK is 2 C
515. on Control signal Electrical components Step Action Check the connection condition between PWB B PK and PWB E PK Check the connection condition between PWB B PK and PWB F PK 3 PWB E PK replacement PWB F PK replacement LI PWB B PK replacement D Q E Q 66 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 3 Finisher Control Board Relevant electrical parts AS Exit Tray Home Position Sensor PI9 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Shift Motor Clock Sensor 117 2 Shift Motor M6 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary PI9 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN5A FN 12 ON FS 603 G 6 4 PI17 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN CN15A FN 6 ON FS 603 G 4 M6 FN operation check when the Main 5 Power Switch is turned OFF and ON 6 FN replacement 8 3 13 C1401 Backup RAM malfunction Relevant electrical parts Finisher Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Disconnect and then connect the power cord Turn OFF the Main Power Swit
516. on Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the connectors on PWB MFP for 1 proper connection and correct as neces sary 2 Change PWB MFP 16 5 109 Scanner Section undefined malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board PWB A Image Processing Board PWB C d Q e Q WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal Correct the connector connection between PWB A and PWB C if faulty 2 Change PWB C 3 Change PWB A 377 bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 110 CEEE3 Engine Section undefined malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Control Signal Check the PWB M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary Change PWB M 378 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 17 Power supply trouble 17 Power supply trouble H 17 1 Machine is Energized at PU1 Operation Check a 3 Relevant Electrical Parts N Main Power Switch S1 DC Power Supply PU1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Resul
517. on Scan Direction 403616402200 403619402300 403615402400 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original is damaged or dirty YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Pad is dirty YES Clean 3 Original Glass Original Glass is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth 4 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth Mirror lens Exposure Mirror is dirty YES Clean Lamp and reflectors ons is dirty YES Clean Exposure Lamp is dirty YES Clean Reflectors are dirty YES Clean Machine Scan The adjustment value for Image NO Readjust 6 Area gt Image Posi Position Side Edge falls within tion Side Edge the specified range Service Mode 7 The white lines bands or colored YES Change Scanner Assy lines bands are blurry Change CCD Unit gt gt d Q e Q 387 bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 2 Scanner System white lines in Main Scan Direction white bands in Main Scan Direction colored lines in Main Scan Direction and colored bands in Main Scan Direction A Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main White bands in Main Color lines in
518. on on Administrator and the From address for e mail trans Use mission Setting 1 Touch Name E Mail Address to input them Procedure 2 Using the 10 Key Pad enter the Extension No B Input Machine Address Functions To register the name of the Machine and E mail address Use Machine Name When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of document registered in Box is generated automatically it is added E Mail Not Used Setting 1 Touch Machine Name and input the name Procedure 8 6 3 One Touch Registration A Scan 1 Address Book E Mail Functions U To register change the e mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e mail se Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting 191 bizhub C250 2 Pe i UO lt bizhub C250 7 ae i 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 lt FTP gt Functions y To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP se Setting Touch New to register the new address Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting lt SMB gt Functions U To register or change the SMB address for transmitti
519. onditions for Life Specifications Values The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions see the Table given below are met They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user Item Description Monochrome Making 3 copies per job dob Type Color Making 3 copies per job Paper Size A4 Color Ratio Black to Color 4 1 CV M Black 2 400 Color 600 Original Density B W 5 for each color 5 for Monochrome a M Days 20 days Main Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month B Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited printing event occurs in another part Purpose In order to reduce the maintenance call times when printing prohibiting is reached for any of the following parts make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is reached and replace those parts at the same time Target parts Fusing unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit K 15 bizhub C250 5 o 7 s 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 5 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol bizhub C250 3 5 1 Replacing the Tray 1 Feed Roller
520. ontal Unit Door Sensor PC4 HO 5 f lt 444 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 20 Connector layout drawing 20 Connector layout drawing Description Number of Pin Ed D Possible to confirm by removing external cover Not possible to confirm by removing external cover 4038F5C515DA No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN57 U 14 9 CN7 E 25 2 CN80 K 3 10 CN101 N 24 3 CN43 E 10 11 CN84 Q 23 4 CN14 K to L 2 12 CN5 D 7 5 CN30 5 6 13 CN4 E 7 6 CN31 S 6 to 7 14 CN23 E 9 7 CN21 E 7 15 CN54 U 13 8 CN1 T2 16 CN38 E 11 445 bizhub C250 Z lt 20 Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 bizhub C250 NC T B 7 4038F5C516DA No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN41 K 1 9 CN44 K 23 to 24 2 CN45 K 2 10 CN40 E 10 3 CN3 E 19 11 CN18 E 11 4 CN13 K 21 to 22 12 CN60 E 26 to 27 5 CN56 E 16 13 CN19 K 22 6 CN55 E 14 14 CN59 K 2 7 CN102 N 25 15 CN10 Y 8 8 CN107 Q to R 24 to 25 16 CN11 U 10 to 11 5 f lt 446 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 20 Connector layout drawing bizhub C250 4038F5C517DA No CN No Location No CN No Location 1 CN39 E 20 7 CN28 E 8 2 CN81 K to
521. ooting Appendix Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 41 Toner Supply Motor Y M M6 e 6 3 42 Maim Motor t N S 6 3 43 Fusing Drive Motor MA amp 6 8 44 2 Lift Up Motor M3 PO ssettt tnnc 121 6 3 45 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor 1 sees 121 6 3 46 2 Vertical Transport Motor M2 PC 123 6 3 47 IDC Registration Sensor 1 IDC Registration Sensor 2 SE1 SE2 124 6 4 Oleaning 126 6 4 1 PE WING aS 126 6 4 2 Image Transfer Belt Unit 127 6 4 3 Tray 1 Feed Roll6r onere reno c masc ER De RENE 127 6 4 4 1 Separation Rollet rre nte torret tibns 127 6 4 5 Bypass Tray Feed Roller 128 6 4 6 Bypass Tray Separation Roller 128 8 6 4 7 Tray 2 Feed Roller Tray 2 Pick up 129 5 6 4 8 Tray 2 Separation 131 3 649 Tray 2 Transport Rollers orari crib ar E ERE HERES 132 64710 Scanner Hall iced trait rn nr error eee bee a ca rede re da 132 6 4 11 Mirrors 1st 2nd 8rd tnnt entrar 133 o NM I cL 134 E 6 4 13 Original Glass c
522. or Relevant Electrical Parts Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri cal Component 1 Check the hard disk specifications 2 Change the hard disk Control Signal 16 5 99 CD012 Encryption ASIC setting error 16 5 100 CD013 Encryption ASIC mounting error Relevant Electrical Parts Encryption ASIC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the Encryption ASIC for proper installation 2 Change the Encryption ASIC D Q E Q 376 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 101 CE001 Abnormal message queue 16 5 102 CE002 Message and Method parameter failure 16 5 103 CEO003 Task error 16 5 104 CE004 Event error 16 5 105 CE005 Memory access error 16 5 106 CEO006 Header access error 16 5 107 007 DIMM initialize error bizhub C250 Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the connectors on PWB MFP for 1 proper connection and correct as neces sary 2 Change PWB MFP 16 5 108 CEEE1 MSC undefined malfunction occurring Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Locati
523. or Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 9 2 Misfeed display When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 6401 Paper Exit Turnover section Paper Exit section Cover ts 30 6402 Paper Take Up section Paper Take Up section Cover ts 31 6403 Transport section Paper Take Up section Cover 32 6404 Transport Tray section Paper Exit section Cover gt 33 9 2 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door 29 DF 601 d Q e Q 9 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 3 Sensor layout S a 458216450200 1 Exit Sensor PC6 DF 3 Pick up Sensor PC2 DF 2 Turnover Sensor PC5 DF 4 Registration Sensor PC1 DF 9 4 Solution 9 4 1 Paper Exit Turnover section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper remaining at the Turnover Sensor Misfeed is detect
524. or PC19 FN Control Board PWB A FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC19 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ14A 6 ON FS 501 B 4 3 PWB A FN replacement 23 FS 501 d Q e Q 8 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 5 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description o E 96 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed detection The Storage Sensor is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked B Action Relevant electrical parts Storage Sensor PC3 FN Control Board PWB A FN Exit Motor M3 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ20A 3 ON FS 501 H 7 3 M3 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ8A 1 to 4 FS 501 B 1 4 PWB A FN replacement 8 3 6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description Paper Stack Exit section misfeed detection The Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN remains activated when a copy stack which has been stapled together is fed out B Action Relevant electrical parts Exit Motor M3 FN Control Board PWB A
525. or Tray Lower Limit Switch S3 FN Elevator Motor M7 FN WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 2 Check the motor and sensor connectors 8 1 for proper connection and correct as n necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PWB D FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ21A 2 4 FS 501 G to H 6 4 S2 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ4A 1 FS 501 H 8 5 S8 FN operation check PWB A FN PJ4A 4 FS 501 H 8 6 7 operation check PWB A FN PJ5A 1 to 2 FS 501 H 7 7 PWB A FN replacement 27 9 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 3 3 C1190 CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts CD Aligning Home Position Sensor PC9 FN Control Board PWB A FN CD Aligning Motor M5 FN o E 46 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 j for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC9 FN I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ25A 6 ON FS 501 H 3 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch move the Aligning Plate out of its home posi 4 tion and turn ON the Main Power PWB A FN PJ11A 5 to 8 FS 501 B 3 Switch Operation check of the CD aligning Motor M5 FN at this time
526. or disable TCP IP setting Use To disable TCP IP setting Setting The default setting is ON Procedure OFF NOTE When the setting is changed turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after 198 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 IP Address 8 Utility Mode Functions To set the IP address of the device used in the network Use To enter the IP address of the machine Setting P address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 3 Subnet Mask Functions To set the subnet mask of the device used in the network Use To enter the subnet mask of the machine Setting P address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 O to 255 4 Default Gateway Functions To set the gateway address of the device used in the network Use To enter the gateway address of the machine Setting P address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 5 DHCP Setting Functions To set DHCP for the network Use To use DHCP Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 6 Priority DNS Server Functions To set the Priority DNS Server Use To enter Priority DNS Server Setting IP address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0
527. ord 3 Setting Enter the CE Password 8 digits on the on screen keyboard Procedure The initial setting is 92729272 Current Password Enter the currently using CE Password New Password Enter the new CE Password Re Input Password Enter the new CE Password again NOTE When the following setting leads to the Password Rules ON the password with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous one cannot be changed Administrator Setting Security Setting NEVER forget the CE password When forgetting the CE password call responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA 11 3 2 Administrator Password Functions To set and change the Administrator Password Use Use to change the Administrator Password Setting Enter the Administrator Password 8 digits on the on screen keyboard Procedure The initial setting is 12345678 New Password _ Enter the new Administrator Password Re Input Password Enter the new Administrator Password again NOTE When the following setting leads to the Password Rules ON the password with the same letters the password which is same as the previous one and the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed Administrator Setting Security Setting 2 Pe i N lt 297 bizhub C250 2 5 n o lt 11 Enhanced S
528. osition in which the blue mark meets face to face with the hole is the home position for stapling If the Staple Jam Release Gear is turned for some reason this home position will shift and the Staple Cartridge will not come off In this case the Staple Position Confirm Gear plays a role of resuming the stapling home position by referring to the blue mark Therefore the Gear should be set in place cor rectly 18 Remove the pin fixing the Gear and the Cam to release them 19 Set the spring 33 the spacer 34 the Staple Jam Release Gear 35 the Timing Belt 36 and the Middle Gear 1 37 and fix them with two E Rings 38 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Mechanical adjustment 5 6 Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment Whenever the Gear in front of the Saddle or the Folding Roller has been replaced or removed for some reason make gear phase adjustment following the procedures given below 5 6 1 Adjustment procedure 458316251500 458310251600 Remove the Saddle 11 Remove five screws 1 and remove the Saddle Gear Cover 2 N 3 Setthe Folding Roller 3 and Saddle Cam 4 within the Saddle as shown in the figure 4 With the Folding Roller and the Sad dle Cam positioned as shown in the Left figure set the gears as shown in the figure in the following way NOTE The mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear 5 either of the two marks comes face to face with
529. p the Pick up Roller 2 Paper Take up Roller 3 and Separation Roller 4 Cleaning procedure Open the Paper Take up Section Cover 1 Remove four screws 2 from the Registration Roller Cover Remove the Wire Harness Saddle 4 and the screw 5 from the Regis tration Timing Sensor mounting plate 3 Wet a cloth with alcohol and use it to wipe up the Registration Roller 6 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 1 6 Exit Roller Roll Fi 3 1 7 458215251700 3 1 8 Sensor Section 458216252200 3 Periodical check Cleaning procedure Open the Paper Exit Section Cover 1 Wet a cloth with alcohol and use it to wipe up the Exit Roller 2 Roll 3 Cleaning procedure Open the Paper Exit Section Cover 1 and open the Turnover Guide Plate 2 Wet a cloth with alcohol and use it to wipe up the Turnover Roller 3 Cleaning procedure Remove the Registration Timing Sensor mounting plate 8 Clean the Registration 1 Timing Sensor 2 with a blower brush or the like DF 601 o 7 E s gt DF 601 5 s 7 E 3 Periodical check 458218251900 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Registration Roller Cover 8 Clean the Paper Empty Sensor 3 with a brush or the like Open the Paper Exit Section Cover Clean the Paper Exit
530. paper misfeed and close the door 7 2 Sensor layout d Q e Q 4066F4C500DA 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor1 PC1DU 3 Registration Roller Sensor PC1 2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU 11 AD 503 D fe Q E Q 7 Jam Display 7 3 Solution 7 3 1 Initial check items Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if necessary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper Set as necessary Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Jam Display 7 3 2 Duplex Unit pre registration section misfeed AD 503 A Detection timing Type Descri
531. pgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Select Install from Local Directory and click Next N RETI Choose A Download Source Choose whether to ital ox dowmiosd from the iene or instal bom Hes n a besl directory 5 o o v G o S s o C hom intenet Qosedomd boms Internat install hom Local jack jest gt Canoni pour 4037F2E546DA 4 Specify the folder for installation Check to make sure that Root Directory is in default setting C cygwin NOTE Make sure to check that Root Directory is in default setting C cygwin 8 Do not change the setting value except Root Directory 5 5 Click Next N i gt aia Alto choose a few Root Directory Instat For Dalma Test File Type ders C pgs C duit Me Unix lt Back Newt Carcel meea 4037F2E547DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Firmware upgrade 6 Specify the place of the data to be installed For installing from CD ROM select the cygwin folder in CD ROM drive 5 e E Described below is the sample procedure when CD ROM drive is E drive 7 Click Next N 2 9 alix g Select Local Package Directory S Select a Grechory where you want Selup to the installation fies e deweninads The ciectery wall be crested
532. pots A Typical Faulty Images Void areas White spots bizhub C250 403615405100 403618405000 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check There are void areas at the front YES 419 side or high density section There are void areas in the trailing YES Perform Transfer Adjust of 2 edge Image Process Adjustment under Service Mode Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES with specified solvent 3 matter is evident on the Transfer See Maintenance Belt Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 4 Change Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 2nd ImageTrans Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched YES Change 2nd Image Transfer 5 fer Roller Unit Roller Unit Charge Neutralizing Cloth is not NO Correct or change 6 separated and ground terminal is connected properly 7 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 8 Pre Image Transfer Guide Plate is YES Clean or change 2 damaged or dirty E 9 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt through the checks of steps up to 8 Unit 2 421 bizhub C250 D fe Q E Q 18 Image quality problem 18 3 34 Printer 4 Color colored spots A Typical Faulty Images Field Service Ver 1 0 Ju
533. print number 6 12 18 20 24 36 40 42 48 54 of times Upon each call 60 000 o e 9 Main Unit 120 000 e e e e 4 200 000 e e 2 300 000 e 1 60 000 9 601 200 000 2 103 203 300 000 1 9 PC 403 AD 503 60 000 e o o elele 9 5 FS 501 S 8 60 300 000 e 1 3 2 Maintenance items 3 2 1 Parts to be replaced by users CRU No Class Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace Descriptions 1 Imaging Unit C M Y 45K e 3 2 Imaging Unit K 70K e 8 3 Dust filter Cooling Fan 30K e 1 4 Processing Comb electrode When is replaced 5 sections Toner cartridge TC 12K e 8 TC Y TC M TC C 6 TC 20K e 2 3 7 Fusing section Deodorant filter 20K e 2 8 Waste Toner 30 K e 134 A Also replace the Dust Filter Cooling Fan packed in the Waste Toner Box at the same time when the Waste Toner Box is replaced Also replace the Deodorant Filter packed in the Toner Cartridge K at the same time when 20 K is reached The parts can be replaced either by User or Customer Engineer t For details of setting see Unit Change on Page 269 Adjustment Setting 4 A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions 3 Periodical check Fi
534. procedure g 5 5 Stapler Phase 5 5 5 1 Adjustment procedure 5 6 Saddle Gear Phase 39 5 6 1 Adjustment procedure esses 39 6 Board 40 6 1 PWB AFN Finisher Control Board 40 Hi 6 1 1 Adjustment of the folding 41 6 1 2 Adjustment of the center stapling position 42 E 6 1 3 Adjustment of the Alignment Plate position 43 B 6 2 PWB B PK Punch Control Board lt 6 2 1 Adjustment of the sensor output 6 2 2 Registration of the number of punch 46 6 2 3 Procedure after replacing the EEP ROM 1002 47 a 6 2 4 Punch center position 47 E Troubleshooting E 7 Display a 51 7 1 Misieed display iiiter coit Pr i Ecrans eva cp eL ob repe a 51 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 51 Sensorlayout sien s a DU
535. pse of a given period of time after the Paddle has started moving from a position not the home position The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from its home position The Swing Guide Home Position Sensor PI3 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Booklet Roller has started moving from a position not the home position C1183 Elevate Mechanism The Exit Tray Home Position Sensor PI9 FN is not blocked malfunctions even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray has started moving up An encoder clock input is not detected within a given period of time during operation of the tray 56 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code Code Item Description C1192 Front Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI4 FN is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from its home position to a position out of the home position The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI4 FN is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Front Aligning Plate has started moving from a position out of the home position to the home position C1193 Rear Aligning Plate Motor malfunctions The Rear Aligning Plate
536. ption AD 503 Detection of The Registration Roller Sensor PC1 is not blocked even after the lapse of a misfeed at Duplex given period of time after the Duplex Paper Take up sequence started pre registration section Duplex Unit Pre Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at registration section front of the Registration Roller at pre registration take up Loop Registration Reversing JAM detection B Action Relevant electrical parts Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Duplex Control Board PWB A DU Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical components Step Action A Initial check items PC1 I O sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C250 C 3 PWB A DU replacement PWB M replacement AJ oj d Q e Q 13 7 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 3 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed AD 503 A Detection timing Type Description AD 503 The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU is blocked by the paper Detection of The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU is not unblocked even after the set misfeed at Duplex period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport
537. r 2 E and the Middle Rear Cover 3 and remove them while shifting them 1 1 back and forth j 458318254000 3 Disconnect two connectors 4 4 Pinch the tie band 5 and remove it from the sheet metal 458318254100 Remove two screws 6 Loosen two screws 7 Remove the Middle Transport Unit by sliding it upwards Maintenance 458315254200 2 3 9 Stapler 1 Open the Front Door 1 2 Pull out the Stapler 3 while pressing the Stop Lever 2 4583250260 5 fag Do not remove the Stapler from the 1 ASIN shaft of the stapler frame or dis d IN i placement will be caused between LES y f A CARY Y 0 the position to which the Staple Driver 4 the lower unit of the Sta pler feeds staples and the position from which the Staple Clincher 5 the upper unit of the Stapler receives them 458318250300 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other 2 3 10 Saddle Section Remove the Front Cover 7 Remove the Rear Cover 7 Remove the Punch Dust Box Open the Jam Access Cover 1 remove two screws 2 and remove the Right Stay 3 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Lever 5 FS 603 458315254400 a 6 Turn the Folding Jam Release Dial 6 to move the Paper Pressure 7 inside 458316251800 7 Remove the C clip 8 and remove the
538. r ADF LCT Sorter FN Duplex Vendor Fax1 265 bizhub C250 2 x 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 8 4 No Sleep Functions To display the option of OFF for the Sleep Mode Setting screen available from Administrator Setting Use To display the option of DFF for the Sleep Mode Setting NOTE The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to OFF Setting The default setting is Prohibit Procedure Permit Prohibit 10 8 5 Original Size Detection Functions To change the document size detection table Use Use to change the setting for the document size detection table Copy Glass To change the size detection table for the document glass ADF To set whether or not to detect 18k 16k while using ADF only when marketing area is Europe Setting Copy Glass Procedure The default setting is Table1 Table1 Table2 NOTE Table 2 can be set only when Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 is being mounted ADF The default setting is Disable Enable Disable 10 8 6 Foolscap Size Setting Functions To set the size for Foolscap paper Use Upon setup To change the size for Foolscap paper Setting Select the size from among the following five Procedure 220x330mm 81 2 13 81 4 13 81 8 131 4 8 13 266 Field Service
539. r M1 FN Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Exit Motor M3 FN Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN Shifting Operation The Elevator Tray shifts to the front The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Test mode 7 3 5 Aligning Plate Operation S1 FN ON atthe home position 3 Es S1 FN ON At a position to align A4 paper S1 FN ON At a position to align Letter paper S1 FN ata position to align A4R paper v S1 FN ON At a position to align Letter R paper 7 3 6 Stapling Unit CD Movement S1 FN ON At home position S1 FN ON At a position for A4 corner stapling 4 S1 FN At home position E 7 Y S1 FN ON At a position for A4R corner stapling E lt 7 3 7 Exit Roller Rolls Spacing gt 31 pressed SZ FN ON Separated 17 7 Test mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 8 Storage Roller Rolls Spacing gt S1 FN ON Pressed o Q P Y S2 FN ON Separated 7 3 9 Elevator Tray Operation S1 FN ON Goes up until Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN is blocked S2 FN ON Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ PWB D FN is unblocked 7 3 10 Sensor Test
540. r PC2 DF is not turned ON within a preset time after the Take up Motor M1 DF started reverse rotation Misfeed due to paper not reached the Pick Up Sensor B Action Relevant electrical parts Registration Sensor PC1 DF Control Board PWB A DF Pick up Sensor PC2 DF Take up Motor M1 DF WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 PC1 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN7A 9 ON DF 601 G to H 5 3 PC2 DF I O sensor check PWB A DF CN7A 12 ON DF 601 G to H 5 4 Mt DF operation check PWB A DF CN5A 1 3 4 6 DF 601 C 6 5 PWB A DF replacement d Q e Q 31 9 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 4 3 Transport section misfeed A Detection timing 5 at Type Description 9 Misfeed due to paper Misfeed is detected if the Pick up Sensor PC2 DF is not turned OFF remaining at the Pick Up within a preset time after the Take up Motor M1 DF started reverse Sensor rotation Misfeed due to paper not Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor PC5 DF is not turned ON reached the Turnover Sensor within a preset time after the Transport Motor M2 DF started B Action Relevant electrical parts Pick up Sensor PC2 DF Control Board PWB A DF Turnover Sensor PC5 DF Take up Motor M1 DF Transport Motor M2 DF
541. r Close Open DU Paper Passage Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper Paper not present present PC2 DU Paper Passage2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper Paper not present present PC1 HO Hori Horizontal Paper Sensor Paper not Paper zontal Transport present present PCe HO Tans Paper Detect Turnover Empty Sensor Paper Paper not Unit Reverse Sensor present present PC7 2nd Retraction 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Not Retracted Trans Position Sensor Retracted fer PC6 Trans Retraction 1st Image Transfer Pressure Not Retracted fer Belt Retraction Position Sensor Retracted PC8 Waste Toner Full Waste Toner Full Sensor Blocked Unblocked Toner 282 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 E Sensors 3 FS 501 JS 601 10 Service Mode Operation Characteris Symbol Panel Display Part Signal Name tics Panel Display 1 0 PC1 FN Multi Exit Non sort1 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper no Staple present present PC19 FN FinisherlExit Non sort3 Job Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paperno present present Exit Finisher Storage Sensor Paper Paper no present present PC4 FN Upper Paper Pass Upper Entrance Sensor Paper Paper no present present PC2 FN Transport Lower Lower Entrance Sensor Paper Paper no present present PC6 FN Full Non sort1 1st Tray Full Sensor Blo
542. r Empty Sensor PC6 HO 2 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN 6 Paper Sensor PC1 HO 3 Upper Entrance Sensor PC4 FN 7 Storage Sensor PC3 FN 4 Lower Entrance Sensor PC2 FN 8 Finisher Tray Paper Sensor PC5 FN D e Q E Q 20 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Jam Display 8 3 Solution 8 3 1 Initial check items When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if necessary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator worn Finger Are rolls rollers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective roll roller Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the cor rect position to accommodate the paper SELAR NECESAN Are the actuators operating correctly Correct or replace the defective actuator d Q e Q 21 8 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 2 Transport section misfeed A Detection timing Type Description o E 1 The 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1 FN is not blocked even after
543. r Exit Sensor of the main unit Transport section m misfeed detection The Paper Sensor PC1 HO of the Horizontal Transport Unit is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor 1 B Action gt gt Relevant electrical parts 8 1 Control Board PWB A FN E Turnover Empty Sensor PC6 HO E E WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components 1 Initial check items 2 Horizontal Transport section gear check 3 1 I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ15A 4 ON FS 501 B 5 4 PC6 HO I O sensor check PWB A FN PJ15A 12 ON FS 501 B 5 5 PWB A FN replacement 25 FS 501 D e Q E 9 Trouble code 9 Trouble code 9 1 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Trouble code display The main unit s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel paroa Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative TEL FAX C 1182 4684F4E502DA 9 2 Trouble code list Code Item Description C1182 Shift Motor drive The Shift Home Position Sensor
544. r in case of the document detection error DF 601 Adjustment procedure Set the mode to the Service Mode Touch ADF Touch Sensor Auto Adjust ADF Adjustment Result Sensor sensor2 DF Senso 5 3 uto Adj ensor Sensor4 4582F3E527DA Select Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj or ADF Sensor Auto Press the Start key If the result is OK touch the END key on the panel If the result is NG check the influencing sensor replace it if necessary and then make readjustment 2 Pe i N D lt 27 8 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 DF 601 Blank Page 2 5 n lt 28 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Troubleshooting 9 Jam Display 9 1 Initial check items 9 Jam Display When a paper misfeed occurs first perform the following initial check items Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications Replace paper Is the paper curled wavy or damp Replace paper Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures Is a foreign object present along the paper path or is the paper path deformed or worn Clean the paper path and replace if necessary Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty deformed or worn Clean or replace the defective Paper Separat
545. r mode and Service Procedure Mode Service Total Duplex No of pages printed by User mode and Service Mode in Duplex 10 10 8 Counter of Each Mode Functions To display the printed pages in the following specified modes Copy Printer Scanner and Fax It also displays the count value of using the specified mode Use Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes Copy Printer Scanner and Fax as well as No of times each mode was used in order to know the using condition 10 10 9 Service Call History Data Functions To display the trouble history in chronological order Use Use to check the trouble history in chronological order 10 10 10 ADF Paper Pages Functions To display the No of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder Hi Use Use to check the No of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder D 10 10 11 Paper Jam History El Functions To display the jam history in chronological order Use e Use to check the jam history in chronological order NOTE Code displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code For details of JAM code see Trouble shooting on page 313 10 10 12 Fax Connection Error Functions To display the No of Fax transmission errors occurred Use Use to check the No of Fax transmission errors occurred 276 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 S
546. r operation and trans C fer completion linez0 DMA HO bizhub C250 D i Q E Q 352 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CFEOC ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMA H1 MFP Control Board C CFEOD ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMA H2 MFP Control Board CFEOE ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMA I MFP Control Board CFEOF ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMA J MFP Control Board Engine CFE10 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMAPCI Bridge MFP Control Board CFE11 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMA19 ASIC1 MFP Control Board CFE12 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMA JPEG MFP Control Board CFE13 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion linez0 DMA NO MFP Control Board CFE15 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion lin
547. r the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Take up feed or Vertical Motor M123 PC has been energized Transport Section The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor 117 is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC The Tray 4 Take Up Sensor PC125 PC is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper Tray 4 Vertical Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at Transport section front of the Registration Roller at Tray 4 feed Loop Registration Reversing JAM Detection of paper The Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor 126 is blocked when the Main left in Tray 4 Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The Tray 4 Take Up Sensor PC125 PC is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 4 Take Up Sensor PC125 PC Control Board PWB C2 PC Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC Mechanical Control Board PWB M Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC Tray4 Take up Motor M123 PC Registration Roller Sensor PC1 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component 1 Initial check items Step
548. raise a given degree of temperature even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Fusing Pressure Heater Lamp H3 is turned ON The detected temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 TH2 is lower for a given level of degree than one of the Heating Roller Thermistor 1 TH1 after the Front Door is opened or closed the Main Power Switch is turned ON or TROUBLE RESET is implemented C3461 New Fusing Unit New Article A new installation is not detected when a new Release Fusing Unit is installed C3751 Abnormal High Temp Heater The temperatures of the Heating Roller Ther mistor 1 TH1 and the Heating Roller Thermistor 2 TH3 are higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly The Heater Relay is OFF The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 TH2 is higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly before the Heater temperature control starts The temperature of the Fusing Pressure Roller Thermistor 1 TH2 is higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly after the Heater temperature control starts C3752 Abnormal High Temp Press C3851 Abnormal Low Temp Heater The temperature of the Heating Roller Ther mistor 1 TH1 is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly dur ing Ready mode Low Power mode or printing The temperature of the Heating Roller Th
549. ram Next Job OFF The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out The normal Copy setting screen will be displayed The copy reservation is available Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure 2 Pe i N lt ON OFF E Fax Active Screen 1 TX Display Functions To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting Fax Use To display Sending on the screen when transmitting Fax Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 165 bizhub C250 2 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 RX Display Functions To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving Fax Use To display Receiving on the screen when receiving the Fax Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 8 5 3 Initial Setting Functions To register the default setting for the Copy mode function the Scanner mode func tion and the Fax mode function The machine is initialized at the following timings The Main Power Switch is turned ON Panelis reset nan Interrupt mode Auto Reset The password entry screen for account Track is changed Use Tochange the Initial mode setting to meet the user s need Setting Procedure Current Setting To register t
550. ration display 5 Utility Mode Except items on E Expert adjustment Service Mode _ _ _ a _ System 1 2 Billing Setting _ Counter Setting Adjustment of the touch panel _ _ position O Will be cleared initialized Will not be cleared O 1 Items to be cleared Marketing Area Fax Target Only Foolscap Size Setting Install Date System 1 Tel Fax Number No Sleep Original Size Detection System 2 HDD 302 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 Mechanical adjustment 14 Mechanical adjustment 14 1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 14 1 1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt bizhub C250 This adjustment must be made in the following case The Scanner Motor Assy has been removed The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound 1 Remove the Upper Rear Cover and the IR Rear Cover 57 54 2 Remove the Harness from two Wire Saddles 1 and the Edge Cover 2 4038F2C128DA 3 Disconnect the Connector 3 and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 4 D 7 N E lt 4038F2C129DA 303 bizhub C250 D S ES oO E lt 14 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Remove 16 screws 5 and remove the Reinforcement frame 6 5 4038F2C130DA
551. rch 5 Setting 1 Touch Initial Setting for Search Details 5 lt 2 Setting Up LDAP Server Address Functions To set the LDAP server address Use To enter LDAP server address Setting P Address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Search Base Functions To set the Directory Path for LDAP server Use To enter the Directory Path for LDAP server Setting 1 Touch Search Base Procedure 2 Enter the Search Base up to 255 characters on the on screen keyboard and touch OK 206 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Enable SSL gt Functions To set whether to use SSL data encryption for connecting to LDAP server Use To use SSL data encryption for connecting to LDAP server Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF Port No Functions To set the LDAP server port number Use To enter the LDAP server port number Setting 1 Press the Clear key Procedure 2 Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Kay Pad General Settings Functions To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server Use To change the authentication method to logon to LDAP server anonymous User name and password are not necessary Simple Simple method which needs the user name and the password Digest MD5 Method ava
552. re 2 Default Paper Size Functions To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing Use To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS etc 3 2 Sided Print Functions To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the printer driver Use To use when 2 sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by Windows DOS etc Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 4 Bind Direction Functions To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing Use To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS etc Setting The default setting is Left Bind Procedure Left Bind Right Bind 5 Functions To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing Use To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows DOS etc Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure 1 Position 2 Positions OFF 170 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 6 Hole Punch Functions To select whether to make punch holes or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing Use To use when the printer driver canno
553. rect the TCR connection on the underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty E Reinstall Imaging Unit Change Imaging Unit E Change PWB M Change PWB MFP ES oj A jN E Q e Q 361 bizhub C250 D Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 19 C2559 Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure 16 5 20 255 Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure 16 5 21 C255B Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Toner Supply Motor Y M M6 Toner Supply Motor C K M7 MFP Control Board PWB MFP Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Location Electri cal Component Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty 2 M6 M7 operation check PWB M CNDM2 10 to 13 M6 C 20 PWB M 10 to 13 M7 C 21 3 Reinstall Imaging Unit 4 Change Imaging Unit 5 Change PWB M E 6 Change PWB MFP 16 5 22 C255C Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit K Toner Supply Motor C K M7 MFP Control Board PWB MFP Mechanical Control Board PWB M Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Location Electri cal Co
554. reign matter the Toner Cartridge Installation Is the atmospheric pressure at the YES Make the following adjustment enviroment installation site low Service Mode Image Pro 6 cess Adjustment Dev Bias Choice d Q e Q 409 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 22 Printer Monocolor colored spots A Typical Faulty Images Colored spots bizhub C250 403615405200 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Imaging Unit Developing bias contact terminal NO Clean contact terminal and makes good connection check terminal position 2 The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 3 Dirty on the outside YES Clean D fe Q E Q 410 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 23 Printer Monocolor blurred image A Typical Faulty Images Blurred image bizhub C250 ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4031c0 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is YES Clean with cleaning jig dirty 2 Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside YES Clean 3 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Imaging Unit through the checks of steps up to 2 Change PH Unit
555. rely installed NO Re install it Uneven pitch occurs in 3 0 mm pitch 1 NO Re install it YES Replace the PH Unit Holder Toner Cartridge There is any stain or breakage Clean replace the Toner Car 4 the Drive section of the Toner YES 6 tridge Cartridge 5 Imaging Unit There is any stain damage or YES Replace the Imaging Unit abrasion on the PC drum Transfer Roller There is any stain damage 6 deformation or abrasion on the YES Replace the Transfer Roller Transfer roller Fusing Unit There is any stain damage deformation or abrasion on the f Roller and Drive section of the Replace 1 Fusing unit Fusing Unit 8 The problem has been eliminated NO Replace the Image Transfer Belt through the check of step 7 unit d Q e Q 413 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 26 Printer 4 Color white lines in sub scan direction white bands in sub scan direction colored lines in sub scan direction and colored bands in sub scan direction A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 White lines in Sub White bands in Sub Colored lines in Sub Colored bands in Sub Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction Scan Direction 403615402100 40361540220 403615402300 403615402400 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section
556. remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 4 5 G 7 E s gt 3 4 4038F2C129DA 100 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 4 Remove 16 screws 5 and remove the IR reinforcement frame 6 bizhub C250 4038F2C130DA 5 Remove the Tension spring 7 for the Scanner Motor belt 5 o 7 B 7 4038F2C131DA 6 Disconnect the Connector 8 4038F2C132DB 101 bizhub C250 5 s 7 E 6 Other 4038F2C133DB 4037F2C134DB 3 4 1 MU pete 4 LS 2l mu 4038F2C524DA Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Remove three Screws 9 and remove the Scanner Motor Assy 10 8 Remove two Screws 11 Set screw 12 Damper 13 and remove the Scanner Motor 14 B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Temporarily secure the Scanner Motor Assy 2 using three Screws 1 2 Hookthe Tension spring 3 3 With the Scanner drive gear set Screw located on the right hand side as shown on the left slide the Scan ner Motor Assy to the left and check that it is returned to the original posi tion by the tension of the spring Per form this step three times 4 Securely tighten the three Screws to fix the Scanner Motor Assy 2 into position 5 Connect the Connector and fix the Harness to the Wire Saddle 102 F
557. rent Zone Functions To display the current zone on AppleTalk network Use To check the current zone on the AppleTalk network 205 bizhub C250 9 Pe i lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 G LDAP Setting 1 Enabling LDAP o LDAP Function o Functions To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP function Use To use LDAP function Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF Max Search Results Functions To set the Max results of address for LDAP search Use To change the Max results of address for LDAP search Setting 1 Touch Max Search Results Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the Max Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10 Key Pad lt Timeout gt Functions To set the Max timeout period for LDAP search Use To change the Max timeout period for LDAP search Setting 1 Touch Timeout Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10 Key Pad Initial Setting for Search Details Procedure 2 Touch the key about condition for each search item and select the condition 5 Functions To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search 2 Use To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail sea
558. respond ing page A number within A represents the number of times the revision has been made NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted When page revised in Ver 2 0 has been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 3 0 only are shown with those for Ver 2 0 deleted When a page revised in Ver 2 0 has not been changed in Ver 3 0 The revision marks for Ver 2 0 are left as they are 2005 07 1 0 Issue of the first edition Date Service manual Ver Revision mark Descriptions of revision Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 CONTENTS PC 403 General 1 Product SDecIfICatiori nineteenth erepta e teh tar dues Maintenance 2 Periodical check 2 1 Maintenance procedure Periodical check parts 2 1 1 Replacing the Separation Roller 2 1 2 Replacing the Paper Take up Roller seen 2 1 3 Replacing the Pick up Roller essen 3 GI PM EHE 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items seen 3 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list 3 2 2 Cleaning 3 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 8 1 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover 10 3 8 2
559. ress the Start key to make a copy 5 Check point A on the image of the copy 6 If the image falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make a copy 8 Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met 239 bizhub C250 9 Pe i n D lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 C Cross Direction Adjustment Functions To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section y Use The CCD Unit has been replaced E S Adjustment Measure width on the color chart and on Specification DAC the sample copy and adjust the gap to be within the following specification An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Paper Feed Direction Adj of C Printer Area y Specifications C 1 0 mm 4038F3C516DA Setting Range 0 990 to 1 010 in 0 001 increments Adjustment If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart increase the setting Instructions If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart decrease the setting Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Scan Area Cross Direction Adjust ment 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with t
560. rews 6 8 Remove the gear 1 7 and remove the gear 2 8 while disengaging the claw NOTE Becareful not to lose the gear pin 9 Remove the C clip 9 and remove the bushing 10 10 Remove the screw 11 and remove the Paper Guide Lower 12 11 Remove the Transport Roller 13 1 Remove the Middle Front Cover and the Middle Rear Cover 10 Remove Two screws 1 and remove the Middle Upper Cover 2 19 FS 603 s 7 E s FS 603 5 o 7 E s gt 2 Other 458315258300 2 3 19 Punch Unit 458315258600 45831258700 458318258800 20 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the C clip 3 and remove the bushing 4 Shift the Shaft Assy in the orientation as shown on the left Remove the C clip 5 the Gear 6 the bushing 7 and remove the Mid dle Transport Roller 8 Remove the Punch Trash Box Disconnect the connector J1005 1 Remove the Harness from the Har ness Guide 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Remove the screw 4 and remove the Sensor Support Plate 5 Remove the screw 6 and the washer 7 Disconnect the connector 8 Remove two screws 9 and remove the base cover 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other 9 Remove four screws 11 and remove the Sensor Unit Upper 12 and the Sensor Unit Lower 13
561. riables 21 r User variables Administrator TMP C Documents and Settings Administrat New Edit Delete System variables Variable Value E ComSpec C WINNT system32 cmd exe NUMBER OF PR 1 05 Windows NT Os2LibPath C WINNT system32 0s2 dl Path CHAWINNTIsystem32 CAWINNT CAWIN v Since a Delete e ee 40361526200 44 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 12 Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable Variable name Variable value g CYGWIN ntsec home username 2 H New System Variable LT Variable Name CYGWIN Variable Value ntsec New System Variable E 21x Variable Name HOME Variable Value home username 4036fs2621e0 5 G 7 5 1 4 Writing into the Compact flash 1 Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory C C250 in the below figure 0250 xl File Edit View Favorites Tools Help EJ Back Search C jFolders C4History 5 GE X wy 4 Address 71 c c2s0 e Name mi 20050512 4038 FO00 G00 01 000 R2 CHECKSUM D2FC EXE 31 99 Applicat 5 12 2 1 object s My Computer 4038F2E562DA NOTE The file name of Firmware data consists of the Release Date Version CHECKSUM exe 45 5
562. rint server password Setting 1 Touch Print Server name or Print Server Password Procedure 2 Enter the Print server name or the Print server password up to 63 characters using the on screen keyboard and touch OK 6 Polling Interval Functions To set the Polling interval Use e To set the interval to search the print queue Setting 1 Press the Clear key Procedure 2 Enter the Polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Key Pad 7 NDS Bindery Setting Functions To set whether to enable or disable the Bindery setting when using NetWare4 X model and after Use To enable the Bindery service Setting The default setting is NDS Procedure NDS NDS amp Bindery 201 bizhub C250 9 Pe i lt bizhub C250 2 ae i 5 n lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 File Server Name Functions To set the File server name Use To set the Full server name for the print server to logon Setting 1 Touch File Server Name Procedure 2 Enter the File server name up to 47 characters on the on screen keyboard and ouch 9 NDS Context Name Functions To set the NDS Context name Use To set the NDS Context name Setting 1 Touch NDS Context name Procedure 2 Enter the NDS Context name up to 191 characters on the on scr
563. riod of time has elapsed after the paper lift down operation began The Lift Up Lower Sensor PC13 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift down operation began The Lift Up Upper Sensor PC4 LCT is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT after the paper lift down operation began The Lower Over Run Sensor PC7 LCT is blocked while the paper lift down operating C0212 LCT ejection failure The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid SL1 LCT is energized after the lowering operation is finished C0213 LCT Shift Gate malfunction The Division Board Position Sensor PC14 LCT can not be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Division Board Motor M3 LCT began with the Division Board Position Sen sor PC14 LCT set to L 30 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code Code Item Description 0214 shifting failure The Shift Tray Stop Sensor PC11 LCT is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began shift to the right The Shift Tray Stop Sensor PC11 LCT is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT aft
564. riodical check parts 2 1 1 Replacing the Separation Roller 2 1 2 Replacing the Paper Take up Roller seen 2 1 3 Replacing the Pick up Roller essen 3 GI PM EHE 3 4 Disassembly Adjustment prohibited items seen 3 2 Disassembly Assembly Cleaning list Other parts 3 2 1 Disassembly Assembly parts list 3 2 2 Cleaning 3 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 3 8 1 Right Door Rear Right Cover Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover 10 3 8 2 Hear COVOLr REED ER 10 34 Cleaning ET 11 3 4 1 Separation Roller iiie ii nro 11 3 4 2 Paper Take up Roller 3 4 3 Pick up Roller 12 3 4 4 Vertical Transport Roller iniret rrr rrr nre ren 12 Adjustment Setting 4 How to use the adjustment section sesssssssseeeneeenneennennene 13 5 cem 14 bj Checkproced re cnini rentrer thon eainiie i teria honus 14 5 2 Sensor check list 5 2 1 Sensor CHECK 14 5 2 2 Sensor check list onere erret retro 15 6 Mechanical adjustment eerta etienne
565. ristics 2 Panel Display B 1 0 PC12 Tray 1 Device Tray 1 Set Sensor In position Out of Detection position PC10 Paper Empty Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC11 Near Empty Tray 1 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC2 PC Tray 2 Device Tray 2 Set Sensor In position Out of Detection position PC6 PC Paper Empty Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC1 PC Near Empty Tray 2 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC8 PC Vertical Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not Transport present present PC9 PC Take Up Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC7 PC Upper Limit Tray 2 Lift Up Sensor At raised Notatraised position position PC112 PC 3 Device Tray 3 Set Sensor In position Out of Detection position PC115 PC Paper Empty Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC113 PC Near Empty Tray 3 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked 2 PC117 PC Vertical Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Paper not Transport present present uU PC116 PC Take Up Tray 3 Paper Take Up Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC114 PC Upper Limit Tray 3 Lift Up Upper Limit Sensor Atraised Notat raised position position PC121 PC Tray 4 Device Tray 4 Set Sensor In position Out of Detection position PC124 PC Paper Empty Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC122 PC Near Empty Tray 4 Paper Near Empty Sensor Blocked Unblocked PC
566. ristics Symbol Panel display Part Signal name Panel display 1 0 PI13 FN Crease Tray Saddle Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI11 FN Crease Home Folding Home Position Sensor HP PI12 FN Crease Roller Home Folding Roller Home Position Sensor HP PI14 FN Crease Clock Staple Folding Motor Clock Sensor PI8 FN Paper Exit Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI9 FN Paper Surface Exit Tray Home Position Sensor DETECTED 15 Raised Position Shift Upper Limit Sensor UPPER LIMIT PI16 FN Lift Lowered Position Shift Lower Limit Sensor LOWER LIMIT PI17 FN Lift Clock Shift Motor Clock Sensor Lift Middle FULL PI18 FN Slide Home Slide Home Position Sensor HP PI19 FN Stapler Home Staple Drive Home Position Sensor HP PI20 FN Staple Staple Detecting Sensor SUPPLIED EMPTY Stapler Connect DETECTED MSN o iple Safety Switch ron OPEN CLOSE PI21 FN Self Prime Self Priming Sensor READY PI22 FN Front Door Front Door Open Sensor CLOSE OPEN PI23 FN Upper Cover Upper Cover Open Sensor CLOSE OPEN MS1 FN Front Door SW Front Door Open Switch CLOSE OPEN Remain in Reverse HORIZON Section TAL MS2 FN _ Joint SW Joint Open Switch CLOSE OPEN Punch Depth 1 Punch Depth 2 Punch Depth 3 Punch Depth 4 Punch Dust FULL Punch Timing PI3P PK Punch Motor Clock Punch Motor Clock Sensor Blocked Unblocked Punch Home Punch Home Position Sensor HP PI2P PK Punch Depth Home Side Registration Home Sensor HP PC4
567. rness at the original position with the wire saddle 4038F2C057DA 66 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 5 Remove all the Connectors and Flat Cables on the Mechanical Control Board 4037F2C058DB 4038F2C059DA 6 Remove six Screws 5 and remove the Mechanical Control Board 6 67 bizhub C250 5 G 7 B s 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 NOTE When Mechanical Control Board PWB M is replaced relocate the Parameter Chip IC6 Mount the Parameter Chip IC6 of old Mechanical Control Board onto the new Mechanical Control Board o e o a dei a 2 S A 4037F2C061DB NOTE A When the Parameter Chip IC6 is E mounted precisely fit the direc tions of each A NOTE A When the Control Board is to be replaced rewriting the Firmware to the latest one 4037F2C534DA 68 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 15 Power Supply PU1 NOTE Finishing Option is installed remove if from the main unit before trying to remove the DC Power Supply When removing the Finishing Option support the Horizontal Transport Unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping bizhub C250 Remove the Exit Tray 57 Remove the Rear Left Cover 57 Remove twelve Screws 1 to remove the protective sheet of DC Power Supply 2 vN
568. rocedure Default setting Unset Set Unset Select Color Mode and Message when the Key Counter is mounted Color Mode When Mode 1 is set on Total Counter Mode after selecting Billing Setting gt Counter setting Mode 1 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5 5 counts per 1 copy cycle When Mode 2 is set on Total Counter Mode after selecting Billing Setting gt Counter setting and Large size is selected on Large Size Counter Mode Mode 1 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 2 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3 6 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4 8 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5 10 counts per 1 copy cycle When Mode 2 is set on Total Counter Mode after selecting Billing Setting gt Counter setting and sizes other than Large Size are selected on Large Size Counter Mode Mode 1 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5 5 counts per 1 copy cycle 2 pe i 5 N lt Message Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted Type 1 Message for Key Counter Type 2 Message for Card scanning Type 3 Message for ID management Type 4 Message for Remote SW Management Device Default setting Unset Set Unset 12 3 3 Coverage Rate Clear
569. roduce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the spec gt ified range 8 Repeat steps 1 to 7 similarly for the Tray 4 iz 2 5 n lt 434815350900 18 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Jam Display Troubleshooting 7 Jam Display 7 1 Misfeed display PC 103 PC 203 When misfeed occurs message misfeed location Blinking and paper location Light ing are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit 4061F4C800DA No Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1301 Tray 3 Paper Take Up Section 1 Right Door gt 22 2001 Tray 3 Paper Vertical Transport Section 1401 Tray 4 Paper Take Up Section 2 Right Door gt 23 2001 Tray 4 Paper Vertical Transport Section 7 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure Open the corresponding door clear the sheet of paper misfeed and close the door Q D Q 19 7 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 2 Sensor layout eo ed Q n e 9 4061F4C802DA 8 9 1 Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC 4 Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126 PC E 2 Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC 5 Tray4 Take up Sensor PC125 PC 3 Tray3 Take up Sensor PC116 PC 20 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Jam Display 7 3
570. rruption MFP Control Board Engine C CFB56 DMA_D 1 error interruption MFP Control Board Engine C CFB57 DMA_D 2 error interruption Control Board Engine C CFB58 DMA_D 3 error interruption MFP Control Board Engine C CFB59 DMA E error interruption MFP Control Board C CFB5A DMA F error interruption MFP Control Board C 5 error interruption Control Board C CFB5C error interruption MFP Control Board C CFB5D error interruption MFP Control Board CFB5E DMA_J error interruption Control Board Engine C CFB5F Watch Dog Timer Error interrup MFP Control Board C tion CFB60 PCI slave error interruption Control Board FAX Board Local Board C CFB61 Local bus error interruption MFP Control Board C 349 bizhub C250 fe o e Ke 5 bizhub C250 D Q E Q 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 fer completion line 0 DMA AO Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CFB6E Underrun at DMA D 0 image MFP Control Board C output interface 1 CFB6F Underrun at D 1 image MFP Control Board C output interface 1 CFB70 Underrun at D 2 image MFP Control Board C output interface 1 CFB71 Underrun
571. rts list No Section Part name Ref Page 1 PH PH Window te 126 2 Processing section Image Transfer Belt Unit ts 127 3 Feed Roller gt 127 4 Separation Roller ce 127 5 Feed Roller ts 128 Bypass 6 Separation Roller ts 128 7 Feed Roller ts 129 8 Pick up Roller ts 129 9 nye Separation Roller ts 131 10 Transport Roller ts 132 11 Scanner Rail ts 132 12 Mirrors 1st 2nd 3rd ts 133 13 IR Lens gt 134 14 Original Glass 134 15 CCD Sensor te 135 53 bizhub C250 5 5 7 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 6 3 1 IR Upper Right Cover IR Right Cover IR Upper Rear Cover bizhub C250 B 4 4037 2 Remove three Screws 1 and remove the IR Upper Right Cover 2 Open the Fusing Unit Cover Remove the four Screws 3 and remove the IR Right Cover 4 Remove each Screw 5 and remove two Hinge Covers 6 Remove four Shoulder Screws 7 and the Screw 8 and remove the IR Upper Rear Cover 9 5 s 7 g s 54 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 3 2 Left Cover Upper Front Cover IR Left Cover IR Upper Front Cover 7 6 10 8 bizhub C250 6 2 3 4037F2C034DA 5 G 7 g s Open the Front Door 1 Remove three Screws 2 and remove the Left Tray 3 Remove the Screw
572. ry out the Feed Direction Adjustment procedure 238 5 o 7 111 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 3 37 PWB Box 4038F2C507DA 4038F2C140DA 4038F2C141DA 112 1 Remove the Upper Rear Cover Lower Rear Cover and Rear Right Cover ws 57 59 Remove thirteen Screws and remove the Shield cover 1 3 Disconnect the Flat Cable 2 on the MFP Control Board and remove two Presser Bars 3 of Flat Cable 4 Disconnect the Flat Cable 4 on the Slide Interface Board and remove the Presser Bar 5 of Flat Cable Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 5 Disconnect three Connectors 6 on the Slide Interface Board bizhub C250 4038F2C142DA 6 Disconnect the Connector 7 and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 8 7 Remove two tabs 9 and remove the Cooling Fan Motor 2 10 o 7 g s 8 Remove the Harness 12 from two Wire Saddles 11 4038F2C144DA 113 bizhub C250 Maintenance 6 Other 14 4038F2C145DB 4038F2C147DA 114 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 9 Remove the Harness 13 from two Edge Covers 14 10 Disconnect the Connector 15 and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle 16 11 Remove the Screw 17 of the Ground terminal Field Servi
573. s White lines in Main White bands in Colored lines in Main Colored bands in Scan Direction Main Scan Direction Scan Direction Main Scan Direction poer B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent 1 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES dirty belt with a soft cloth 2 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged Cleaning Blade is not effective in YES Cleaning Blade 3 removing toner completely change Image Transfer Belt Unit 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Image Transfer 4 Transfer Roller scratched Roller Unit Unit 5 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper YES Remove foreign matter path 6 Image Transfer Paper Separator YES Clean or change Fingers are damaged or dirty 7 Fusing Unit Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is YES Clean dirty or damaged Change Fusing Unit 8 Fusing Paper Separator Fingers YES Clean are dirty Neutralizing The resistance values between the NO the contact Modify 9 Brush Neutralizing brush and the ground Change Neutralizing brush terminal is not 10 The problem has been eliminated NO Change MFP Control Board through the checks of steps up to 9
574. s AD 503 A Paint locked Screws NOTE Paint locked screws show that the assembly or unit secured can only be adjusted or set at the factory and should not be adjusted set or removed in the field B Red Painted Screws NOTE When the screws are removed the red paint is coated on the points where read justment is required Once the red painted screw is removed or loosened you should make adjustment Accordingly check the adjustment items in this manual and make necessary adjustment Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in questions only one representative screw may be marked with red paint C Variable Resistors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting 5 o 7 D Removal of PWBs Caution When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS and follow the corresponding removal proce dures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and Screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 3 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts No Section Part name Ref page 1 Unit Duplex Unit gt 6 AD 503
575. s OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator Use To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When setting to ON enter the Login Name and the Password to be set B Admin transmission Functions To call the CS Remote Care Center from the Administrator When the CS Remote Use Care setup is complete Setting t For details see page 250 CS Remote Care Procedure 222 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 6 10 Security Setting A Administrator Password Functions To set change the Administrator Password Use To change the Administrator Password ael Setting Enter the Administrator password on the on screen keyboard Procedure Current Password Enter the current Administrator password New Password Enter the new Administrator password to be used Re Input Password Reenter the new Administrator password NOTE When selecting Utility Administrator Setting Security Setting Secu rity Details leads to Password Rules being ON the password with the same letters the password which is same as the previous one and the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed B User Box Admin Setting Functions To set whether to allow or restrict the Box Administrator to use the system Use To allow the Box Admi
576. s are completed E mail address of the Center is displayed When entering the phone No 10 Keys and keys on the screen have following mean ings Pose Waits to start transmitting after dialing W Wait Detects the dial tone of the other end T Tone dial Carry out tone dialing P Pulse dial Carry out pulse dialing LI To be used as necessary Initial Transmission Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care Center to register the machine Only when the Modem or Fax is selected on the system Input 2 Date amp Time Setting Functions To set the data and time of day Use Use to set or change the date and time of day Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch CS Remote Care 3 Touch Detail Setting to access Date amp Time Setting 4 Enter the date month day and year time of day and the time zone from the 10 Key Pad 5 Touch SET to start the clock 3 RAM Clear Functions To clear the following data at the Center ID Code Primary Setting Date Time Input Time Zone Software SW Setting and AT Command Use To be used for setting CS Remote Care To be used for reset the every data of the Center to default NOTE If RAM Clear is selected during transmission RAM clear processing will be implemented at the time the transmission is completed regardless of whether it is done properl
577. s for proper m u connection and correct as necessary 2 PC4 LCT I O sensor check PWB G1 ceriz PC 403 C 6 3 PC13 LCT I O sensor check eye TA LCT9 PC 403 G to H 3 4 PC10 LCT I O sensor check PE eae LCTS 403 G to H 4 5 PC7 LCT I O sensor check DIRMI NU LCT 56 403 G to H 5 6 PWB C1 LCT replacement 8 3 4 C0212 LCT Lock Release Failure Relevant electrical parts Tray Lock Solenoid SL1 LCT Control Board PWB C1 LCT Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical components Check the SL1 LCT connector for proper connection and correct as nec essary SL1 LCT operation check PWB C1 LCT PJ7C1 LCT 4 ON PC 403 C 8 PWB C1 LCT replacement 33 PC 403 d Q e Q 403 D Q E Q 8 Trouble code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 3 5 C0213 LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure Relevant electrical parts Division Board Position Sensor PC14 LCT Division Board Motor M3 LCT Control Board PWB C1 LCT Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connectors 1 j for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of motor for proper 2 drive coupling and correct as neces sary 3 PC14 LCT sensor check PWB H LCT 2
578. s turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset The Tray 3 Take Up Sensor PC116 PC is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 3 Take Up Sensor PC116 PC Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117 PC Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC Tray3 Take up Motor M122 PC Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Control Board PWB C2 PC Mechanical Control Board PWB M WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal ea 1 Initial check items 2 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C 3 3 PC116 PC I O check Sensor check PWB C2 PC PJ6C2 PC 8 ON PC 103 203 C 4 4 PC117 PC I O check Sensor check M dies Vow PC 103 203 C 4 5 PC8 PC I O check Sensor check PWB Z PC PJ6Z PC 11 ON S 25 6 122 operation check PWB C2 PJ5C2 PC 1 to 4 PC 103 203 C 4 7 Change PWB C2 PC 8 Change PWB M 323 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 15 Jam Display Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 15 3 8 Misfeed at Tray 4 Feed and Tray 4 vertical transport section PC203 e A Detection Timing N e Type Description gt Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor lt misfeed at Tray 4 PC126 PC even afte
579. scent Error The Bypass Lift Up Sensor is not blocked even 5 when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the S standby position to the feed position was started B The Bypass Lift Up Sensor is not unblocked even when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the feed position to the standby position was started C0212 LCT ejection failure ts PC 403 Service Manual B C0213 LCT Shift Gate malfunction B C0214 LCT shifting failure B C0215 LCT Shift Motor malfunction B 334 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank C0301 Suction Fan Motor s failure to The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter e turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C1180 Finishing option transport t See FS 501 or FS 603 Service Manual B 5 system malfunction C1181 Finishing option Paddle Motor B malfunction C1182 Finishing option Shift Motor B mechanism malfunction C1183 Finishing option Elevator drive B malfunction C1190 Finishing option Aligning Bar B moving mechanism malfunction C1192 Finishing option Front Aligning B Motor malfunction C1193 Finish
580. sed for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Caution to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands AD 503 2 Pe i N lt AD 503 iz 2 5 n lt 5 Sensor check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Sensor check 5 1 Check procedure To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Service Mode t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the main unit service manual 2 Touch the State Confirmation key 3 Touch the Sensor Check key
581. set the specific network speed Setting The default setting is Auto Procedure Auto 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex NOTE When Network speed setting is changed turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after 2 Time Adjustment Setting NTP Setting Functions To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting Use To synchronize the time between the server and the client Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF NTP Server Address Functions To set the NTP server address Use To enter the NTP server address Setting P Address Version 4 format Procedure 0 to 255 O to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 1 Touch Host Address 2 Select IP Address Input and enter the IP address 3 Select Host name Input and enter the Host name Port No Functions To set the Port No for transmitting with NTP server Use To enter the Port No for transmitting with NTP server Setting 1 Press the Clear key Procedure 2 Enter the Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Key Pad 211 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Status Notification Setting Notification Address Setting Functions To set the e mail address for notifying the machin
582. setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to make another copy 8 Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met 9 Make adjustments until the specifications are met 238 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode B Image Position Side Edge Functions To adjust part to part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction Use When the CCD Unit is replaced When the Original Glass is replaced The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced Adjustment Specification A width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below An adjustment must have been completed correctly of Print Positioning Side Edge of Printer Area 40361530198 Specifications 1 0 mm Setting Range 10 0 to 10 0 in 0 1 mm increments Adjustment Instructions If the copy image is less than the specified length increase the setting value If the copy image exceeds the specified length decrease the setting value Setting Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine Scan Area Image Position Side Edge 3 Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale 4 P
583. setup exe on CD ROM in which Cygwin is stored B 4037F2C501DA S 2 Click Next N E a Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This wizard vell guide you thiough the instalation and updating the Cygvan environment and a piethorn of GNU packages Setup exe verion 2 249 25 Copyright 2000 2001 Red Hat ine J scurces redhat com cygein Ned _ Cancel Eee 4037F2E545DA 3 Select Install from Local Directory and click Next N 25 Choose A Download Source Choose whether to instal oc download Irom Ure intesa or install bom len n dinctoy instal hom Intemet gowedomd bas Intimna instal hom Local Dancin jack jest gt Cancel Sys 4037F2E546DA 42 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 5 Firmware upgrade 4 Specify the folder for installation Check to make sure that Root Directory is in default setting C cygwin NOTE Make sure to check that Root Directory is in default setting C cygwin Do not change the setting value except Root Directory 5 Click Next N Select Root Install Directory Select the directory where you wiser to intal Cygwin Alto choose a few E pwametres Root Directoy Instal For Dela Tes File Ab Users C pgs C Mex 4037F2E547DA lt Bach Nein Carcel 6 Specify the place of the data to be installed For installing
584. sing temperature Use Used for troubleshooting of image problems Setting TCR C M Y K Shows the T C output reading taken last 5 Procedure e IDC1 IDC2 Shows the latest IDC data Temp Heat Shows the latest Heating Roller temperature data Temp Press Shows the latest Fusing Pressure Roller temperature data Reading taken last means Density of toner of the latest image When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while Level History 1 is being displayed 10 12 4 Level History2 Functions DC Sensor Transfer Belt bare surface level as adjusted through the image stabili zation sequence and ATVC value Use Used for troubleshooting of image problems Setting DC Sensor Shows the intensity adjustment value 0 to 255 of the IDC Sensor Procedure ATVC C M Y K Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value 500 V to 3000 V ATVC 2nd Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value 1000 V to 4800 V 10 12 5 Temp amp Humidity Functions To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location AIDC Sensor portion 2 inside the machine and fusing temperature 2 Use Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs e Setting Temp Inside 0 to 100 C in 1 increments Procedure Temp Heater 0 to 255 in 1 increments i Temp press 0to 255 C in 1 C increments Humidity 0
585. sition insert the Imaging Unit 5 into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped NOTE Install them by fitting the blue label position of Imaging Unit and one of the machine Do not allow the Imaging Unit to become tilted while installing them into the Main Unit as damage to the PC Drum can result Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4038F2C537DA 4038F2C567DA 3 Periodical check 6 Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet 6 while pressing the Imaging Unit 7 Insert the Imaging Unit all the way NOTE Make sure that the Imaging Unit is inserted all the way 8 Plug in the power cord 9 Turn ON the Main Power Switch 10 Close the Front Door 11 Select Service Mode Imaging Process Adjustment Gradation Adjust and carry out Gradation Adjust NOTE When removing installing the Imaging Unit use care not to touch the surface of the PC Drum 7 37 bizhub C250 5 o 7 s 3 Periodical check Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 6 6 Replacing the Fusing Unit N CAUTION Before replacing the Fusing Unit ensure that it has had time to cool down 1 Open the Front Door 2 Turn OFF the Main Power Switch _ and unplug the power cord from the power outlet then wait for about 20 2 minutes 3 Remove the Sub Tray d gt 57 1 4 Remove the Screw 1 and remove the Exit Tray Connector protectiv
586. slot 11 Turn ON the Main Power Switch and close the Front Door 12 Call the Service Mode to the screen 13 Select Firmware Version 14 Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated 5 o 7 E s 3 2 2 Action When Data Transfer Fails f NG appears on the Touch Panel indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful in which case the Start key lights up red take the following steps 1 Perform the data rewriting procedure again 2 Ifthe procedure is abnormally terminated change the Compact flash for a new one and try another rewriting sequence 3 Ifthe procedure is still abnormally terminated change the board that has caused and carry out data rewriting procedure MFP CONTROLLER MFP Control Board PWB MFP 11 3 Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Standard Controller 5 7 E Blank Page 12 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Checking the Image Controller Setting Adjustment Setting 4 Checking the Image Controller Setting Whenever the controller is mounted it is necessary to select Controller 0 in Image Controller Setting Standard Controller 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch System 2 3 Check that Controller 0 is selected in Image Controller Setting NOTE If the setting is changed be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again
587. some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF A risk of electric shock exists The area around the fixing unit is hot You may get burnt S 7 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Work Performed with the Product Powered On NWARNING Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached you may touch live or high voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt leading to a risk of injury Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached High voltage exists around the drum unit A risk of elec tric shock exists Safety Checkpoints NWARNING Check the exterior and frame for edges burrs and other damage aD The user or CE may be injured Do not allow any metal parts such as clips staples and screws to fall into the product They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock Q gU or fire Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage Current can leak leading to a risk of electric shock or aD fire Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit Current can leak leading to a risk of product trouble or fire Check high voltage cables and sheaths for any d
588. sor is unable to detect a Scanner even when the Scanner Motor has been driven to move the Scanner over the maximum B traveling distance The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner when the Scanner has moved 5 mm from the position at which it blocks the Scanner Home Sensor C6103 Slider Over Run The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins with the time when a prescan command B and a scan preparation command are executed and ends when a home return command is exe cuted C6301 Scanner Cooling Fan Motor s The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor B remains stationary C6704 Image Input Time Out Image data is not input from the Image Process ing Board PWB C to the MFP Control Board C PWB MFP C6751 CCD clamp gain adjustment The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD failure clamp adjustment B The peak value of the output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment C9401 Exposure Lamp s failure to turn The output from the CCD Sensor is a predeter ON mined value or less during CCD Sensor gain A adjustment C9402 Exposure Lamp turning ON at The average output value of the CCD Sensor with abnormal timing the Scanner at its standby position is a predeter A mined value or more at the end of a scan job CAO051 Standard controller configuration The controller of the MFP Control
589. ss Input and enter the IP address 3 Select Host Name Input to enter the host name and touch OK 4 Enter the Login Name Up to 63 characters 5 Enter the password Up to 15 characters Detail Setting APOP Authentication Functions To set whether to use APOP Authentication Use To use APOP Authentication Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF Detail Setting Port No Functions To set the Port No for transmitting with POP server Use To enter the Port No for transmitting with POP server Setting 1 Press the Clear key Procedure 2 Enter the Port No between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Key Pad Detail Settin 9 Connection Timeout gt Functions To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e mail to POP server Use To set the timeout period of connection in receiving e mail to POP server Setting Select the timeout period of connection using 30 30 keys Procedure The default setting is 30 sec 30 sec 30 to 300 in 30 sec increments 210 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Detail Setting 1 Device Setting MAC Address Functions To display the MAC address of the machine Use To check the MAC address of the machine Setting The address cannot be changed Procedure Network Speed Functions To set the Network speed Use To
590. steps up to 4 Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original does not lie flat YES Change original 2 Original Cover Cover does not lie flat YES Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken 3 Original Glass Original Glass tilts YES Position Original Glass correctly Check original loading position 2nd 3rd Mirrors Scanner is not aligned with the YES Perform Focus Positioning of the 4 Carriage 2nd 8rd Mirrors Carriage Scanner and 2nd 3rd Mirrors Car riage and Scanner Position Adjustment 5 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Scanner Assy Change CCD Unit 391 bizhub C250 d Q e Q 18 Image quality problem Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 3 6 Scanner System incorrect color image registration sync shift lines in main scan direction A Typical Faulty Images bizhub C250 403615403200 B Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 1 Original Original does not lie flat YES Change original 2 Original Cover Original Cover does not lie flat YES Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken Scanner rails Foreign matter on rails YES Clean and apply lubricant Drive Cables Cable kinks or is damaged YES Correct or change Scanner Assy Scanner moves smoothly NO Adjust the Scanner Motor timing 5 belt Change bushing
591. stors on Board NOTE Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment Setting D Removal of PWBs Caution When removing a circuit board or other electrical component refer to SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS and follow the corresponding removal proce dures The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and Screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board be sure to ground your body 5 o 7 2 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other parts 2 No Section Part name Ref page 1 Upper Cover gt 6 2 Upper Front Cover 6 Exterior Parts 3 Lower Front Cover 6 4 Rear Cover gt 6 5 Unit Stapling Unit uo 7 6 Option Job Separator JS 601 ws 7 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure 2 3 1 Upper Cover Upper Front Cover Lower Front Cover Rear Cover e ED 2 2 Open the Upper Door 5 Remove four screws 1 and remove the Upper Cover Remove four screws 2 and remove the Upper Front Cover Remove two screws 3 and remove the Lower Front Cover Remove four screws 4 and remove the Rear Cover RON Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Other 2
592. str ling ved abning nar sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion Undga udseettelse for str ling Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 1 sikkerheds kravene halvlederlaser Laserdiodens hojeste styrke 10 mW b lgel ngden 775 800 nm S 14 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS Laitteen kayttaminen muulla kuin tassa k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat taa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle laser s teilylle puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho 10 mW aallonpituus 775 800 nm VARNING Om apparaten anv nds pa annat s tt i denna bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstralning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 halvledarlaser Den maximala effekten f r laserdioden 10 mW vaglangden 775 800 nm VARO Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina nakymattomalle laser s teilylle Ala katso s teeseen VARNING e Osynlig laserstr ining nar denna del r ppnad och sp rren urkopplad Betrakta ej str ien Norway ADVERSEL Dersom apparatet brukes annen m te enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn ing kan brukeren utsettes f r unsynlig laserstr lning som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1 halvleder laser Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 10 mW b lgelengde 775 800 nm
593. sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed 434815262300 Replace the Separation Roller Assy Paper Take up Roller and Pick up Roller at the same time 403 5 s 7 g s 2 Periodical check 2 1 2 Replacing the Paper Take up Roller 9 434815250300 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover 10 Remove the Tray3 Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 3 Separation Roller Assy Disconnect the connector 1 from the Main Control Board Remove four screws 2 and remove the Paper Take up Unit 3 Remove two screws 4 and remove the Mounting Frame 5 for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy Remove two screws 6 and remove the Paper Take up Cover 7 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 2 Periodical check 8 Remove two C rings 8 and remove the bushing 9 PC 403 434816250500 9 Shift the Shaft Assy 10 in the tation as shown on the left and remove the C ring 11 and the gear 12 10 Remove the shaft Assy 10 5 o 7 g 434818250600 11 Remove two E rings 13 and the bushing 14 and remove the Pick up Roller Fixing Bracket Assy 15 43481625070
594. sy 6 Remove four C clips 7 of the Pick up Roller and the gear fixing C clip 8 black of the Pick up Paper Take up Roller connected Timing Belt and remove the Pick up Paper Take up Roller connecting section 9 from the shaft 10 Remove the Pick up Roller 11 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 ue amp 12 458216250900 3 1 3 Separation Roller 458215252400 3 Periodical check 5 Remove C clip black of the Paper Take up Roller and remove the Paper Take up Roller 12 NOTE Be careful not to lose the Pick Up Take Up Roller fixing pin A Replacing procedure 1 Unlock the Separation Roller Cover locking claws and remove the Sepa ration Roller Cover 1 2 Remove the Separation Roller Assy 2 NOTE The Separation Roller Assy is of a set in type Pinch the roller shaft at both ends and pull out the Separa tion Roller Assy upward 3 Remove the Holder 3 and the shaft 4 and remove the Separation Roller 5 DF 601 o 7 E s DF 601 Maintenance 3 Periodical check 3 1 4 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Pick up Roller Paper Take up Roller Separation Roller 3 4 458218252300 3 1 5 Registration Roller 458218251400 1 Cleaning procedure Open the Paper Take up Section Cover 1 Wet a cloth with alcohol and use it to wipe u
595. t Action Location Is a power voltage supplied across PJ1PU1 1 Check the WIRING from 1 3 PU1 Q to R 2 NO the wall outlet to 1 PJ1PU1 2 Are the fuses F1 and F2 on PU1 conducting NO Change PU1 3 pra V being output from PJ5PU1 2 on P 7 NO Change PU1 4 15 DC5 V being input to PJ7PU1 3 on PU1 P 7 NO Change PU1 Is DC5 V being input to CNPOW 4 on the Con NO Change PU1 5 trol Board LED on PWB M does not blink ad YES Change PWB M 17 2 Control panel indicators do not light Relevant Electrical Parts Image Processing Board PWB C DC Power Supply PU1 Control Panel UN201 WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action Location Is the I F cable between the Scanner and Reconnect or change 1 NO engine connected properly the I F cable Is a power voltage being applied across Check the WIRING from 2 PJ1PU1 1 and 3 on PU1 Q to R 2 NO the wall outlet to 51 PJ1PU1 DoD 3 15 the fuse on PU1 conducting NO Change PU1 Is DC5 V being output from PJ13PU1 1 on R 7 e 4 PU1 and DC24 V from PJ12PU1 2 R 8 NO Change PUN E 5 18 PJ12C on PWB C securely connected X 10 to 11 NO Reconnect 3 Is CN1UN201 on UN201 securely connected NO Reconnect 6 21 YES Change UN201 Change PWB C 379 bizhub C250 D Q E Q 17 Power supply trouble Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 17
596. t for Y direction Check point Y Adjustment for X direction Check point X Direction of C 036 53006c0 If the cross deviates in the direction of C increase the setting If the cross deviates in the direction of D decrease the setting Direction of C Direction of D 1 4 1 1 1 4 1 403618300700 j 1 ics alite o 403613008 0 242 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 4 8 Fusing Loop Size Functions To vary the timing to start fusing loop processing and adjust the fusing loop size at Envelope printing Use To be used when paper wrinkle or transfer misalignment occur at Envelope printing Adjustment Delay the timing to start fusing loop processing Adjustment in Put ahead the timing to start fusing loop processing Setting The default setting is O Procedure 0 2 to 2 10 4 9 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment Functions To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the Manual Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide Use Use when the Manual Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide has been changed Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual Bypass is used Setting Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 1 2 Touch these keys in this order Machin
597. t prohibited items esee 5 2 2 Disassembly Assembly list Other 6 2 3 Disassembly Assembly procedure sse 6 2 3 1 Upper Cover Upper Front Cover Lower Front Cover Rear Cover 6 2 3 2 ciel gU PE 7 2 9 3 Job Separator JS 601 Option Adjustment Setting 3 How to use the adjustment section 9 4 Sensor Checked ipii re anes ac COP EE 10 412 ee dote 10 4 2 Sensorcheck adu n P red dec 10 4 2 1 Sensor check screen 5 Mechanical adjustment tena dies 12 5 1 Adjustment of the 12 5 1 1 Adjustment of the Upper Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid SL1 FN 12 5 1 2 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid SL2 FN 12 5 2 Timing belt tension adjustment 12 5 2 1 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor M4 FN Timing 12 5 2 2 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor M2 FN Timing Belt 12 5 2 3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor M3 FN Timing Belt 13 5 3 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor 13 6 nci aai 14 7 uunc M os 15 7 1 Test mode setting proced
598. t specify punching during printing from Windows DOS etc Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF C PCL Setting 1 Typeface Functions To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing Use To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS etc Setting The default setting is Courier Procedure 2 Symbol Set Functions To set the Font Symbol Set when not specified by the printer driver during PC print ing Use To use when the Font Symbol Set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS etc Setting The default setting is Roman 8 or PC8 Code Page 437 Procedure 3 Font Size Functions To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing Use To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS etc To set Scalable Font Point and Bitmap Font Pitch respectively Setting The default setting is Procedure Scalable Font 12 00 points Bitmap Font 10 00 pitch 4 Line Pag o Functions To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data Use To change the number of lines per page for printing the text data Setting The default setting is 60 or 64 lines Procedure 60 or 64 lines 5 to 128 171 bizhub C250
599. tal con ditions or degraded durability variable 2 to 2 in 0 1 increments Range Adjustment If brush effect is evident vary the setting value and check for image Instructions If a blurred image occurs decrease the setting Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch these keys in this order Machine gt Fusing Transport Speed 3 Select the transport speed at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred Transport speed Paper Setting 110 mm s Plain paper monochrome color Thick paper OHP film Envelope Postcard 55 mm s Labels monochrome color 4 Enter the new setting from the 10 key pad 5 Touch END to validate the adjustment value 6 Check the copy image for any image problem 10 4 3 Org Size Detecting Sensor Adj Functions To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the Original Size Sensor To display if the Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 is mounted Use When the sensor is replaced with a new one When an optional sensor has been added When an erroneous original size detection is made When the marketing area setting is changed Adjustment Instructions If the adjustment has been successfully made it completes the adjustment procedure If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful check the optional Original Size Sensors for correct installation and change the defect
600. ted to a corresponding value of the number of copies made and the value which ever reaches the life specifications value is detected However the maximum number of copies is detected by counting hours through which the belt has turned When the maximum number of printed pages is reached the print is inhibited 120 000 151 037 3 Imaging Unit C M Y Imaging Unit IK The hours which the PC drum has turned is com pared with the value of the number of hours through which the Imaging roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of hours and the value which ever reaches the life specification value is detected The hours which the PC drum has turned is the value of the number of distance through which the PC drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value 6 366 M 4 6 649 M 4 6 637 4 6 827 4 1 waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions 2 Once the Toner Full is detected it has to be replaced with the new Waste Toner Box in order to reset 8 The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the maximum number of printed pages is reached 4 The mark M is indicated the value of the number of distance through which the PC drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value 14 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check A C
601. the Main Power Switch 2 after main power switch has been and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after Image Transfer Fingerprints oil or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent through the checks of steps up to 10 3 Belt Unit matter is evident on the Image See Maintenance Transfer Belt Image Transfer Belt is dirty or YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth 4 scratched Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged 5 Drive coupling to the machine is YES Clean dirty 6 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is YES Change Imaging Unit scratched 7 2nd Image Image Transfer Roller is installed NO hReinstall Transfer Roller properly Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or YES Change 2nd Image Transfer 8 scratched Roller Unit Machine Brush effect or blurred image YES Readjust Fusing Transport Fusing Trans occurs Speed 9 port Speed Service Mode Machine Check the specific color in which YES Perform Color registration Color regis color shift occurs Adjustment If color shift is not 10 tration Adjust corrected even with a correction ment of x 1 dot go to next step Service Mode 11 The problem has been eliminated NO Change Image Transfer Belt Unit Change MFP Control Board 420 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 18 Image quality problem 18 3 33 Printer 4 Color void areas white s
602. the Stabilizer sequence check to see if the values of the phase detection sen sors Black PC Drive Main Sub Sensors change A sensor is faulty if its value does not change a d Q e Q 333 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 3 Trouble code The machine s CPU performs a self diagnostics function that on detecting a malfunction gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel o D N o a 5 N a Malfunction detected Please call your Technical Representative TEL 1234567890 FAX 1234567890 C 0204 4038F4E513DA 16 3 1 Trouble code list For the details of the malfunction codes of the options see the Service Manual for the cor responding option Code Item Description Rank C0001 LCT Connection failed ts 403 Service Manual B C0102 LCT Vertical Transport Motor B malfunction C0204 Tray 2 Elevator failure The Lift Up Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting B motion has been started C0206 Tray Elevator failure ts PC 103 PC 203 Service Manual B C0208 Tray 4 Elevator failure B C0209 LCT Elevator Motor malfunction See PC 403 Service Manual Elevator malfunction C0210 LCT ascent motion failure B g C0211 Manual Tray Rise De
603. the following procedures has been performed When the PH Unit has been replaced When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image PC 103 PC 203 6 1 1 Print Positioning Side Edge 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual 2 Touch Machine gt Printer Area 3 Touch Print Positioning Side Edge 3rd Print Positioning Leading Eda aai Positioning Sade Edd Plain Paper 4061F3E807DA 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specification 3 0 mm 1 0 mm 6 If the measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 7 Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the spec gt ified range iz 2 5 n D lt 434816350900 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Mechanical adjustment If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value perform adjustment according to the following procedure 8 Slide out the drawer 1 and unload paper from it 9 Loosen three screws 2 at the center ASS of the Paper Lifting Plate 434816360100 4 10 Watching the grad
604. the mark on the Middle Gear 6 the mark on the semi spherical part with narrow gear face width 5 With the Saddle Cam Drive Gear 5 and the Middle Gear 6 positioned as above the mark on the Middle Gear 6 the mark on the other semi spherical part meets face to face with the rib of the Folding Roller Drive Gear 7 39 FS 603 D amp 2 N E lt 6 Board switch Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Board switch 6 1 PWB A FN Finisher Control Board FS 603 e 7 T SE T 1L 2 1E 2 1E 1 6 CNS CN6 CN22 CN18 CN10 CN3 LNO 2 ZNO o L VINO YNO ap sE EL CS SNO Mk OE de c 6 32 1 ZENO 3 2 02 LEL 1 E 9 61NO Ci Q Q PSW2 PSW1 swt 2 CN2 CN21 CN9 CN11 hip 0 19 Symbol Description 1 Swi Used to adjust the folding position adjust the center 2 point stapling position and adjust the alignment plate position P Used to adjust the folding position adjust the center 2 point stapling position and 2 PSW1 E adjust the alignment plate position 5 Used to adjust the folding position adjust the center 2 point stapling position 3 PSW2 i ui lt adjust the alignment plate position 40 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 1 1 Adjustment of the folding positions 6 Board switch When a folding posi
605. the reception box to receive data F PBX CN Set Functions set whether to use PBX connection setting or not Use This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF When set to ON enter the external number between 0 and 9999 G Report Settings 1 Activity Report Functions To set whether to print out the Activity Report or not and also the timing for printing Use To print out the Activity Report Setting The default setting is Every 100 Comm Procedure OFF Daily Every 100 Comm 100 Daily 2 TX Report Functions To set whether to print out the TX Report and also the timing for printing Use To print out the TX Report Setting The default setting is If TX Fails Procedure ON If TX Fails OFF 3 Sequential TX Report Functions To set whether to print out the Sequential TX Report or not Use To print out the Sequential TX Report Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 4 Timer Reservation TX Report Functions To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not Use To print out the reservation TX Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF 220 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 5 Confidential RX Report Functions To set whether to print out the Confidential R
606. the settin Procedure y prog i 9 158 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode D Subject Text for E mail 1 Subject 5 N Functions o 7 register the e mail subject when transmitting the scanned data se N Setting A new address can be registered by touching New Select any displayed address to detail check edit or delete the setting The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing Set as Default 2 Text Functions To register the e mail message when transmitting the scanned data se Setting A new address can be registered by touching New Procedure Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing Set as Default 8 4 2 Fax e Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit FK 502 is mounted A Address Book 1 Abbr Dial Functions To register change the Fax numbers Use Setting A new address can be registered by touching New 2 Procedure Select any displayed address to check edit or delete the setting 5 2 E Mail Functions 0 To register change the e mail address when transmitting the Fax data 5 Setting A new address can be registered by touching New Procedure
607. the shaft 9 and fit the C clip 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 10 Mount the Scanner drive gear 11 on the shaft 12 and secure it using the screw 13 NOTE Allow a clearance of about 0 3 mm between the Scanner drive gear and bushing Apply the Screw lock on the Screw bizhub C250 4038F2C549DA 11 Secure the front and rear pulleys 14 15 using the screw 15 each 14 NOTE Apply the Screw lock on the Screw 7 E s 403616256400 18 jose Mount the Screw 16 in the direc N tion that is opposite against the Gear 17 and Screw 18 are screwed together as shown in the left figure 12 Mount the Scanner Motor Assy t 100 dl 2 direction for which Scanner Drive 403616258400 Front 13 Wind the bead end of the cable 19 around pulley C 20 and pulley B 21 then hook the bead 22 onto the Adjustable Anchor 23 19 21 23 40365256560 109 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 14 Wind the hook end of the cable 24 KO around pulley A 25 and pulley B g 26 a N 2 26 15 Fit the hook end of the cable 27 to the spring 28 and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame 16 Measure the Spring length and CD e check if its length is within th
608. the test pattern 6 If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key 7 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 8 Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern 9 If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again width A falls within the specified range touch END 11 Following the same procedure adjust for Thick 1 to 3 OHP Film and Enve 235 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 B Print Positioning Side Edge Instructions Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source Use The PH Unit has been replaced A paper feed unit has been added The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction Adjustment Width A Specification idt Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range Specifications 3 0 0 5 mm Setting Range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm in 0 2 mm increments Adjustment If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur rent one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Setting Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to t
609. the troubleshooting procedures for image problems 184 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 Scanner Adjustment Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section e f the Color Chart is not available a scale may be used instead Centering COLOR CHART bizhub C250 B Leading Edge Adjustment C Horizontal Adjustment D Vertical Adjustment Original Reference 4038F3C517DA Leading Edge Adjustment Functions To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sen sor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction Use When the Original Glass is replaced When the Original Width Scale is replaced Adjustment B width on the color chart and one on the Specification Hi copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below An adjustment must have been completed V correctly of Leading Edge Adjustment the all Printer Adjustment Specifications B x 0 5 mm 2 L N El E lt Setting Range 5 0 to 45 0 0 1 mm increments Adjustment If the copy image is less than the specified length increase the setting value Instructions If the copy imag
610. the volume by touching the Lower or Higher 216 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode D TX RX Setting 1 Duplex Print RX Functions To set whether to carry out the Duplex print for the received original when receiving Fax Use To carry out the Duplex print for the received original Setting The default setting is OFF Procedure ON OFF 2 Inch Paper Priority Over A4 Functions To set weather to use the Inch Paper Priority when receiving Fax Use To use the Inch Paper Priority when receiving Fax Setting Procedure ON OFF NOTE The default setting is different depending on the country 3 Print Paper Selection Functions To set the priority for Paper Feed Tray when receiving Fax Use To change the priority for Paper Feed Tray when receiving Fax Auto select Selected automatically Priority Size Printed on size with priority When the size is not set it will be printed on the closest Size Fixed Size Printed only on the fixed size Setting The default setting is Auto Select Procedure Auto Select Fixed Size Priority Size 4 Print Paper Size Functions To set the paper size to print the text when receiving Fax Use To change the paper size for printing the received text The displays are different depending on the country To make the setting of Print Paper Size enable set Tray Selection for RX Print
611. tical transport section Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC does not transmit the paper even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked PC8 PC Tray 2 Vertical Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at Transport section front of the Registration Roller at Tray 2 feed Loop Registration Reversing JAM Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or mal Detection of paper function is reset left in Tray 2 Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor PC9 PC is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON a door or cover is opened and closed or a misfeed or malfunction is reset B Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Paper Take Up Sensor PC9 PC Tray 2 Control Board PWB Z PC Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8 PC Mechanical Control Board PWB M Registration Roller Sensor PC1 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor M1 PC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component 1 Initial check items 2 PC9 PC I O check Sensor check PWB Z PC PJ6Z PC 8 ON 5 25 g 3 8 I O check Sensor check PWB Z PC PJ6Z PC 11 ON S 25 8 4 I O check Sensor check PWB M CNSEN 3 ON C 3 E 5 M1 PC operation check PWB Z PC PJ5Z PC 1 to 4 M 24 8 6 Change PWB Z PC 7 Change PWB
612. ting H SLP Setting 3 2 Setting SNMP Setting Prefix Suffix ON OFF Setting Setting Copier Auto Zoom Prefix Suffix Setting Platen Setting gt 213 Auto Zoom ADF Select Tray H meus when APS OFF Wo 213 Select Tray for Insert Sheet 152 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Administrator Copier Settin Settin di mg Operation gt 173 gt 213 Printer Local Setting Timeout gt 214 Parallel I F IEEE 1284 USB Fax Setting Header Infor 1 mation 1 ws 215 Header Footer Header Position 1 Position 1 Footer Position 1 Telephone Line Dialing Settings 1 Method 1 Receive Mode 1 Number of RX Call Rings 1 Number of Redials 1 Redial interval 1 Line Monitor Sound 1 Line Monitor Sound Volume 1 TX RX Duplex Print Setting 1 RX 1 Inch Paper Pri ority Over A4 1 Print Paper Selection 1 Print Paper Size 1 8 Utility Mode 153 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N UO lt 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Administrator Fax Setting TX RX Incorrect User Setting 1 Setting 1 Box No Entry 1 tS 173 gt 215 Tray Selection for RX Pr
613. ting a malfunc tion gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel PC 103 PC 203 Malfunction detected Please call Technical Representative TEL 1234567890 FAX 1234587890 0206 4061F4E504DA 8 2 Trouble code list Code Item Description C0206 Tray3 Lift Up Failure The Lift up Upper Sensor is not blocked even after the 7 set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift up C0208 Tray4 Lift Up Failure operation for the drawer began Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF the Main Power Switch Then wait for 10 sec or more and turn ON the Main Power Switch to reset the malfunction display D fe Q E Q 24 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Trouble code 8 3 Solution e 8 3 1 0206 Tray3 Lift Up Failure C0208 Tray4 Lift Up Failure amp 8 Relevant electrical parts Tray3 Lift up Motor 124 Control Board PWB C2 PC Tray4 Lift Up Motor M125 PC Main unit Mechanical Control Board PWB M Tray3 Lift up Upper Sensor PC114 PC Main unit DC Power Supply PU1 Tray4 Lift up Upper Sensor PC123 PC WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Control signal Electrical components Check the motor and sensor connec 1 tors for proper connection and correct as necessary Check the connector of each motor for 2 proper drive coupling and correct as ne
614. tion Image transfer Area around the Waste section Toner Collecting Port Upon each call ee 4 AD 503 Conveyance Roller Upon each call 60 K 1 1 See AD 503 Service Manual 13 bizhub C250 5 o 7 s bizhub C250 5 7 E s 3 Periodical check 3 4 Concept of parts life Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Description Life value Specification value Max number of printed pages Waste Toner Bottle A waste toner full condition is detected when about 2 500 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected 30 000 1 2 Fusing unit The number of copies made is counted The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm The number of copies made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the Fusing Drive Motor has turned translated to a cor responding value of the number of copies made and the value whichever reaches the life specifica tion value is detected When the maximum number of printed pages is reached the print is inhibited 120 000 150 000 3 Transfer Belt Unit The number of copies made is counted The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm The number of copies made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the belt has turned transla
615. tion Security Level Security Password Details Rules Manual Desti nation Input Print Data 2 Capture 5 0 Check HDD 4 HDD Sett m Setting Capacity v Delete Unused lt User Delete Secure Print Documents Overwrite Data HDD Lock Password Check Consumable Life H Meter Count Details Print Coverage 155 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Meter Count Details Copy H Print bizhub C250 Scan Fax Other 2 5 n lt 156 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 3 Utility Mode function setting procedure 8 3 1 Procedure 1 Press the Utility Counter key 2 The Utility mode screen will appear bizhub C250 4037F3E522DA 8 3 2 Exiting Touch the Close key 8 3 3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions Use the key to enter or change the setting value Use the 10 Key Pad to enter the setting value To change the setting value first press the Clear key before making an entry 2 Pe i N D lt 157 8 Utility Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 4 One Touch Registration 8 4 1 Scan e A Address Book E ES 1 E Mail a Funct
616. tion is adjusted adjust the folding position to the stapling position Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the folding posi tion must be changed for some reason NOTE Depending on the type of paper both the folding position and the stapling position may be inaccurate In this case make adjustment independently from the Finisher In this independent adjustment from the Finisher set the adjustment value of Center Stapling Position and Folding Position in the service mode to 0 mm on the main unit 45838351000 direction mm direction 458315352360 1 Set SW1 on the Finisher Control Board as shown on the Left figure Press PSW1 or PSW2 on the Fin isher Control Board for the required times to adjust the folding position One pressing of the switch moves the folding position by approx 0 16 mm Press PSW1 to move the folding posi tion in the direction Press PSW2 to move the folding posi tion in the direction Press PSW1 and PSW2 simulta neously to clear the present set adjust ment value After setting the adjustment value of the folding position set all bits of SW1 on the Fin isher Control Board to OFF Perform the Booklet Creation on the main unit and confirm that the folding position has been correctly adjusted If not redo the adjustment 41 FS 603 2 Pe i
617. tment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board PWB A Image Processing Board PWB C bizhub C250 Step Action 1 Correct the harness connection between PWB A and PWB C if faulty Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary Clean the lens mirrors CCD surface and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty or change Scanner Change PWB A Change PWB C OO of BR Cw N 16 2 2 P 5 IDC Sensor Front failure 16 2 3 P 28 IDC Sensor Back failure Relevant Electrical Parts IDC Registration Sensor 1 SE1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M IDC Registration Sensor 2 SE2 High Voltage Unit HV1 Image Transfer Belt Unit Step Action 1 Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth if it is dirty Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged Reinstall or reconnect SE1 or SE2 if it is installed or connected improperly Clean SE1 or SE2 if it is dirty Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary Open and close the Left Door run an image stabilization sequence and select State Confirma 6 tion gt gt Level History 1 to check the IDC value IDC1 SE1 IDC2 SE2 If the value is 1 0 V or less change SE1 or SE2 7 Change PWB M D i Q E Q 330 F
618. to item 2 15 Standard Controller d Q e Q Standard Controller D fe Q E Q 7 Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Check Possible Cause Action Remark Is the response of Ping sent from the PC to the machine The print destination port setting is wrong Set the correct port See User s Guide Print Operations PC operates errati cally temporarily Restart the PC Yes Uninstall the printer Printer driver incor driver through the See User s Guide rectly installed proper steps and then Print Operations reinstall it properly Controller board Turn OFF the Main Control Board oper Restart the controller Power Switch and turn ates erratically tempo board it ON again more than rarily 10 seconds after No Network cable is dis Reconnect the cable Check with the con connected or a relay device is faulty and restart or change the faulty relay device troller network LED IP address and or subnet mask incor rectly set Set the correct IP address and subnet mask See TCP IP Setting in Installation Guide 16 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 Troubleshooting procedures 7 2 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP Check Possible Cause Action Remark E The message Failed to conne
619. tor Motor M5 LCT Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor PC10 LCT Lower Over Run Sensor PC7 LCT Shift Motor Pulse Sensor PC8 LCT Shift Tray Motor M4 LCT 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Manual Button Down Board NU1 LCT Shift Tray Stop Sensor PC11 LCT Lift Up Lower Sensor PC13 LCT Shift Tray Empty Sensor PC9 LCT Shift Tray Home Sensor PC12 LCT Division Board Motor M3 LCT Division Board Position Sensor PC14 LCT Motor Connection Board PWB N LCT Control Board PWB C1 LCT Tray Lock Solenoid SL1 LCT Cassette Open Sensor PC6 LCT Take up Motor M1 LCT Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 Parts layout drawing 19 5 AD 503 Option bizhub C250 4038F5C512DA Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 1 Duplex Unit Switchback Motor M1 DU 4 in PWB A DU PC2 DU 2 Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor PCI DU 5 Duplex Control Board PWB A DU Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 3 Duplex Unit Transport Motor M2 DU 6 in PWB A DU PC1 DU 2 lt lt 437 19 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 6 FS 501 Option Q 5 E 22 i 3 21 gt 4 ik 5 amp y ii c n 11 12 4038 5 5020 CD Aligning Home Position Sensor 1 Upper Cover Sensor PC18 FN 12 PC9 FN 2 1st Tray Full Sensor PC6 FN
620. transmitted Use Not to carry out Binary division for data to be transmitted Setting The default setting is ON Procedure ON OFF Divided Mail Size Functions To set the dividing size when carrying out the Binary division for data to be transmit ted Use To change the dividing size of the data Setting 1 Press the Clear key Procedure 2 Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 in 100 increments using the 10 Key Pad Connection Timeout gt Functions To set the Timeout period for connection in transmitting e mail to SMTP server Use To change the timeout period for connection in transmitting e mail to SMTP server Setting Select the timeout period using 4 keys Procedure The default setting is 60 sec 60 sec 30 to 300 in 30 sec increments Server Capacity Functions To set the Max capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive Use To change the Max capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive Setting The default setting is No Limit Procedure No Limit 1 to 100 Detail Settin 9 Port No Functions To set the Port number for transmission with SMTP server Use To enter the port number for transmission with SMTP server Setting 1 Touch Input Procedure 2 Press the Clear key 3 Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10 Key Pad Detail Settin
621. tration Sensor 1 SE1 High Voltage Unit HV1 PH Interface Board PWB D DC Power Supply PU1 Mechanical Control Board PWB M Slide Interface Board PWB SIF DIMM 0 WORKO DIMM 1 WORK1 NVRAM Board PWB NVR MFP Control Board PWB MFP Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 Parts layout drawing 4038F5C507DB Fusing Drive Motor M4 Main Motor M1 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 M11 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 1 M8 Color Developing Motor Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor M14 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor 2 M9 8 9 10 11 12 13 Cooling Fan Motor 1 M12 Toner Supply Motor Y M M6 Cooling Fan Motor 2 M22 Toner Supply Motor C K M7 Color PC Drum Motor M2 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 M13 429 bizhub C250 dad o i Q Q lt 19 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 bizhub C250 4038F5C509DA 1 Right Door Switch S5 7 Front Door Switch 2 S4 2 Primary Interlock Switch S2 8 Hard Disk Drive HDD 3 PH Unit 9 Main Erase Lamp Y LA4 4 Main Power Switch S1 10 Main Erase Lamp M LA3 5 Total Counter CNT1 11 Main Erase Lamp C LA2 6 Front Door Switch 1 S3 12 Main Erase Lamp K LA1 lt gt a a lt 430 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 Parts layout drawing 13 2 12 3 N 7 bizhub C250 8
622. trical Parts Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Mechanical Control Board PWB M MFP Control Board PWB MFP Step Action WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Reinstall Imaging Unit Change Imaging Unit Change PWB M oj wo N Change PWB MFP 360 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 17 2557 Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor o Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit K Mechanical Control Board PWB M 2 Toner Supply Motor C K M7 MFP Control Board PWB MFP Toy WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty V7 operation check PWB M 10 to 13 C 21 Reinstall Imaging Unit Change Imaging Unit K Change PWB M c Change PWB MFP OQ oy 16 5 18 C2558 Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit K Mechanical Control Board PWB M MFP Control Board PWB MFP WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Cor
623. trol Board CFDOA ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA G MFP Control Board CFDOB ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA HO MFP Control Board CFDOC ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA H1 MFP Control Board CFDOD ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA H2 MFP Control Board CFDOE ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA I MFP Control Board CFDOF ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA J MFP Control Board Engine CFD10 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA PCI Bridge MFP Control Board 351 bizhub C250 d Q e a 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Code Item Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank CFD11 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA 19 ASIC1 CFD12 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA JPEG CFD13 ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C fer completion line 0 NO CFD15 ASIC
624. ts 40385301050 Adjustment If width A is longer than the specifications make the setting value smaller than the cur Instructions rent one If width A is shorter than the specifications make the setting value greater than the cur rent one Setting 1 Call the Administrator Setting to the screen Procedure 2 Touch System Setting Expert Adjustment Printer Adjustment Center ing Select the paper source to be adjusted Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A falls outside the specified range change the setting using the key Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern If width A is outside the specified range change the setting again and make a check again 10 If width A falls within the specified range touch OK 11 Following the same procedure adjust for all other paper sources Use A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 plain paper for the Bypass 2 x 5 n lt 178 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode Centering Duplex 2nd Side Functions To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2 Sided mode Use To use when the optional Automatic Duplex Unit AD 503 is set up The image on the b
625. ts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 7 JS 601 Option bizhub C250 4037F5C513DA 1 Job Tray Cover Sensor PC21 FN 3 Job Tray Full Sensor PC20 FN 2 Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19 FN 4 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid 51 4 5 f lt 440 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 19 8 FS 603 Option 19 Parts layout drawing 14 4037F5C516DA Transport Motor M1 FN Entrance Motor M9 FN Saddle Clutch CL1 FN Joint Open Switch MS2 FN Front Door Open Switch MS1 FN Finisher Control Board PWB A FN Front Aligning Motor M4 FN Staple Safety Switch Front MS4 FN Slide Home Position Sensor PI18 FN 10 Shift Motor M6 FN 11 Slide Motor M8 FN 12 Exit Motor M3 FN 13 Rear Aligning Motor M5 FN 14 ROM IC6 FN 15 Staple Safety Switch Rear MS3 FN 16 Paddle Motor M2 FN 17 Staple Folding Motor M7 FN 441 bizhub C250 dad o i Q Q lt bizhub C250 fas a a lt 19 Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4037F5C521DA 10 442 Entrance Sensor PI1 FN Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI12 FN Folding Home Position Sensor P111 FN Folding Position Sensor PI10 FN Upper Cover Open Sensor PI23 FN Front Door Open Sensor PI22 FN Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI4 FN Finis
626. uations 3 pro vided in the drawer move the Edge Guide 4 in the rear f width A is greater than the specified value move the Edge Guide toward ELA the front e f width A is smaller than the specified value move the Edge Guide toward the rear 43481536020 11 Perform another test print and check the reference deviation 12 Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range 13 Tighten the adjustment screw 14 Repeat steps 1 to 13 similarly for the Tray 4 17 PC 103 PC 203 2 Pe N lt 6 Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 1 2 Dup Print Positioning Side Edge 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen t For details of how to display the Service Mode screen see the Adjustment Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual 2 Touch Machine Printer Area 3 Touch Dup Print Positioning Side Edge 8rd PC 103 PC 203 Machine Adjust Dup Print Posib Printer Area d hing Side Edde FBPinE POSIEIOHIHg Leading Edge TOBSSTETOTITG dae 514 Edd 4061F3E808DA 4 Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern 5 Measure the width of printed refer ence line A Specification 3 0 mm x 1 0 mm 6 If the measured width A falls outside the specified range enter the correc tion value 7 P
627. ub C250 4038F2C520DA 6 3 47 IDC Registration Sensor 1 IDC Registration Sensor 2 SE1 SE2 1 Remove the Image Transfer Belt the Plate spring 2 Unit gt 31 8 2 Remove the Multi Bypass Unit S gt 87 2 3 Remove the Screw 1 and remove oO gt 4038F2C169DA 4 Remove the Shoulder Screw 3 and the Screw 4 5 Remove the Vertical transport unit 5 in manner of the left illustration NOTE Since multiple Connectors are con nected to the backside of the Verti cal Transport Assy do not pull it by force 4038F2C170DB 124 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 6 Remove the Claws 6 of both sides and remove the Sensor cover 7 NOTE Usecare not to miss the spring 8 bizhub C250 4038F2C171DA 7 Remove two Screws 9 and Connec tor 10 and remove the IDC Regis tration Sensor 1 11 o 7 E s 8 Repeat the step 6 and 7 and remove the IDC Registration Sensor 2 rear side 12 4038F2C173DA 125 6 Other Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 4 Cleaning procedure NOTE The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol bizhub C250 6 4 1 PH Window 1 Open the Front Door 2 Remove the PH Window Cleaning Jig 1 3 Insert the PH Window Cleaning Jig 5 s 7 E s gt p m
628. ue for the 1st image transfer voltage g Use e To use when white spots appeared 2 Adjustment 0 5 to 45 E Range a Adjustment Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by Instructions Increasing it Increase the setting value white spots will decrease Decreasing it Decrease the setting value Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Select Test Mode Halftone Pattern to output the red or green test pattern gt 292 3 When the test pattern image has white spots adjust with the following procedure 4 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustment Transfer Output Fine Adjustment 5 Select 1st transfer Adjust 6 Change the setting value using the 4 keys 7 Touch OK key to set the adjustment value Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while checking the test pattern NOTE PC Drum memory 94mm pitch may occur by taking measure to white spots occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting The value for the 1st image transfer adjustment will be reset when the new transfer belt unit is detected The value will be 0 10 6 5 Stabilizer D A Stabilization Only E oO Functions The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of 2 imag
629. ueuox3 feul amp uo 151 MO7 99S WWOS YBIH 09s WW006 uo 39 115 lt 5 99 gt lt 341504 gt 5 90 06 plouajog yo 39 216 plouajog uo yo uo T 119 no yo 30 999 208095 13 uo yo 30 59 10sueg uo 30 29 10sueg dnd oj 10 eamm Jedeguyy 5 yo pub 30 6 1010 pa UBIH MoT AON yodsueit ubiH HO mog 30 HA dn ayey MO yo 13SQ uo HO aN39S uo ues Bunoejeq jeuibuo PASIN dn ye 151 449 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 hart iming 21 T Vvd6esassZeor eBueuox3 pig 4696 eui L 01507 swp8g reuibuo yo uo yo uo 39 718 plougjog senoun 30 618 plouepos 1X3 o Poo Jo uo 30 999 108095 13 yo 90 89 Josuag Janoun uo o HO 40 204 0195 uo yo 40 199 uo Josuas uoljensibay aede io 90 99 208095 dwg 9 yo JQ EW 100W W3 MO 9 100W AQ 2W uuu junowy fee Ue ee TY e uoneJisibeu ejejduio2 d
630. up failure Label Paper Take up failure Offset Master Paper Take up failure Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet Sheets patched Patched part folded or torn sheet 2 3 Paper feed not guaranteed originals f fed paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible Type of Original Possible Trouble Sheets lightly curled Curled amount 10 15 mm Dog eared exit failure Heat Sensitive Paper Edge folded exit failure transport failure Ink Jet Paper Take up failure transport failure Sheets with smooth surface Coated Paper Take up failure transport failure Intermediate paper Take up failure transport failure Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Take up failure transport failure to vertical feeding Paper with many punched holes e g loose leaf limited Multi page feed due to flashes from holes Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Transport failure Sheets two folded or Z folded A3 or 11 x 17 Transport failure image deformation Sheets with rough surface e g letterhead Take up failure Sheets penciled Contamination Sheets folded Image deformation multi page feed take up failure Sheets other than detectable size sheets Image deficit Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Maintenance 3 Periodical check 3 Periodical check 3 1 M
631. ure 15 7 2 T stmode operatiOliS SERRE o 15 7 3 Operation in each test mode operation 16 7 3 1 EXO oxi oin t he ee eaten n e E esie datdaancahssnsasaseed 16 7 3 2 Elevator Tray EXIU nc ona cer pero n P Coo orae e e ECL e Ra Ee Ea 16 FS 501 Maintenance D 7 L n El E lt Troubleshooting o E 1 Maintenance Adjustment Setting D e Q E Q Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 7 3 3 Finisher Tray Exit 7 3 4 Shifting Operati 16 7 3 5 Aligning Plate Operation seen nennen nnns 17 7 3 6 Stapling Unit CD Movement 17 7 3 7 Exit Roller Holls Spacinig retenir entr tue rrr nk cr erai 17 7 3 8 Storage Roller Rolls eene 18 7 3 9 Elevator Tray Operation irt entr eter creek t FU ERR SEXE ERE ES 18 7 3 10 S6n5S0fr TE iio iei cesa rina e Vera sii es hee v ees 18 Troubleshooting 8 Jam DIS Play saccis eicit tcr Dra e EH 19 8 4 Misleed display etr ert repone 19 8 1 1 Misfeed display resetting procedure 19 8 2 5 VUE T 20 8 3 ise iens ER Hin a Ere EDR EXER UE LOG ies 21 8 3 1 initial
632. ure 1 Open the Front Door and turn OFF the Main Power Switch 2 Open the Right Door 3 Unlock the Lock levers 1 at two places 4 Holding onto the Lock levers 1 at two places remove the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit 2 B Reinstallation Procedure 1 Holding onto the Lock levers 1 at two places mount the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit 2 2 Lock the Lock levers 1 at two places 3 Close the Right Door NOTE Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear 4 Turn ON the Main Power Switch 5 Close the Front Door NOTE The 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit is supplied with the Transfer Belt Unit Replace it when replacing the Transfer Belt Unit 30 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 3 Periodical check 3 6 2 Replacing the Image Transfer Belt Unit gt Removal Procedure Open the Front Door and turn OFF the Main Power Switch Remove the Waste toner Box 27 Slide out the Imaging Unit C M Y K bizhub C250 After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit be sure to place it the plastic bag black or wrap it in a light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it may become damaged 4 Open the Right Door 2 5 Remove two Screws 1 and release the Lock of the Image Transfer Belt Unit 2 5 o 7 g 4038
633. ure If neither Max nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above Perform steps from 2 to 6 2 x 5 n o lt fault is detected 0 is displayed for all values In that case after turning off the Main Power Switch turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and then make the Gradation Adjustment again If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max Density If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the spec ified range check the image f the image is faulty perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems 244 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode 10 6 2 D Max Density e Ie Functions To adjust gradation color and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine adjust 2 ment of gamma of each color after Gradation Adjust 5 Use An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run 2 Adjustment 0 10 to 10 Range Adjustment To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking increase the setting value Instructions To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking decrease the setting value Setting Procedure 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen 2 Touch these keys in this order Imaging Process Adjustme
634. ust be made Check to see if The power supply voltage meets the specifications The power supply is properly grounded The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently e g elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise The installation site is environmentally appropriate high temperature high humidity direct sunlight ventilation etc levelness of the installation site The original has a problem that may cause a defective image The density is properly selected The Original Glass slit glass or related part is dirty Correct paper is being used for printing The units parts and supplies used for printing developer PC Drum etc are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life Toner is not running out Caution to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures If itis unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device Do not touch IC pins with bare hands 9
635. utomatically recognizes it Procedure and displays its capacity 10 12 9 Color Regist Functions To check each of C M Y and K for color shift amount The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjust ment has been completed Use Use for check when color shift is evident Use for adjustment of PH skew Setting For each of C M Y and K the color shift amount in X and Y directions at two loca Procedure tions one at the front and the other in the rear and the difference in color shift amount between the front and rear X and Y directions are displayed Display unit dots The shift amount is displayed with reference to K for C M and Y and that for K is dis played with reference to an ideal position 10 12 10 IU Lot No Functions To display the 10 digit lot number for each of C M Y and K IUs The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU Use Use for checking the IU Lot No D Setting The IU lot number is displayed even with the Front Door opened however the display 2 Procedure is blank since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the Main Power 2 Switch is turned ON with the Front Door open Nonetheless the lot number will be displayed when the Front Door is closed E The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the Front Door is closed lt 10 12 11 Adjustment Data List
636. utput of output buffer 2 MFP Control Board C surpasses clear CFC13 Image transfer control informa Control Board C tion acquisition malfunction CFDOO ASIC10 Timeout Number of MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans C 350 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code Code Item CFD01 ASIC10 Timeout Number o Relevant Electrical Components Units and Options Rank MFP Control Board DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA A1 C CFD02 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA A2 MFP Control Board CFD03 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA BO MFP Control Board CFD04 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA B1 MFP Control Board CFD05 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA B2 MFP Control Board CFD06 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA C MFP Control Board CFD07 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA D MFP Control Board CFD08 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA E MFP Control Board CFD09 ASIC10 Timeout Number o DMA under operation and trans fer completion line 0 DMA F MFP Con
637. ve the Control panel base 6 Remove the Original Glass 56 Remove the Scanner Assy 103 Unhook the Springs 7 of the Scan ner Drive Cables on the hook side one each at the front and in the rear Remove the Scanner Motor Assy 100 Remove the Screw 8 and then slide the Front pulley 9 toward the front Remove the Screw 10 and slide the Wire Pulley 11 Rear side in the direction of front side 105 bizhub C250 G 7 E s bizhub C250 5 G 7 E s gt 6 Other 4038F2C554DA 16 17 4038F2C555DA B Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables 1 Overall figure Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 13 Remove the Screw 12 and remove the Scanner drive gear 13 14 Snap off the C clip 14 and remove the Bushing 15 front 15 Slide the Shaft 16 toward the rear and lift it Then remove the front and rear pulleys 17 16 Remove the Scanner Drive Cables 4038F2C556DA 106 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 6 Other 2 Reinstallation Procedure Front Bm e di 1 Position the round bead 1 of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley 2 2 7 as shown o Make sure that the bead snugly d rests in the slit in the pulley 403615255400 bizhub C250 2 Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clock wise
638. ve coupling and correct as necessary 3 14 I O check Sensor check PWB M 1 10 ON C 8 to 9 M2 PC operation check PWB Z PC PJ5Z PC 5 to 8 M 25 Change PWB Z PC D Q E Q 356 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 Malfunction code 16 5 3 C0301 Suction Fan Motor s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board PWB M Right Door Assy bizhub C250 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location Electri Control Signal cal Component Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Change the Right Door Assy 3 Change PWB M 16 5 4 C2151 2nd Image Transfer Roller Separation Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board PWB M Right Door Assy WIRING DIAGRAM Location Electri cal Component Step Action Control Signal Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary 2 Change the Right Door Assy 3 Change PWB M d Q e Q 357 16 Malfunction code Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 5 C2152 Transfer Belt Separation Relevant Electrical Parts o 2 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Position Main Motor M1 E Sensor PC6 Mechanical Control Board PWB M a 1st Image Transfer Pressure Retra
639. vice Mode CS Remote Care and touch Detail setting Touch Communication Log Print Load Tray 1 or Bypass tray with A4R paper Press the Start key to output transmission log AROoONLI 10 7 8 Detail on settings A System Selection gt Functions To select the system type for remote diagnosis E Use Use to newly build or change the system Setting Select E Mail Modem or Fax 2 Procedure Fax is available only when the optional Fax kit is being installed E Mail Not Used Modem Fax Not Used lt B ID Code Functions To register the Service ID Use Use when registering and changing Service ID Setting Enter a 7 digit code from the 10 Key Pad 0000001 to 9999999 Procedure Registration Touch ID Code and enter the Service ID Touch ID code to register the ID The Detail Setting will appear when the ID has been registered 258 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 10 Service Mode C Detail Setting 1 Basic Setting Functions Execute the primary setting Use Use to change the set contents Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care Center Setting 1 Call the Service Mode to the screen Procedure 2 Touch CS Remote Care 3 Touching the Detail Setting will display the primary setting Primary Setting Set the Center ID Device ID and the phone No When e mail is selected for system and all setup procedure
640. vice Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 8 Utility Mode 8 6 Administrator Setting The Administrator setting will be available by entering the administrator password 8 dig its set by the administrator setting or Service Mode The administrator password is initially set to 12345678 8 6 1 Sy stem Setting A Power Save 1 Low Power Mode Setting Functions To set the time until Low Power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed Low Power To turn LED and LCD OFF and lower the power consumption Use To change the time until Low Power starts Setting Use the 10 Key Pad for setting Procedure The default setting is 15 min 15 min 10 to 240 2 Sleep Mode Setting Functions To set the time until Sleep Mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for Control OFF will only be displayed when No Sleep in Service Mode is set Use To change the time until the Sleep Mode starts NOTE The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to OFF Setting Use the 10 Key Pad for setting Procedure The default setting is 30 min 30 min 15 to 240 OFF 3 Power Save Key Functions To set the type of the Power Save Mode which starts by pressing the Power Save Key Use To change the Power Save function which starts by pressing the Power Save key Setting T
641. w TCR Sensor adjustment failure 362 2 16 5 22 C255C Black TCR Sensor adjustment 362 E 16 5 23 C2651 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access 363 E 16 5 24 C2652 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access 363 8 16 5 25 C2653 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access 363 16 5 26 C2654 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access 363 16 5 27 2 01 Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM access 363 16 5 28 C2A02 Yellow Toner Cartridge EEPROM access 363 x 16 5 29 2 03 Magenta Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error 363 5 16 5 30 C2A04 Black Toner Cartridge EEPROM access 363 lt 16 5 31 3301 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 1 s failure to turn 364 16 5 32 C3302 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor 2 s failure to turn 364 16 5 33 C3451 Heat Heater Trouble Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 16 5 34 16 5 35 16 5 36 16 5 37 16 5 38 16 5 39 16 5 40 16 5 41 16 5 42 16 5 43 16 5 44 16 5 45 16 5 46 16 5 47 16 5 48 16 5 49 16 5 50 16 5 51 16 5 52 16 5 53 16 5 54 16 5 55 16 5 56 16 5 57 16 5 58 16 5 59 16 5 60 16 5 61 16
642. xit Turnover section 30 E 9 4 2 Paper Take Up section misfeed 31 9 4 3 Transport section 4 32 s 9 4 4 Transport Tray section misfeed eee 33 10 Set error detection eiae nier er ence etie oe Ete bab esr eye Hoe d EE ep e 34 D e Q E Q Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 1 Product specifications a General 1 Product specifications A Type Name Duplexing Document Feeder Paper Take Up Paper Take Up from top of stack Transport Endless Belt Transport Mode Type Turnover Loop Turnover Mode Paper Exit U turn Turnover Switchback U Turn Turnover P Mode only in 1 Sided Mode Installation Screw cramp to the main unit Document Alignment Center Document Loading Face up B Functions Modes Standard Mode 1 Sided Mode 2 Sided Mode Thick Paper Mode 1 Sided Mode Mixed Original Detection Mode 1 Sided Mode 2 Sided Mode C Paper type Type of Document 1 Sided Mode Standard Mode 35 to 128 g m 9 1 4 to 34 Ib Plain Paper 2 Sided Mode 50 to 110 g m 13 1 4 to 29 1 4 Ib Thick Paper Mode 1 Sided Mode Plain Paper 129 to 210 g m 34 1 4 to 55 3 4 Ib Mixed Original Detection Mode 1 Sided 2 Sided Mode 50 to 1
643. y Transmit again manually Start request telegram is not delivered after line connection 0009 Timeout of finish request telegram delivery Transmit again manually Finish request telegram is not delivered Start of shut down 000A Receiving rejection Check the setting condition of Receiving is made when the main unit is set to the host side reject receiving Check the setting condition of the main unit side 000B RS232C Driver Over Run f the same error is detected When the modem detects Over Run several times turn the modem power OFF and ON 000C If the same error is detected several times turn e If the same error is detected the modem power OFF and ON Several times turn the modem power OFF and ON 000D Break Interrupt BI Indicator f the same error is detected When the modem detects Break Interrupt BI several times turn the modem Indicator power OFF and ON 000 Receiving RING Buffer Full Contact responsible person of When the Receiving RING Buffer is full KONICA MINOLTA 261 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 Error code Error Solution 000 Transmitting RING Buffer Full Contact responsible person of When the Transmitting RING Buffer is full KONICA MINOLTA 0010
644. y data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state including a misfeed malfunction and closure failure condition Procedure 1 Setthe mode to the Service Mode 2 Touch the State Confirmation Check key 3 Touch the Sensor Check key 4 2 Sensor check list 4 2 1 Sensor check screen This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ ual main unit Sensor Check Exit Hon sortl 0 Empty Elev Exit Hon sort3 0 HomeCCD Align Exit Finisher D Staple Standby Bags 0 rolier Transport LowerO roler Full Hon sorti 0 Home Stapler Full Mon sort3 0 A ES e5 FullfElev Tray 0 Self Priming Empty Finisher 0 Raised ouerea SurfacetElev 0 Home Shift Shift Speed caoaoaoaooozocozozdoco 4684F3E500DA iz 7 Z n lt 10 Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 A Sensor monitor 3 4 Sensor Check Operation characteristics Symbol Panel display Part Signal name Panel display 1 0 PC1 FN Exit Non sort1 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC19 FN Exit Non sort3 Job Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC3 FN Exit Finisher Storage Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC4 FN Upper Paper Pass Upper
645. y or not Setting Procedure The default setting is Unset Set Unset 259 bizhub C250 2 Pe i N lt bizhub C250 2 x 5 n lt 10 Service Mode Field Service Ver 1 0 Jul 2005 4 Communication Log Print Functions To print out the Communication Log Use Use to output and use the Communication Log Setting 1 Call the Service Mode on the screen Procedure 2 Touch CS Remote Care 3 Touch Detail Setting to access Communication Log Print 4 Load Tray 1 or Bypass Tray with A4R or 81 2 x 11 paper 5 Press Start key to print out the Communication Log 5 Software Switch Setting Functions To change the CS Remote Care settings Use To change the settings for CS Remote Care as necessary Setting t For procedures on settings see 252 Procedure 6 Response Time Out Functions Use Not Used To be used when connected by E mail Setting Procedure D AT Command Functions To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization This setting is available only when Modem is selected for the system setting Use To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization ettin Setting Enter the command and touch SET to register Procedure E Server set Functions

SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents